1^
NARRATIVE
SURVEYING VOYAGES
OF HIS MAJESTY'S SHIPS
ADVENTURE AND BEAGLE,
BETWEEN
THE YEARS 1826 AND 1836,
DESCKIBINO THBIB
EXAMINATION OF THE SOUTHERN SHORES
OP
SOUTH AMERICA,
AND
THE BEAGLE'S CIRCUMNAVIGATION OF THE GLOBE.
APPENDIX
'•^'•'ft- AJ'^X V0LUME^I.,^^^a^2^ ^.
LONDON:
HENRY COLBURN, GREAT MARLBOROUGH STREET.
1839.
I
»
LONDON;
Printed by J. L. Cox and Sons, 75, Great Queen Street,
Lincoln's-lnu Fields.
APPENPIX
SECOND VOLUME.
MEMORANDUM.
The greater number of the articles in this Appendix are
placed as required for reference while reading the volume to
which they belong (vol. ii.) ; and the arrangement, or rather
non-arrangement, of the rest, depended upon circumstances
which I could not alter ; though quite aware how disorderly
the group of documents would appear.
If they should ever require to be reprinted, or even if a
part should demand further attention from me, it will be easy
to dispose them differently.
DIRECTIONS TO THE BINDER
FOR PLACING THE PLATES.
Track Chart Loose.
Low Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • Loose.
Surveying Diagram . . . . . . . . . . to face page 206
Clouds — cumulus, &c. .. .. .. .- •• .- 275
Clouds — cirrito-stratus, &e. .. .. .. .. .. 276
Clouds — stratitus, &c. .. .. .. .. .. .. 276
Clouds — cumulito-stratus, &c. . . . . . . . . . . 276
Tide Diagram 287
Note. — The loose Plates to be folded into a pocket in tlie cover.
CONTENTS OF THE APPENDIX.
No. Page
— Meteorological Journal 1
— • Table of Positions, &c 65
1. Letter from Captain King 89
2. Letter from the Admiralty 90
8. Agreement with Mr. Mawman' 91
4. Letter from Mr. Coates 93
5. Instructions to Matthews 94
6. Agreement with Mr. Harris 97
7. Receipt from Mr. Harris 98
8. Orders to Lieut. Wickham 99
9. Orders to Mr. Stokes 100
10. Orders to Lieut. Wickham 100
11. Extract from Falkner 101
12. Extract from Pennant 102
13. Extract from Viedma 110
14. Extract from Byron 1 24
15. Fuegian Vocabulary, &c 135
16. Remarks by Mr. Wilson (surgeon) 142"
17. Phrenological Remarks 148
1 7a. Papers relating to the Falklands 149
18. Orders to Lieut. Wickham 162
19. Winds, &c. off Chil6e and Chonos 163
20. Letter from the President of Chile 164
21. Orders to Lieut. Sulivan 165
22. Orders to Mr. Stokes 166
24. Extract from Agiieros 166
23. Extract from Burney 172
24a. Extract from Wafer 176
25. Orders to Lieut. Sulivan 177
26. Orders to Lieut. Wickham 178
VIU CONTENTS OF THE APPENDIX.
No. Page
27. Proceedings in the Carmen 178
28. Winds, &c. off Southern Chile 183
29. Letter from the Government of Chile 186
30. Orders to Mr. Usborne 186
31. Letters, &c. from Peruvian Government 188
32. Passport for the Constitucion 190
33. Additional Passport 191
34. Lovsr, or Paamuto, Islands 192
35. Mr. Busby's Announcement 193
36. New Zealand Declaration 195
37. Mr. M'Leay's Letter 197
38. Extract from Instructions 198
39. Notes on surveying a wild coast 202
40. Remarks on the coast of Northern Chile 208
41. Remarks on the coast of Peru 231
42. Letter from the Government of Buenos Ayres 273
43. Letter from Merchants at Lima 273
44. Description of a Quadrant 274
45. Remarks on Clouds 275
46. A very few Remarks on Winds 277
47. Remarks on Tides 277
48. Harris's Lightning Conductors 298
49. Fresh Provisions obtained 298
50. Temperature of the Sea 301
51. Remarkable Heights 301
52. Americus Vespucius 304
53. Barometrical Observations in St? Cruz 308
54. Nautical Remarks 310
55. Remarks on Chronometrical Observations and a Chain
of Meridian Distances 317
ERRATA, &c. IN THE APPENDIX.
Page 1 , line ^j of figures, for 29,4, read 30,4'.
65, line 4, of figures, for 0.15, read2.\5.
85, line I, for 00" read 36"; line 2 (of figures), for 30'' read 51";
line 3, for 14" read 21" ; and line 4, /or 22" read 36".
ABSTRACT
METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
NOVB
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr. Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
MBER,1831.
Inches. Inches.
Lat. Long.
5
9 a.m.
29-60
53
Baths, Devonport.
6
, ,
29-40
52
8
• •
29-80
51
10
..
29 "4
49
11
..
30-5
49
12
..
30-4
53
13
30-2
52
H
30-6
51
15
30-2
51
On board the Beagle*|
i6
29 '9
48
17
29 "9
47
i8
29-8
46
19
..
29 '9
47
22
29-95
54
23
30.05
58
24
30-06
60
as
..
29-98
61
26
30-03
61
27
30-05
59
Decb
mbeb.
1
30-26
55
Barn Pool
2
• •
30-4
56
3
..
30-17
57
5
29 '9
62
6
..
2'-) -7
61
7
29-3
60
8
29 '4
eo
9
29 '5
61
9
2'30 P.M.
29'45
10
9 A.M.
29-63
63
12
29-2
61
14
..
29-8
63
18
..
29-6
58
19
10 A.M.
Noon
3 P.M.
29-8
29-85
29 '9
57
46
48
48
27
6 ..
E.
5
gd
30-66
30-54
47
46
/At sea, lost sight of
\ Eddystoue
8 ..
5
eg
3070
30-52
48
47
10 ..
5
eg
3073
30-53
49
47
Midt.
S.E.
4
egq
30-63
30-51
51
48
28
2 a.m.
5
bp
30-62
30-52
50
48
4 ••
s.E.by s.
5
bp
30*65
30-52
50
48
6 ..
30 '69
30-46
47
46
8 ..
4
b V
30-66
30-50
50
47
10 ..
S.E.
5
bey
30-69
30-51
49
48
Noon
5
bey
30-65
30-51
49
48
48-6 N. 6-47 w.
2 P.M.
S.E.by s.
4
c
30-67
30-49
49
48
4 ••
4
og
30-63
30-47
49
48
6 ..
5
og
30 64
30-44
50
49
8 ..
5
e
30-62
30-48
50
48
♦ Beagle a
t sea 15th, returne
d next m
oruing. |
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURVAL.
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
1
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
December. I
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. Long.
28
10 P.M.
S.E.
5
c
30 'bo
30-48
50
48
, ,
Midt.
, ,
5
C
30 '58
30-44
50
49
29
2 A.M.
5
C
30-58
30-40
50
48
4 ••
, .
5
C
30-51
30-37
50
49
, ^
6 ..
5
cog
30-55
30-40
50
43
a •
8 ..
s.E.by E.
5
cog
30-54
30 '33
60
50
, ,
10 ..
• •
5
cp
30-53
30-38
52
51
54
, ,
Noon
.,
5
C
30 "50
30-26
53
51
45"32 N. 9-30 w.
^ ,
2 P.M.
S.S.E.
5
c
30-50
30'3i
53
51
, ,
4 ••
5
b c
30-46
30-29
53
51
54
• •
6 ..
, .
5
og
30-42
30-27
54
50
, ,
8 ..
5
be
30-40
30-29
52
51
• •
10 ..
5
b c q
30-40
30-24
52
51
, ,
Midt.
5
be q
30-36
30-23
52
52
30
2 A.M.
5
c q
.30-35
30-24
53
51
4 ••
• ■
5
cq
30-32
30-21
53
51
• •
ei ..
E.
5
be
30-32
30-21
53
50
At sea.
8 ..
••
5
b c
30-32
30-21
53
52
• .
10 ..
5
cq
30-35
30-20
56
53
54
56*
• ■
Noon
S.E.
5
c p
30-32
30-17
55
53
43-00 N. 12-01 w.
31
• •
N.E.byE.
5
be V
30-32
30-24
58
56
57
58
40-39 i3'39
Janu
ARV, 1832.
60
59
1
Noon
E.N.E
2
b c V
30-40
30-32
61
57
38-24 15-03
2
, ,
N.W.
6
be
30-20
30-00
61
59
60
37 "29 15 '32
4 P.M.
N.N.W,
8
m q
30-11
30-00
58
56
59
• •
Midt.
••
7
SP 1
30-22
30-03
59
56
3
Noon
N.
6
bcq
30-40
30-25
60
59
62
65t
34-38 16-37
4
W.N.W.
6
bcq
30-30
30-14
66
65
66
32-58 16-07
5
• •
N.w.byN.
4
be V
30-48
30-38
66
64
68
29-54 16-11
6
, ,
w.
2
be V
30-40
30-35
67
66
68
28-28 OffSantaCruz.
7
..
s.w.by w.
1
be
30-40
30-34
69
67
68
/SantaCruz. n.6i-w.
\^ 12 m.
8
.•
N.E.
2
be
30-46
30-39
73
69
68
26-45N. 16-40 v.
9
..
S.S.E.
5
be V
30-40
30-38
68
67
69
70
25-05 i8-i8
10
S.E.
4
b V
30-20
30-25
71
69-5
70
22-51 20-00
11
N.w.byN.
4
b c
30-24
30-17
7»
70
71
21-55 '^0-22
1-2
N.N.W.
2
ol t
30-23
30-17
7c
69
69
20-29 21 16
13
E.
2
b m
30-18
30-19
73
71-5
71
19-18 22-00
H
..
••
4
b
30-22
30-16
74
71
71
17-30 23-28
15
• •
5
b m
30-16
30-14
71
70
72
73
15'23 23-46
16
..
2
b c m
30*20
30-18
72
71
73
72-5
i5"05 23-23
17
N N.E.
5
be
30-21
30-20
75-5
73"5
72
Port Praya.
18
• •
E.by N.
4
bcq
30-20
30-23
77
75
72-5
19
6 A.M.
N.by E.
4
be
30-24
30-23
70
68
Noon
..
5
be
30-22
30-22
78
75-5
72-5
20
• •
E.by N.
5
be
30-22
30-28
78
76
72-5
21
•■
N.£.
2
b e V
30-20
30-24
80
79
72-5
22
•■
N.E by E.
4
be
30-30
30-27
80
76
73
72-5
23
• -
••
4
be
30-30
30-30
78
76
72-5
* 1
^emperature
of water was tak
an at 10 a.m. and 4
P.M. fror
n this dat
e.
t B
lack case th
ermometer used fc
r temperature of »
rater fron
•1 this date
•
ABSTRACT OF METEOUOLOGICAL JOURNAL.
3
Day.
Hour.
Winds
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
JANU
ARY, 1832.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. Long.
24
Noon.
N E.
5
bcq
30-29
30-31
78
76
71-5
72
72
Port Praya.
25
••
■ •
4
bcq
30-29
30-29
73
73
26
••
••
5
bcq
30-24
30-21
73
73
71
72
27
••
• •
5
bcq
30-15
30-17
73
72
71-5
72
28
• 1
• •
2
cgq
30-15
30-18
73
71
71
29
••
E.
2
bcq
30-11
30-14
76
74
71-5
72
72
72
72
7i"5
71
72
72
30
F£BI
1
lUARY.
Noon
N.N.E.
4
2
5
be
be
bcq
30-16
30-18
30-15
30-18
30-25
30-24
75
79
82
77
80
79
2
3
4
6 A.M.
Noon
6 P.M.
N.
N.E.
4
5
5
4
c q p m
bcq
bcq
b cl
30-30
30-26
30-19
30 '20
30'20
30-32
30-22
30-20
30-21
30-20
74
76
72
76
75
72
75
71
75
73
5
Noon
N.N.E.
4
b c q m
30-19
30-19
73
76
71-5
72
72
72
6
7
N.E.
5
5
b m q
30-19
30-16
30-22
30-20
7"
77
76
76
8
••
••
4
bq
30-11
30-15
77
76
72
72-5
Sailed 3 p.m.
9
••
E.N.E.
4
be
30-12
30-14
78
77
73-5
74
13-33 N. 25-05 w.
10
••
N.E. by E.
4
b V
30-10
30-14
76
74
75-5
76
11-52 26-34
11
• •
E.
4
be
30-04
30-08
78
77
78
79
9-23 26-46
12
••
••
5
30-04
30-06
80
79
80
80-5
6-34 27-32
13
••
••
4
be
30-00
30-04
83
81
81-5
4-03 27-21
14
S.E.
2
og
30-02
30-07
78
77
82
81-5
81
81
82
82
81-5
3-43 27-50
15
16
17
18
••
s.E. byE.
S.E.
E.S.E.
S.E.
4
1
2
2
b c V
be
be
b e q V
30-03
30-06
30-09
30-15
30-04
30-11
30-15
30-19
82
83
82
82
82
82
81
83
1-15 28.50
f Isl. St. Paul N 7 1 E.
I lira.
0-145. 30-08 W.
1-30 30-49
19
••
S.E. byE.
4
b c V
30-13
30-21
81
80
81-5
82
3-11 31-47
20
s.E.ly
4
b c V
30-12
30-16
83
82
82
Fernando Noronlia.
21
••
2
be
30-14
30-17
84
84
82
83
3-17 S. 32-06 W.
22
••
N.E. by N.
2
be
So -06
30-13
84
83
82 .
82-5
4-06 32-03
23
••
E.
1
be
30-07
30-14
34
83
83
82-5
5-29 32-01
24
25
26
• •
E.S.E.
E.byN.
5
4
2
bcq
be
og
30-03
30-06
30-10
30-07
30-14
30-15
82
80
81
81
80-5
80
82-5
82-5
82
7-25 31 '55
9-38 32-25
11-26 34-01
27
E.S.E.
4
bcq
30-10
30-12
83
82
81-5
82
1-2 -41 36-20
28
••
••
4
be V
30-18
30-23
83
82
81
82
Bahia.
29
S.E.
2
bcq
30-47
30-24
78
78
81
B •
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
i
Hour.
Winds. I
^orce
1
Weather.
Sjmpr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
Marc
H, 1832.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. Long.
1
Noon.
w.
2
r
30-25 30 --iB 1
76
75
Bahia.
2
s.
2
CO
30-26
30-28
78
76
3
S.E.
2
ocqr
30-26
30-28
78
74
■ •
4
N. N. E.
4
be
30-19
30-29
83
82
> •
5
VBLE.
4
be
30-17
30-22
83
82
6
S.E.
4
be
30-18
30-20
85
83
. .
7
, .
4
bcq
30-14
3020
83
82
• •
8
4
be
30-14
30-18
82
80
• •
9
• •
2
be
30-12
30-19
83
81
10
N.
4
b eq
30-14
30-21
82
81
• •
11
S.E.
4
be
30-23
30-26
83
81
■ •
12
. ,
2
be
30'13
30-17
79
77
13
4
bcq
30-11
30-19
82
80
• •
14
4
b c V
30-10
30-20
82
80
• •
15
N.
4
c
30-14
30-21
80
74
• •
i6
S.E.
4
be
30-19
30-20
83-25
80-5
81
82
13-065. Off Bahia.
17
■ •
4
be
30-20
30-25
83
82
Bahia Harbour.
i8
4
be
30-20
30-22
82
81
83
, ,
19
VBLE.
2
be p
30-18
30-18
81
80
82
82
82-5
13-405. 38-31 w.
20
S.E.
1
b c V
30-12
30-20
84
83
13-29 38-25
21
N.N.E.
1
b e
30-19
30-22
84
82
82-25
83
14-20 38-07
22
N.E. byN.
4
be
30-22
30-23
82
81
82
81-5
15-31 37-20
23
E.
1
be
30-18
30-20
83
81-5
81
82
16-28 36-44
24
VBLE.
4
be
30-15
30-18
83
81
81-5
82
17-12 36-19
25
..
5
be
30-14
30-18
84
82-5
81 -5
82
18-17 35-34
26
s. E. by s.
4
be
30-19
30-18
83
85
82
18-06 37-04
27
E
2
be
30-25
30-26
83
84
81
81-5
17-43 37.15
28
N.N.E.
4
be
30-24
30-22
84
83
80
18-09 38-22
29
E.
4
bcqp
30-28
30-28
83
82
78
OS the Abrolhos Isl.
30
..
E. by N.
2
be
30-32
30-30
82
80-5
78
31
E.S.E.
4
be
30-39
30-37
82
81
81-5
19-523. 38-36 vr.
April.
80
80-5
1
N. byE.
4
b cgq
30-34
30-32
80
78
-22-13 38-57
2
E.N.E.
4
b cp
30-35
30-32
79
77
80*
23-22 40-53
3
E.S.E.
2
be
.30-34
30-34
78
79
75*
76
76
76-5
76
23-18 42-37
4
VBLE.
2
be
30-32
30-32
82
82
/Standing into Rio
\_ Harbour.
5
••
1
be
30-27
30-27
80
79
Rio de Janeiro.
6
—
b c
30-28
30-20
79
82
76
77
• •
7
••
be
30-20
30-20
80
78
76
77-5
..
8
N.E.
2
b e
30-27
30-26
84
83
78
, ,
9
N.N.E.
1
be
30-26
30-24
85
82
78
• ■
10
••
4
be
30-20
30-22
80
78
77
76
• •
11
N.
1
b c m
30-23
30-23
83
85
76
78
• •
* Tern
f. of »
lateral lU A
St. 3d April, 5 de
jrees lowi
:r than 4
P.M. 2d A
pril.
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day. Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
April, 1832.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. Long.
12
Noon.
s.
2
be
30-26
30-24
80
78
76
77
Rio (le Janeiro.
13
s.w.
2
be
30-30
30-30
76
75
75
75'5
14
1
b c m
30-34
30-31
76
75
76
75'5
15
N.w.ly.
1
cog
30-30
30-30
76
74
76
]6
S.E.
1
be
30-34
30-26
73
73
75
75 '5
17
N.E.
1
be
30-30
30-28
74
72
74-5
75
18
S.
2
be
30-32
30-28
77
76
76
19
S.E.
1
be
30-32
30-25
76
75
76
20
N. W.
2
be
30-17
30-16
76
75
76
21
S.E.
I
be
30-20
30-18
78
77
77
22
VELE.
2
ogr
30-33
30-29
70
69
75
74-5
23
W.
2
be
30-43
30-35
68
67
73
74
24
s. by w.
2
b ep
30-36
30-38
70
69
74
25
S.E.
2
be
30-37
30-26
70
68
75
26
S.
2
be
30-36
30.32
73
72
75
75-5
27
N.
2
be
30-30
30-27
75
73
28
S.E.
2
be
30-25
30-20
76
75
29
8 a.m.
2
be
30-26
30-23
74
73
4 P.M.
S.
2
be
30-28
30-24
78
77
30
Noon.
W.N.W.
1
be
30-37
30-34
78
77
May.
1
s.
1
b c p
30-38
30-36
80
79
2
—
be
30-38
30-31
78
77
3
s.
2
be
30-20
30-19
79
77
4
N.E.
2
be
30-15
30-14
83
82
5
S.
2
ogp
30-35
30-28
73
73
6
N.E.
1
eg
30-37
30-32
76
75
• •
7
2
be
30-27
30-24
78
77
8
S.W.
1
e p
30-32
30-26
76
76
9
2
be
30-33
30-30
73
72
10
N.E.
2
be
30-46
30-38
67
76
74-5
11
S.W.
4
be
30-35
30-33
74
72
74-5
22-523. 41-47W.
12
w. s. w.
5
be
30.32
30-23
74
73
77
78
20-16 39-47
13
W. N. W.
3
be
30-24
30-27
77
76
78
18-29 38-59
14
s.s.w.
4
be
30-31
30-30
77
76
79
79 '5
16-55 38-45
15
E.S.E.
6
coqp
30-32
30-26
80
78
80-5
14-23 38-32
16
E.
4
b c
30-30
30-29
80
79
Babia.
17
S.E.
2
be
30-33
30-28
. 82
81
18
4
be
30-32
30-30
81
82
19
2
b e q
30-30
30-29
80
79
20
2
b c q p
30-28
30-28
81
80
21
s.
2
cor
30-26
30-26
76
74
22
W.
2
be
30-26
30-23
78
77
23
E.S.E.
4
be
30-28
30-26
81
80
24
VELE.
1
b e
30-28
30-25
78
76
13-43 s. 38.27 w.
25
E.by s.
4
be
30-27
30-25
79
78
15-10 38-26
26
N.w.byN.
4
be
30-23
30-22
80
79
17-00 38-20
27
s. by E.
2
be
30-33
30-21
77
75-50
19-18 38-16
6
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
May,' 1832.
Inches.
Inches.
76-5
76
Lat. Long.
28
Noon.
s. by w.
5
qpr
30-33
30-27
75
70
19-408. 38-31 w,
29
• •
E.S.E.
1
cop
30-37
30-35
73
71
77
76-5
19.47 38-31
30
N.E.
2
ogr
30-38
30-32
72
70
76-5
76
20-10 38'3i
31
, ,
N.N.E.
4
CO
30-32
30-28
76
74
77
21-03 39 '59
June.
1
VBLE.
4
be
30-29
30-21
75
74
77-5
23-04 40-31
2
1
bv
30-30
30-28
75
73
74
75
22-56 41-17
3
S.E.
1
be
30-36
30-27
75
76
73-5
23-05 42-41
4
N.
1
be
30-25
30*20
76
75
Rio de Janeiro.
5
be
30-32
30-26
75
75
6
S.
2
be
30-27
30-35
81
79
7
S.E.
2
be
30 '.58
30-50
78
79
8
be
30-08
30-52
75
85
9
S.E.
2
be
30-56
30-51
76
80
10
2
be
30-58
30-50
73
73
11
S.E.
1
be
30-48
30-44
75
75
12
N.E.
2
be
30-52
30-44
75
75
13
W.N.W.
2
be
30-58
30-50
73
72
14
be
30-36
30-44
76
78
1.5
S.
1
b V
30-52
30-47
74
76
16
..
2
be
30-45
30-35
71
76
17
N.w.byw.
2
be
30-47
30-40
69
70
18
—
be
30-40
.30-38
74
73
19
s.
2
b
30-42
30-30
71
82
20
2
be
30-48
30-38
73
85
21
N.
2
be
30-47
30-39
73
76
22
N.E.
2
b c V
30-32
30-25
72
71
23
N.
2
b
30-30
30-25
72
71
24
T"
be
30-38
30-33
76
74
25
VBLE.
1
be
30-50
30-42
75
74
26
N.N.W.
2
c in
30-51
30-46
73
72
27
VBLE.
1
be
30-48
30-41
74
74
28
b e V
30-44
30-41
75
75
29
N.N.W.
2
be
30-50
30-45
76
76
30
N.E.
1
be
30-51
30-48
75
82-5
July.
1
S.E.
1
be
30-50
30-44
74
75
2
■•
N.E.
2
be
30-49
30-40
72
73
3
••
S.S.E.
I
be
30-43
30-33
70
70
4
S.E.
2
b V
30-30
30-30
76
75
5
N.
4
b m
30-34
30-28
73
73
f Running out of Rio
I Harbour.
6
S.W.
2
bcm
30-40
30-33
73
71
70-5
74-5
23-228. 43-11 w.
7
s.w.by s.
2
cop
30-51
30-41
70
68
72-5
73
23-38 43-23
8
VBLE.
2
be
30-49
30-40
72
69
72
72-5
24-09 43-01
9
W.N.W.
1
c
30-49
30-36
70
68
73
73-5
24-17 43-35
10
s.s.w.
4
b e q
30-38
30-32
70
69
74-5
25-01 42-47
11
"■"
b e
30-26
30-16
72
70
75
26-01 42-57
12
VBLE.
be
30-39
30-28
70
69
73
72-5
26-39 44-08
13
1 s.
2
b e
30-44
30-36
69
68
72-5
27-08 45-44
ABSTRACT OF METEOEOLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day. Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barotn.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
July, 1832.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. Long.
14
Noon.
E.N.E.
2
be
30-46
30-38
71
70
72
72-5
27-20 s. 46-22 w.
15
, ,
W.N.W.
5
cgr
30 '22
30-11
69
67
71
29-48 47-50
16
2 A.M.
s.w.
7
beg
30 '06
30*20
66
64
••
Noon.
• •
4
c pq
30 '32
30-13
64
62
70-5
68-5
30-12 48-03
17
••
N.N.E.
2
be
30-45
30-35
68
67
68-5
69-5
30-00 48-18
18
••
N.N.W.
6
q
30 '39
30-26
69
66-5
71
70-5
31-37 49-17
19
••
b c
30-38
30-27
68
66
69-5
68-5
33-16 50-10
20
•■
S.
4
be
30-39
30-25
62
59
61 -5
61-0
33-47 50-59
21
2
b c m
30-33
30-19
63
61-5
59-5
56-5
34-15 52-17
22*
• •
VBLE.
4
cogr
30-20
30-05
60
58
56-5
34-59 53-19
23
••
• •
4
og
30-33
30-12
53
51
56
! Cape Sta. Maria.
\ N.42 E. iim.
24
••
••
4
b e
30-50
30-28
54
52
56
56
56-5
f
\ N,!|E.i5m
25
E.
4
b c
30-50
30-30
55
55
26
S.
2
be
30-46
30-28
57
56
58
Monte Video.
27
b c
30-35
30-23
56
55-5
28
4
b c
30-36
30-16
54
53
29
D
E.by s.
5
r
30-56
30-52
51
48
30
E.
2
b c
30-60
30-53
55
53-5
31
N.E.
2
b c
30-56
30-40
59
57
AUGU
1
ST.
N.
4
be
30-45
30-27
58
59
56-5
58-5
Off Atalaya Chureh.
2
••
N.E.
4
b c
30-32
30-16
6i
60
58
Off Buenos Ayres.
3
. •
N.N.W,
5
b C
30-28
30-14
62
60-5
57
Off Point Indio.
4
• •
N.
2
b e
30-28
30-16
66
64
Monte Video.
5
• .
4
b c
30-11
30-00
62
59
6
2
b c
30-26
30-15
69
68
7
S.
1
be p
30-31
30-20
66
66
8
• .
E.
6
eog h
30-30
30-10
57
54-5
9
..
5
g or
30-10
29-92
56
55
10
..
s.E.by E.
2
ogm
30-29
30-10
58
56
11
• •
E.
2
coh
30-29
57
12
4
ogr
30-25
55
13
5
cogp
30-24
58
14
8 a.m.
s.
1
b e m
30-15
30-01
58
57
• •
4 p.m.
• .
2
b e
30-13
29-99
61
15
Noon.
2
b c
30-34
30-14
57
56
16
s.w.
4
cor
30-28
30-08
61
60
17
5
be q
30-57
30-31
50
47
18
..
s.s.w.
5
be q
30-64
30-38
47
46
19
••
N.N.W.
5
be q
30-52
30-27
53
52-5
20
••
N.w.byw.
4
bv
30-53
30-30
57
54-5
54-5
53-5
35-318. 56-52 W.
21
••
N.N.W.
2
b e
30-54
30-33
56
58
54-5
56-0
35-27 56-59
22
• •
N.w.byN.
4
b e
30-36
30-19
57
55-5
54
56
36-23 56-36
* Thunder
and lightning earlj
1 in the n'
oming.
8
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Altd.
Ther.
Temp.
Alrf
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
AUGU
23
24
iX, 1832.
Noon.
N.N.E.
4
2
b c
b c
Inches.
30-34
30-34
Inches
30-14
30-23
58
55
55-5
55
53
53
Lat.
37-08 s.
37-26
Long.
56-49 w.
56-58
•25
N.W.
4
bcrn
30-10
30-03
60
58
53
54
38-10
57-25
26
27
6 A.M.
Noon.
6 P.M.
4 a.m.
N.E. by N.
E.
E.N.E.
s.s.w.
2
2
4
7
bcm tl
gm ro
c mr
gocqr
30-08
30-00
29-87
29-88
29-91
29-88
29-69
29-68
54
55
56
52
54
53
54
51
53
38-28
57-58
• •
Noon.
6
b c
30-10
29-81
51
50
51
50
38-36
57-13
, ,
8 P.M.
s.
7
bcq
30-24
29-96
49
48
28
Noon.
E.N.E.
4
gom
30-43
30-14
52
51
52
52-5
38-27
57 '54
29
VBLE.
2
cogr
30-30
30-08
55
52
52
52-5
38-36
57-57
30
4 A.M.
Noon.
. •
1
ogrl
ogin
30-11
29-95
53
52
53
52-5
38-36
57-58
31
8 P.M.
Noon.
S.
s.w.
4
5
ogr
bcq
30-04
30-18
29-84
29-96
52
52
51
61
52
38-39
58-42
Septi
1
2
• •
3
4
5
EMBER.
Noon.
2 a.m.
Noon.
10 P.M.
Noon.
s.w.
N.byw.
N.W.
S.E.
E.
N.E.
4
5
9
4
4
4
4
b c
b c
be
bcq
ogm
og
og
30-52
30-50
30-32
30.27
30-43
30-72
30-55
30-27
30-27
30-12
30-08
30-17
30-42
30-30
52
48
59
59
51
48
50
51
47
56
53
50
47
49
52
52
51-5
50
50
38-44
38-51
38-53
39-10
39-12
58-35
59-13
60-10
61 00
61-12
6
••
4
og
30-30
30-10
58
57
51
51-5
Off Blanco Bay.
7
E.S.E.
4
ogm
30-17
29-97
53
51-5
52
52-5
Blanco Bay.
8
s. s. w.
4
b c
30-02
29-84
55
55
52
52-5
9
w.
2
ogP
30-13
29-94
54
50-5
51-5
52
10
••
2
be
30-23
30-00
53
53
52
52-5
11
N.W.
4
ogq
30-28
30-09
55
55
52
52-5
12
••
I
eg
30-29
30-09
55
55
52
13
S.E.
5
b
30-47
30-26
54
54-5
52
52-5
14
15
S.W.
4
b c
c
30-35
30-30
30-20
30-11
56
55
56
54
52
52-5
53
16
1
b V
30-52
30-37
53
54-5
52-5
53
17
N.
4
be
30-60
30-38
55
54
52
53
18
W.N.W.
4
be
30-44
30-24
61-5
60
52-5
54 '5
19
N.W.
4
b e m
30-18
30-08
68
67
54-5
56-5
20
N.
2
b c
30-07
29-96
67
70
55
56
21
w.s.w.
4
bcq
30-08
30-03
60
63
55
56-5
22
s.s.w.
2
og
30-26
30-10
64
65
57
•
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
9
Day.
Septe
23
Hour.
Winds,
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
MBER,1832
Noon.
s.wly.
bv
Inches.
30-44
Inches.
30-26
58
57
56-5
56
56-5
Lat. S. Long.W.
Blanco Bay.
24
• •
N.N.E.
5
bcq
30-32
30-15
61
61-5
••
25
6 a.m.
Noon.
6 P.M.
s.s.w.
w.
1
2
2
og
bcq
be
30.10
30-08
29-90
29-99
29-96
59-5*
65
60
69
64
60
56-5
56
56-5
••
26
Noon.
N.W.
4
C
30-27
30-11
58
57
• •
27
28
• •
W.
N.W.
2
2
be
be
30-25
30-03
30-12
29-90
61
62
61
62
56-5
56-5
• •
29
..
E. b. s.
4
com
30-46
30-24
55
53
55
54
30
. •
N.E.
5
be
30-48
30-21
55
61
54-5
Off Blanco Bay.
OCTOB
1
ER.
Noon.
—
qrlt
30-09
29-85
57
55
54-5
56
• •
• •
2
3
2 P.M.
Midt.
Noon.
6 a.m.
Noon.
VEI.E.
N.w.b. W.
s.w.b.vv.
S.S.E.
S.E.
2
2
6
7
4
beg
cm 1
m d r
oq
bcq
29-90
29-86
29-99
30-44
30-61
29-72
29-74
29-77
30-22
30*26
56
57
58-5
49
50
55
56
56-5
47
48
56
53-5
54
Off Point Heimoso.
4
••
N.N.W.
5
bcq
29-95
29-89
57
56
54
54-5
••
5
. •
VBLE.
1
b c V
30-16
30-00
57
56-5
54-5
56-5
6
6 A.M.
N.W.
5
b c m
29-94
29-80
58
56
••
6 P.M.
4
belt
29-77
29-67
67
66
57
58
Blanco Bay.
7
Noon.
W.
5
be
30-02
29-93
64
62-5
57-5
57
• •
8
S.S.W.
4
b e
30-56
30-38
55
54
57
57-5
••
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
6 A.M.
Noon.
N.
E.N.E.
w. b. N.
S.S.E.
s. b. w.
4
6
2
2
2
5
4
4
be
bcq
b c
b c
b c V
bcq
bcq
b c
b V
30-41
29-97
29-99
30-06
30-16
30-57
30-70
30-29
29-82
29-90
29-92
30-08
30-34
30-44
30-51
30-45
63
59
65
60
61
53
49
52
53
61
57
64
59
59-5
51-5
48
45
54
58
58
58
56-5
57
• •
• •
17
••
N.
2
be V
30-32
30-34
62
61-5
• •
18
• •
W.N.W.
1
b c
30-26
30-25
66
70
57-5
58
Off Blanco Bay.
19
..
E.b. N.
1
b c
30-16
30-17
63
62
58-5
58
Off Mount Hermoso.
20
. .
N.
1
b c
30-14
30-16
60
60
55-5
58
39 "34 59-37
21
4 p.m.
N.E.b.E.
N.E.
4
4
eogq
ogrtl
30-03
29-98
30-03
29-96
■57
56
59
55-5
56
39-20 59-02
22
Noon.
2
e og
29-88
29-89
56
55-5
52-5
53
39-49 58-24
23
..
N.W.
2
f
30-18
30-13
54
52-5
53
56
38-51 57-10
24
• •
N.E.
4
c m
30-22
30-16
55
56
56
56-5
3B-11 56-56 ,
* 25th S
Bptr. t
liere was mu
ch lightning early i
n the moi
ningand
late at ni
ght.
10
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
OCTOl
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
3ER, 1832.
58-5
61
Lat. S. Long.W.
25
Noon.
s. b. E.
5
bv
30-19
30-18
58
59
36-18 56-22
26
* ■
E.S.E.
2
c
30 '36
30-36
60
58-5
61-5
Monte Video.
27
, .
4
be
30-21
30-25
63
61-5
• •
28
• •
4
be
30'03
30-11
65
62
• •
29
w.s.w.
4
b c q r
30-05
30-07
62
56-5
• •
30
• •
• •
5
b V m
30-08
30-10
63
62
62
62-5
••
31
NoVE
MBER.
N.N.W.
4
b c V
30-15
30-20
67
65
63
64-5
35-22 Pt.Piedras.
1
Noon.
w. b. N.
1
be
30-05
30-13
69
67-5
67
68-5
35-47 OffEnsenada.
2
4
be
30-02
30-05
71
70
71
Off Buenos Ayres.
• >
6 P.M.
.N.N.E.
5
ogrqlt
30-00
30-06
67
65-5
3
2 A.M.
E.N.E.
4
grl
30-00
30-04
65
64
• ■
Noon.
N.E.
6
cgq
30-01
30-08
68
64
,.
4
.•
4
c
29-95
30-06
71-5
69-5
5
..
4
b c V
29-91
30-04
74
74
6
6 a.m.
E.N.E.
4
cgq
29-86
29-95
69
69
Midt.
VELE.
5
g r t 1
29-76
29-86
68
66-5
7
Noon.
W. N. W.
I
eg
29-78
29-94
73
71
8
• a
N. w.b.w.
2
be
29-81
29-95
71
69
9
• •
s.w.
1
be
29-95
30-12
72-5
70
6 P.M.
2
ogqrl t
29-92
30-07
69
68
10
Noon.
s.s.w.
4
beg
29-28
30-30
62
60
• •
11
••
S S.E.
be
29-37
30-38
57
56-5
67-5
69
34-41 57*45
12
••
N.E. b. N.
4
be
29-38
30-44
64
63
68-5
68
34-45 57-28
13
• •
'e.
4
be
29-41
30-45
64
64-5
64-5
35-08 56-35
••
6 P.M.
VELE.
7
b c q
30-33
30-34
64
63-5
•4
Noon.
5
be
30-20
30-28
66
64
64
64-5
Monte Video.
15
• •
E.S.E.
2
be
30-03
30-16
72
68-5
• •
16
• •
S.W.
4
be
30-02
30-09
67
65
17
• •
••
5
cgq
30-04
30-05
60
57-5
18
•-
S.S.W.
4
be
29-99
30-04
63-5
60
19
• •
S.S.E.
1
be
29-90
30-05
60
67
20
• •
S.E.b. E.
2
be
29-98
30-12
70
68
21
••
1
b c V
30-15
30-28
70
67-5
22
••
S.E.
2
b e V
30-25
30-31
67-5
65
23
••
S.
1
b c V
30-14
30-28
70
68-5
24
2 P.M.
E.
4
b c V
30-03
30-22
74
73-5
25
Noon.
N.W.b. N.
2
be
29-90
30-19
76
75
26
S.W.
4
be
29-70
29-98
80
78
■ a
Midt.
S.E.
6
ogql
29-62
30 -00
73
72
79
27
Noon.
..
4
og
29-90
30-00
62
61
73
• •
••
Midt.
4
b e q 1
30-00
30-09
64
62
71
28
Noon.
S.E. b. E.
4
b e V
30-10
30-18
64-5
64
70
34-52
29
E.
1
b c V
30-22
30-35
66
64
69
35-25 56-08
30
N-
4
bv
30-09
30-18
66
67
61-5
37-42 56-18
Dece
MEEE.
1
Noon.
N.N.W.
4
be
29-94
30-04
66
67
60
61
39-20 58-10
• •
Midt.
••
6
oegql
29-78
29-92
64
63
2
Noon.
S.E.
5
b e q
29-87
29-96
62
61
60-5
60
40-03 59-43
3
s. b. w.
1
bv
29-92
30-04
65
65
64-5
40-22 61-48
i
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
11
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
Decs
4
MBER,1832.
Noon.
W.N.VV.
4
b c V
Inches.
2970
Inches.
30.00
77
75
64-5
66
Lat. S. Long.W.
40-48 62-06
5
• .
s. b. w.
4
be
29-70
29-81
64
63-6
61
62-5
42-16 61-26
6
..
w.s.w.
2
be
29-67
29-73
65
64
61-5
42-54 61-20
7
• •
VBLE.
4
b c V
29-72
29-80
64
61
60
60-5
43-34 6 1-22
8
..
vv. b. N.
4
bom
29-88
29.92
62
60
58-5
44-52 62-01
9
••
w.
5
be
29-68
29-82
61
60-5
56-5
57
46-17 63-22
10
••
N.W.
5
be
29 '52
29-53
61
57
54
55
48-21 64-02
11
.•
s.w.b.w.
6
b e m q
29-12
29-05
54
52-5
51
49-5
51-03 65-05
13
Midt.
Noon.
w.s.w.
7
7
be
b c q
29-41
29 '59
29-30
29-48
47
47
46
46-5
49
50-36 65-28
«3
• •
s. b. w.
5
b e q
29*92
29-79
48
46
49
50
50-32 65-48
14
• •
s.w.
1
be
29-40
29-40
55
54
48
50-5
51-58 66-53
15
i6
17
• •
VBLE.
N.W.
2
4
5
b m
be
b e q
29-51
29-62
29-18
29-47
29-65
29-10
46
49
54
45
49
54
45-5
47
48
48-5
48
53-01 67-18
53-47 Cape Peiias,
s.22E.3m.
54-34 Off Cape San
Vicente.
■ •
18
Midt.
Noon.
S.
S.E.
6
4
cog q
b c g
29-28
29-50
29-32
29-36
44
49
46
47-5
46-5
Good Success Bay.
19
..
S.W.
4
b e q
29-92
29-84
53-5
51-5
47
48
• •
20
21
• *
w.
S.E.
2
4
be
be
29-81
29"99
29-75
29-91
58
49
56
49
48-5
49
48
• •
OffValen-
55 °*» tyn Bay.
22
• .
N.W.
4
be
29-86
29-77
53
51
48
48-5
55-51
• •
23
24
25
■ •
26
27
28
10 P.M.
Noon.
Midt.
Noon.
W.
S.W.
s.
w.
w.s.w.
7
5
5
4
7
2
2
4
begrq
ogqr
beg
be
be q
cgq
e m
cgq
29-72
29-66
29-70
29-71
29-48
29-59
29-72
29-94
29-62
29-54
29-60
29-62
29-46
29-49
29-59
29-81
49
47
47
54
52
47
47-5
45
47
45
46-5
51
51
45-5
45
43
46-5
47-5
48
47
47
46-5
56-27 68-00
San Martin Cove.
• •
• •
• •
• •
29
• •
• •
4
ogqp
29-56
29-47
48-5
47
47
47-5
• •
30
4 A.M.
s.
6
oq
29-34
29-22
47
45-5
• •
• •
Noon.
1
od
29-65
29-53
44
42
47
47-5
••
31
• •
w.
4
cog
29-50
29-41
50
47
48-5
48
Cape Spencer, N.5 m .
Jand
1
ABY, 1833.
VBLE.
5
c q
29-52
29-38
47
46
47
48
Off Diego Ramirez.
2
..
w.
7
be q
29-30
29-20
47
46
47
••
3
• •
S.W.
1
ocg
29-32
29-16
43
44
42
43-5
57-03 69-16
4
• -
w.
2
c
29-38
29-23
45
44
44
43-5
56-48 69-32
12
ABSTKACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
January, 1833.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. S.
Long.W.
5
Noon.
w.
4
b c q p
29 •56
29-41
44
45-5
45
48-5
56-22
69-34
6
• •
••
6
cgq
29-80
29-64
50
48
49
45-5
56-15
69-23
7
W.N.W.
2
com
29-44
29-32
48
46
45-5
46-5
56-42
70-57
Midt.
• .
8
b c q p
29-26
29-12
46
45
"s
2 A.M.
N.E.
10
c gq hp
29-25
29-07
42
43
Noon.
W.N.W.
7
bcq
29-41
29-26
46
45-5
44-5
44
57-06
71-31
9
6 A.JI.
• •
7
c qg
29-46
29-28
44
43
Noon.
5
be
29"56
29-36
45-5
44-5
44
57-18
71-07
10
8 A.M.
N.W.
8
gq
29-23
29-08
45
44
Noon.
be m q
29-38
29-25
47
46
46
56-37
71-09
4 P.M.
w. b. s.
8
b e q
29 '44
29-29
45
44-5
45-5
Noon.
s. w.
7
b c q p
29 '44
29-26
47
45-5
48
55-47
70-08
Midt.
vv. b. s.
8
be q p
29 '58
29-43
45
43-5
12
2 A.M.
7
bcq
29-58
29-42
45
44
4 -.
6
bcq
29-58
29-42
46
44-5
6 ..
..
7
ogrq
29-57
29-40
46
45
8 ,.
7
ogqr
29-52
29-37
46
45
10 ..
8
c ogq
29-49
29-29
46
45
47-5
Noon.
7
e r g u
29-44
29-26
47
45
56-09
69-20
2 P.M.
N.W.
8
c q r
29-32
29-14
48
46-5
4 ..
10
c q r
29-26
29-14
47
46
46-5
6 ,.
7
CO q r
29-26
29-10
47
46
8 ..
7
c q r
29-23
29-04
47
46
10 ..
10
bcq
29-16
29-04
46
45
Midt.
10
b e q
29-16
29-04
47
46
2 A.M.
11
ogqhr
29-14
29-00
47
46
4 ..
1 1
ogqp
29-14
28-98
47
46
6 ..
W.S.W.
10
ogqp
29-17
28-91
47
45
8 ..
10
opgq
29-20
2g-oo
46
45
10 ..
11
c g q r
29-25
29-04
46
44
48
Noon.
11
ocgqp
29-30
29-14
46
44
56-20
■69-10
2 P.M.
11
b c p
29-37
29-14
47
46
4 ..
11
b c pq h
29-40
29-24
47
46
47-5
6 ..
8
b c qp h
29-40
29-28
47
46
8 ..
S.W.
6
bcq
29-40
29-20
47
46
14
4 A.M.
N. b. E.
2
be
29-06
28-97
47
45-5
8 ..
W.S.W.
6
b e q
28-93
28-89
54
52-5
Noon.
10
bcq
28-89
28-90
55
53-5
48-5
Windhond Bay. |
4 P.M.
S.W.
8
b e q p
29-14
29-12
48
47
48-5
8 ..
4
b c q {1
29-34
29-24
46
45
15
Noon.
• •
6
b c q p
29-74
29-66
52
50-5
48-5
50
Goree Road.
i6
••
N.W.b. w.
4
be
29-78
29-74
56-5
55
51-5
50
17
••
S.W.
6
b c q p
30-06
29-96
49
46-5
50
i8
••
s.
1
be
29-57
29-54
55
53
49
49 '5
19
••
7
be
29-60
50
47-5
48-5
49-5
20
5
bcq
29-87
48
45-5
21
••
S.W.
1
c m p
29-84
53-5
51-5
50
50-5
22
N. N. W.
5
be
29-74
68
63-5
52
54
23
..
S.W.
1
be
29-50
62
60-5
50-5
1
54
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
13
Day.
JANUj
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
iBY, 1833.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. S. Long.W.
24
Noon.
s.
2
c m qd
29-70
52-5
51
51
50-5
Goree Road.
25
••
N.W.
2
b c p
29-80
52-5
50-5
50-5
51-5
26
• •
s.w.
5
be
30-18
54
53
51
52
27
• •
N.W.
4
be
30-15
62-5
59
52
55-5
28
••
S.E.
2
be
30-00
60
59-5
53-5
55-5
29
••
N.
1
e q
29-88
67
64
53-5
55 "5
30
••
••
2
c m
29-52
62
59-5
53-5
55-5
31
••
N.W.
5
be
29-52
62
59-5
53
55
Feer
UABY.
1
Noon.
s.s.w.
4
eg r
29-46
54
52-5
52
52-5
2
• •
N.W.
5
b c q
29-33
61
58
52-5
3
• •
••
4
be
29-17
61
57 "5
51
52
4
••
S.S.W.
5
be
29-44
53
51-5
50-5
51-5
5
• •
—
b c r
29-57
50
47
51-5
51
6
• •
N.N.E.
2
cgr
29-35
51-5
49-5
51
51-5
7
••
W.
4
be q
29-38
61-5
59-5
51-5
52
8
..■
S.W.
5
bcp
29-40
29-36
48-5
46
51-5
51
9
• •
• •
5
eq
29-44
52-5
49-5
50-5
10
••
N.W.
2
ogr
29-17
29-18
55
54
50-5
52
Windhond Bay.
11
••
S.W.
5
b c q
29-09
29-07
51
48-5
49-5
50
Nassau Bay.
12
••
s. b. w.
4
b c q
29-38
29-34
50
48
49
50
Packsaddle Bay.
13
• <
N. b. E.
1
be
29*63
29-62
52-5
50
50
50-5
••
14
••
VBLE.
1
be
29-62
29-62
53-5
51-5
51
• •
15
• •
4
c m p d
29-50
29-46
50
48
50
50-5
• •
16
• •
—
eg
29-73
29-68
49-5
47-5
50-5
• •
17
N.E.
2
beg
29-98
29-94
53
50-5
50-5
51
••
18
8 a.m.
VBLE.
1
b c
29-67
29-59
54
54
Gretton Bay.
••
4 P.M.
S.S.W.
5
boo
29-76
29-76
51
52
51-5
51
• •
19
Noon.
w. b. N.
1
be
29-80
29-81
56-5
53-5
51
52
• •
20
• •
w.
5
b c qp
29*62
29-55
45
43-5
49-5
50
• •
21
2 A.M.
S.W.
5
q ph
99-60
29-57
40
38-5
• •
••
Noon.
• •
7
b c qp
29-58
29-58
46
44
50
49-5
Oglander Bay.
22
••
• •
4
bcp
29-55
29-56
53-5
52
49-5
50-5
Good Success Bay.
14
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Airl
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
FEBB0ARY, 1833.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. S. Long. W.
23
Noon.
W.s.w.
4
Ogp
29-48
29-46
54
51
60
50-5
Good Sueeess Bay.
24
• ■
..
I
eg
29-50
29-50
53
50-5
50
..
25
• •
s.s.w.
6
b c q
29-22
29-23
52-5
50-5
50
• •
26
• •
5
be
[29-36
29-27
50
49
48
47
54-15 64-27
27
2 P.M.
1
be
29-75
29-70
44
43
46
47
53-18 63-20
28
Noon.
w.b.s.
5
b c q p
29*31
29-20
49
48
46
46-5
53-20 58-34
March.
T" (J
1
..
s.s.w.
4
boo
29-46
29-45
46
46
Berkeley Sound,
2
.•
s. b. w.
4
c q p
29*19
29-16
51
47-5
50-5
• •
3
• •
w. b. s.
4
cgq
29-19
29-22
56
53-5
51
• •
4
• •
w.
4
be
29-56
29-61
53
51
50-5
• •
5
• •
6
b c q
29-57
29-60
54
52
50
• •
6
■ •
s.w.
5
b e q
29-95
29-93
48-5
46-5
49-5
• •
7
••
w.
4
cgq
29-81
29-81
51-5
48-5
49-5
60
• •
8
6 a.m.
S.E. b. E.
4
c r
29-01
29-00
46
43*5
• •
• •
Noon.
S.S.E.
6
cqm r
29-18
29-15
47
43-5
49
48
■ •
9
..
4
be q p
29-51
29-55
48
47
• •
10
8 a.m.
w.b. s.
4
be q p
28-84
28-85
41
40
• •
.•
Noon.
s.s.w.
6
b c q p s
29*00
28-86
41
38
47
. •
6 P.M.
s.
11
b c q h
29-09
29-06
40
37-5
• •
11
Noon.
w.
6
eq
29-58
29-56
46-5
45
47-5
• •
12
• •
s.w.b. s.
2
be
29-65
29-64
51-5
48-5
47-5
• •
13
••
N.
1
be
29-79
29-76
62-5
50-5
48
48-5
• ■
14
• •
W.b.N.
4
cgq
29-13
29-22
57-5
55
49-5
50
• •
15
• •
2
be
29-10
29-22
61
58
50
50-5
• •
16
6 a.m.
w.s.w.
4
bv
29-56
29-54
43
42-5
• •
• •
Noon.
w.b. s.
9
b e q
29-49
29-54
54
52
49-5
• •
• •
6 p.m.
• •
6
be q
29-52
29-56
52
50-5
• •
17
Noon.
w.s.w.
5
be
29-71
29-76
55-5
52-5
49 '5
• •
i3
2 a.m.
6
ctlr
••
Noon.
N.W.b. K.
6
bcm q
29-01
29-06
53-5
51-5
50
49-5
• «
19
• .
w. b. s.
5
be
29-16
29-16
53
50-5
49 '5
• •
Midt.
4
be
28-64
28-72
47
46
20
2 A.M.
s.s.w.
9
b c q r d
28-86
28-86
41
40
• •
••
Noon.
s.w.
6
b c q
29-26
29-21
46
43'5
48
48-5
• •
21
••
—
be
29-58
29-55
47-5
45-5
48-6
49 "5
• •
22
• •
E. b. s.
4
e gr
29-74
29-71
46
43
48
• •
23
••
s.s.w.
5
beg
29-96
29-93
47-5
46
48
• •
24
••
w.
4
be
30-15
30-15
49
47
48
• •
25
26
• •
N.
w.b. s.
2
5
eg
b c q
2973
29-41
29-75
29-43
50
50
49
48
48-5
49
48
• •
• •
27
• •
S.S.E.
1
be
29-48
29-48
46
44-5
47-5
• •
28
• •
w.b. s.
5
be
29-46
29-45
45-5
44
47
47-5
• •
29
• •
«•
4
b cp
29-38
29-39
48-5
47
48
47.-5
••
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
15
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
March, 1833.
Inclies.
Inches.
Lat. S.
Long.W.
30 Noon.
w.s.W.
6
bcqh
29-32
29-28
43-5
41
46-5
Berkeley Sound. |
31
s.w.b. w.
6
b c q
29-40
29-27
43
40-5
46-5
'•-•
April.
1
Noon.
S.W.
4
be
29 '95
29-82
45
43
46
• •
2
.•
w. b. s.
2
be
30-00
29 '93
46
44
46
46-5
• *
3
• .
. .
2
be
29-85
2974
46-5
45
46-5
• •
4
.•
s. b. w.
4
ogp h
30-04
29-92
41
39
45
5
s. b. E.
5
be
80-20
30-07
44-5
43
45
* *
6
s. b. w.
4
bcqprh
30-28
30-15
44
42-5
46
• •
7
• •
N.E.
5
CO q
29-90
2975
45
43
47
50-28
59-10
• •
6 P.M.
• •
12
eqt
29 "32
29-20
42
40
, .
Midt.
4
c op r
28-20
28-90
44
44
8
4 A.M.
S.E.
8
c oq
28-06
28-94
45
42
8 ..
• •
4
CO gq
28-26
28-48
43
42
• •
10 ..
9
b cq
28-29
28-60
46
45
• ,
Noon.
• •
7
b cq
28-73
28-50
45
42
49-04
59-55
2 P.M.
10
ocq
28-86
28-76
46
42
4 ..
8
oc q
28-90
28-74
45
42
••
8 ..
s.w.
6
CO
29-60
28-96
43
41
9
Noon.
S.E.
4
b cp
30-36
30-24
45
43
48
50
47-12
61-36
10
• •
W.S.W.
1
b c V
30-62
30-54
51
48-5
53
54-5
45-15
62-50
1 1
8 A.M.
7
- ff q
30-27
30-17
54
53
Noon.
N.N.W.
5
be
.30-12
30-02
56
54
54
44-59
63-01
• •
8 P.M.
N.W.
4
be
29 "98
29-94
55
55
54-5
12
Noon.
S.E.
6
cop
30-22
30-12
53
51
56-5
57 '5
43-01
62-20
13
••
VBLE.
4
c
30-28
30-22
55
53
58
60
River Negro.
14
• •
N.E.
4
be
30-30
30-22
56
54
59
59-5
41-08
62-37
15
• •
2
be
30-17
30-14
57
56
58-5
61
41-16
62-52
16
, .
VBLE.
5
be
30-41
30-38
54
53
59
41-58
64-33
17
• *
N.
1
be
30 -23
30-20
58
55
59-5
42-23
64-19
18
• •
N.W.
4
be
30-20
30-18
60
60
60
60-5
41-46
62-32
19
• •
..
5
be
29-92
29-96
63
62
60
60-5
41-19
63-38
, ,
Midt.
N.W.b.N.
6
bcq
2973
29-73
65
65
*-*" t>
20
4 A.M.
8
cogql
29-70
29-65
65
62
••
Noon.
s.w.b.w.
6
b V
29-76
29-70
65
64
60-5
60
40-41
60-34
21
••
N.N.W.
4
b c m
30-03
30-03
61
6i
57-5
57
39-33
58-15
22
• •
N.W.
4
b c m
29-72
29-70
63
62
58-5
59-5
37-49
58-11
23
, .
W.
4
e
29 '94
29-92
62
60
58-5
37-56
56-20
24
10 A.M.
N.E.
6
CO g 1 1 r
29-80
29-78
64
62
• •
Noon.
5
cgr
29-68
29-68
63
61
36-56
55-36
. .
2 P.M.
N.E. b.E.
8
c r p q
29 "56
29-60
64
62
61-5
..
10 ..
og] tr
29 '56
29-64
65
63
25
4 A.M.
••
oglp
29-64
29-70
64
62
••
Noon.
VBLE.
4
c
29-82
29-82
63
60
60
63-5
37-07
55-27
16
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
— . C
[
Locality.
April, 1833.
Inches.
Inches
64
62
Lat. S. Long.W.
26
Noon.
4
c
30-21
30-15
61
57
Monte Video.
61-5
27
S. S.E.
5
ocq
30-34
30-32
57-5
55-5
61
••
28
4
be
30 '45
30-43
60
58
64
Maldonado.
29
.*
N.N.E.
4
cgr
30-35
30-37
66
64
64-5
64
• .
30
• •
S.S.E.
4
c
30-19
30-20
65
64
63-5
• ■
May.
1
N.
1
be
30-18
30-21
69
67-5
64-5
65-5
• •
2
, .
N.N.E.
I
beg
30-12
30-16
67-5
65
65
64-5
• •
3
8 a.m.
N.
2
b c 1 t
30-06
30-10
68
65
. .
Noon.
VBLE.
1
b c p t
30-05
30-12
71
68-5
63-5
Monte Video.
a «
6 p.m.
copl
30-05
30-11
67
64-5
» •
4
Noon.
N. N. W.
5
be
29-95
30-02
76
72-5
65
• •
5
• •
, ,
5
be
29-90
29-93
77
75
• •
6
, .
N.
5
c qr 1 t
29-78
29-87
70
67
64-5
. .
7
2 A.M.
S.S.E.
8
ocqpg
29-97
29-97
62
60-5
63-5
63
• •
• •
Noon.
S.E.b.S.
5
b eg q
30-29
30-26
63
61
• •
8
• •
s. b. E.
4
be
30-48
30-47
58-6
56-5
62
• •
9
, ,
4
be
30-44
30-44
58
56
• •
10
, ,
s. b. w.
4
be
30-32
30-32
58
56
60
• •
11
W.N.W.
2
beg
30-33
30-31
58
58-5
58-5
• •
12
N.W.
4
be
30-15
30-14
59
60
..
13
VBLE.
1
be
30-13
30-19
63-5
67
• •
H
N.E. b. E.
4
eg
30-04
30-05
64
62
58-5
• •
• •
6 P.M.
..
5
oe ql
29-9'
29-97
63
61-5
■ •
15
Noon.
N.N.E.
2
bcp
29-48
29-57
65-5
63-5
59-5
• •
6 P.M.
N.N.W.
6
c q rl
29-45
29-52
63
61
62
.•
16
Noon.
s.w. b. w.
5
be q
29-82
29-79
59-5
58
60
••
17
..
S.E. b. s.
1
beg
30-09
30-07
59
57-5
59
59-5
• •
18
. a
s.w.
4
e
30-14
30-12
61
59
61
Maldonado.
19
••
w.s.w.
4
bv
30-32
30-32
60
58
60
20
••
N.N.W.
4
b e V
30-32
30-32
64
62-5
58-5
60-5
21
••
N.
5
be
30-40
30-37
67
65
58-5
60-5
Monte Video.
22
••
• •
2
be
30-34
30-37
69
65-5
60-5
63
■ •
23
••
N.E.
4
b e m
30-33
30-39
64
62
61
62-5
24
••
• •
4
be V
30-38
30-42
67
65-5
62
64
Maldonado.
25
••
N. b. w.
2
b c
30-29
30-34
70-5
68
65
65-5
• •
26
••
N.N.W.
5
be
30-19
30-26
72
70-5
65
65-5
■ •
27
•■
N.W.
4
be
30-ao
30-23
73
70
65
66
• •
28
S.
1
be
30-17
30-23
67
67-5
29
6 a.m.
N.
5
c g t Ir
29-96
30-04
63
61
Noon.
N.W.
>2
eg
29-93
29-98
65
62
• •
• •
6 P.M.
W.S.W.
2
cgd
29-97
30-03
64
62-5
64-5
30
Noon.
S.K.b.E.
7
bcqg
30-13
30-15
63
61 -5
63
• •
ABSTRACT OF METEOKOLOGICAL JOURNAL.
17
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
May,
1833.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. S. Long.W.
30
6 P.M.
E.
7
be q
30-14
30-18
62
60-5
Maldonado.
31
Noon.
E.b. N.
6
c m
30-17
30-21
65
63
June
1
6 A.M.
N.E.b. E.
10
c m q
29 '94 30-01
62
61
64
• •
Noon.
N.E.
9
c q w m
29-90
29-95
65
63
64
..
6 P.M.
N.E. b. N.
4
c gr
29-81
29-89
65
63
64-5
2
6 a.m.
s.w. b. s.
8
cgqr
29-94
29-95
58-5
55-5
Noon.
s. w. b. w.
6
beg
30-02
30-03
61
59
63-5
..
6 P.M.
w. b. s.
5
b e
30-10
30-10
59
58
3
Noon.
w.
2
b e
30-22
30-24
62
69
62-5
4
••
E.
5
eg
30-22
30-24
61
59-5
61
61-5
5
S.E. b.E,
5
cgqr
29-94
29-95
58
56-5
62-5
6
..
S.S.E.
6
gq na
29-84
29-86
61
59-5
62-5
..
8 P.M.
..
7
og qd
29-88
29-92
59
58
7
Noon.
w. b. s.
4
be
2997
29-98
60
60
60-5
8
* •
w.
2
be
30 "06
30-08
59
58
59
59-5
9
• •
N.W.
2
og
29-72 29-74
56
54
58
2 P.M.
2
c g
29-66
29-68
57
56
59
10
8 a.m.
W.
11
b e q
29-86
29-84
50-5
50
• ■
Noon.
w. b. s.
10
b c q
29-96
29-94
53
51-5
56-5
4 P.M.
w.s.w.
10
ocgq
30-04
30-01
54
52-5
1 1
Noon.
w.
1
be
30-32
30-28
49
51
56-5
12
• •
N.N.E.
2
be
29-96
29-96
53-5
53
55-5
■•
Midt.
W.
4
bcl
30-09
30-03
58
56
56
13
Noon.
S.W.
4
bem
30-21
30-20
60
58-5
56
56-5
14
K.
1
bv
30-32
30-32
60
60
56
15
• •
N.N.E,
2
og
29-90
29-92
61
59
59
16
« •
S.W.
5
be q
30-21
30-21
55
54
56-5
56
17
• •
E.S.E.
1
be
30-44
30-43
52
51
56-5
55
18
• •
N.W.
4
be
30-34
30-29
54
52
54
19
••
• •
4
be
30-25
30-22
59
58
53
54
20
• •
••
2
be
30-19
30-20
69
66
54-5
21
••
w. b. s.
1
be V
30-32
30-32
61
61
54-5
55-5
22
.•
N.
2
b c V
30-30
30-31
72
67-5
23
..
..
2
cop
30-23
30-25
60
58
54-5
24
• •
N. N. W.
5
be
30-04
30-08
70
69
58
25
• •
S.
2
e q p
30-02
30-14
62
60
56-5
26
••
N.
2
beg
29-98
30-02
60
59
27
• •
w. b. N.
5
be q
30-16
30-16
54
57
54-5
56
28
••
W.N.W;
4
be
30-10
30-12
60
58
29
••
VBLE.
2
b e q
29'88
29-95
60
60
55
55 '5
30
• •
S.S.E.
4
og
30-06
30-09
54
53
54-5
54
July.
1
« •
S.S.E.
6
oqg
30-17
30-14
54
52
54-5
2
• •
S.
4
b c
30-33
30-34
52
51
53-5
3
••
S.E.
2
gc
30-48
30-46
54
53
52-5
4
10 A.M.
S.W.
2
r
30-34
30-43
48
47
51-5
52
••
18
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
Hour.
Winds
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
1
Barom.
.Mtd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
July,
5
1833.
Noon.
s.W.
5
be
Inches.
30*35
Inches.
30-31
50
48
51
52-5
Lat. S. Long.W.
Maldonado.
6
7
8
8 A.M.
Noon.
* •
S.E.
2
4
5
beg
ocp
be
30-40
30-27
30-46
30-36
30-27
30-44
47
53
51
46
51
50
51
51
51
••
9
, ,
, ,
5
og
30-36
30-32
50
48
49*5
49
47-5
46*5
10
11
12
13
8 A.M.
Noon.
s.
S.W.
w. b. s.
W.N.W.
5
5
5
4
ogqd
ocg
b c V
b c V
30-30
30-26
30-44
30-42
30*26
30-22
30*40
30-40
47
48
48
53
45-5
47-5
47
55
Monte Video.
14
..
N. w. b. w.
5
be
30-29
30-30
54
55
49
50-5
Maldonado.
15
...
W.N.W.
4
be
30-16
30-20
58
60
49-5
•■
i6
6 A.M.
N.
1
be
30-10
30-15
60
49
51
52
••
17
i8
8 ..
Noon.
S.E.
S.W.
4
1
bcm
ef
30-28
30-12
30 32
30-14
51
58
50
57-5
50*5
52
••
19
E.
1
bff
30-25
30-30
51
50
50
50*5
34-55 54-29
20
. ,
N.
5
be
3015
30-16
55-5
55
50
35-14 53-17
21
• •
N E.
4
bm
29 "97
3003
56
56
52
54-5
34-56
22
23
24
Midt.
Noon.
N.
N.E.
W.
N.
4
4
5
4
be q
be ql
ogqp
be
29-82
39-58
29-64
30-02
30-90
30-74
30-68
.30-05
62
64
56
55
61
63
54-5
53
53
54 5
52-5
52
Maldonado.
■ •
25
• •
S.
4
g d m
29-95
29 '95
53
51
51
51-5
35-28
26
6 P.M.
Noon.
s.s.w.
7
4
bq p
be
30-04
30-39
30-01
30*39
52
50
51-5
49-5
51
35*33
27
••
w. b. N.
4
b c q
30-34
30-35
49
48
46-5
45*5
35-57
28
-.•
N.W.
4
be
30-29
30-24
48
47
44-5
45
33-09
29
••
w.
4
be
So -06
30-01
48*5
48
45
46
39-54
30
K. b. \v.
6
b c q
29-88
29-80
49
48-5
46
45-5
40-55
31
AUGL
8 P.M.
Noon.
ST.
s. b. w.
VBIE.
7
1
bcq
■ be
29-98
30-21
29-89
30-18
46
48
45
50
45*5
40-56
1
Noon.
N. W. b. N.
7
be q m
29-86
29-82
50
48
48-5
50
41*19
2
••
w. b. s.
2
be
30-10
30-10
54
53-5
51 5
52
41-24
3
• •
N.E. b. N.
4
be
30-12
30-11
54
53
49 '5
50
Off River Negro.
4
•-
N.W.
2
be
29 '93
29 •93-
52
50-5
49
5
••
S.
30-18
30-12
52
50
46
48*5
41 -02
6
••
—
be
30*28
30*30
52
51
48-5
49
40-21
7
E. b. N.
2
be
30-25
30*30
51
49
47-5
48-5
40-08
8
• •
W.N.W.
4
be
29-98
30-02
53
51-5
51
41-18
9
••
s.
4
ocg
30-08
30-08
48
48
52
51
41*14 ;
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
19
Day
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Airf
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
Aug I
ST 1833.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. .S. Long.W.
10
10 A.. M.
s.w.
1
Og
30-04
30-01
44
43
51
51 "5
Off Port SanAntonio
11
Noon.
S.S.E.
4
b c
30-10
30-10
47
46
51
51-5
12
« •
N. W.
4
be
30-10
30-10
47
48
50-5
48
41 12
13
14
15
16
• •
E. b. N.
N. N. W.
S.E. b. E.
N.W. b. N.
4
6
6
4
b c
ogqp
ogr
b c
30-08
29-67
29-72
29-93
30-12
29-65
29-67
29-83
47
49
47
47
46-5
48-5
46
46-5
48-5
50
50
50
50
Off River Negro.
42-10 63-00
41-40 61-58
Off River
Negro
i7
i8
19
20
21
8 a.m.
Noon.
s.s.w.
s.
N. N. W.
N.
IV.
N.W. b. w.
9
6
5
•2
2
5
ogqm
ogqp
ogr
og
be
be q
29-68
29-84
30-07
29-76
29-83
29-94
29-63
29-82
30-03
29-76
29-82
29-90
49
49
45
50
50
53
47 "5
48
43
50
49-5
51-5
49 '5
49
49-5
49
49-5
41 -03
39-54
22
• •
w.s.w.
2
eg
29-96
29-95
50
49
49 "5
49
39 "03
23
24
8a.m.
Noon.
s. b. E.
s.w.
4
4
c r
b c
30-00
30-27
30-04
30-26
48
48
47
47
48
47
49-5
r standing up Blaneo
I Bay.
25
..
>'.W.
6
beq
30-15
30-14
51
50
48
49
Blanco Bay.
26
27
• .
s.s.w.
E.S.E.
5
1
be q
b c
30-08
30-41
30-11
30-46
52
52
51
51
48-5
48-5
28
••
W.N.W.
4
b c m
30-10
30-19
57
55
49
48
29
30
31
Septi
1
2
SMBER.
Noon.
N.W.
W.N.W.
N.
W.S.W.
5
2
5
b c m
be
be m
be
be
29-90
29-92
29 '97
30-12
29-98
30-08
30-01
30-04
30-18
30-04
58
60
61
57
52
57
59
63-5
77
56
50
50
3
8 A.M.
• •
4
b V
30-23
30-24
45
44
49 '5
49
4
Noon.
w. b. N.
4
bq
29"97
30-10
63
67
50
52
5
• •
S.S.E.
4
b e m
30-37
30-45
55
63
51-5
^
6
r •
N.W.b. w.
5
beq
30-22
30-19
54
53
50
50-5
7
• •
8
• •
8 p.m.
8 a.m.
Noon.
W. N. W.
N.N.W.
S.S.W.
s.
5
2
6
6
b in
e
bq
bq
29-71
29-56
29 "94
30-03
2977
29-51
29-98
30-08
57
57
50
51
57
55
49
50
50-5
49-5
39-11
/39-30 OffBright-
\ man Inlet.
• •
4 P.M.
■ •
9
b c q m
30-24
30-19
53
48
49-5
9
Noon.
w. b. s.
4
be
30-22
3024
50
48
49
50
40-00
10
4 A.M.
N.
5
bq
29 "95
30-04
48
49
• .
Noon.
N. b. w.
7
eg qra
29-95
29 "95
49
48-5
49-5
50
39 "53
11
4 A.M.
N.N.W.
5
bq
29-81
29-87
50
48
■ •
Noon.
••
29-90
29-96
54
55
505
51
40-15
12
13
• •
N. b. E.
4
1
e
be
30-01
30-04
30-03
29 '93
1
48
54
48
52.5
47-5
40-12
39*45
20
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
Hour.
Winds. I
'orce
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom. AHd.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
Septei
14
UBER,1833.
Noon.
s.s.w.
5
Ogt
Inches.
29-69
Inches.
29-72
50
48
48
48-5
Lat. S. Long.W.
39-05
Midt.
6
oc q m
29 "96
30-06
52
49
15
Noon.
s.
4
b c m
30-10
30-17
53
52
51
54
36*42
16
.-
E.S.E.
4
be
30-12
30-18
55
53-5
56-5
56
Monte Video.
17
S.E. b. E.
5
be q
30-02
30-12
55
56
56
55-5
••
18
• .
• .
6
e q m
30-04
30-13
56
55
54-5
54
19
• •
20
Midt.
4 A.M.
E. S E.
S.E. b. E.
7
9
6
cmq r
ogqr
ogqrm
30-00
29-81
2977
30-00
29-96
29-90
54
55
55
53-5
54
54
53-5
Maldonado.
Noon.
S.W.
b cq
29'83
29-96
57
56-5
53 '5
54*5
• •
21
22
23
10 A.M.
N.W.b.N.
4
4
5
bcq
beg
b c
30-04
29-93
29-71
30-15
30-11
29-96
56
64 •
71
56
65
71
55*5
56*5
58*
59
Monte Video.
24
2 A.M.
E.N.E.
6
bcgl
29'85
30-02
58
58
• •
Noon.
E.S.E.
5
cgq
29-88
29-93
57
57
55
54
36-27
25
• •
E.b.N.
1
b e V
30-00
30-07
56
57
54
54-5
36-29 56-26
26
..'
s. b. w.
5
be
30-12
30-17
51
51
50-5
51*5
37*37 57-03
27
••
N.W.
2
b in
30-07
30-11
58
57
50-5
52
38-05 57*19
*
28
• ■
S.S.E.
6
be m
30-17
30-21
52
48
50-5
52-5
37-46 56-58
■ 29
• •
N.E.
2
b c
30-44
30-49
52
51
53
54
30
10 A.M.
N. b. E.
4
be q
30-30
30 -36
53
52
54-5
57
36-14 56-42
OCTO
1
BER.
Noon.
N.E.
4
b c
29-96
30-03
61
62
57
58
/Off Sanborombon i
I Bay.
2
4 A M.
S.E.
6
C 1 t q
29-50
29-66
60
59
• •
Noon.
••
5
eg
29-65
29*73
59
58
57*5
58-5
••
3
••
S.S.E.
6
be m
30-06
30-16
55
54
58
57*5
4
••
E.
5
c q
29-96
30-10
60
58
57-5
58
Monte Video.
5
..
S.W.
4
cgm
29-82
30-94
58
57
57-5
58
6
7
• •
• •
W.S.W.
vv.
4
1
be
be
29-94
30-00
30-14
30-20
60
63
60
61-5
57*5
56-5
Maldonado.
• •
8
• •
E
4
be
30-07
30-20
59
58
57-5
57
• •
9
JO
• •
10 P.M.
Noon.
VBLE.
S.E.
s. w. b. W
2
1
1
eg
ogtl
r
29-72
29 -.56
29-66
29-88
29-82
29-84
61
62
57
60
60
56-5
57-5
56-5
• *
« •
11
12
10 A.M.
E,
E.S.E.
2
4
oe
b e m
29-96
29-96
29-05
29-14
60
66
59
68
56-5
57-5
58*5
• •
» 1
remperature of water taken at 9 a.m. and 6 p.
«. from t
liisdate. 1
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
21
Day.
Hour.
Winds .
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
OCTO
BER,1833.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. S. Long.W.
13
Noon.
—
r
30-14
29-24
52
51
56-5
56
Maldonado.
14
••
S.E.
5
b c
30-16
29-30
59
56-5
..
15
••
E.
4
b cq
30-24
29-40
59
57
57
57-5
• •
16
8 A.M.
E.N.E.
5
b c q
30-16
29-30
60
59
57
55
• •
17
10 A.M.
W.N.W.
2
ogrtl
29-65
29-87
58
57
54
• •
18
Noon.
w.s.w.
4
be
29-76
29-91
61
58-5
54
54-5
• •
19
••
E.
1
be
29-90
30-12
67
65-5
56-5
62
••
20
••
s. b. w.
4
oc
29-98
30-16
62
61
59
61-5
21
• •
S.S.E.
4
b e
30-24
30-36
6i
60
61
62
22
10 a.m.
N.E.
2
b e
30-19
30-31
59
57
61-5
62
Monte Video.
23
Noon
W.S.W.
2
b c
29-91
30-20
67
67
63-5
• •
24
-•
N.E.
4
b eq
30-10
74
73
64-5
67
• ■
25
5
ogq
29-49
29-80
70
70
62
::
4 P.M.
5 ..
N.W.
W.N.W.
4
9
ogql t
grql t
29-19
29-58
74
73
26
Noon
s.s.w.
4
b c
29-72
29-96
68
68
65
• •
27
..
E.N.E.
5
beg
29-92
30-18
67
62
■ •
28
. •
s.w.
5
be q
29-54
29-81
67
67
« •
29
• •
5
b c q
29-98
30-10
56
56
30
S.E.
1
b c
30-15
30-36
61
61
• •
31
10 A.M.
E.N.E.
5
be q
30-01
30-21
61
60
60-5
8 P.M.
E.N.E.
6
cqp
29-77
29-99
58
57
• •
November.
1
Noon.
E.S.E.
2
cgm
29-81
30-01
60
60
• •
2
S.
1
be
29-86
30.06
63
62
• •
3
• •
S.E.
4
be
30-14
30-27
58
58
• ■
4
• •
S.S.W.
1
b e m
30-14
30-40
63
62
• •
5
• •
N.N.E.
4
b V
29-94
30-24
66
■ •
6
• •
S.W.
4
b e m
29-59
29-94
71
70
• •
7
• •
E.S.E.
5
c m
29-87
30-12
65
64
» •
8
• •
E.
5
m q p
29-85
30-05
64
63
• •
9
• •
S.E.
2
b e m
29-75
30-02
62
62
• «
10
• •
E.N.E.
4
b m
29-80
30-09
68
67
• •
11
• •
S.E.
2
b c V
29-80
30-15
69
71
12
• •
N.E.
5
b e m q
29-70
30-04
72
70
a .
• •
10 P.M.
c r 1 1
29-64
30-00
68
67
13
6 A.M.
N.E.
4
c r t 1
29-51
29-81
66
64
• •
Noon.
w. b. s.
4
b c q
29-50
29-82
70
70
• «
H
••
E. b. S.
2
b e m
29-77
30-07
67
66
• •
J5
••
w.
4
b e q m
29-78
30-13
70
70
..
16
••
s.w.
1
b c m
29 '93
30-33
73
72
17
• •
w.
4
b c m
29-61
30-08
79
79
• ,
18
••
S.E.
2
b c m
29-87
30-25
70
69
■ •
>9
••
N.N.W.
1
b ra*
30-28
30-28
72
71
« •
20
••
N.
4
b c m
30-10
30-16
75
75
• •
21
• *
S.
6
bcmq
30-29
30-24
67
66
• •
22
••
S.E. b. S.
1
be m
30-46
30-40
66
65
• •
* 10 A.M. 19th, set Sympr
. by Baro
m.
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
NOVE
MBER,1833.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. S.
Long.W.
23
10 A.M.
N.N.K.
4
b c m q
30-37
30-37
71
71
24
Noon.
S.
2
b c m
30-11
30-23
78
78
25
, ,
N. W.
5
b c m q
29-86
30-10
85
84
a6
10 A.M.
S.W.
2
b c ni
29 •90
30-06
81
80
.,
Midt.
VBLE.
7
ogqrlt
29 '94
30-01
72
73
27
6 A.M.
E.
6
c q r 1
29 '98
30-00
68
67
Monte Video. |
Noon.
N.N.E.
4
be
29-86
30-00
77
75
28
, ^
E. S.E.
4
m
2979
29-94
78
77
• •
4 p. M.
E. b. s.
4
ogt p
29-76
29-89
73
72
29
2 A.M.
S.W.
2
q rl t
29-82
29-93
71
70
Noon.
s.
4
b c q
30-05
30-08
72
71
30
De
MEMBER.
S.S.E.
2
b c m
30-20
30-26
71
70
1
8 a.m.
N.
2
b c m q
30-15
30-15
69
67
3
Noon.
W.
5
b c q
29-91
30-04
77
76
3
N.N.W.
2
c q m
29-90
30-04
76
75
4
• •
S.
4
m
30-05
30-09
72
70
5
• •
N.
1
b m
30-08
30-20
75
74
6
• ,
N.W.
2
b e m g
29-99
30-06
75
75
7
W.
4
b c m
29-85
30-01
77
76
35-28
56-32
8
2 a.m.
s.
1
be gtl
29-57
29-78
76
74
• •
Noon.
VBLE.
2
be m
29-54
29-64
74
73
36-46
56-^5
• •
10 P.M.
s. b. E.
7
bcgm 1
29-80
29-70
61
60
9
Noon.
S.E.
5
rq
29-88
29-74
58
56
37-12
56-09
10
4 A^M.
, ,
5
c m rl
29-83
29-67
54
55
. •
Noon.
s.s.w.
4
be
29-83
29-70
59
60
37-10
56-36
11
4 A.M.
w. b. N.
8
begl
29-85
29-74
56
55
• •
Noon.
7
be
30-05
29-85
60
58-5
37-56
56-49
12
w.
1
bcm
30-28
30-19
63
62
37-49
13
• •
E.N.E.
4
be
30-24
30-15
62
61
39-02
57-13
14
• •
W.
2
bcm
29-84
29-74
60
59
41-15
58-24
15
••
4
b e m
29-92
29-82
59
58
54
50
42-13
58-38
16
4
c q
29-66
29-46
53
52
48-5
51
43-27
59-23
17
• •
s. b. VV.
4
be
29-73
29-53
54
53
48-5
51-5
43-29
59-28
18
VBLE.
4
b c q
30-05
29-83
49
47
50-5
43-31
59-48
19
• •
W.
4
bm
30-28
30-00
56-5
55
53-5
43-18
60-00
20
••
N.W.
4
b c q
30-10
29-90
57
57
53
54
44-12
60-46
21
••
E.S.E.
4
b c q
30-39
30-20
55
54
54
53-5
45-13
62-52
22
••
N.W.
4
bcm
30-23
30-05
57
56
53
52
46-31
64-05
23
••
E.
a
bcm
30-12
30-03
57
58
50
52-5
47-38
65-29
24
••
S.S.E.
4
be
30-12
30-04
69
68
53
55
Port Desire.
25
N.E.
4
be
30-13
30-06
62
61-5
53-5
1
26
• •
S.
7
b c q m
29-78
29-73
64
63
64
• .
4 p.m.
S.S.E.
10
b c q m
29-88
29-78
57
56
53-5
27
Noon.
S.
7
b c q
30-19
30-02
52
52
53-5
..
2 P.M.
8
b c q
30-16
30-04
54
54
28
Noon.
W.
4
og
30-20
30-10
55
53
29
••
E.N.E.
5
be
30-30
30-13
58
57
53-5
30
••
N.N.E.
4
c
30-17
30-07
58
58
53-5
53
31
8 A.M.
N.E.
4
e
30 "00
29-98
55
54
^0
53-5
ABSTRACT OF
METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
23
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
January, 1834.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. S. Lat.W.
1
Noon.
S.S.E.
6
Ogq
30-18
30-00
53
52
52-5
Port Desire.
2
• •
S.E.
4
b e
30-40
30-20
54
53
52-5
• ■
3
••
W.
2
be
30-62
30-38
57
54
52
• •
4
• •
N.E.
4
be
30-15
30-05
61
60
53
51
5
••
N.
2
bf
2974
29-76
64
63-5
51-5
6
• •
VBLE.
1
b e m
29-36
29-52
62
61
50-5
51
48-37 66-01
7
• •
S.W.
4
b e m
29-81
2979
64
63
51-5
53
48*46
8
••
■•
5
b m
29-88
29-88
69
68
53
50-5
48-17 66-44
9
• •
W. N.W.
4
b c m q
29 '63
29 '69
72
71
52
54-5
Off Port St. Julian.
10
• •
w. b. N.
4
b m q
29-76
29-81
73
72
54-5
Port St. Julian.
11
8 A^M.
w.
8
bcq
29-62
29-62
67
71
55
• ■
••
w.s. w.
4
bcq
29 "59
29-67
70
72
55 '5
• •
12
••
N.E.
4
b c m
29-86
29-83
63
62
55
56-5
- .^
13
••
N.W.
4
c q m
29-54
29 "51
63
62
56
• •
8 p.m.
S.E.
2
cm qp 1 1
29-64
29 '65
60
59
14
Nqon.
E.
4
b c qm
29-76
29-76
59
57
57
•••
15
••
s. b. w.
6
c p
29-72
29-70
58
57
56
• •
4 P.M.
s.
9
bcq
29-56
29 "56
61
61
i6
Noon.
• •
8
c q m p
29-92
29-82
69
58
55
• k
17
E.
2
m
29 '96
29-88
61
61 -5
55
« ■
i8
••
N.N.E.
6
mr q
29-90
29-76
53
52
54-5
54
• •
19
••
S.E.
4
c oq
30*02
29-85
52
51
52-5
51-5
20
••
E.S.E.
4
be
29-88
29-78
57
56
.52-5
54-5
Off Port Desire.
21
10 A.M.
W.N.W.
4
b c
29 "93
29-88
64
63
55
Port Desire.
22
Noon.
W.
4
b c q m
29-76
29-80
68
67
56
55-5
23
••
w. b. N.
5
be
29-52
29-55
69
67
55
48-20
••
Midt.
w. b. s.
7
b c m q
2979
2974
56
55
53
24
Noon.
w.
4
be
30-04
29 "94
55
54
52-5
53-5
49-37 66-03
25
26
N.N.W.
4
be
2979
29-71
58
56
51 5
52-5
51-16 67-19
••
N.
4
be
29-40
29 '44
67
65-5
53
10 P.M.
S.W.
7 cgqp
29 "37
29-30
57
56
27
Noon.
W.N.W.
7
bcq
29-42
29 "35
61
61
53
Possession Bay.
••
4 P.M.
w.s.w.
10
bcq
29 '50
29-46
60
59
38
10 A.M.
8
bcq
29-76
29-66
57
59
52-5
First Narrow.
• •
Noon.
s. b w.
6
bcq
29-80
29-70
57
56
52-5
29
w.s.w.
6
10
bcq
29-64
29-48
56
55
52-5
• •
6 P.M.
S.W.
8 i bcq
29-68
29-60
57
56
51
Gregory Bay.
30
Noon.
w.s.w.
4
bcq
29-82
29-70
53
52
50-5
49 "5
Second Narrow.
31
■•
E. b. S.
4
b c m
2974
29-64
52
51
50
50-5
Shoal Harbour.
faam
JARY.
I
Noon.
N.W.
1
c
29-88
29-80
59
57 '5
49-5
50-5
Off Cape Negro.
2
••
N.
2
b c m
2976
29-76
59
59
51-5
50
Port Famine.
24.
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Au:.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
1
Fbebuaby, 1834.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. S. LoDg.W.
3
Noon.
N.
4
OgP
29-61
29-51
57
56
50
49-5
48-5
Port Famine.
*4
* •
w.s.w.
5
b c q
29 '54
29-44
56
56
49
48
48
• •
5
••
s.
1
c m p
29-68
29-63
53
51-^
48-5
48
48
6
« •
s.s.w.
6
b c q
30-17
30-04
53-5
52-5
49-5
50
47-5
7
" •
N.
1
be
30 "34
30-25
53
54
49-5
51-5
50-5
'*
8
••
E.N.E.
2
c m r
29-98
29-88
54
51-5
51
51
49-5
9
N.
2
b c m p
29 "93
29-84
55
53
50
53
48-5
10
■■
S.E.
2
be
30-16
30-04
55
54
53-5
51-5
50-5
1
11
« ■
1
b e m
30-01
29-96
57
56
51-5
51-5
50-5
i
la
• •
1
be
29 '94
29-84
58
57-5
53-0
63-5
52-5
64
Second Narrow.
13
, ,
S.W.
5
be q
29-97
29-88
58
60
First Narrow.
53-5
53
14
••
N. b. E.
4
b c m
3o'i3
30-04
58
57
54
53
52-33
15
••
N.E.
4
b c m
29 "52
29-48
57-5
56-5
55
52-33
4 P.M.
N.W.
4
ogqrtl
29-50
29-50
58
56
52-5
52-5
i6
Noon.
N.N.E.
4
be
29-46
29-38
56
56
52
54-5
52-47
..
Midt.
S.W.
6
b e q
29-60
29-52
50
48
53-5
17
Noon.
5
c q
29-62
29-54
54
53
53
53-5
/ Off San Sebastian
I Bay.
••
10 P.M.
N. N. W.
7
beg
29-20
29-32
54
53-5
53-5
i8
Noon.
w. b. s.
5
be
29-24
29-36
55
53-5
53
52
52-5
51-5
• •
19
N.N.E.
2
be
29-41
29-30
54
53
53-5
51-5
49-5
54-01
20
S.S.E.
5
bcq
•29-90
29-69
46
44
49-5
50-5
49
21
• ■
S.
5
be q
30-04
29-88
48
46
49-5
San Vicente Bay.
49
* '■
reraperature of water taken from th
sat 8 A.j
I., 1-30, a
nd 7 P.M. 1
ABSTRACT OF METEOllOLOGICAL JOURNAL.
25
Day
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
1
Feeruaby,1834.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. S. Long. W.
49
22
Noon.
s.s.w.
5
b c q p
30-23
30-01
47
46
45-5
47-5
46-5
Strait Le Maire.
23
"
K.W.
4
C
30-16
30-02
50
48
46-5
46
50-6
24
' •
N. N. W.
4
b C p
29-86
29-72
52
51
60 -5
50-5
25
« •
w.s.w.
5
ocqp
29-85
2974
50
49
49-5
49-5
OtfWollaston Island.
• •
Midt,
s.w.
6
c q r
29*56
29-51
49
47
60
49
26
Noon.
■*
10
cqp
29-60
29-49
47
42
49
48
48-5
• •
27
* *
• •
7
b c qp
29-86
29-70
47
46
49-5
49
49*
28
• •
VBLE.
2
c d
30-00
29-90,
54
53
50-5
50
March.
1
Noon.
W.S.W.
2
be
29-90
29-83
58
54
50*
51
r Cove in Beagle
L Channel.
50-5
60
2
••
VBLE.
1
b c m
29*57
29-52
57
55
52-5
51
48-5
Beagle Channel.
3
*■
S.W.
2
be
29-50
29-30
51
49
48-5
48
47-5
• •
4
••
W.
. 4
be
29-52
29-38
49-5
60 -5
48
48
• •
5
••
N.VV.
1
b c V
29-72
29-66
53
55
47-6
51
Off Woollya.
6
••
••
2
C q
29-52
29-50
59
58-5
51
51-5
505
49
•
7
" •
S.E.
6
ocqp
30-16
29-96
45
43-5
48-5
48-5
46-5
8+
• •
N.W.
4
c
30-18
30-01
46
45
48
44-5
46-5
54-26
9
• •
s.w.b. s.
6
bm
29-82
29-70
51
50
48
49
52-53 59-17
• •
8 P.M.
s.w.
10
be m q
29 '85
29-64
49
48
10
2 a.m.
••
10
b c q
29-80
29-58
46
45
48-6
' •
Noon.
s.w. b.w.
4
be
29-76
29-63
51
52
50-5
50-5
51
Berkeley Sound.
11
••
s.b.w.
5
b e q
29-70
29-60
53
51-5
51-5
51
• •
1
* Compared
1
Water Tliermometer with Re;
'istering ditto Feb
Mar
.28th, Nc
ch 1st, N
)on, R.T
oon. R.l
. 55-5, W.T. 54-5.
. 58-5, W.T. 7-5.
t From 8th 1
March, Temperature of Wate
r taken at 9 A.M.,
1-30, and
6 P.M.
26
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attil.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
March. 1834.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. S. Long.W.
51-5
12
Noon.
w.b.N.
5
b c ni q
29 "62
29-57
58
57
52-5
51-5
51-5
Berkeley Sound.
13
••
w.
5
b c
29-46
29-46
60-5
52-5
51-5
Port Louis.
6 P.M.
s.s.w.
5
c m q r
29 ^S^
29-40
52
49
14
Noon.
s. w.
5
be q p
29 'Si
29-70
48
46-5
50-5
50-5
15
• *
w. b. s.
6
c m q r
29-44
29-35
48-5
46
50-5
50
49
i6
• ■
• •
6
b c q
29-63
29-52
49
47
49-5
49
48
17
s.s.w.
6
be q p
29-66
29-50
44
41-5
47-5
47
i8
.•
s.
1
c m (1 q
29-68
29-54
44
43
47
19
s.s.w.
4
e qp
2977
29-62
47
45
47
20
6 a.m.
W. N. W.
6
e m q r
29 "57
29-46
47
45
• •
Noon.
s. b. w.
8
b c q
29-59
29-47
49
47
47-5
47
6 P.M.
s.s.w.
9
b eq
29-64
29-51
43
42
46-5
21
6 A.M.
s.w.
9
b e q p
29-57
29-43
43
41
45-5
Noon.
s.s.w.
10
b e q
29-59
29-45
44
42-5
46
.•
6 P.M.
s. b. w.
8
b c q p
29-64
29-47
40
38
45-5
22
6 A.M.
7
c qp
29-97
29-83
42
39
45
••
Noon.
S.S.E,
4
b c q
30-16
29-99
45
43-5
45-5
45
23
••
w. b. s.
4
beg
30-35
30-23
43
47
44-5
46-5
24
••
N.W. b.w.
5
e m
30-16
30-05
50
49
47
47
46-5
25
• *
N.N.W.
2
eg
29-98
29-90
51
49
47
47
1
47
26
E.
1
beg
29-92
29-84
53
51
47-5
47-5
47-5
27
• •
K.E.
1
eg
29-97
29-92
52
51
48
47-5
47
28
• •
w.s.w.
2
be
29-94
29-85
54
53
48
48
29
••
N.\y.
2
beg
30-03
29-93
50
49
46-5
48
30
••
s.s.w.
2
be
29-66
29-60
53
50-5
48
48-5
> • 1
31
• •
—
be
29-80
29-70
52
50-5
47
48-5
April.
I
Noon.
N.W. b.w.
4
beg
29-74
29-65
51-5
49-5
47 "5
48-5
48
••
2
6 A.M.
K.N.W.
7
c q r
29-15
29-09
48-5
46
47-5
••
Noon.
W.
4
bcqp
29-06
28-97
48
44-5
47-5
••
9 P.M.
S.W.
1
e r
28-90
28-84
43-5
41
47
3
6 A.M.
s.b. w.
11
c q r
29-35
29-05
43
42-5
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
27
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
April
, 1834.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. S. Long.W.
3
Noon.
s. s. w.
8
C q p
29 '52
29-37
41
39-5
46-5
45-5
6 P.M.
s. b. w.
10
cqp
29'58
29-49
40
38
45
Port Louis.
4
6 A.M.
6
eg
29-93
29-67
37
36-5
43-5
.•
Noon.
s.s.w.
6
eg q
29 "93
29-73
41-5
39-5
44-5
..
..
6 P.M.
s. b. w.
4
b c q g
29 '98
29-82
40
39
44
5
6 A.M.
s.w.
5
cq
30-07
29-90
40
39
44
Noon.
s. s. w.
8
cq
30-08
29-95
47
45-5
45-5
••
Midt.
s.w.
4
oc
30-09
29-98
45
44
46
47
6
Noon.
VV.N.W.
6
ocg
29-86
29-74
49
48
Berkeley Sound.
47-5
7
6 A.M.
w.
2
bf
29-50
29-38
45
44
46-5
« •
• •
Noon.
w.s.w.
4
b c m
29-55
29-55
53
52
47-5
46
• •
8
6 A.M.
s.w.
9
b c q
29-86
29-70
47
45
45
••
Noon.
s.s.w.
7
b c q p
30-03
29-83
47
46
45
44-5
45-5
50-02 58-08
9
N.N.W.
4
b c
30-15
29-98
48
47
46
47
49-14 59-55
10
••
N.W.
5
b C q
29-49
29-38
50
49
47-5
47-5
50-06 63-29
11
W. S.W.
4
be
29-77
29-67
52
51
48
47-5
47-5
50-10 64-09
12
• •
W.N.W.
2
b c m
29'S9
29-98
51
50
48
47-5
49-46 65-05
13
10 A.M.
N.
9
b e q
29-54
29-50
55
55
49
. .
Noon.
7
b c q
29-67
29-60
54
53
49-5
River.
'
Midt.
N. N. W.
5
bq
29-68
29-72
51
50
49
48
Santa Cruz.
14
Noon.
W.
7
be
29-68
29-69
59
59
49-5
48-5
47-5
15
* "
w.b. s.
4
eg
29-77
29-77
58^
53
49
48-5
• •
i6
••
~~
be
30-16
30.02
47-5
47-5
48-5
48-5
47-5
17
• •
s.
4
b e ID
29-83
29-77
46
45
47-5
47
46
47
■ •
18
• ■
S.S.E.
4
b c q
30-03
29-92
47
45
••
46-5
19
• •
s.
1
beg
30-34
30-19
47
46
46-5
46
45-5
20
N. N. W.
1
b c m
30-33
30-22
45
47-5
46-5
45
• »
21
b cnn
30-33
30-21
48
46
47
47
46-5
• •
22
VBLE.
1
bcq
30-09
30-07
59*5
48-5
48-5
#•
28
ABSTHACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOUKNAL,
Day.
Hour.
Winds. 1
Force Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. S. Long.W.
April
,1834.
48*
S3
Noon.
w.s.w.
2
be q
30-n
30-02
55-5*
53
48-5
47 '5
46
Santa Cruz.
River.
24
••
w.
4
be
30-12
30-04
53
51
48
47-5
46-5
• •
25
• •
w. b. N.
1
b c m
30-09
30-03
55i
53
43-5
48-5
46-5
• »
26
• •
N.N.W.
1
be
30-00
29 '93
53
51
48-5
49
46-5
48
27
• •
w.
1
eg
29 '9 3
29-89
52
52
• •
28
..
—
b m
29-62
29-66
57-5
53*5
48-5
46
■ •
29
• •
w. b. N.
4
beq
29 '55
29-52
52
51
47-5
48
45-5
• •
30
■ •
s.w.b.w.
6
be q
29 '45
29-39
52-5
50
47
47
• •
May.
46
1
• «
N.W.
1
be
29-36
29-33
52
53
47-5
47
• •
• «
9 P.M.
W.-
6
bcq
29-42
29-39
47
45
45-5
2
Noon.
S.W.
2
cgm
29-60
29-53
49
47
46-5
46-5
44-5
• •
3
«•
N.W.
1
beg
29-70
29-63
50
49
46
46-6
• ■
4
• •
S.W.
9
bcq
30-01
29-93
48
46
44
45-5
• •
• •
3 P.M.
..
10
bcq
30-05
29-98
50-5
48-5
45-5
5
6 a.m.
S.w.b.w.
6
beq
30-J6
30-07
44
42
44
• •
Noon.
S.W.
10
bcq
30-07
30-08
67
46
• •
••.
6 p.m.
••
8
bcq
30-07
30-07
52
50
45-5
6
Noon.
••
5
bcq
30-07
30-07
57-5
45
46
46
45
• •
7
8
bcq
29-96
29-91
54
46
46
• •
6 P.M.
E.S.E.
7
c q r
30-03
2998
43
40
42-5
8
Noon.
S.w.b.w.
1
be
30-41
30-30
44
42
44-5
44
42
• •
9
*■
N.W.
4
b m
30-45
30-34
44
41
45
43-5
• •
10
••
S.E.
2
b m
30-36
30-31
49
48
42
• .
11
• •
W.
4
b c m
30-24
30-16
44
43
• •
12
••
N.
4
eg
t29-67
29-79
51
49
44*5
46-5
46-5
* Fro
n 23d April, Temi
t
leratuve of Water taken at 9
12th May, changed Sympr.
A.M., 1-3
3, and 3 p
M.
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
29
1 Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
A ltd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
May,
1834.
Inches
Inches
Lat. S. Long.W.
13
6 A. M.
s.w.
7
bcq
29 '69
29-65
44
42
45
••
Noon.
s.w.b. w.
7
oqp
29 "65
29-65
44
43
45-5
45
51-48 64-58
14
4 A.M.
VBLE.
5
ocqph
29 '49
29-45
39
38
43-5
» •
Noon.
s. b. W.
5
bcq
29'50
29-47
39
38
44
43-5
52-08 64-28
15
• •
S.S.W.
5
ogqp
29-25
29-27
43
42
46
46
52-28 66-47
..
6 P.M.
S. S. E.
7
bcq
29 '47
29-50
43
42
46
••
Midt.
S.
9
bq
29-60
29-58
45
43
16
Noon.
w.
5
DC q
29-69
29-69
44
43
45-5
44-5
45
44-5
52-17 (Off Cape
' 1. Virgins.
>7
S.S.E.
4
b c
29-55
29-58
44
43
44
45
45
• •
18
• •
w.
4
bcra
29-72
29-65
45
43
44-5
44
44
52-27 66-35
«9
1
E.S.E.
1
ogm
29-19
29-38
49
47
43
41
46
1
1
! 30
• •
S.
4
om f
29-24
29-32
46
45
45
45 '5
45-5
21
• •
S.W.
5
bcq
29-72
29-74
45
44
45
44-5
45
22
N.W.
4
be
29-85
29-89
47
46
45-5
43-5
45
52-28
23
• •
w.s.w.
4
b c
29-68
29-70
44
43
44-5
43-5
24
• '
s.w.
5
bcq
29-81
29-82
43
42
42-5
42-5
25
# •
5
be
29-78
29-74
44
42
43
42-5
First NarroAV.
Midt.
w.s.w.
7
8
coq
29-36
29-40
42
41
26
Noon.
7
ocgq
29-53
29-52
41
40
41
41-5
• •
6 P.M.
s.w.
8
bcq
29-56
29-57
38
37
41-5
27
6 A.M.
s.w.b.s.
9
bcq
29-68
29-67
37
36
40-5
••
Noon.
6
bcq
29-82
29-80
39
38
41-5
• •
6 P.M.
. •
7
b c
29-78
29-76
40
39
40-5
39
40-5
41
40
28
Noon.
s.
5
bcq
30-08
30-10
33
37
29
. •
N.
5
ogm
30*20
30-20
33
32
40
39
Gregory Bay.
30
N.E.
6
ogqr
29-82
29-81
39
38
41-5
40
41
31
. •
N.
4
c m
29-96
29-96
40
38
43
Off Cape Negro.
43
30
ABSTRACT OF M ETEOUOLOGICAL JOUKNAL.
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. S. Long.W.
June, 1834.
43
1
Noon.
E.N.E.
4
c r
29-53
29-61
41
39-5
42
38-5
Port Famine.
2
••
w.
4
be
29 '58
29-65
49
45
43-5
42-5
42-5
3
••
■^
b c
29-64
29-88
44
43
40
37-5
4
••
N.E.by E.
4
e m r
29"93
29-97
43
41-5
43
39
33
5
••
—
gcd
2975
29-74
41
39
39-5
38
37
6
« •
••
fm
2974
29-69
41
39
39
40-5
7
••
• •
b c m
2971
29-65
40
39
36-5
39
8
9 A.M.
s.w.
2
be
29 '63
29-52
40-5
33-5
38
43-5
44
9
Noon.
W.N.W.
4
c m q
29'3+
29-35
43
43
45*
45
45
Magdalen Channel.
• •
6 P.M.
N.W.
4
b c q p 1
29 '38
29-27
41-5
40
10
Noon.
N.E.
2
c
29'34
29 --29
43
42
45
45-5
Cockburn Channel.
11
■■
N.
5
ogm p
29 '20
29-16
45
44
46-5
47-5
44-5
12
• •
w.s.w.
5
b c q
2g-20
29-09
42-5
42-5
44
44
44
55-10 74-26
13
"
s.s.w.
4
b c q
29-60
29-49
41
40-5
44-5
45-5
47
53-14 77-12
H
« •
VBLE.
4
b e q p
30-06
29-95
46-5
46
47-5
48-5
48-5
50-45 78-09
15
'•
W.
4
c q p
30-15
30-07
49
48
50-5
51
49
48-45 75-17
i6
' •
W.N.W.
6
b c q
29-98
29-93
50
49
49-5
49 -5t
48-51 77-34
17
' '
VBLE.
1
c m
30-17
30-10
53
48-5
49
50
47-29 77-43
18
W. b. N.
1
c q
29-98
29-87
56
55
50
50-5
46-53 78-59
19
• «
N. h. W.
2
be
30-02
29-97
51
50
49-5
50
46-01 78-54
20
N.
8
c q p
39-98
29-90
52
51
51
51
50-5
45-30 78-54
21
S.W. b.w.
2
c m
29-82
29-76
50
49
45-20 78-16
22
6 A.M.
N.W.
7
b c q
29-45
29-42
50
49
51-5
••
Noon.
••
10
b c q
29-24
29-18
52
50
51
44-39 76-44
••
4 P.M.
N.
11
oqp
29-02
28-97
51
49
* Taken carefu
and Magd
Ily at fl'30 A
alcn Channe
M. 9th June, becai
1.
jse the ship passed
through
a raeetin
; of tides
between Cape Froward
t 16th, lost Wa
ter Thermor
neter overboard ; i
md employed anot
her agree
ing with
Six's Seli
■ Registering.
ABSTRACT OF METEOHOLOGTCAL JOURNAL
31
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
Tune, 1034.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat.S.
Long.W.
22
Midt.
W-N.w.
9
be q p
29-13
29-18
51
50
/^o
23
Noon.
N.W.
5
b C q
29-52
29-49
53
52
0-'
52
51-5
44-29
76-13
•M
N. b. w.
5
be
29-68
29-67
53
52
51-5
51-5
44-20
76-16
25
• •
K.W.
5
DC q
29-70
29-64
54
52-5
52
51-5
52
44-03
76-02
26
w.
2
c ra p
29-63
29-58
53
52
51-5
51
43-u
73-52
27
••
W.N.W.
5
b c q p
29-51
29-37
52
51-5
51-5
42-54
75-10
• •
8 P.M.
N.W.
9
c q p
29-48
29-35
51
50
51-5
28
Noon.
S.W.
5
b c q
29-90
29-48
52
51-5
52
52
42-17
74-54
29
N.N.E.
5
DC q
29-77
29-69
50
49-5
50
50-5
50-5
St. Carlos
Isl.Chil6e.
30
• •
E.
1
ogr
29-40
29-37
50
49
50-5
ruLY.
49-5
47-5
1
• •
W.
2
be
•29-99
29-92
50
46
49
48-5
50-5
2
• "
w. s. w.
6
b c q
30-02
29-94
53
51
51
50-5
3
• •
VBLE.
1
b c p
30-16
30-11
48-5
49
49-5
49
4
s.w.b.w.
4
b c q p
30-04
29-95
47
45
49-5
49
48
43
5
• •
S.E.
2
be
30-41
30-31
44
40
7
• •
N.E. b. N.
5
e
29 '94
29-79
42
41
47-5
48
49
8
* *
N.b.W.
5
cqp
29-76
29-70
52
50
49-5
49-5
9
N.W.
2
c m
29-52
29-49
54-5
53
50
10
N.N.W.
2
e m
29-68
29-64
54
63
50
51-5
49 '5
n
• •
N.N.E.
1
beg p
29-76
29-70
52-5
51
51
51-5
50-5
12
N.
2
cgm
29-48
29-46
53
52
51
51
50
13
W. N. W.
5
be
29-53
29-52
52
50
50-5
50
51
14
5
b c q
29-95
30-04
52
50
51
52
51-5
15
N.N.W.
5
b e q p
29-80
29-81
51
50
51-5
61
52
41-48
75-28
16
■*
s. w.
4
be
30-09
30-10
53
51-5
52-5
52
40-27
75-44
'
•
33
ABSTRACT OF
METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality. j
— — I
July, 1834.
Lat. S. Long.W.
10
Midt.
N.
7
c q r
29*96
30-06
50
48
17
6 A.M.
W.N.W.
7
qr
29-76
29-86
55
53
Noon.
w. b. N.
4
c q r
29 'So
29-82
55
52
53
53-5
40-09 76-18
18
••
N.N.W.
4
b c q
29-87
29-95
54
53
54
53-5
53 "5
38-23 75-29
19
••
W.N.W.
5
b c q
29-80
29-86
56
55
54
54
54
36-23 73-56
20
••
VBLE.
4
c q p
29 "93
29-99
55
52-5
55
55-5
34-21 73-04
21
••
W.N.W.
6
c q r
29-36
29-92
56
55
54-5
54
54
33-29 72-14
22
• •
VBLE.
1
be
30-11
30-15
54
53
65
55
53-5
23
• •
S.W.
2
bv
30-02
30-09
58
57
55
55
53"5
Valparaiso.
24
••
S. b. E.
1
be
30-15
30-19
56
54
55
54-5
• •
25
, ,
VBLE.
1
b e ra
30-10
30-09
57
56
26
, ,
S.
4
b e m
30-02
30-06
53
52
27
, ,
2
be
30-04
30 -09
53
51-5
28
. ,
N.N.W.
1
be
29-91
29-96
51-5
48-5
29
• •
S.E.
1
be
30-06
30-03
53
51
30
. .
W.S.W.
2
be
29-93
29-96
53-5
50-5
31
E.S.E.
1
eg r
30-38
30-10
54
52
Adgdst.
1
. •
N. b. E.
1
b m
29-90
30-06
60
i
2
b cm
29-84
29-88
60
59
3
1
beg
29-98
30-04
56
55
4
N.
2
be
29-89
30-99
56-5
52-5
5
6 A.M.
E.N.E.
2
og
29-94
30-95
52
50
6
9 A.M.
bm
30-07
30-06
50
48
:: s
7
Noon.
b ra
29-85
29-98
57
53-5
8
N.W.
1
be
29-77
29-89
57
53-5
9
N. b. W.
2
beg
29-96
30-03
56
54
10
^^
be
29-80
30-03
62
11
..
e og
30-08
30-14
57
56
12
S.W.
2
be
29-92
30-04
59
57
: ■ «
13
—
eg
29-92
29-97
56
55
14
N.W.
2
be
30-03
30-10
58
57
15
be
29-94
30-06
60
56
16
E.
1
eg
29-80
29-95
6.-5
59-5
17
S.S.E.
1
eg
29-70
29-83
62
59-5
18
c g
29-76
29-85
56
56
19
N.E.
1
c m r
29-95
30-03
54
53
20
—
c m
29-85
29-91
56
56
• 1
21
N.W.
1
beg
29-93
30-00
59
57
'f
22
W.S.W.
2
b c m
29-79
29-93
59
60
23
N.N.W.
5
e r
29-82
29-91
54
53-5
24
4
be
29-93
30-00
59
25
N.W.
2
be
30-04
30-12
58
26
S.
5
be
30-10
30-11
58
53-5
1
27
s.s.w.
6
be
29-89
30-01
55
52
'
28
w.
5
be
29-87
30-00
57
52-5
!
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
S3
Day
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
AUGI
ST,1834.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. S. Long.W.
•29
Noon.
w.
2
be
29-92
30-08
57
54
Valparaiso.
30
4
b c g
29 '99
30-10
57
56
, ,
31
..
s.s.vv.
4
be
29-78
30-00
59 "5
57
, .
September.
1
Noon.
—
b e m
29-61
29-85
60
58
..
2
• •
E.
1
cog
29 "90
30-00
60
59-5
, ,
3
N.E.
1
be
29-70
29-90
61
59
..
4
W.S.W.
2
c in
29-83
29-96
59
58
, ,
5
• •
s.
4
beg
29-87
29-99
58
55
, ,
6
• •
4
b
29-80
30-00
63
58
, ,
7
..
N.E.
1
be
29-72
29-98
60
58
, ,
8
..
S.W.
6
be
29-81
30-00
58
55
9
..
N.
2
eg
29-85
29-97
58
56
10
-.
• •
4
eg
29-82
29-99
59-5
57-5
, ,
11
• •
E.
4
e gr
29-88
29 "94
48
48
, ,
12
..
N. N. W.
2
be
30-25
30-32
55
53
, ,
13
• •
W.S.W.
2
e p d
30-09
30-22
55
52-5
, ,
H
N.W.
1
b e V
29-75
30-01
62
57
, ^
15
..
b V
29-77
29-99
63
57-5
• ■
16
• •
VBLE.
1
b m
29-68
29-96
63
59
■ '•
17
9 A.M.
N.W.
1
b c m
29-77
29-97
58
55
18
Noon.
E.S. E.
1
be
29-71
29-98
61
57
.,
'9
S.W.
4
be
29-89
30-05
56-5
54
, ,
20
• •
S S.W.
5
b c q
29-89
30-08
57
64-5
, ,
21
S.W.
6
b e q
29-90
30-11
59
57
, ,
22
S.S. E.
5
be m
29-63
30-03
70
65
23
.•
N.E.
2
b e m
29-63
29-89
60
59
24
..
W. N. W.
1
eg
29-62
29-88
58
58
• •
25
N. W.
2
eg
29-60
29-87
61
58-5
, ^
26
• •
N.
4
eg
29-77
29-96
58
56
, ,
27
S.W.
5
be
29-79
30-04
61
57
, ,
28
W.S.W.
4
beg
29-76
30-00
60
57
, ,
29
..
S.W.
4
b e q
29-77
29-99
58
55-5
• •
30
W.N.W.
2
be
29-62
29-92
66
62
• •
OCTOl
lER.
1
Noon.
S.W.
4
be
29-76
29-98
58
55-5
, ,
2
W.
4
b c
29-72
29-91
57
54
• •
3
••
S.W.
5
be
29-80
30-09
58
56-5
« a
4
• •
5
b c q
29-91
30-13
57
55
, ,
5
• •
s.
5
be
29-84
30-13
60
58
, ,
6
• •
N.E.
2
be
29-65
30-01
65
62
, ,
7
• •
S.W.
4
og
29-70
29-90
59
58
, ,
8
• •
N.
1
eg
29-58
29-89
57
56
• •
9
• •
N.W.
2
beg
29-72
29-97
60
59
, ,
10
..
S.W.
4
be
29-69
30-00
64
61
, ,
11
6 a.m.
S.E.
1
be
29-83
30-06
54
52-5
, ,
12
Noon.
s.s.w.
5
be
29-75
30-11
65
60
, ,
»3
• •
S.W.
5
be
29-57
29-99
65
61
, .
14
• •
s. s. w.
5
cgq
29-58
30-00
60
59-5
• • -
>5
S.W.
5
b e q
29-77
30-12
61
60
16
s.s.w.
4
b e q
29-64
30-12
65
63
>7
• •
5
b c q
29-60
30-07
63
61-5
• •
18
• •
—
f
29-55
29-99
60
60
•9
• •
N.
1
be
29-43
29-90
63
62
» •
20
• •
1
eg m
29-69
30-00
60
61
. •
21
..
2
f w
29-66
29-97
59
60
• .
22
• •
2
cf
29-58
29-95
61
60
• .
23
••
• •
2
be m
29-50
29-88
63
61
24
S.W.
2
cm
29-67
29-97
58
57
••
34
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
OCT3
2 b'
27
28
29
30
31
Hour.
Winds. Force Weather.
I I
BER,lti34.
Noon.
10 A.M.
Noon.
November.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
13
'4
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
Noon.
10 A.M.
Noon
8 A. M.
Noon.
6 A. M.
Noon
4 P.M.
8 A.M.
s.s.w.
4
VBLE.
1
N. N. W.
1
N.
2
N.W.
1 1
N.N.W.
2 .
••
1
s.w.
5
w.
2
N.W.
2
S.W.
4
N.W.
■2
S.W.
4
S.E.
■2
VELE.
S.W.
5
S.
7
••
6
S.S.E.
5
S.
4
s. b. w.
4
w.ly.
2
VBLE.
1
S.S.E.
7
N.b.W.
4
E.N.E.
]
S.E. b. £.
2
N.
4
S.W.
5
••
7
••
1
b c q
b c m
b c
o c m f
b c o
b c m
be q
o f m
og
b c
b c V
b c o
ocg
b
b c q
b c q
b c q
b c q
b rn
b c
beg
ogqm
b c
b c
be
be q
o c q
b e q
b c
Sympr.
Inches.
29 '54
29-43
29-46
29-63
29"52
29-56
29-68
29-42
29-42
29-55
29-63
29-44
29-50
29-69
29-67
29-58
29-68
29-72
2974
29-70
29 '66
29-60
29 '51
29-47
29-42
29-43
29"62
Barom.
Inches.
30.06
29-96
29-94
29-97
29-93
29-96
29-96
29-90
29'83
29-99
30-07
29-95
30-00
30-05
30-07
30-01
30-10
30-14
30-19
30-14
30-04
30-03
29-92
29-87
29-84
29-85
30-00
*29"94| 29-92
29-87 I 29-81
29-98 29-85
30-08 ^ 29-98
30-31 I 30-15
Attd.
I'her.
o
67
70
63
61
62
64
56-5
67
64
59
63
65
64
60
61
63
64
58
59
60
61
61-5
63
61
55
59
68
58-5
60
52
54
51
Temp.
Air.
o
67
68
63-5
60
60
63
56
64
65
59
61
65
64
59
60
61
61
58
58
60
60
60
62
60
54
58
57
58
59
49-5
55
50
Temp.
Water.
56-5
55
56-5
58
57
58-5
53-5
59-5
59
58
59
59-5
58-5
59-5
60-5
61
61
59-5
60
59
58-5
57-5
57-5
58
58
56-5
57
56-5
54-5
57-5
56-5
55*5
56-5
56
55-5
55-5
55
56-5
Locality.
Lat. S. Long.W.
Valparaiso.
33-22
35 "52
36-51
37-'40
39 "51
40-41
77-34
33-43
76-20
31-16
76-08
34-16
78-00
77-34
78-00
78-02
77-23
San Carlos, Isl. Chiloe
* Index of Sympr. set four-tenths higher.
ABSTllACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
35
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
i
Sympr. Barom.
1
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
NOVB
MBER, 1834.
Inches.
Inches.
56
Lat. S. Long.W.
24
4 A.M.
E.S.E.
I
b C
30-18
30-19
48
48
56-5
56-5
SanCarlos,Isl.Chil6e
25
Noon.
VBLE.
I
b C
30-05
30-03
58
58
56
58
53-5
••
26»
" •
S.
5
be
30-26
30-25
55
54
55
54
41 -42 Near
•i-
••
s.s.w.
7
b cq
30-15
30-12
54
55
54
54-5
41-41 the
• •
Midt.
s-
8
c q 1
30-16
30-16
54
53
55-5
land.
28
Noon.
••
5
b c q
30-21
30-19
53-5
54
54-5
54
41-32 76-17
29
E.
2
b c
30-10
30-16
53
54
54
53
42-02 78-25
30
• •
E.N.E.
4
cgq
29 "94
29-88
54
54
53-5
43-25 77-38
Dece
MBEH.
54-5
1
Noon.
VBLE.
1
b c
29-82
29-97
61-5
62
55
57-5
56
44-26 76-38
2
N. b. \V.
2
be
30-03
30-05
60
59
57-5
57
54
44-29 75-30
3
• •
N.N.W.
6
b c qp
29"83
29-
55
55
54-5
54-5
Chonos Islands.
4 P.M.
N.E.
7
c q p r
29-80
29-76
57
56
54
4
Noon.
W.N.W.
7
b c q r
29-84
29-80
53-5
53
54
53
45-05 Close
5
••
s. w. b. W.
4
be
30-06
30-00
58
58
54-5
54
53
to the
6
S.W.
5
bep
30-20
30-23
55
54
51-5
51-5
51-5
sliore.
7
s. b. W.
4
be
30-24
30-23
55
55
52
51-5
San Pedro.
8
• •
w.
1
eg m
30-11
30-20
56
57
52
9
••
N.
1
cgd
29-86
30-23
54
52-5
••
10
N.E.
4
be
29-99
30-21
58
57
52-5
53
51
••
u
VBLE.
2
cgp
29-87
30-20
56
55
53-5
54-5
54
Near the land.
12
• '
VC.N.W.
4
be q
29-89
30-14
57
56
54-5
54
45-02
13
W.
2
oe m
29-82
2975
55
55
53
52-5
51-5
"Vallenar Road.
14
• '
w.s.w.
8
b e q p
29-30
29-28
51
48
52
52
^ ^
4 P.M.
S.W.
10
b c q p
29-30
29-26
52
50
51-5
15
Noon.
s. s. w.
7
b c q p
2974
29-64
49
48
52-5
52-5
» c
eth Noveml
ler, T
emperature c
)f water from this (
Jay taken
at 9 A.M
. 1-30 and 7 p.m.
36
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL,
Day.
Hour.
Winds ]
^orce
Weather.
Sympr.
Batom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
Decembea, 1834.
Inches.
Inches.
52
52-5
Lat. S. Long.W.
16
Noon.
S.W.
5
b cq p h
2974
29-69
51
50
Valleiiar Road.
52-5
52-5
17
s. b. w.
4
be
29-90
29-70
51
50
54
53-5
53-5
18
* *
* *
4
be
29 '94
29-90
52
52
53-5
53
52
52-5
45-12
19
..
s.s.w.
2
be
29 '98
30-02
50-5
50
45-13
52-5
53
20
S.W.
4
be
29-77
29-75
51
51
53-5
54
46-55
21
w.
4
cgp q
29-82 29-78
51
50
53-5
53-5
Port San Andres.
22
• 1
S.E.
2
b C q
29-72 2^-66
56
55
55
54
• •
23
••
w.
6
b c qf
29-97
29-94
50
49
53
24
S.W.
5
beg
29-55
29-55
55
55
53
53-5
53
Christmas Cove.
25
VBLE.
2
b e q p
29 "34
29-29
53
53
54
54
• •
26
« •
N.W.
5
cq
29-67
29-60
50
49
52-5
52-5
53
52 5
• •
27
• *
VBLE.
2
b c q p
29-61
29-55
53
52
53
53
••
28
W. S.W.
4
be
29-76
29-70
51
50
53
53-5
52-5
46*26
29
10 A.m.
S.W.
5
b c q p
29-80
29-82
48
47
53
52-5
53
46-02
30
Noon.
N.W.
oeg
29-93
29-92
54
53
54
53-5
54
OffYnchemo Island.
31
■■
VBLE.
1
c
29-73
29-65
59
59
55
54-5
••
Janu
ARY. 1835.
1
Noon.
N.W.
5
cgqr
29-45
29-72
54
53
54
54
53-5
52-5
Patch Cove.
2
VBLE
2
cgqp
29-65
29-73
53
51
54
52-5
52-5
3
N. W.
5
ogqr
29-64
29-60
52
52
53
53
•.
4
W.N.W.
1
c
29-73
29-76
56
55
54
54
• •
5
••
N. N. W.
■ 4
gr
29-84
29-84
55
55
53-5
1
6
s. b. w.
4
be
29-90
29-90
55
55
53-5
53
53
Off Lemu Island.
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL,
37
Day.
Hour.
Winds. 1
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
LoCAtlTV.
jANUi
IRY, 1835.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. S. Long.W.
7
Noon.
w. b. s.
2
be
29-88
29'9i
54
54
53*
55-5
43-48
10 A.M.
N.
1
cm r
29-76
29-87
58
57
54-5
Port Low.
9
Noon.
VV.N.W.
1
beg
29-78
29-88
58
57
53-5
54
54
••
10
' *
N.W.
5
cgqr
29*47
29'85
57-5
56-5
54-5
55
54-5
"'
11
8
cgqp
29 '52
29-85
58
56
53-5
53-5
■ •
••
6 P.M.
8
eom qr
29-24
29-82
54-5
53
53
12
Noon.
S.W.
4
b c q p
2975
29-82
56
55
53
52-5
52
■■
13
N.W.
6
c m q r
29-60
29-81
55
54
52-5
52
51-5
• •
14
"
S.W. b. s.
6
be q
2974
29-82
53
52
52
52
51-5
• •
15
* *
S.W.
2
b c
30-02
29-96
56
56
52-5
53-5
53
i6
• •
N.W.
4
eg
30-08
30*12
56
55
54-5
53
52-5
Oflf Hiiafo.
17
a »
~
beg
29*90
30-04
60
61
54'5
56
i8
• «
s.
4
b c m
2979
29-95
65
62-5
55-5
58
San Carlos.
19
• •
s. w.
1
be
29-98
30-00
60
59
54
53
59
57-5
TNear the English
\ Bank.
20f
* *
* •
2
b c m
29-88
30-01
65
64
59-5
60-5
59
San Carlos.
21
• •
N.W.b. w.
4
cor
29-70
30-01
60
59
58
57-5
57
• •
22
• •
S.W.
5
be
29-97
30-01
63
63
58-5
58
••
23
••
w.s. w.
5
be
29-84
30-02
65-5
68
57
58
• •
24
••
2
b c
2978
30-01
65-5
59-5
59-5
25
. •
w. b. N.
2
b
29-70
30-03
65-5
66-5
26
4
b m
2970
30-00
67
66
..
27
w. s. w.
4
be
2974
30-01
63
61
58-5
r «
28
N.W.
4
cgq
29 "57
30-01
64
63
58-5
58
29
..
W.N.W.
1
cgp
29-63
30-00
64
53
30
w.s.w.
4
be
30-07
30-01
61 -5
62
.•
31
2
b c V
2973
30-01
64
64-5
• •
* 7th, W
ater T
t J
hemnometer broken ; new one
an. 20th, 2 a.m., observed an e
nearly 1'
ruplion c
lower th
)f Osorno
m the Sti
mdard.
38
ABSTRACT OF METEOliOLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Syrapr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. S. Long.W.
Febr
UARY, 1835.
1
Noon.
N.W.
4
be
29-76
30-02
66
San Carlos.
2
w.s.w.
5
bcgq
2977
30-00
60-5
59-5
3
••
s.w.
4
gcp
29-82
30-01
55
53
56
• ■
4
• •
* *
4
oc p
2977
30-02
53
50
52
52
51
• •
5
* *
s.s.w.
4
be
29-62
30-02
53
53
54-5
51-5
53
41 -23 Close
6
• •
W. N. W.
2
be
29-96
30-09
55
55
53
53-5
53
40-33 to the
7
N.N.E.
5
q d
29-97
30-03
54
53
54-5
57-5
shore.
8
• •
S.S.W.
1
bcm
29-82
30-06
59
58
40-11
9
10 a.m.
E.
I
be
29-B5
30-05
61
60
59-5
61-5
Valdivia.
10
Noon.
N.
4
b V
29-67
29-93
64
65
• •
11
N.N.W.
2
b c
29 '55
29-85
65
68
• •
12
••
N.
5
b
29-68
29-90
62-5
62-5
61
62-5
••
13
, ,
W.
2
be
29-71
29-98
67
67
• •
63
14
• •
N.
5
be
29-50
30-10
66
66
15
• •
S.W.
2
c gp
29-60
30-09
63-5
64
16
• •
N.
4
c g
29-58
29-80
62-5
63
17
• ■
N. N. W.
4
be g
29-69
29-89
62
61
18
• •
w. b. s.
2
c g
29-78
30-00
65
64
• •
19
• •
S.E.
4
be
29-70
30-04
66
64
..
20*
6 A.M.
E
1
be
29-70
29-99
60
59
59-5
• •
• •
Noon.
N. b. w.
5
be
29-66
29-98
66
67
62-5
6 P.M.
VBLE.
4
b e q
29 "59
29-92
66-5
66
59-5
21
Noon.
K.E.
1
be
29-68
30-04
66
65
63
59
53-5
• •
22
S.S.W.
4
bra
29-75
30-01
59
58
55-5
-
53-5
54-5
39-37 Near
23
■ "
S.
1
bcm
29-70
30-96
58
57
53-5
55-5
38-57 the
24
" •
2
be
29-72
30-95
58
58
54
54-5
38 -45 land.
25
• •
N.W.
4
c f
29-74
30-93
57
58
56-5
56
38-17 Off Mocha.
26
••
N.
gqr
29-44
30-60
53
53
55
56
56
56-5
• •
27
"
N.
4
be
29-54
30-87
60
60
5B-5
58
38-28
28
S.S.E.
1
b c r
29-59
30-17
61
59
57-5
57
58
38-18
*20
hFeb
ruary, ir40
A.M., felt a severe
shock of
m earthq
uake.
ABSTllACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
39
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality,
VlABC
H, 1835.
laches.
Indies.
58-5
Lat. S. Long.W.
I
Noon.
N.N.W.
2
C HI
29*60
30-17
66
65
58-5
57
57-5
Off Moeha.
2
■ *
VULE.
2
be
29-67
30-17
62-5
63-5
59
59-5
60-5
37-59 Near
the
•3
S.W.
4
beg
29-78
30-17
65
63
62-5
60
57-5
37-32 land.
4
• •
S.
5
be
29-64
30-18
64
63
58
57-5
Coneepcion Bay.
5
• •
• •
5
b vq
29"59 30"i8
69
69
••
^ ^
4 P.M.
S. S.W.
/
6
b q m
29-46 ' 3o'i8
70
69
6
Noon.
N.
2
be
29-53 1 30-18
65
63
4 «
55-5
7
" •
N.N.W.
1
29 "54
30-17
63
62
58
57
55-5
" "
8
••
S.
4
f
29-61
30-18
59
58
58
59-5
35-17
9
• •
VBI.E.
1
m
29-64
30-18
61
60
59
61
33 '54 72-34
10
2 A.M.
2
belt
29-56
30-18
62
61
60
• •
Noon.
N.W.
2
egni
29-64
30-19
62
61
61
61
33-39 72-20
11
.•
VBLE.
1
c o in
29-57
30-19
63
62
61
62
33-32 72-07
12
• •
■ N.
1
oc d
29-53
30-18
62
61-5
Valparaiso.
13
10 A.M.
s.s. w.
4
b c q
29-56
30-16
67
65
H
Noon.
—
o
b V
29-40
30-18
70
69
15
10 A.M.
S.W.
4
b V
29-33
30-17
70
66
i6
Noon.
—
c m
29-58
30-18
63
63
17
• •
b c m
29-44
30-18
65
64
55-5
59-5
i8
■■
s.
5
be
29-71
30-05
59
57
60-5
60
63
32-52 74-01
19
* •
S.E. b. s.
6
be
29-78
30-14
62
61
62-5
62-5
63
33-09 75-55
20
S S.E.
5
be q
29-80
30-20
63
63
64
64
63
33-46
21
• •
" '
6
beq
29-70
30-08
64
63
62-5
63
63-5
33-49 77"oo
22
5
oeg
29-67
30-04
64
63
64
64-5
34-11 79-03
23
••
• •
5
beq
29-80
30-
65
64
65
6=.
34-57 81-41
24
••
VBLE.
4
be
2975
30-10
65
64
65
64-5
63
35-13 79'53
25
• •
4
be
29-70
30-08
64
64
63-5
63
34-59 78-03
«3d
March, 10-26
A.M., felt a severe
shock of
an earthf
luake.
40
ABSTEACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr. Barom.
Attd.
Then
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
March, 1835.
Inches.
Inches
Lat. S. Lat.W.
60
26
Noon.
S.E.
4
b c m
*30-i9
61
62
62
57-5
35-38 76-15
27
s.
4
C ni q
30'i3
56
54
56
53-5
36-28 73-54
28
••
I
o c m
30-28
59
55
54
Concepcion Bay. .
29
VBIE.
4
b cq
30-17
62
52
/Standing out of the
30
s. s. w.
4
b c m
29 "93
58
55-5
52-5
)_ Bay of Concepeion.
31
N.
5
b c m q
30-09
56
53-5
54
APJIIL.
54
1
Noon.
VBLE.
1
bcf
30-21
60
55
54-5
Island of St. Mary.
2
••
••
1
b m
30 "09
59
53
57-5
Concepeion Bay.
3
..
S.
4
b cq
30-21
58
..
4
..
4
b c m
30-12
61
• •
5
10 a.m.
4
be
30-23
63
• •
6
Noon.
s.
2
b c m
30-14
65
54-5
7
s.w.
2
b m
30 '09
67
59-5
57
56
8
• •
N.
4
f
30-07
58
55-5
56-5
56
r Soutb Harbour, in
\. Santa Maria.
9
■ •
N.E.
1
c m
30-22
55
56-5
56
55-5
10
• •
1
b c m
30-22
58
56-5
53-5
56
11
' "
S.
1
b c ra
30-22
59
56-5
.56-5
Concepeion Bay.
12
••
N.
1
b e
30-05
70
■ •
13
b
30-10
59
• .
ti4
10 a.m.
N.
4
fd
30-19
30-20
61
15
* •
S.
2
be
30-20
30-24
57
57
• •
16
10 a.m.
2
be
30-20
30-18
57
58
57-5
54-5
Tome Bay.
17
8 A.M.
o
c o
30-02
30-08
57
53-5
53-5
Coliumo Bay.
18
54
9 ••
N. b. w.
5
eg
30-05
30-07
57
54
• •
54-5
55
19
9 ••
VBLE.
2
f
30-12
30-16
57
57
57
• •
* 25th Marc
h, P.M., set Sympr. five-tenths highe
r.
t From
14th A
pril Cabin T
hermometer used, which agreed with
the Stan
dard.
ABSTRACT OF METKOKOLOGICAL JOUllNAL.
41
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
Aprii
., 1835.
Inches.
Inches.
55-5
Lat. S. Long. W.
20
8 a.m.
s.
2
bf
30-16
30-20
57
55-5
53-5
35-35
21
8 ..
— '
bm
30-13
30-17
54
54
54-5
54-5
or-,^ /OfftheRiver
35 '9 \ Maule.
22
Noon.
s.
4
bv
29-98
30-03
60
55-5
57
58
33-51
23
N.E.
2
c
30-13
30-16
58
58-5
58
56-5
Off Valparaiso.
24
S.
4
bf
30-11
30-16
59
58
57-5
58-5
• •
25
• •
S.S.E.
2
of
30-17
30-21
58
57-5
53
57-5
Oif Horcon.
25
• •
S.W.
1
of
30-12
30-18
58
58
57
Horcon Bay.
27
••
s.w.
4
b c q
30-19
30-20
60
56
55
55
Port Papudo.
28
eg
£0-21
30-23
54
55-5
55-5
54
• •
29
s.s.w.
5
be
30-20
30-25
59
55
55
55-5
Port Pichidanque.
/ Off Port Picbi-
!_ dan que.
30
• *
s.
2
b m
30-13
30-17
59
56
55
May.
55
1
Noon.
VBLE.
1
b c m
30-03
30-07
59
56
58-5
59-5
31-24
2
W.
1
com
30-12
30-19
59
59-5
60
58
Off MaytenciJIo.
3
■'
S.W.
2
ogm
30-14
30-23
59
58-5
56-5
57 '5
Off Lengua de Vaea.
4
s.
2
c
30-18
30-24
58
58-5
57-5
58
Herradura.
5
• •
• •
2
c
30-16
30-25
62
58
57
56-5
• >
6
N.N.W.
2
b
30-13
30-17
59
58
56-5
• •
7
N.W.
2
b
30-10
30-16
60
• •
8
• •
—
com
30-24
30-28
56
• •
9
• •
W.
4
be
30-21
30-29
61
• •
10*
• •
w.s.vv.
4
be
30-23
30-29
56
54-5
.•
11
• •
2
be
30-13
30-25
63
«•
12
• •
N.W.
4
c m
30-09
30-15
56
56
• •
13
N.N.W.
4
c g
30-23
30-28
58
57
• •
• From this date used
deck
Barom, with
a correction addec
I of 0- 28,
its avera
ge dlff. fr
om Cabin Barom.
8
4S
ABSTRACT OF METEOKOLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
Hour,
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
May,
1835.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. S. Long.W.
14
Noon.
N. N. E.
1
be
30-21
30-30
63-5
Herradura.
15
N. N. W.
1
beg
30-16
30-27
64
65
16
w.s.vv.
4
be
30-14
30-25
63
63
17
8 a.m.
S.E.
)
e r
30-16
30-21
57
56
18
Noon.
s.
5
b c V
30-14
30-26
65
19
N.N.W.
2
b e V
30-06
30-14
58
57
20
1
b c m
30-10
30-14
58
56
21
N.W.
2
c m
30-06
30-15
57-5
56-5
22
N.
1
com
30 '09
30-13
57
57
23
1
beg
30-21
30-27
60
59
24
s.w.
4
be q
30-13
30-23
62
61
25
—
cod
30-20
30-24
57
56
26
eg
30-26
30-28
59-5
58
27
w.s.w.
4
b c V
30-10
30-31
63
59
28
4
be
30-03
30-26
61
60
29
2
be
30-16
30-15
60
59
30
N.W.
4
be
30-13
30-23
58
31
W.N.W.
4
be
30-23
61
59
June
1
N.
2
e g w
30-16
30-26
57-5
67
2
N.N.W.
4
b c
30-13
30-18
61
59-5
3
S.W.
4
beg
30-17
30-29
63
61-5
4
..
N. N. W.
2
b c V
30-18
30-25
61
5
..
eg
3011
30-16
55-5
56
6
9 A.M.
com
30-15 30-19
55
53-5
55-5
7
Noon.
••
m
*
30-25
58
56
56
57
8
• •
S.S.E.
5
b m q
30 -451
58
57
55-5
56
60
30-26 72-22
9
• •
• •
4
b c q
30-45
59
59
60
58-5
61
30-49 74-18
10
" '
* •
4
b e
30-46
61
61
62
62
62
31-11 75-44
11
*■
S.
4
b c q
30-41
60
59
61-5
58
58
31-22 74-55
12
2
bch
30-44
59
58
56-5
57
56-5
31-36 73-10
13
• •
N.N.E.
4
8 ra
30 -541
30-47
56
56
55-5
55-5
56
54
Off Pichidanque.
14
••
N.
4
og
30-49
30-44
56 ,
54
Valparaiso.
15
••
—
eg
30-56
30-46
56
53 5
52-5
53-5
..
16
• •
N.
m r
30-48
30-46
54-5
53
1
17
S.E.
b c V
30-50
30-45
56
18
• •
N.
b c
.30-56
30-44
59
58
19
••
N.E.
eg
30-39
30-44
58
57
1
20
N.W.
beg
30-50
30-45
58-5
59
1
21
••
b V
30-58
30-45
61
56
,.
22
••
N.N.W.
2
b e V
30-24
30-44
55-5
54-5
••
23
6 A. jr.
N.
8
bcgq
30-11
30-43
56
55
Noon.
N. 1). «•.
9
egq
30-09
30-44
58-5
57-5
* Syi
np. sent on board .
Schooner
f Baromet
er tub
e loose : use
d it no more.
t Nc
w Sympr
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
43
Day
] Hour.
1
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom. ^Ud.
1
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
June
, 1835.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. S. Long.W,
23
6 P.M.
N.N.E.
9
cgqp
30-13
54
Valparaiso.
24
4 A. M.
N.N.W.
6
c q p 1
30-18
55
, ,
..
Noon.
N. b. w.
7
cgq
30-29
56
, ,
..
9 P.M.
w.
1
b c q p 1
30-45
52-5
^ _
•25
Noon.
w.s.w.
2
b c p
30-62
57
• •
26
VBLE.
1
bv
30-62
27
N.
I
b c
30-50
57
28
••
N.E.
1
eg
30-69
56-5
54
54-5
• ■
29
••
W.
1
b
30-63
59
54
55-5
• •
30
. .
s.
6
be q
30-48
30-26*
60
58-5
30-17 73-23
July.
59
1
'■
' •
4
ogq
30-38
30-17
61
57
53-5
58-5
58-5
27-41 71 "39
2
"
ogm
30-30
30-12
61
58
58-5
58
58-5
Off Copiapo.
3
8 A.M.
N.
4
bo
30-34
30-13
60
55-5
57-5
57-5
56-5.
Copiapo.
4
Noon.
^~
eg
30-34
30-18
62
57
57
••
5
••
s.s.w.
4
b c
30-37
30-18
60
57
56-5
57
56-5
-• •
6
8 a.m.
s.
I
beg
30-43
30-24
62-5
56
57
57
••
7
2 P.M.
VBLE.
1
ogm
30-30
30-13
61-5
58-5
59-5
60
25-57 71*23
8
Noon.
ogm
30-28
30-14
62
59
60-5
60-5
60-5
25-32 71-29
9
■■
VBLE.
1
og
30-39
30-24
62
58
60-5
61
61-5
24-43 71 "21
10
" •
S. b. E.
4
30-44
30-31
63
60
62
62
62-5
23-18 71-26
u
• •
S.E.b.S.
2
c
30-30
30-18
64-5
61
62-5
61
61
20-49 70-54
12t
• •
VBLE.
1
ogm
30-26
30-14
63-5
60
60-5
59-5
59-5
Off Iquique.
»3
S.
2
be
30-29
30-18
64-5
62
60
59 '5
Iquique.
14
••
S.S.W.
4
b c
30-32
30-20
64-5
61
59-5
58
61
• •
15
• •
VBLE.
2
m
30-34
30-18
64
60
62-5
62-5
62-5
19-42 70-59
16
• •
• •
2
m
30-32
30-22
65
62
62-5
61 -5
18-47 72-19
* Cabin Barometer.
t July 12, 10-35
A.M., felt the shock of an e
arthquali
e.
u
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
?rr: ^°-
LLITY.
Lat. S.
Long.W.
July,
1835.
63
17
Noon.
s.
4
30-32
30-23
65 -e
62
63 17-43
62-5
62-5
73-55
18
• •
S.E.
4
be
30 '36
30-28
66
63
61-5 15-57
60
60-5
76-20
19
■ *
5
be q p
30-31
30-18
65
61
59-5 12-55
60
58-5
77-19
20
30-20
65
60 Ca
53-5
llao.
21
s.
4
beg
30-28
30-21
64
62
22
, ,
w.
1
eg
30-3'
30-24
65
63
23
, ,
—
beg
30-26
30-21
64
62-5
24
s.
2
be
30-25
30-20
64-5
61-5
25
4
eg
30-27
30-19
64
61
26
, ,
1
eg
30-25
30-18
64
61 -5
27
. ,
w.
2
be
30-28
30-21
64
63
28
s.
5
be
30-30
30-21
65-5
62-5
29
S.S.E.
4
beg
30-32
30-28
66
65
30
« •
5
beg
30-37
30-20
66 "
63 'o
31
..
s.
4
beg
30-25
62
AUGD
sr.
1
• •
W.N.W.
1
be
30-21
30-18
66
63-5
2
S.S.E.
4
eg
30-21
30-17
66
63-5
3
W.S.W.
1
eg
30-25
30-18
65
60-5
4
W.
2
eg
30-24
30-17
65
62
6
• •
s.
4
be
30-26
30-21
64-5
65
6
• •
• •
5
be
30-26
30-21
65-5
63-5
7
..
S.E.
4
b c g m
30-18
30-16
66
64
58-5
8
..
N.W.
2
be
30-20
30-16
65
63
9
..
S.
2
beg
30-23
30-20
65-5
62
10
• •
S.S.E.
5
beg
30-26
60-5
11
• ■
..
2
beg
30-23
30-19
65
62
12
• •
s.
4
b eg
30-00*
30-21
65-5
62
13
3 P.M.
w.
2
be
29-96
65
14
Noon.
s.
4
be
29-97
62
15
..
S.S.E.
4
beg
29-97
61
16
..
••
4
beg
29-96
64-5
17
..
s.
4
b c m ; 29-94
63
18
• •
• •
5
c g ! 29-90
62
19
• •
w.
2
beg 29-85
30-i4t
63-5
63
20
• •
• ■
4
b e 29-8.5
61 -5
21
VBLE.
1
eg 1 29-81
65
22
• •
W.S.W.
1
beg 129-92
63
23
• •
S
4
c m vv ' 29-95
63
24
9 A.M.
S.S.E.
b e g m 1 30-02
30-25
69
25
Noon.
S.
4
b e 30-00
59
26
• •
••
2
b eg
29-93
64
27
b eg
29-85
62
28
• •
s.w.
2
beg 129-85
61
20
••
s.
4
beg
29-92
63
30
••
..
5
beg
29-93
63
31
• •
W.N.W.
- 2
beg
29-89
62
Sept
EMBER.
1
1 Noon.
S.W.
2
b eg
29-87
63
.
* 12th August, changed Sympr.
t 10 a
M.
ABSTIIACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
45
Day.
Septi
2
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
;mber,1835.
Noon.
s. b. w.
4
be
Inches.
29-89
Inches.
63-5
Lat. S. Long.W.
Callao.
1 3
••
s.
4
beg
29-90
63
^ ,
4
9 A. M.
S.S.E.
4
beg
29 '96
30-20
61
5
Noon.
4
beg
29-89
61 -5
6
' •
s.s.w.
4
beg
29-96
63
57
57*
• •
7
• •
S.S.E.
4
eg
30-03
61
57-5
58-5
60-5
a •
8
• •
S.E.
5
e
29-98
64
61-5
60
61 -5
11-51 78-12
9
« •
S.S.E.
4
ogm
29-90
64
62
63-5
63-5
9-58 79-42
10
10 A.M.
S.E.
2
DC
29-90
30-16
645
64
63
64
64-5
8-09 81-19
11
Noon.
S.S.E.
4
b c m
t29-i7
64
6-52 83-19
64-5
64
12
• '
S E.
2
b c m
29-12
67
64-5
64-5
5-05 84-31
13
••
• •
4
bom
29-09
68-5
65-5
66-5
3-i8 85-49
• ■•
3 P.M.
4
b c m
29-03
30-07
70-5
67
66-5
65
H
10 A.M.
• •
4
b e m
29-12
3o-i8t
70-5
67
66-5
66
1-53 88-13
15
• •
S.
2
29-12
30-22
71
66
67-5
68-5
1-07 89-01
i6
67-5
9 A.M.
S.S.E.
2
b c m
30-22
70-5
69-5
Oif Bamngton Isl.
67
1"
S. b.E.
2
c mp d
29-11
30-20
71
68-5
69-5
70 'i^
/ Stephens Bay,
/
/"
70-5
I. Chatham Island.
i8
70-5
S.S.E.
5
c mq
30-09
30-23
72
70
70-5
■ •
70
68-5
'
19
• •
4
egm
30-18
30-26
71-5
68-5
71-5
71-5
70-5
Working round
the Island.
20
"
4
be
30-15
30-24
71-5
70
71
67-5
21
• •
VB LE.
1
beg
30-11
30-21
72
70-5
63
68-5
68-5
Stephens Bay.
22
N.W.
2
be
30-21
73
70
69-5
69
• •
23
10 ..
VBLE.
1
egm
30-07
30-25
74
71
66-5
68-6
• •
* Fron
1 Sept.
7th, Temp
t
1 1
erature of Water taken at 9
Sept. lOth, changed Sympr.
1
A.M., l-30,and6p.M.
• t
Sept. 1
4 th, Barom
eter in cabin taken at 9 a.m.
from this date.
46
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
September, 1835
Inches.
Inches.
67
67-5
66
65-5
Lat. Long.W.
24
10 A.M.
S.E.
4
oc
30-16
30-23
71-5
68
Off Charles Island.
25
9 ••
S.S.E.
4
cog
30-13
30-23
71-5
69
Post-oflBce Bay.
26
S.E.
4
b c q
30-23
72
72
65
• •
3 P.M.
4
bcgq
29 '99'
30-15
73
71-5
64
27
6 A.M.
4
beg
30-15
65
64-5
63-5
Black Beach Road.
28
9 A.M.
S.S.E.
4
beg
30-18
30-27
71 "5
66-5
63-5
66-5
;
29
, ,
30-22
70-5
62
Albemarle Island.
• •
Noon.
S.E.
5
bcgpq
30-07
67
58-5
s.w. extremity.
••
3 P.M.
••
6
b e m q
29 "97
30-10
70-5
70
63-5
62
30
Noon.
W.S.W.
2
ocg
30-10
30-19
70-5
66
63-5
65-5
Elizabeth Bay.
October.
1
9 A.M.
VBLE.
1
b c na
30-13
30-22
70-5
67
63-5
65-5
62
Tagus Cove.
2
1
b e g m
30-13
30-22
71
67
67-5
66
63
• •
3
10 ..
W.
2
bom
30-10
30-21
71-5
67
66
66
67
Banks Bay.
4
• •
S.E.
4
be m q
30-14
30-22
68
69
68-5
68
Off Abingdon Island.
5
••
S.
4
c m (1
30-07
30-23
71-5
67
67-5
68-5
••
6
• >
S.E.
4
oh
30-10
30-21
71
69
67-5
68-5
69
70-5
f Off Towers (or
\ Douwes) Island.
7
• •
S.
4
ocg
30-12
30-20
71
66-5
68-5
66-5
64-5
OffBindloes Island.
8
9 ••
30-22
70
68
66
65-5
67
James Island.
9
••
be
30-07
30-21
72
66
69
67
67
••
*
1
10
S.E.
4
oc
30-14
30-24
70-5
65
68-5
69
• •
11
S.
4
c p
30-12
30-25
72
67
66-5
68-5
Chatham Island.
12
S.S.E.
2
be g m
30-09
30-22
72
69
69
68-5
71
• •
13
■■
S.
4
m p d
30-06
30-20
72
67
70
70
70
• •
14
■■
S.S. .
4
oc q
30-08
30-21
72-5
68
68-5
69
66-5
Hood Island.
15
Noon.
s.
5
c gq m
30-04
30-17
72
69
65-5
64-5
Post-office Bay.
i
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
47
Day. Hour.
October, IS-TS.
16 I 10 A.M.
17
19
20
22 10
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
November.
10 ..
10 A.M.
1
Winds,
Force
Weather.
S.E.
4
c m q
S.
4
be
S.E.
2
bch
VBLE.
4
b c m
S.
2
b c m
••
4
c q p
VBLE.
2
bcgp
S.E.
1
c p q
••
4
c q
• •
4
b c q
E.S.E.
4
be
E. b. N.
4
be
• •
4
be
E.
4
be
4
bch
••
4
be q
E. b. S.
5
b c q h
E.N.E.
4
be
N.E. b. E.
4
b e
E.N.E.
5
be
N.E.
4
b e q
Inches.
30-07
30-10
30-00
30-98
30-98
30-02
30-04
30-07
30-04
30 "09
30-03
29 '99
Barom.
Inches.
30-23
30-22
30-19
30-16
30-16
30-17
30-19
30-22
30-18
30-18
30-19
30-18
I
29-95 30-16
29 '95
29-95
29-99
30-00
29-88
29-89
29-86
29-84
30-19
30-20
30-22
30-23
30-19
30-19
30-17
30-15
Attd.
Temp.
Temp.
Ther.
Air.
Water.
72-5
69
65
65-5
68-5
72-5
67
68
66
66
72
70
69
70-5
68-5
73
69
72
73
73
74-5
72
75
75
74-5
75
71
74-5
74
71-5
74-5
70
70-5
66-5
65
73
66
66
66
66-5
7-^-5
68
67-5
67-5
67-5
72-5
69
67-5
68
68-5
73
70
70
70
70-5
73-5
72
70-5
71
72
73-5
74
73-5
73-5
72-5
75
73
72-5
73
74-5
76
75
73-5
73-5
76-5
73
74-5
77
78
75-5
75-5
77-5
79
76-5
76
76
7B-5
77
76-5
76-5
76-5
78-5
77
77
77
80
79
77-5
Locality.
Lat. Long.W.
Post-office Bay.
( Albemarle Island,
\ East side.
/ Off James Island
\_ Sugar-loaf.
/ Close to Abingdon
\^ Island.
Off Wenman Islet.
0-51 N. 93-03
0-23 N. 96-53
0-305. 99-04
1-47S. 100-19
3-04 s. 102-15
4-54 104-34
6-32 107-00
7-18 109 48
7-49 112-06
8-34 114-34
9-26 117-39
10-14 120-35
11-03 123-27
11-39 125-36
11-56 128-03
12-44 130-42
48
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
NOVE
MBEB, 1833-
Inches.
Inches.
77*5
Lat. S. Long.W.^
6
10 A.M.
N.b.E.
4
b C q
29-86
30*17
80
77
78
77*5
77*5
13*26 132*49
7
Noon.
N.
4
be
29-82
30-17
81
79
77*5
76*5
77
14*05 134*43
8
8 a.m.
N. N. E.
2
og q t 1 r
29*92
30*19
80
74
77*5
77*5
78
14-24 136-51
9
10 ..
••
4
c p
29-80
30-14
80
76
77
77
14*38 138-44
11 ..
6
q r
76*5
10
10 ..
5
c q p
29-84
30-10
78*5
73
77
77
77
15*13 139-54
11
••
N. b. E.
4
b c
■29-85
30*14
79
76
77*5
78
78
15-24 141*26
12
••
Z.N.E.
4
be
29-86
30-20
80-5
78
78-5
78-5
15-23 143*22
13
2 A.M.
4
q rl t
29-82
77
77*5
• •
10 ..
4
b c q
29*92
30*24
81
80
78
15-44 145-12
4 P.M.
E.
4
be
29-83
30*16
81*5
78
77*5
77*5
14
9 A.M.
E. b. N
4
b c m
29 '93
30*23
81
77
77*5
77
16-46 147*47
15
10 ..
••
5
b c m
29*92
30*25
81
78
76-5
77*5
Matavai Bay.
i6*
17
9 ••
E.
4
b c q
29 '89
30*27
80-5
79 .
18
• •
VEI.E.
2
b eg
29*92
30-22
80-5
75
..
>9
10 ..
S.E.
2
be
29-82
30-19
81
81
78
79
Papawa Cove.
20
N.E.
2
b c m
29*80
30*13
80
78
• ■
78*5
21
VBLE.
1
c g
29*78
.30*15
80-5
76
76*5
Matavai Bay.
22
• •
1
c rn t
29-76
30*12
78-5
79
77*5
23
••
■ •
1
oe
29-78
30*13
79
80
• ■
24
••
E. b. N.
4
b c p
29*76
30*14
79
77
..
25
* •
S.E.
4
b e q
29*76
30*11
79
78
78-5
• •
26
S.W.
1
be
2970
78
78
77*5
77
Port Papiete.
27
• a
S.S.E.
4
b e m
29*71
30-07
81
77
78*5
77*5
77*5
17-14 150-31
23
S.
1
bv
29*69
30-09
80
77
79
78
77*5
17*17 152-15
29
E. b. N.
4
be
29*67
30-07
80-5
80
78-5
78-5
77*5
17-25 153*24
30
• •
N.E.
2
be
29-70
30*05
81-5
80
79*5
78*5
17-54 155-00
» CaUe
d this day Tuesda
y 17th N
ov.
i
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURKAL.
49
1
Day.' Hour.
1
Winds.
Force
Weather.
i
Symp r
Batom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
DbCembbr, 1835.
Inches.
Inches.
77-5
Lat. S.
Long.W.
1
10 A.M.
S.E.
2
b c
29-64
30-05
8i-5
79
79
78-5
78
18-16
156-56
2
" •
• •
1
b c V
30-04*
30-10
81-5
77
80
79-5
77-5
18-35
158-13
3
••
•■
4
be
30-22
30-19
82
81
78-5
78
18-57
159-44
4
• •
E.b. N.
4
beg
30-28
30-18
81
78
77-5
77
20-00
162-29
5
• •
K.E.
4
b c
30-19
30-16
81
77
78-5
78-5
78
21-00
164-55
6
• *
N.E. b. E.
4
b c
30-20
30-19
82
79
77-5
75-5
75-5
22-02
167-00
7
• •
E.
4
be
30-26
30-20
81-5
78-5
75-5
74-5
73
22-58
169-39
8
• •
• •
5
oep
30-30
30-18
80
74
73-5
73
71-5
23-56
172-00
9
• "
E. b. N.
4
ocp
30-28
30-13
77-5
71
69-5
69-5
72
24-51
174-27
10
• •
E.S.E.
6
be
30-31
30-13
76-5
73
70-5
69
68
26-00
177-50
11
• •
E. b. S.
4
be
30 "36
30-16
73
68-5
68-5
68
67
28-08
179-52
12
• •
E.S.E.
1
be
30-32
30-15
72-5
67
71-5
69-5
68
29-44
178-44'
13
• •
S.S.E.
5
be
30-43
30-13
70-5
64
68-5
69
65-5
30-13
177-06
14
• *
S.E.
2
b eq
30-55
30-29
69-5
66
66-5
66-5
66
31-46
175-42
15
• •
E.S.E.
2
be q
30-60
30-33
69-5
65
66-5
66-5
66
32-51
174-11
i6
• •
S.
4
be
30-46
30-19
70
64
66
65-5
33-i8
175-01
17
..
S.W.
7
b c q
30-27
29-92
67
61
64-5
34-20
175-36
• •
4 P.M.
••
6
be q
30-12
29-79
69
61-5
64
63-5
63
18
10 A.M.
s. b. E.
7
be q
30-37
29-94
67
57
63
63-5
34-26
174-57
»9
2 ..
••
8
be q
30-36
5B
62-5
• ■
10 ..
4
b e q
30-44
30-07
65-5
60
62-5
63
34-28
174-33
* 1
St Decembe
•, P.M., set Sympr.
three ten
ths highe
r.
50
ABSTRACT OF ^[ETROROLnGICAL JOURNAL,
Day.
Dece
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Tlier.
Temp.
Air.
1
WS. LOCALITV.
UBER,1835.
Inches.
Inches.
60-5
Lat. S.
Long.E.
20
Noon.
VBLE.
5
bcq
30-46
30-16
67
62
62-5
61-5
62
3517
174-17
21
10 a.m.
b c m
30*60
30-30
68
66
63-5
63
Bay of Islands.
New Zealand.
61-5
■
22
Noon
s.
1
be m
30-61
30-35
68
69
65-5
63-5
,
• •
23
• •
N. N. E.
4
b cm
30-53
68
63-5
66-5
• •
24
10 A.M.
N.
2
b c
30-50
30-27
70
67
• •
25
VBLE.
1
o c r
30-53
30-27
70-5
66
• •
26
Noon.
E.S. E.
2
bcin
30-63
65
, ,
27
10 A.M.
S.E.
4
b c
30-70
30-41
68
64
, ,
2B
4
b c
30-69
30-45
68
64
• •
29
Noon.
E.S.E.
4
bcq
30-60
65
, ,
30
10 a.m.
E.
4
b c
30-41
30-19
69
65
66
• •
4 P.M.
E.N.E.
5
be
30-32
30-06
695
62
65-5
63-5
Midt.
K.E.
8
oqgr
30-10
63
31
4 a.m.
10
ocqr
29-98
65
63
• •
lO . ,
• •
5
o c p
30-01
29-74
70-5
65
635
34-15
17304
••
4 P.M.
• •
I
c p
30-00
29-75
72
65
63
January, 1836.
64
1
10 A.M.
N.
4
be
30-20
29-95
70-5
65
58-5
65
65-5
Off Three Kings.
2
4 p.\'.
VEI.E.
4
be
30-04
29-85
71-5
67
64-5
64
62-5
34*21
170-02
3
10 a.m.
W".
4
be
30-10
29-85
70-5
64
63-5
64
63
35-05
168-29
4
s.
5
b c q p
30-20
29-90
69
64
64-5
64-5
655
34-51
166-32
5
• •
N.E.
I
e
30-37
30-12
70
64
67-5
67
66-5
34-21
16505
6
■■
E.
1
b c
30 -iS
30-13
71
68
68
67-5
67
66-5
34-18
164-28
7
N.
2
be
30-36
30-16
72-5
67
34-27
162-57
69-5
70
8
••
N.W.
5
bcq
30-20
30-06
73 •£
72
67-5
35-10
160-21
68-5 ;
68-5
9
Noon
S.
4
c r
30-16
29-95
73
64
67 34-56
67-5
158-51
lO
2 A.M.
• •
8
bcq
30-22
63
68-5 ,
••
Noon.
••
6
b c qg
30-30
30-02
71
68
73 33-46
156-13
' *
4 P.M.
s. b. £.
7
bcq
30-28
30-02
69-5
67
71-5
67-5
11
10 A.M.
• •
4
bcq
30-36
30-13
68
64
68 34-14
153-23
68
ABSTKACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
^1
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Syinpr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. S. Long.W.
Janu
ARY, 1836.
68-5
12
Noon.
£.
2
be
29-99
71-5
70-5
70-5
Sydney Cove.
»3
9 A.M.
S.
1
eg tip
30-19
30-04
71-5
63
14
, ,
s.s.w.
2
cgP
30-20
30-03
72
64
15
N.
2
beg
29-87
29-79
73-5
70
Itf
, ,
s.
2
be
29-95
29-81
69
66
17
w.s. w.
4
be
30-01
29-84
68-5
65
..
18
VULE.
1
eg
30-21
30-08
71-5
69
• ■
19
a •
N.E.
1
eg
30-25
30-12
72
69
20
• >
, ,
1
be
29-86
29-84
74
72
21
VBLE.
1
beg
29-83
29-80
75
72-5
22
. .
E.N.E,
2
be
30-15
30-06
76
72
a a
•23
• .
N.E.
5
beg
30-37
30-22
73-5
72
24
N.W.
2
be
29 '97
29-96
74
72
.a
•25
. •
S.E.
4
eg p d
30-40
30-16
72
63
26
6 A.M.
S.S.W.
1
b c
30-56
58-5
27
9 a.m.
N.N.W.
1
beg
30-69
130-43
71-6
64
a •
28
VV. N. W.
1
bcgp
30-63
30-41
71-5
63
•a
'•29
••
N.E. by E.
2
be
30-37
30-25
72-5
67
71
70-5
••
30
Noon.
N.E.
4
b c
30-21
30-16
74
70
Port Jackson.
69-5
68
31
10 A.M.
N.
4
m
30-24
30-18
73-5
70
68
67-5
36-32 151 17
Febr
UARV.
1
10 A.M.
N.
6
c u p
29-78
29-73
73
67
62-5
Noon.
9
29-70
29-58
74-5
67
62
39-19 150-22
2 P.M.
N. b. E.
10
e q m
. .
4 ..
N. b. W.
5
c q m
29-75
29-61
74
65
59-5
2 A.M.
W.N.W.
8
be q
29-89
57
56-5
58
* *
10 ..
• •
5
b e V
29-92
29-66
63
56
57-5
57
57 '5
42-01 149-21
3
••
VBLE.
4
b c q
30-22
29'94
64
56
58
42-48 14956
4
W.N.W.
4
b e q
♦29-64
29*55
65
56
56-5
..
4 p. M.
W.
5
b e q p
29-62
29'54
64-5
56
56-5
Van Diemen's Land.
• •
Midt.
W.N.W.
6
b e q 1
29-72
50
57
56-5
5
10 A.M.
W.
5
b e q p
29-76
29-65
63
51
57*5
57
Storm Bay.
6
VBLEa
2
b c q
29-82
29 '74
62
61
Hobart Town.
7
9 A.M.
S.W.
4
beg
30-25
30-14
62-5
53
a.
8
VBLE.
1
eg
30-52
30-41
62-5
56
aa
9
I
be
30-55
30-47
64
60
.'.
Noon.
S. E.
5
be
30-52
30-46
64
63
■ •
10
9 A.M.
N.E.
2
be
30-49
30-42
63
58
• •
11
a .
N.N.W,
4
be
30-14
30-19
65-5
67
• ■
12
S.E.
4
b e g m
30-09
30-08
68
63
• ■
13
.a
E.
1
beg
29-97
30-03
66-5
64
>4
Noon.
N.N.W.
6
bcq
29-55
29-77
69
74
• ,
4 P.M.
N.W. b. N.
7
be q
29 "47
29-71
69-5
76
..
••
9 ••
S.E.
7
be q 1 1 29-67
69
••
* Feb. 3, P.M., Hympr. set tv
vo tenths
lower.
52
ABSTRACT OK METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality
Feer
UARY, 1836.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. S.
Long.W.
15
9 A.M.
N.W. b N.
2
beg
2978
29-76
68
55-5
Hobart Town. 1
16
• •
N.W.
5
be
30 'CO
30-01
66
61
57-5
59-5
59
• •
17
• •
2
CgP
30-11
30-08
67-5
59-5
59-5
58-5
57-5
• •
18
10 A.M.
N.
4
be
30-46
30-28
65
58
57-5
56 -.5
43-58
147-58
'9
, ,
N. E. b N.
2
od
29-86
29-89
66
59
56
44-07
145-14
4 P.M.
N.
4
c p
29-86
29-85
67
56-5
54-5
••
6 ..
S.
7
00 m p q
29-95
55
56
55
20
10 A.M.
VBLE.
4
e q
30-12
30-00
62-5
54
43-03
143-35
55
53-5
21
••
VBLE.
2
be
30 '32
30-16
62
51
54
54
42-55
142-03
22
••
E.
4
be
30-37
30-26
62
54
54-5
54-5
42-
b c q p
30-02
30-26
71-5
65
70
70
14-11
7-53
16
70-5
• •
S.
1
be
29-90
30-20
72-5
68
71*
71
72
13-27
8-53
»7
• •
• •
2
be
29-97
30-28
73
72
72-5
12-17
1015
72-3
* 3d and IGth, Temperature of water take
n at nigh
t.
58
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL*
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
A ltd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
July, 1835.
Inches.
Inches
73
Lat. S. Long.W.
18
10 a.m.
S.E.
4
be
30*00
30-31
74
70
74
74
75
10-27 12-04
19
• •
••
5
b c q p
29 '94
30-29
76
73
75-3
75
8-11
20
Noon.
, ,
6
b cq p
29-89
30-30
76-5
76
Ascension.
21
9 A.M.
4
b cgqp
29 '93
30-29
75-5
72
..
22
••
••
4
b c q
29 '92
30-28
76
74
75-3
••
23
Noon.
"
5
b c q
29 '89
30-30
77
75
75
75-5
75-5
• •
24
10 A.M.
S.S.E.
4
b c q
29 '98
30-33
76-5
73
75 '5
75
74 '5
9 -08 16-52
•25
■■
S.E.
4
be q
"ig'Q^
30-31
76-5
73
75
74 '5
74
10-28 19-35
26
«
••
5
b c q
29-96
30-30
77
74
74-5
75
74
11-17 22-43
27
• '
• •
5
b c q
29-96
30-31
77
72
74-5
74-5
11-47 26-13
28
9 ..
VBLE.
4
be
30-32
77
75
75-5
12-05 29-05
29
10 ..
E.
2
b c m
29-89
30-27
77*5
73
75-5
■76
12-19 31-33
30
••
• •
4
be
29-85
30-24
77-5
74
76-5
76-5
12-44 34-14
31
• •
• •
4
b c
29-87
30-29
78
76
76
12-51 36-31
AUGCST.
1
4
be
29-90
30-32
78-5
75
74-5
2
9 ••
S.S.E.
4
be
29-90
30-32
78-5
75
Eahia.
3
• •
S.W.
4
be
29-95
30-34
77-5
73
4
30-32
77-5
• •
5
Noon.
s.s.w.
2
be
29-90
30-32
77-5
75
74
• •
6
S.W. b. w.
4
b c
29-88
30-30
77
73
75*5
75
74
• •
7
1 A. M.
VBLE.
4
b c q
29-94
30-31
77
74
75-5
75-5
13-02 38-15
8
• •
••
2
og
29-92
30-31
77
74
75-5
12-55 37-47
9
4
be
29-90
30-32
78
76
75-5
76
12-53 37-23
10
S.E>
5
b cq
29-90
30-31
77-5
74
76-5
76-5
76
11-30 36-17
11
VBLE.
4
be q
29-94
30-31
78
74
76
75-5
75
9-45 35-20
12
• •
S.E.
4
ocmgqp
29-90
30-26
77-5
73
76
75-5
7-58
»3
Noon.
••
6
beq
30-11*
30-30
78-5
75-5
r Pernambuco,
\ Inner Harbour,
,
» Set Syi
npr. 0-26 higher, 1
2th Augu
St, P.M.
1
ABSTRACT OF
METEOROLOGK^AL JOURNAL.
59
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
Adoust, 1836.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat. Long.W,
H
9 A.M.
S.E.
4
be
30-14
30"29
78
75
75-5
76-5
76-5
76
f Pernambuco,
L in the Roads.
15
• •
• ■
4
be
30-12
30-28
78
76
76-5
77
75-5
• ■
16
10 ..
E.S.E.
5
bcgpr
30-10
30-24
78-5
74
76-5
76-5
* •
J7
••
S.E.
4
beg
30-22
78-5
76
76
76-5
76-5
••
18
• •
E.
5
b c q
30-06
30-25
79-5
77
76-5
77
76-5
6-53S. 34-30
*9
• •
S.E.
5
bcq
30-10
30-26
80
76
76-5
76
76-5
4-22S. 33-30
20
4
b c q
30-11
30-30
80
78
76
76-5
75-5
1-58 s. 31-57
21
4
be
30 "09
30-24
80
75
76
76-5
77-5
0-15 N. 30-41
22
4
be
30-07
30-25
79
76
77-5
77
78
2-08 29-35
23
"
4
bcq
30-06
30-26
80
76
78-5
73-5
79
4-09 28-40
24
• •
s. b. w.
2
be
30-04
30-25
80-5
79
79-5
79
79
6-09 26-48
25
■*
S.W.
2
be
30-00
30-25
81
79
79
78-5
78-5
8*07 25-25
26
"
VBLE.
2
be
'30-00
30-20
82
77
79
79-5
79
9-57 24-18
27
• •
• '
2
b e m
29-86
30-14
82
80
81
80
10-40 23-42
28
2 A.M.
S.W.
10
ogqr
29-72
76
• •
10 ..
s.
2
e
29-96
30-16
82
78
78-5
79-5
12-27 23-27
29
* *
VBLE.
1
bom
29-98
30-23
82
78
81
79-5
78-5
13-41 23-22
30
• •
N.b.E.
2
b c m
30-00
30-24
82-5
78
79-3
79 -2
14-20 23-05
31
9 ..
N.E.
4
bcq
30-23
80-5
77
Torto Praya.
iBPTEMBEB.
78
1
• •
N.N.E.
4
be
30-01
30-26
81
77
78-5
78
• •
i 3
• •
N.E.
4
be
30-04
30-28
81
78
. .
3
..
5
bcq
29-97
30-26
80-5
79
..
1 4
• •
4
bcq
29 '94
30-22
81
79
5
10 ..
••
5
be
30-02
30-23
82
77
78-5
14-24 25-21
60
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
Hour,
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom .
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
LOCAIITY.
Septembeb,1836.
Inches.
Inches.
78
78
Lat.N.
Long.W. ,
6
10 A.M.
N.E.
•4
b C m q
30 •22*
30-26
81
78
16-01
27-44
77-5
1
77
7
• •
• '
5
b c m
30*26
30-28
80
78
76-5
76-5
76
18-12
29-58
1
1
8
* *
E.N.E.
5
be
30-35
30-32
78-5
74
76-5
76
75-5
20-46
3154 j
9
• *
VBLE.
5
bcqp
30 "39
30-32
77-5
73
76
75-5
75
23-07
32-25
10
• «
E.N.E.
4
be
30-39
30-36
77
76
75-2
74-5
74
25-41
34-34
11
* '
E. b. N.
2
be
30-39
30-38
76-5
73
74-5
74-5
74-5
27-52
35-47
12
■'
W.N.W.
2
be
30-32
30-31
77
73
75-5
75
73-5
28-42
35-17
13
• •
N.E.
2
be
30-34
30-27
77
72-5
75-5
75
74-5
29-59
36-23
M
, ,
S.E.
2
b c
30-32
30-29
77-5
76
30-37
36-23
73-5
15
• •
s.w.
5
bem
30-25
30-26
78-5
74
74
74
73*5
32-41
3430
i6
••
s.s.w.
5
b c m
30-26
30-22
78-5
74
72-5
71-5
35-15
32-22
17
6 a.m.
s.
8
om qg
30-16
*7 1
••
10 ..
• •
6
b c q m
30-24
30-18
78
73
69-5
70
69-5
36-49
29-31
i8
9 .•
30-26
77
73
70-5
69-2
38-03
27-39
19
10 ..
N.N.W.
2
be
30-50
30-36
75
66
68-5
20
• •
S.W.
1
b cf
30-42
30-35
73"5
71
Angra
Roads.
21
VBLE.
1
e n
30-40
30-35
74-5
72
• •
22
S.W.
4
OCT
30-42
30 -SI
75-5
72
68
23
• •
VBLE.
1
be
30 '60
30-48
75
70
70
69-5
37-58
24
••
S.S.E.
4
b e
30-62
30-50
73
69
70-5
70
OflF St.
Michaels.
25
• •
S.
2
ocg
30-46
30-34
74
70
69
68
39-20
24-30
26
• •
N.W.
2
be
30-37
30-24
72
66
67-5
66
65-5
41-05
22-07
27
• •
• •
4
be
30-52
30-32
68-5
63
65
64-5
42-28
19-32
28
• •
W.
4
c g d
30-36
30-16
69
67
64t
64-5
44-33
16-29
29
• •
• •
' 10
cgqp
29-88
29-54
59
61
* 5th Sept, Noon, set Sympr. 0-17 I
lighcr.
t 27th Sept
, P.M.,
broke Wat
3: Therm
ometer ;
used fror
n this tim
e Ivory (
No. 25.)
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
61
Day.
Hour.
Winds.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
LOCAHTV.
Septk
MBER,1836.
Inches.
Inches.
Lat.N. Long.W.
29
10 A.M.
N.W.
9
b c q m
30-11
29-73
65-5
59
61-5
45-43 13-43
• •
4 P.M.
N.
7
be q
30-37
30-03
67-5
60
62
30
10 a.m.
N.W.
2
be q
30-46
30-17
65-5
58
60-5
61
60-5
» •
4 p.m.
VBLE.
2
e q
30-38
30-06
66
59
46-31 11-41
• •
Midt.
S.W.
8
gqp
30 "00
60
October.
*
1
10 A.M.
N.W.
9
be
29-58
29-52
67
61
59-5
■ •
2 P.M.
. ,
10
be q p
29-46
58-5
48-15 8-58
■ •
4 .-
• •
9
b e q p
29-51
29-46
67-5
56
58-5
3
10 A.M.
W.
5
b c q p
29-80
29-72
63
51
55
56-5
• •
9 p.m.
s.
5
b e q p
29-30
29-56
60
52
Falmouth.
* •
Midt.
11
ougq
29-16
29-08
49
3
10 a.m.
N.N.W.
4
bcq
29-64
29-691
60-5
50
56-5
• •
• •
6 p.m.
S.W.
4
b c q p
29-72
29-67
60-5
50
4
9 a.m.
—
b
29-67
60
52
• •
Noon.
S.W.
2
b
29-76
29-71
59-5
54
• •
, ,
4 P.M.
N.W.
2
b
29-80
29-74
59-5
53
56-5
5
9 A.M.
K.
30-02
55
»•
4 p.m.
S.
2
be
30-18
30-06
59
56
Plymouth.
6
9 a.m.
N.N.W.
2
b c m
29-97
30-04
59
53
••
4 P.M.
w.s. w.
1
beg
29-86
•29-86
59
55
• •
7
9 a.m.
S.W.
5
bcq
29-58
29-59
59-5
55
3 P.M.
S.S.E.
6
bcq
29-44
29-46
59-5
58
• •
"s
9 A.M.
S.W.
2
be
29-59
29-55
60
54
• •
• •
3 P.M.
s.s.w.
29-59
29-55
59-5
57
9
9 A.M.
w.
5
be q
29-56
29-53
58
54
• •
10
9 ..
.,
6
b c q p
29-47
29-44
59
55
• •
• •
3 P.M.
w.s.w.
6
b c q p
29-50
29-50
59
56
56-5
11
4 A.M.
S.W.
11
bcq
29-34
51
9 A.M.
w.
2
begq
29-50
29-48
58-5
53
• •
• •
3 P.M.
S.W.
4
b c p
29-54
29-52
58-5
55
12
9 A.M.
w.s.w.
4
begq
29-76
29-73
58-5
54
• ■
..
4 P.M.
S.S.E.
9
eg qr
29-42
29-42
59
53
• ■
8 ..
w.s.w.
11
b c q p
29-08
29-13
59
55
..
10 ..
10
be q p
29-11
29-12
58-5
55
13
10 A.M.
w.
5
b e q p
29-49
29-39
58
53
• ■
3 P.M.
S.W.
4
bcq
29-51
29-49
57-5
56
Midt.
9
b c q p
H
9 A.M.
S.W.
4
be
30-03
29-96
57
54
.-
, ,
3 P.M.
• .
4
be
30-08
30-03
68
57
..
15
9 a.m.
s.s.w.
2
b c
30-00
29-96
57
55
• •
16
9 ••
S.E.
2
b c m
30-35
30-25
59
54
• •
• •
3 P.M.
• ,
5
bcq
30-26
30-24
59
58
17
9 A.M.
E.S.E.
4
bcq
30-27
30-23
60
60
• •
. ,
3 P.M.
S.E.
5
be q
30-19
30-23
61
61
18
9 A.M.
• •
2
b c m
30-30
30-25
61
60
56-5
• •
Noon.
S.S.E.
VBLE.
2
b c m
30-29
30-24
61
57
• •
4 P.M.
W.S.W.
1
b e m
30-28
30-26
61-5
60
57-2
19
10 A.M.
N.N.W,
4
b c m
30-56
30-47
61
56
57-2
• •
4 P.M.
N.
2
b m
30-54
30-50
62
56
58-3
57-5
50-17
20
10 A.M.
S.E.
2
b cm
30-70
30-60
61-5
57
21
10 ..
4
be m
30-63
30-46
60-5
53
57
* 1st Oct., A.M., set Sympr. 0-27 lo
wer.
t 3d Oct., 12-30 A.M., Barometer lowe'
it 29-08.
63
ABSTRACT OF METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL.
Day.
OCTO]
Hour.
WinJs.
Force
Weather.
Sympr.
Barom.
Attd.
Ther.
Temp.
Air.
Temp.
Water.
Locality.
jEB, 1836.
21
3 r.M.
S.E.
5
b c m
30-56
30-44
59-5
53
57-5
22
10 A.M.
2
b c m q
30-68
30-53
59-5
57-5
, ,
3 P.M.
E
4
be
30-68
30-54
59-5
53
56-5
23
9 A.M.
N.
<2
b m
30-55
59
4 P.M.
VBLE.
2
b c m
30 '66
30-52
58
51
57-5
24
10 A.M.
b c m
30-62
30-53
58
54
Downs.
4 P.M.
N.W.
2
bf
30-63
30-50
59
55
56-5
57
25
10 A.M.
..
4
bf
30-56
30-44
59-5
52
57
4 P.M.
2
f m
30-50
30-37
59
52
55-5
54-5
26
10 A.M.
N.W.b. N.
2
b m
30-
30-35
60
• •
4 P.M.
N.W.
1
ogm
30-36
30-28
60
51
54-5
54-5
27
10 A.M.
W.
8
c q
30 '00
29-88
59
49
53-5
Thanaes.
..
6 P.M.
N.W.
6
b c q
30-25
30-04
57
41
53-5
52-5
28
10 A.M.
4
b c q
30-26
30-11
56
40
52-5
51-5
8 P.M.
30-02
55
Greenwich.
29
9 A.M.
N. b. E.
2
og
29-87
29-69
53
35
• •
Noon.
N.N.E.
4
ogs
30-00
35
• •
• •
3 P.M.
N. b. E.
4
beg
30-10
29-91
53
35
30
9 A.M.
30-20
51-5
Noon.
N.
1
b m
30-44
36
• ■
• .
3 P.M.
30-22
51-5
31
8 A.M.
30-28
52
32
Noon.
1
b m
30-52
37
• •
3 P.M.
• •
1
bm
30-51
30-28
51-5
39
NOVE
MEER.
1
9 A.M.
w.s.w.
1
be g m
30-50
30-28
49-5
• •
Noon.
s.w.
2
cgm
30-48
38
• •
3 P.M.
• •
2
cgm
30-49
30-32
50
40
2
9 A.M.
w.s.w.
1
b c g m
30 -,30
30-13
52
49
Noon.
w. b. s.
2
cgm
30-23
52
a •
3
9 A.M.
w.s.w.
1
b c g m
30-08
30-05
54
47
• •
Noon.
2
b c g m
30-01
51
4
9 A.M.
w.
4
egqm
29-87
29-78
54
45
• .
Noon.
..
4
cgqm
29-83
46
• •
'•
3 P.M.
• •
4
e m p d
29-78
29-68
53-5
44
5
9 A.M.
VBLE.
2
be gq
29-43
29-36
53-5
45
• •
Noon.
W.N.W.
4
b eg qp
29-53
44
• •
• •
3 P.M.
5
b cq
29-63
29-47
53
45
6
9 A.M.
W.S.W.
2
be
29-82
29-66
52-5
37
• •
• •
3 P.M.
W.N.W.
4
b eq
29-87
29-66
51-5
Woolwich,
7
9 A.M.
..
2
b enn
29-99
29-82
52
35
• •
3 P.M.
N.W.
2
b e m
30-08
29-91
50-5
42
8
8 P.M.
S.W.
1
b e m
30-46
30-28
48
38
• •
9
9 A.M.
• a
2
b eg
30-38
30-18
48
45
• •
"While the Beagle was at Plymouth, in 1831, an excellent marine barometer, made by Jones,
(with an iron cistern) was sent by water from the maker's hands. This instrument was suspended
in my cabin, with the cistern at the level of the sea (excepting during the first eight months, when
it was placed six feet higher), and by it all the barometrical observations recorded in this table were
taken or corrected.
In 1836, while conveying the same barometer by land fiom Woolwich to London, it was seriously
injured, and therefore, to give value to its indications while on board the Beagle, I annex some cor-
responding observations, made at the Royal Observatory, and at Somerset House.
63
EXTRACT
THE REGISTERS OF THE STANDARD BAROMETERS OF THE
ROYAL SOCIETY, AT SOMERSET HOUSE; AND OF THE ROYAL
OBSERVATORY, AT GREENWICH.*
Day.
Hour.
a.S. Bar.
Attd.
Then
R.O. Bar.
Day.
Hour.
R.S. Bar.
Attd.
I'her.
R.O. Bar.
November, 1831
Dece
MBER, 1831'
5
9 A.M.
29-520
47-6
29-40
1
9 a.m.
30-170
46-8
30-06
6
29-607
47-3
29-44
2
30-027
46-7
29-92
8
29-666
49 '3
29-58
3
30-148
47-7
30-05
10
30-421
43.4
30-30
5
29-837
48-8
29-73
11
30-245
47-4
30-13
6
29-432
48-8
29-32
12
30-326
51-0
30-22
7
28-924
50-7
28-83
13
29 '994
51-8
8
29-139
51-3
29-05
14
30'053
45-3
29-93
9
• «
29-190
55-3
29-08
15
29-478
44-2
29-38
9
3 P.M.
29-206
56-3
29-13
i6
29-312
41-4
29-21
10
9 A.M.
29-418
53-8
29-31
17
29 '585
39-7
29-47
12
• •
29-307
53-8
29-21
i8
29-691
38-5
29-58
14
29-573
51-5
29-48
19
29'4'36
40-7
29-32
18
. .
29-373
49-5
22
29-850
48-8
29-75
19
29-567
46-7
29-46
23
29-966
52-7
29-87
19
3 P.M.
29-643
47-6
29-54
24
30-032
53-4
29-92
27
3 P.M.
30-418
40-0
30-32
25
29-960
54-3
29-85
28
9 A.M.
30-428
40-4
30-32
26
29*944
54-e
29 83
28
3 P.M.
30-392
42-7
30-27
27
30-321
46-7
30-20
OCTOI
3EB, 1836.
OCTO
BEB, 1836.
7
9 a.m.
29'5ii
54-8
29-40
7
3 P.M.
29-423
56-7
29-31
8
29-386
56-0
29-29
8
29-390
58-6
29-26'
10
29-219
54-4
29-11
10
..
29-322
58-9
29-20
11
29-247
57-9
29-14
11
29-388
60-0
29-28
13
29-140
57*5
29-02
13
..
29-333
59-5
29-16
14
29-782
56-4
29-68
14
..
29*717
59-2
29-80
16
30-229
54-7
16
. .
30-212
57-8
17
30-210
55-7
30-10
17
• •
30-176
57*7
30-08
18
30-174
56.9
30-06
18
. •
30-150
60-3
30-02
19
30-241
58-5
30-15
19
30-322
60-3
21
30 '332
52-2
30-22
21
• •
30-305
55 '5
30-20
22
30-398
51-2
30-29
22
• •
.30-382
53-9
30-28
23
30-408
49-3
23
..
30-378
52-2
24
30-394
51-5
30-28
24
.•
30-360
53-6
30-25
25
30-371
52-6
30-15
25
■ •
30-225
53-2
30-12
26
30-196
52-6
30-07
26
30-113
54-4
30-01
29
29-473
42-3
29-35
29
..
29-703
41-6
29-55
30
30-019
39 "0
30
..
30-035
41 -0
31
30-089
37-3
29-97
31
30-009
40-0
29-97
NOVEMBEB
NOVE
MBER.
1
9^
l.M.
30-099
37-6
29-97
1
3 P.M.
30-008
40-4
29-90
4
.
29-570
45-4
29-46
4
..
29-451
47-0
29-34
5
.
29-140
45-6
29-03
5
29-287
'47 -2
29-14
6
.
29-459
42-1
6
..
29-439
44-6
7
••
29-631
40-0
29-52
7
••
29-722
42-8
29-60
* Royal Society Barometer about 95
feet, and Ob
servato
ry Baromete
r about 156
feet abo
ve the mean
level c
f the sea. The heights of the m«
■reury are giv
en as re
ad off, with
3Ut any corr
action or
reduction.
64
FIGURES USED TO
Calm.
1 Light Air
2 Light Breeze
3 Gentle Breeze
4 Moderate Breeze .
5 Fresh Breeze ,
DENOTE THE FORCE OF THE WIND.
Or just sufficient to give steerage way.
Or that in which a man-
of war, with all sail set,
and clean full, would go
in smooth water from
6 Strong Breeze . .
7 Moderate Gale
8 Fresh Gale
9 Strong Gale .
10 Whole Gale
Or that to which a well-
conditioned man-of-
war could just carry-
in chase, full and by
1 to 2 knots.
3 to 4 knots.
5 to 6 knots.
Royals, &c.
Single-reefed topsails and
top-gall, sails.
Double-reefed topsails,
jib, &c.
Treble-reefed topsails,
&c.
Close-reefed topsails and
courses.
11 Storm
12 Hurricane
.Or that with which she could scarcely bear close-reefed
main-topsail and reefed fore-sail.
.Or that which would reduce her to storm stay-sails.
. Or that which no canvass could withstand.
LETTERS DENOTING THE STATE OF THE WEATHER.
b Blue sky; (whether clear, or hazy atmosphere).
c Clouds ; (detached passing clouds).
d Drizzling rain.
f Foggy f Thick fog.
g Gloomy (dark weather).
h Hail.
1 Lightning.
m Misty (hazy atmosphere).
o Overcast (or the whole sky covered with thick clouds).
p Passing (temporary showers),
q Squally.
r Rain (continued rain),
s Snow.
t Thunder.
u Ugly (threatening appearances).
V Visible (clear atmosphere).
w Wet dew.
. Under any letter, indicates an extraordinary degree.
By the combination of these letters, all theordinary phenomena of the weather
may be expressed with facility and brevity.
Examples :—Bcm, Blue sky, with passing clouds, and a hazy atmosphere.
Gv, Gloomy dark weather, but distant objects remarkably visible.
Qpdlt, Very hard squalls, with passing showers of drizzle, and accompanied
by lightning with very heavy thunder.
TABLE
LATITUDE, LONGITUDE, AND VARIATION OF THE COMPASS,
ALSO
TIME OF SYZYGIAL HIGH WATER, RISE OF TIDE,
AND DIRECTION OR SET OF FLOOD TIDE STREAM IN THE OFFING.
ENGLAND.
Devonport — Clarence Baths — at high water"!
mark.inthe meridian of GovernmentHouseJ
Falmouth — Pendennis Castle
AZORES ISLANDS.
Terceira — Mount Brazil — summit
St Michael's— St. Braz Castle
CAPE VERDE ISLANDS.
St. Jago — Port Praya — Quail Island, the "I
west point (called also Gun Point) .(
St. Paul — Penedo, or Penado de San Pedro ~l^
— summit J
BRAZIL.
Fernando de Noronha — Fort Concepgdo ...
Pernambuco — Fort Picao
Bahia — Fort San Pedro
Bahia — intheoffing
Abrolhos — Santa Barbara — e. summit
Rio de Janeiro — Villegagnon Islet — well .
Santa Catharina — Anhatomirim Islet — flag-1
staff J
PLATA.
Buenos Ayres — landing-place (mole)
Montevideo — Rat Island
Gorriti — well at n.e. end
Point Piedras — extremity of gi'assy part
River Sanborombon — entrance of
River Salado — entrance of
San Antonio, Cape — north extremity, above\
high water ... J
PAMPA.
Medano Chato— summit of
Medano Silla— summit of
Medanos Point — south-east summit
Mar Chiquito — bar of
Corrientes Cape — eastern summit
Mogotes Point— south-east summit
Ventana Mount — highest summit
San Andres Point— south-east high cliff ...
Hernieneg Point
Gueguen River
Black Point — cliff summit
Argentino Fort
Nakedness Point — southern summit
Wells— Anchorstock Hill -(Point Johnson)
Lat.
North.
Long.
West.
50 22 00
50 08 33
38 38 35
37 43 58
14 54 02
o 55 30
SOUTH.
3 50 00
8 3 35
12 59 20
13 00 00
17 57 42
22 54 40
27 25 31
34 35 30
34 53 20
34 57 02
35 26 50
35 41 40
35 43 15
36 18 30
36 28 00
36 37 10
36 59 05
37 47 30
38 05 30
10 36
1" 45
17 20
38 22 40
38 36 00
38 39 00
38 43 50
38 49 40
38 56 55
38
38
38
4 10 00
5 02 45
27 13 00
25 40 15
23 30 00
29 22 00
32 25 00
34 5' 30
38 30 45
38 20 00
38 41 30
43 08 45
48 34 45
58 21 53
56 13 15
54 57 35
57 05 11
57 18 45
67 19 15
56 45 51
56 40 15
56 40 55
56 40 43
57 21 45
57 29 15
57 30 35
61 56 18
57 39 05
57 51 45
58 40 00
58 47 30
62 14 41
59 36 55
61 58 30
Van
West.
25 00
24 10
24 19
24 15
16 30
/ 15-I6 V
Unl83i;
9 30
7 00
5 54
4 18
2 00
EAST.
2 00
6 30
11 40
12 40
12 28
12 30
12 30
12 30
13 00
13 30
13 50
14 00
14 00
15 20
15 00
H.W.
h. m.
5 17
5 35
2 30
o 15
Noon.
4 00
4 23
3 30
about
noon
when
at all
regu-
lar.
Noon.
11 00
10 40
10 00
9 55
8 20
5 51
R. &S.
Feet.
20 E.
17 E.
6
7
5 N.W.
w.
N.
s.
s.
. w.
Varble.
Varble.
8 N.E.
8 N.E.
G()
TABLE OF POSITIONS.
PAMPA — conthmed.
Asuncion Point
Hermoso Mount — summit
Ziiraita Island — south extreme of...
Ariadne Island — south extreme of
Labyrinth Head — summit
Colorado Head — one mile north of the en-
trance
Colorado River — mouth ...
Indian Head (Union Bay)
Snake Bank — south-east extreme of ...
Ilubia Point— summit of
Del Carmen Fort
Ilaza Point — summit over extreme
Leading Hill — summit
Negro River — Main Point
EASTERN PATAGONIA.
Nipple Hill— summit of
Direction Hill — summit of
San Antonio Port — Point Villarino
Fort Hill — centre of
False Sisters — eastern summit
Helen Blutf— s.w. cliff
Bermeja Head — eastern summit
Sierra Point — summit of
Pozos Point — summit of cliffy extremity
San Antonio Sierra — summit of
Norte Point — cliffy extreme
Entrance Point — east
San Jose, Port — Point San Quiroga — extrem
Bajos Point
Castro Point — rise over extremity
Valdes Port— entrance
Cantor Point
Pyramid — near Pyramid Road
Ercules Point — eastern cliff
Delgado Point — south-east cliff
Western Port — rocky point in
Lobos Peak
Nuevo Head
Nuevo Gulf— Point Ninfas— East Cliff
Chupat River — middle of entrance
Delfin Head — summit
Lobos Head — summit
Tombo Point — extreme
Atlas Point — summit
Raza Cape — eastern summit
Rock of Salaberria
Santa Elena — Spanish Observatory
San Jose Point — eastern summit
Santa Elena, Port — south-vv^est cove, Beagle'
observatory (not the Spanish)
San Fulgensio Point
Blanca Islet ...
Dos Bahias Cape — summit over extreme
Monte Mayor Mount
Arce Island — summit near centre of ...
South Cape — near Oven
Leones Island — south-eastern summit ...
Lat.
South.
Long.
West.
Var.
East.
H.W.
R.
SiS.
o / //
/ //
/
h. m.
Feet.
33 57 30
60 38 00
857
...
3B 58 50
61 39 45
14 50
5 8
12 w.s.w,
39 11 00
61 54 20
15 10
558
1 2 w. N. w
...
39 15 .50
62 00 20
15 20
5 20
12
39 26 30
62 02 36
15 30
5 10
12
39 50 30
62 05 30
15 40
340
11
N.
39 51 40
62 04 20
15 40
340
11
N.
...
39 57 30
62 07 00
>5 50
3 10
12
...
40 27 00
61 54 30
16 30
2 30
12
>'.
40 36 10
62 08 40
16 30
2 15
12
...
40 48 15
62 58 06
17 00
• 15
11
N.W,
...
40 52 10
62 18 15
17 00
Noon.
12
...
40 56 36
62 49 20
...
41 2 00
62 45 10
17 40
11
14
N.E.
...
40 40 00
64 50 15
...
40 48 CO
65 10 10
...
40 49 00
t34 53 55
17 40
10 40
28
N-
41 06 30
(15 10 30
...
41 09 00
63 03 30
...
41 09 00
63 55 30
17 40
10 50
18
E.
...
41 11 00
63 07 30
...
41 35 45
64 54 50
...
41 40 30
64 54 00
17 50
930
24
H.
...
41 41 10
65 12 10
...
42 03 00
6S 47 40
17 50
10
20
N.W.
42 14 05
64 21 45
17 45
10
25
me
42 14 15
64 27 10
...
42 18 00
63 34 10
...
42 25 20
65 04 00
...
42 30 25
63 35 20
'7 50
815
1
(N,
42 30 50
63 36 00
...
42 34 50
64 18 30
17 50
8
14
42 38 30
63 34 10
...
42 46 15
63 36 30
17 50
7 50
12
...
42 47 00
64 59 45
17 50
8
14
42 49 00
63 43 50
...
42 53 00
64 07 30
17 50
7 20
...
42 58 00
64 ip 30
17 50
7 10
13
N.
...
43 20 45
65 02 50
18 06
5
12
N.
...
43 3> 00
65 12 06
...
43 46 40
65 I- 30
18 30
440
13
N.
...
44 07 00
65 14 30
...
44 11 40
65 15 30
18 50
4 10
14
44 23 40
65 15 30
44 25 00
65 07 20
...
44 30 40
65 21 40
19 10
4
>7
N.
"J
44 30 45
65 17 00
44 32 15
65 22 30
19 06
4
18
N.
44 32 30
65 22 00
...
44 54 50
65 32 10
19 00
3 20
12
.•
44 56 3o
65 32 00
19 00
3 20
12
K-
...
44 57 35
66 24 00
...
45 00 40
65 29 15
...
45 03 50
65 41 15
19 00
3
14
N.K.
...
45 04 00
65 35 '5
2 10
12
TABLE OF POSITIONS.
67
EASTERN PATAGONIA — continued.
Melo Port— Sugar-loaf Islet, near
Raza Islet
Medrano Rocks
Malaspina Cove — South Point
Aristazabal Cape — south-east pitch
Matalinares Head
Salamanca Peak
Novales Ledge.
Cordova Head
Tilly Road — Point Marques — eastern cliff
Murphy Head
Bauza Head — summit
Casamayor Clitf
Nava Head
Three Points Cape — north-east pitch ...
Sugar-loaf, near Cape Three Points
Blanco Cape — north-east summit
Rivers Peak
Desire Port — eastern islet
Desire Port — Spanish ruins
Fresh- water islet, at the head of Port Desire |
(where the fresh water reaches) ... J
Penguin Island — mount at south end
Sea Bear Bay, observatory on sandy beach \
at south side J
Shag Rock — centre
Mount Video
Watchman Cape — summit of Round Mount)
Islet j
Bellaco Rock — summit
Look-out Point
Flat Islet— centre
San Julian Port — Cape Curioso — south east |
point ... J
Wood Mount — summit
Shell Mount
Desengano — South Head — north-east extreme
Sholl Point — monument
Franc? de Paulo Cape — extreme cliif ...
Beagle Bluff — summit
Weddell Bluff— summit
FALKLAND ISLANDS.
Adventure Sound — O.S. (Observ? Spot)
Albemarle Rock — Middle
Barren Island — south-east extreme
Beauchesne Island — north extreme
Beauchesne Island — south extreme
Berkeley Sound — entrance
Bird Island — summit
Bougainville Cape — North-east clift"
Brisbane Mount — summit
Bull Road — height near Point Porpoise
Bull Road— O.S
Calm Head — summit
Carcass Island — summit
Carlos San Port — summit northward of
Choiseul Sound — Pyramid Point ...
Carysfort Cape — north-east cliff ... .
Lat.
South,
45 04 10
45 06 10
45 10 00
4.5 10 10
45 12 45
45 24 00
45 34 00
45 43 10
45 46 00
45 57 00
46 31 10
46 41 20
46 52 00
47 04 40
47 06 20
47 17 20
47 12 20
47 29 45
47 44 40
47 45 00
47 49 30
47 55 35
47 57 '5
48 08 30
48 13 40
48 21 30
48 29 20
48 35 30
48 43 00
49 10 45
49
49
49
49
13 45
14 00
14 30
15 20
49 41 >o
49 55 10
49 59 20
52 12 20
52 14 30
52 24 36
52 40 00
52 41 00
51 35 00
52 10 45
51 18 00
51 29 50
62 20 50
52 20 45
52 07 20
51 16 50
51 28 50
52 01 20
51 25 40
Long.
West.
Var.
East.
H.W.
R. &S.
/ //
/
h. ra.
Feet.
65 47 40
19 20
3 40
15 N.E.
65 24 30
65 53 30
66 31 50
19 30
2 50
16 N.
66 31 10
67 02 30
67 19 30
67 17 20
67 21 40
19 40
1 20
20 N.
67 34 20
19 42
1 15
20 N.
67 23 10
19 40
1 00
67 10 30
20 00
1 00
18 N w.
66 56 40
66 32 15
65 51 00
19 20
12 50
65 56 20
65 43 30
19 30
47
18 N.W.
65 58 50
65 49 20
19 42
12 10
18I N.
65 54 15
20 12
18
18 N.
66 22 50
20 20
Noon.
20
65 42 00
65 45 40
20 50
12 45
20 N.
65 53 30
66 25 50
66 21 25
20 00
4
24 N.N.E.
m 12 15
21 00
Noon.
24
66 53 20
21 00
11 30
25
67 01 00
13
N.N.E.
67 37 CO
21 00
N.N.E.
67 44 50
21 10
67 48 00
67 36 10
21 00
10 45
30 N.N.E.
67 42 00
21 00
10 30
30
67 36 00
N.
68 33 00
68 31 40
59 04 30
19 30
60 24 42
59 42 22
59 04 00
59 05 00
57 50 00
19 00
5
6 N.W.
60 55 12
58 28 20
57 55 20
59 19 57
69 20 28
19 50
60 56 22
60 35 30
59 02 00
58 36 00
5 58
5 N-
57 51 00
68
TABLE OK POSITIONS.
FALKLAND ISLANDS — continued.
Lat.
South.
Long.
West.
Var.
East.
H.W.
R. &S.
o
/ //
/ //
/
h. m.
Feet.
Castle Rock — summit
. 52
12 25
60 48 22
Cow Bay
. 51
27 00
57 49 00
5 25
8 N.N.W.
Dangerous Point — east extreme
. 52
01 35
58 20 47
Dolphin Cape — north-west extreme
. 51
14 35
58 58 30
Driftwood Point— Islet off
. 52
16 40
59 01 34
Eagle Point, Nelson Head, near eastern ex-
}-
32 50
57 47 00
tremity
Eddystone Rock— centre
. 51
11 30
59 03 15
Edgar Port, summit at south end of Entrance
! 52
06 15
60 16 12
Ridge
J ^
Edgar Port, summit over South Head
. 52
02 10
60 15 10
Edgar Port— O. S
. 52
03 15
60 16 16
20 00
7 15
5
Egmont Port— O.S
• 51
21 26
60 04 04
19 35
8 20
8 w
Egmont Port — Cay — western centre
. 51
13 05
60 03 10
Elephant Cays— west extreme of western Ca
y 52
09 00
59 52 52
Elephant Jason — summit
. 51
10 20
60 52 02
Fanning Head-'south-west summit
. 51
28 06
S9 08 35
Flat Jason — north-west extreme ..
. 51
06 30
60 55 20
Fox Bay— eastern entrance — summit
■ 52
00 50
60 00 52
Frehel Cape — north cliff
• 51
23 16
58 14 00
George Island — south-west cliff
• 52
24 00
59 48 12
Gibraltar Rock— summit
• 51
"9 45
60 47 02
Grand Jason— summit
• 5'
04 30
61 03 57
Grantham Sound — summit of Islet north-west
of
}-
35 30
59 13 10
4
Harbours— Bay of — O.S
• 52
12 00
59 22 00
5 44
8
Hope Point — near West Point Island— O.S
51
20 51
60 40 14
9 18
Horse Block Island
. 51
56 00
61 08 00
Jason Cay (or East Cay) — north- west extrem
B 51
00 38
61 18 02
Kelp Point— small height on
■ 51
52 20
58 13 52
Keppel Island — north-west cliff
• 51
18 45
60 03 00
Keppel Island — west summit
. 51
'9 15
60 02 20
Lively Island — south-east extreme
• 52
06 15
58 25 02
Long Island — small height near west end ..
• 52
14 40
58 59 42
6
5 w.
Louis Port — settlement, flagstaff at Govern-
ment House
}-
32 00
58 07 16
19 00
Louis Port Creek — west side of the narrowest
part
]-
32 20
58 06 58
Low Kelp Patch — middle
■ 52
32 00
59 39 00
Low Mount
. 51
38 20
57 49 30
Macbiide Head — north cliff
. 51
23 00
57 59 25
Many-branch Harbour — summit over north
point
}..
31 05
59 20 30
Mare Harbour — height over north-east side
51
54 35
58 27 37
Mare Harbour — O.S
• 5>
54 11
58 .so 08
7 15
8 w.
Meredith Cape — southern cliff
. 52
i6 15
60 39 07
Midway Rock
• 5»
25 36
59 10 00
New Island — highest summit
• 51
42 07
61 17 52
New Island— Ship Islet, O.S
. 51
43 10
61 16 59
North Islet— summit of north cliff
. 51
39 15
61 14 36
North Look-out Hill— summit
• 61
29 10
58 02 15
North Fur Island — east extreme
• 51
08 15
60 44 10
North Keppel Island — north extreme
. 51
J3 30
59 55 55
Orford Cape — west summit
• 51
59 45
61 06 22
Passages Island— summit
. 51
34 55
60 46 58
Pebble Island — cliff summit near north-west
end
1-
15 ^8
59 47 20
Pembroke Cape — eastern extreme
• 51
41 30
57 41 45
Pleasant Port- O.S
. 51
48 55
58 u 26
7 19
5
TAliLK OF POSITIONS.
69
FALKLAND ISLANDS — Continued.
Poke Point — east extreme
Porpoise Point— extreme ,
Race Point Cliff— extreme
Rodney 13Iuff — western summit
Salvador San Port— O.S
Saunders Island — north-west summit
Saunders Island — north-east point — extreme
Sea Lion Island — west extreme
Sea Lion Point — summit
Sedge Island — north-west extreme
Shag Rock
Ship, or CoflBn, Harbour — Ship Islet — )
south-west extreme J
Simon Mount — summit
South Fur Islet — summit
South Jason — summit
Speedwell Island Harbour — O.S
Split Cape — extreme cliff
Split Island — west summit
Steeple Jason — steeple summit
Steeple Jason — north-west summit
Stephens Port— east entrance point — summit
Stephens Port — O.S
Swan Island — French Harbour — entrance ...
Tamar Cape — north cliff summit
Tamar Harbour — eastern head — extreme ...
Uranie Rock, off Volunteer Point
Usbome Mount
A'olunteer Point— eastern solid extreme
AVest Point Island — summit over West Bluff
West Cay — north-west extreme
White Rock
White Rock Point — north-east extreme cliff
White Rock Harbour — south head
White Rock Harbour — sharp peak
White Rock Harbour— O. S
Wickham Heights— middle summit of
William Port— O.S
William Mount
Wreck Island — east extreme
SOUTH OF 50° (exclusive of falk-
LANDS.)
Admiralty Sound — bottom — Mount Hope ...
Agnes Islands — summit of Western Isle
Aguirre Bay — Kinnaird Point
Ainsworth Harbour — projecting point west"!
side J
Alikhoolip Cape — south extreme
Anchor Bay — summit over anchorage
Ancon Sin Salida — Central Island, summit of
Andres San — Sound — summit of Middle
Kentish Isle
Andres San — Sound — south-east extreme .
Anna, Point Santa— extremity
Anne St. Island — central summit ,
Anne St. Peak
Anthony, Cape St. — northern extreme cliff,
}
Lat.
South.
Long.
West.
51 36 25
52 21 47
51 25 00
52 03 36
51 27 05
51 17 20
51 18 55
52 26 50
51 21 47
51 10 30
52 14 30
51 43
51 38
5» 15
51 12
52 13
51 49
51 28
51 04
51 02
62 11
52 11
51 52
51 16
51 20
51 31
51 42
51 31
51 23
60 59
51 17
51 24
51 26
51 27
51 26
51 43
61 39
61 42
51 11
10
05
60
40
00
20
05
00
16
50
16
00
60
32
45
30
15
00
47
15
23
26
56
00
60
14
15
00
64 26 30
54 18 00
54 67 06
54 23 05
56 11 50
50 65 00
52 12 46
50 23 15
50 33 00
53 37 50
53 06 30
52 43 00
64 43 30
69 23 26
59 19 22
59 06 20
61
68
60
04 37
20 04
19 60
60 05 07
59 09 37
58 21 00
60 27 20
58 39 42
61 17 07
58 28 50
60 51 52
60 53 42
59 41 16
61 20 37
tJo 42 10
61 09 37
61 13 22
60 42 27
60 40 53
61 08 00
59 29 50
59 25 42
67 41 00
58 49 48
67 43 40
60 43 12
61 27 30
60 63 52
12 22
13 00
16 30
16 38
58 31 52
67 48 28
67 55 58
13 20
60
69 02 55
72 48 40
65 47 00
69 37 45
70 49 00
74 21 20
73 19 30
74 23 00
73 42
70 55 00
73 16 30
73 55 45
64 34 00
Var.
East.
19 42
20 18
20 24
22 50
22 50
22 30
23 10
22 20
22 25
23 00
23 30
H.W.
h. m.
6 20
6 45
8 30
7 45
8 35
7 17
5 49
4 20
1 00
o 50
1 30
o 07
4 00
R. &S.
Feet.
N.
E.
70
TABLE OF POSITIONS.
SOUTH OF 50^ — continued.
Antonio, San — summit over
Apostle Rocks — western large rock
April Peak — summit
Arenas Point — south extreme
Astrea Island — summit
Austin Point — north-east pitch ...
Avalanche Point— extreme
Aymond Mount — summit
Bachelor River — entrance
Bachelor Peak
Back Harbour — outer point
Balthazar Point — extreme
Bamevelt — north-east extreme . .
Bartholomev»r San, Cape — south- west, cliff
Basalt Glen
Bald Point, west extreme of cliff ...
Bathurst Cape — summit
Beagle Island — north-west summit
Beaufoy Mount — summit
Bell Mount — summit
Bell Mount Summit — Valentyn Bay
Bessel Point — extremity
Benito Point— extreme
Bennett Point — extremity
Between Point — west low rise
Bivouac — Last Hill
Black Head — south-east point
Boat Island — summit of (Diego Ramirez)
Boqueron Mount — highest pinnacle
Bougainville Cape — south-west summit
Bougainville Cape— extremity
Bolton Island — northern summit ...
Bougainville Sugar Loaf — summit
Bowles Island— north summit
Brazo Ancho Point— eastern summit
Brent Cove — point south-east of ...
Brinkley Island — summit
Brisbane Head — extreme summit...
Broken Mount
Broken Cliff Peak
Brother, Middle — north-east summit
Buckland Mount (Staten Land) ...
Buckland Mount — summit
Bueno Puerto — west point
Burney Mount — southern summit
Button Island— south-east summit
Bynoe Island— summit
Camden Head — summit
Capstan Rocks— summit of largest
Card Point— extremity
Castle Hill
Castlereagh Cape— summit
Catherine Point, north-east extremity
Catherine Isle, western point
Cayetano Peak
Ceres Island — summit
Chalia Stream — junction with Santa Cruz
Chancery Point, south- west pitch...
Charles Island— Wallis Mark
Lat.
South.
Long.
West.
53 54 40
52 46 15
50 10 50
53 09 10
54 36 30
55 49 30
54 56 00
52 07 10
53 33 00
53 29 30
54 47 25
51 38 05
55 48 25
54 53 45
50 11 00
53 34 40
55 14 15
51 58 30
55 36 15
54 09 54
54 53 »5
53 00 40
51 48 52
52 38 45
53 J3 50
50 12 30
55 33 45
56 28 50
54 10 40
53 25 40
53 27 00
54 59 00
53 57 32
54 02 00
50 08 55
54 50 20
51 58 45
55 39 00
55 24 20
50 14 40
54 42 35
54 46 18
54 26 00
50 58 35
52 20 00
55 05 00
54 19 00
53 12 30
55 24 10
54 20 45
50 09 15
54 56 00
52 32 00
54 47 30
53 53 04
51 51 35
50 11 1/5
52 52 00
53 43 57
69
69 32
72 19
O I II
71 50 30
74 47 50
75 21 00
68 12 10
72 05 30
67 03 00
13 20
10
15
72 19 30
63 50 15
74 00 30
66 44 40
64 45 3"
70 u 00
67 39 30
68 00 00
75 J2 45
68 58 00
72 07 10
65 33 30
73 46 40
73 55 00
71 30 00
70 28 30
71 41 00
69 20 30
68 42 30
70 59 44
70 13 15
70 13 00
Var.
East.
70 10 00
71 27 57
72 15 00
74 41 45
64 22 50
73 43 00
68 57 00
69 45 19
68 31 30
65 29 50
64 20 45
70 22 30
74 10 55
73 26 00
68 07 30
12 44
41 00
17 30
15 30
72 34 00
71 28 00
68 44 10
71 19 00
72 09 40
74 05 55
70 10 30
74 40 30
72 05 45
72
71
70
70
23 40
23 50
24 40
24 06
23 00
22 40
24 00
23 00
23 34
23 20
24 00
23 50
21 00
21 00
23 45
24 15
24 10
21 00
24 00
H.W.
h. m.
Noon.
2 20
1 40
4 40
4 45
3 30, 6
1 30
o 50
12 15
1 40
2 40
2 50
2 55
1 40
TABLE OF POSITIONS.
71
Lat.
South,
Long.
West.
Var.
East.
H.W.
R.
&s.
SOUTH OF 50^ — contimied.
o / //
1 II
/
h. m.
Feet. 1
Charles Cape— pitch
53 15 00
72 20 00
Cheer Cape— north-west jiitch
51 41 00
74 18 45
Childs Island — summit
53 21 30
73 51 00
Claiiricarde Point— south summit..
50 11 30
74 35 30
Clay Cliff Narrow — cliff summit ..
54 54 00
67 28 30
23
00
3 00
6
E.
Cliff Head— northern cliff'
52 43 30
70 19 15
College Rocks— south-west rock ..
53 37 20
73 58 00
Colnett Cape — northern cliff
54 42 15
64 18 30
22
30
5 00
9
W.
Cone Point — summit
54 o5 35
70 51 45
Convent Hill— south
51 53 00
69 17 35
Cook Port — Observatory Mark summit
54 45 16
64 02 45
Cook Port — Observatory at south-west cor-\
nerof J
54 46 27
64 02 45
22
30
5 30
8
N.W.
Corona Island — summit
53 15 15
72 23 30
Cortado Cape — extremity
52 49 37
74 26 40
23
40
Cotesworth Island— Port William
53 10 00
74 34 00
Coy Inlet — northern head
50 54 7
69 04 20
21
30
9 30
40
N.
Coy Inlet — height south side extreme
50 58 30
69 07 20
21
30
9 30
40
N.
Coy Inlet — south-east height
50 59 00
69 06 00
Creole Point — extreme
54 06 00
72 12 30
Crosstide Cape — extreme
53 33 00
72 26 30
23
35
1 40
5
E-
Cruz Mount — summit
53 40 45
72 04 00
Cruz Santa Port — north point — south-east \
extreme J
50 05 30
68 03 00
20
54
9 48
40
N.
Curious Peak— summit
54 19 35
70 12 15
Cutter Cove— Jerome Channel
53 22 00
72 26 45
4 30
6
N.
Dampier Islands — southern summit
54 53 00
64 11 20
Darwin Mount — summit
54 45 00
69 20 00
Davies Gilbert Head— north summit
53 5b" 30
72 15 00
Deceit Island — Cape Deceit — east extreme
55 54 40
67 02 25
Deceit Islets — middle islet
55 56 10
66 59 00
23
30
4 30
8
E.
Deepwater Head — summit
53 38 00
73 44 00
Deepwater Sound — O.S
53 35 00
74 34 55
24
20
1 10
5
N.E.
Delgada Point — extreme
52 26 30
69 34 10
Deseado Cape — peaked summit near
52 55 30
74 37 30
Desolation Cape — southern summit
54 45 40
71 37 10
24
30
1 40
4
N.E.
Detached Islet — summit
54 53 20
64 30 00
Devil Island — summit
54 58 30
69 04 50
Diana Peak
52 08 00
74 48 00
Diego San — Cape — east extreme
54 41 00
65 07 00
22
50
4 30
10
N.W.
Dinero Mount — summit
52 19 40
68 33 20
Direction Hill — north
52 20 50
69 32 50
Dislocation Harbour — O.S
52 54 15
74 37 10
23 53
1 40
4
S.E,
Divide Cape — east extreme
54 59 10
69 07 00
Dog-jaw Mountains —western summit
55 00 30
67 41 00
Dog-jaw Mountains — eastern summit
55 02 20
67 32 00
Donaldson Cape— extremity
51 06 10
74 20 15
Doris Cove — O.S
54 58 50
71 09 48
24
16
3
4
E.
Doris Peak— summit
54 59 20
71 11 40
Dos-Hermanas — summit
53 57 45
71 25 15
Duncan Rock — middle
51 22 40
75 28 20
Dungeness Point — extremity
52 23 50
68 25 10
22
36
8 50
40
W.
Dutch Point — north extreme..,
55 29 00
67 39 30
Dynevor Sound— north-eastern headland ...
53 22 00
73 35 00
Dynevor Castle— summit
52 35 00
72 26 00
Earnest Cape
52 10 52
73 18 30
Eastern Peak — summit
50 00 15
75 '3 20
Elizabeth Island— north-east Bluff
52 49 10
70 37 15
23
50
05
7
N.E.
Elizabeth Head— Adventure Passage
54 56 30
70 54 00
72
TABLE OF POSITIONS.
SOUTH OF 50° — continued.
Elvira Point— extremity
Emily Island — summit
Enderby Island— centre ■••
Entrance Mount — summit of Santa Cruz Cliff
Esperanza Island — south-west extreme
Espinoza Cape — north-east extreme of cliff...
Evangelists — Sugar Loaf Islet
Evans Island — western summit
Evouts — north-east head
Expectation Bay — north islet
Fairweather Cape
Famine Port— Observatory
Felix Point — extremity
Felipe, San — Bay of
Felipe, San — Bay of
Fifty Point — south-west summit
Fincham Islands — summit of westernmost\
islet ' J
Fitton Mount — summit
Fitz- Roy Passage— N.W. end O.S
Flamsteed Cape — extremity rock
Focus Island — summit
Fortune Bay — rivulet mouth
Fortyflve Cape — extreme pitch
Foster Mount — summit
Friar Hill — southernmost summit
Froward, Cape — summit of the Bluff
Furies, East — largest rock
Furies, West — largest rock
Fury Peak — highest
Gallant, Port — Wigwam Point
Gal legos River — observatory mound
Gallegos River — west head
Gap Peak
Gente grande, Point — north-west extremity
George Point— extreme pitch
George, Cape — Bluff summit
Gidley Islet — summit
Gloucester Cape — summit
Good Success Bay — O.S
Good Success Bay — north head
Good Success Bay— south head
Good Success Cape — southern extreme
Goodwin Mount — summit
Goree Road— Station Islet
Goree Road — Guanaco Point, extreme
Gracia. N.S. de— south extremity of cliff ...
Graham, Cape — south-east pitch
Grant Bay — head south-west of
Graves Mount — summit
Gregory Bay
Gregory Bay ,.
Gregory Cape — extremity ...
Gregory Range— soulh-wesi summit
Guanaco Hill
Guia Narrow — north extremity — nearly mid."\
channel /
Hall Cape — south extreme
Hall Point — extremity
Lat.
South.
53 49 12
55 29 30
54 13 00
50 08 50
51 11 45
52 37 20
52 24 18
53 26 30
55 33 00
50 25 00
51 32 05
53 38 15
52 56 00
52 35 00
52 40 00
55 17 10
53 44 15
54 47 45
52 39 00
51 46 25
51 53 23
52 15 48
53 23 00
55 50 30
51 50 08
53 53 43
54 38 00
54 34 45
54 25 40
53 41 45
51 33 20
51 38 45
53 55 00
53 00 45
55 12 20
51 37 40
53 10 45
54 05 18
54 48 02
54 47 00
54 48 45
54 54 40
54 19 30
17 35
19 00
52 43 10
55 16 40
54 51 45
53 45 00
52 39 00
52 39 00
52 39 00
53 34 30
50 02 00
50 43 30
54 57 00
52 49 45
Long.
West.
55
55
72 03 55
69 35 00
71 57 35
68 20 00
73 15 00
68 36 20
75 06 40
73 53 30
66 45 00
74 17 00
68 55 20
70 57 45
74 12 45
69 49 00
69 42 00
66 35 40
73 45 30
64 23 00
71 31 00
73 51 45
72 48 00
73 45 00
72 31 45
67 32 50
69 08 20
71 18 15
72 12 00
72 21 60
72 19 20
72 00 41
68 59 10
69 42 40
69 39 50
70 26 45
66 36 20
75 21 00
72 13 00
73 29 15
65 14 00
65 11 30
65 12 20
65 21 30
70 51 00
67 03 00
67 10 00
70 30 25
66 30 30
64 14 00
70 37 30
70 13 00
70 13 00
70 13 40
70 22 50
69 03 00
74 26 40
65 36 00
71 25 54
Var.
East.
22 54
24 00
22 00
23 40
23 30
23 00
23 40
23 50
23 20
25 00
25 00
24 04
21 47
23 00
23 45
24 30
22 48
23 40
23 30
23 30
23 30
23 30
22 00
H.W.
h. m.
9 o
o 7
R.&S.
Feet.
30 N. w.
6 to 7
9 40 30 s.
9 00 24 \v.
4 45 8 N. E.
1 30
1 or 2
o 50 8
3 00 7
1 o
2 30
2 30
9 3
8 50
5 o
1 30
4 3
4 15
4 40
4 00
9 22
10 22
9 38
6 N. K.
4 N. E.
4 N.E.
5 or 6 E.
48 N.
6 N. E.
5 S.E.
9 N-
9 N-.
N.E.
N.E.
25 S. S.W.
15
12 S.S.WJ
28.
N.E,
4 00 1 4 N,
TABLE OF POSITIONS
73
SOUTH OF 50^ — co7iiinued.
Halfport Bay — point
Hamond Island— south-west summit
Hart Mount — summit
Harvey Point — south-west extreme
Hat Isle — summit
Hately Point— south-east extreme
Henry Port — observatory
Herschel Mount— summit
Hewett Harbour — south point of
Hobbler Hill
Hole in Wall Point — south extreme
Holland Cape — south-east extreme
Hope Island — central extreme summit
Hope Harbour — Hope Pointextreme
Horace Peaks— southern summit
Horn Cape — summit
Horn False Cape — south extreme
Hyde Mount — summit
Ignocentes Island— summit
Ildefonso Isles — northern rock
Ildefonso Isles— liighest summit
Ildefonso Isles— southern rock
Indian Cove — south-east comer
Indian Pass— first (Santa Cruz river)
Indian Pass— second (Santa Cruz river) ...
Inez Sta.— north cliff
Inglefield Island — north extremity
Inglefield Island — south extreme
Inman Cape — cliff summit
Ipswich Isles— southern summit
Isabel Cape — summit
Isabe' Cape — west extreme
Isidro. San, Cape
Isabella Island— O.S
Isabella Isle — Murray Peak, northern summit
Jane Mount— summit
Jerdan Island — summit
Jerome Channel — Jerome Point — summit ...
Jerome, St., Point— south-east extreme
Jesse Point
John, St., Cape — north cliff
John, St., Cape— east cliff
Jonathan Mount — summit
Joy Mount
Juan, San, Point — south-west extremity ...
Judge Rocks — westernmost
Jupiter Rock
Kater Peak
Keel Point — Observatory true west of Shin-
gle Point
Kekhlao Cape — northern pitch
Kempe Peaks — southern summit
Kendall Cape— extremity
Kennel Rocks— largest
King Island— summit
King Head — summit
Latitude Bay — OS
Labyrinth Islands — Jane Island, summit
Laura Harbour (basin) — O.S
Lat.
South.
}
53 11 40
55 18 45
54 11 45
55 18 25
55 04 20
52 58 30
50 00 18
55 49 45
52 25 00
50 11 40
54 49 20
53 48 33
55 32 30
54 07 30
54 43 00
55 58 40
55 43 15
55 43 40
50 31 55
55 49 00
55 52 30
55 53 30
55 30 20
50 08 00
50 12 20
54 07 00
53 04 20
53 06 10
53 18 30
54 10 30
51 52 00
51 51 50
53 47 00
54 13 05
54 12 35
55 31 10
55 49 05
53 31 30
53 31 40
55 02 45
54 42 20
54 42 50
55 21 .50
52 39 20
50 39 52
52 51 00
54 24 15
55 51 55
50 06 45
55 10 00
54 23 30
51 27 15
54 17 30
54 22 38
53 13 30
53 18 40
54 19 10
54 07 00
I
Long.
West.
Var.
East.
1
II
73
18
45
70
0(3
30
70
50
30
67
26
20
71
08
30
71
46-
00
75
18
55
^7
19
15
72
50
30
72
21
00
63
55
25
71
39
25
«9
39
50
73
07
00
71
57
25
67
16'
00
68
05 40
tf7
29 40
74 46
30
^9
23
00
09
18
30
«9
17
00
09
05
00
6q
11
00
71
36
20
b'7
07
50
71
53
14
71
53
00
74
19
15
73
20
40
75
10
00
75
13
00
70
57
50
72 58
50
72
59
00
«9
05
00
67
29
00
72
25
30
72
25
45
bf)
22
30
ti3
43
45
^3
43
15
70
00
00
73 47
00
74 32
45
74 48 30 1
72
43
40
67
33 50 1
68
23
30
70
02
00
72
30
10
74
10
04
73
02
00
71
17
00
72
01
00
74
16
44
71
00
20
73
i8
45
o /
23 40
24 16
20 50
23 50
24 00
23 56
24 10
24 10
23 56
23 56
24 00
23 40
24 20
24 00
22 30
22 30
24 00
20 54
23 50
23 56
28 50
24 40
H.W.
R. &S.
h. m.
2 00
3 00
Noon.
10 40
4 40
3 28
3 20
3 20
4 00
4 00
2 00
1 00
2 00
1 30
5 30
5 30
1 00
9 48 40
Feet.
6 E.
9 E.
6 N.E.
6 E.
6 E.
6 N.K.
4 S. E.
2 05
30
1 00
74
TABLE OF POSITION'S.
Lat.
South.
SOUTH OF 50° — continued.
Law Peaks — northernmost
Leading Hill - summit
Lennox Harbour— O.S.
Lennox Road— Luff Islet— summit
Lindell Rock
Lion Mount — summit
Longchase Cape — western pitch
Lort Point— eastern pitch
Lucia, Santa— Cape — summit
Magdalena Isle, Sta.— north-west cliff
March Harbour — O.S
Martha, Santa— Island — summit
Magalhaens Strait— eastern entrance — Ob-1
servation for tide J
Magalhaens Strait— eastern entrance ...
Magalhaens Strait— eastern entrance ...
Magalhaens Strait — eastern entrance ...
Magalhaens Strait— eastern entrance ...
Magalhaens Strait- eastern entrance ...
Magalhaens Strait— eastern entrance ...
Martens Peaks— highest
Martin, St., Cove— O.S
Mary, St., Point— extremity
Mateo, San, Point— extreme
Maxwell Island— summit
Maxwell Mount
May Point — western extreme
Medio Cape— north-east cliff.
Mercy (Misericordia, orSeparation) Harbour 1
— Bottle Island summit .= /
Meta Islet — central summit
Michael Point— extremity
Mid Bay Rocks— largest
Middle Islet — summit
Middle Cape — north-west cliff
Middle Cove, Wollaston Island — Observa-1
tion Spot on beach J
Middle Hill
Mitchell Cape — north-west pitch
Monday Cape — extreme of
Monmouth Cape— west head
Monmouth Island — summit
Moore Monument
Morrion, El— summit
Murray Narrow— Eddy Point
Nassau Island — south-east point
Nativity Cape— western pitch
Negro Cape — south-west extreme cliff.
Newton Point — extreme of Windhond Bay...
Newyear Islands — north-eastern point
Nicholson Rocks — south-western rock
Nodales Peak
Noir Island— O.S
Noir Island — Cape Noir— extreme
Nombre Head — north-east cliff
North Cove— O. S
North Hill — summit
Northern Rock (above water) off Diego Ra-
mirez
Long.
West.
52 53 00
55 33 20
55 17 00
55 18 40
56 Q4 30
50 20 00
54 45 40
55 40 30
51 30 00
52 54 15
55 22 35
52 50 00
52 26 00
52 26 00
52 32 00
52 31 00
52 22 00
52 14 GO
52 15 00
55 43 00
55 5» 20
53 21 15
5> 23 50
55 47 30
53 47 10
55 22 20
54 12 15
52 44 58
52 29 15
50 17 00
53 50 10
55 36 15
54 48 20
55 35 30
51 49 56
55 57 30
53 09 12
53 20 30
53 41 45
51 39 30
53 33 20
55 01 00
53 50 23
55 27 30
52 56 40
55 15 45
54 39 00
55 03 00
53 50 40
54 28 15
54 30 00
52 39 00
54 24 25
51 47 30
56 24 40
Var.
East.
}l
74 33 00
69 iti 40
66 49 00
66 44 45
68 43 10
68 49 30
71 04 00
67 59 00
75 29 00
70 35 25
69 59 34
70 34 45
68 57 00
69 00 00
68 59 00
68 42 00
68 39 00
69 06 00
G9 24 00
67 19 00
67 34 00
70 57 45
74 04 00
67 30 45
72 15 00
70 09 30
66 51 20
74 39 14
72 55 40
74 48 00
73 35 «o
67 17 45
64 45 20
68 19 00
69 22 40
68 14 00
73 22 00
70 27 45
72 11 45
72 52 40
73 32 15
68 14 20
71 04 30
69 48 30
70 49 00
67 52 40
64 06 20
71 23 20
71 09 45
72 59 45
73 05 30
68 34 50
72 18 10
69 25 40
68 43 00
H.W.
R &S.
23 40
23 40
23 30
22 00
24 04
23 58
22 30
22 00
22 40
24 23
23 26
24 10
23 48
23 00
23 50
23 00
23 20
23 40
24 00
22 30
24 20
24 40
25 00
24 30
24 30
Feet.
4 40
4 40
4 30
3 10
N. E.
N.
8 56 45 w.s.w.
8 47
7 40
8 37
8 13
8 24
8 46
s.w.
s.s.w.
42 w.
39 S.S.W.
w.s.w.
35
4 4>
3 00
1 10
3 30
3 00
3 00
2 30
w.
S.E.
S.E.
S.B.
TABLE OF POt^lTlONS.
SOUTH OF 50^ — continued.
Nose Peak — summit
Notch Mountain' — summit
Notch Cape — extremity
Observation Mount — summit
Observation Mount — summit — on west coast
Oeste Point — extremity
Oracion and Isthmus Bays — Isthmus middle
Orange Cape — north extremity
Orange Peak
Orange Bay— Burnt Island — summit ...
Orange Bay — O.S
Orozco Table — south-east summit
Oazy Harbour — head at west en trance ...
Packsaddle Island — summit
Parker Cape — western summit over ...
Parry Harbour — north-west point
Paulo, Sail, Cape — north-east cliff
Paulo, San, Mount — northern summit
Pecket Harbour — south summit
Peel Inlet — north-east extreme
Penas Cape- — south-east cliff
Penas Cape — offing near
Peter Mount
Philip, St., Bay
Philip, St., Bay
Philip, San, Mount — summit
Phillip Cape— summit
Phillips Rocks — largest, summit
Picton Island — Cape Maria — south-east ex- \
treme j
Pillar Cape (or Pilar) — northern cliff ...
Pillar Rock, at extremity
Pinto Hills — eastern summit
Pio, San, Cape— south pitch
Playa Parda — Shelter Isle summit
Policarpo Point — extreme
Pond Mount ...
Porpoise Point — north-east extremity...
Portland Bay — west point of islet
Possession Cape— middle of cliff
Possession Bay — western bank
Providence Cape — south extreme
Pyramid Hill^summit
Preserve Islands — summit of west island
Quarter Master Island — north point ...
Quoin Head — south extreme, summit ...
Quod Cape— extremity
Ramirez Diego Islands — highest summit
Red Hill
Redbill Island — summit
Rejoice Harbour — north point extreme
Rees Cape — east pitch
Renouard Island — summit
Richardson Mount — summit...
Roca Partida — summit
Rocky Point — extreme
Roldans Bell— summit
Roos de Cape — north-east pitch
Rose Mount — Whittlebury Island
Lat.
South.
o t If
53 52 30
55 04 30
53 25 00
50 32 35
52 28 58
51 31 45
52 10 00
52 27 10
52 28 15
55 31 00
55 30 50
54 40 40
52 42 00
55 23 50
52 42 00
54 25 15
54 16 20
54 39 30
52 47 10
50 38 00
53 51 30
54 08 00
52 22 00
52 35 00
52 40 00
53 36 25
52 44 20
55 »4 10
55 07 00
52 42 50
50 02 00
52 23 00
55 03 15
53 18 45
54 39 00
53 51 45
52 55 30
14 45
17 00
19 00
52 59 00
54 27 00
54 23 00
52 56 00
53 44 15
53 32 10
56 28 50
55 34 00
50 05 30
51 02 15
55 05 00
52 34 50
54 45 50
50 45 00
54 57 45
53 57 40
55 34 20
55 13 20
50
52
52
Long.
West.
Var.
East.
H.W.
/
//
/
70 05
20
70 30
30
72 48 55
23 40
69 00
20
74 36
02
25 09
74 08
41
73 40
00
69 28
00
22 30
69 25
10
68 02
20
23 56
68 05
17
23 56
65 59 45
70 36 35
23 50
68 04
20
23 50
74 14
30
69 20
00
66 40
05
72 01
00
70 46
15
23 29
73 36
30
67 33
20
22 00
66 53
00
72 40
30
69 49
00
22 40
69 42
00
22 40
71 00
00
73 56 44
70 57
00
66 46
45
74 43
20
23 50
75 23
15
23 00
72 20
00
66 30
30
73 01
30
23 45
65 39
30
71 56
30
70 48
00
23 30
74 40
30
68 56
20
22 40
69 20
00
73 34
45
23 22
71 07
40
71 35
00
70 22
35
23 20
70 43
15
23 20
72 33
25
68 42
30
24 30
68 09
00
74 48
00
74 19
45
67 01
00
23 20
73 43
00
63 51
05
75 02
00
65 46
00
71 47
15
67 20
00
23 45
70 10
00
1 00
9 00
3 30
o 30
3 30
12 00
6 42
6 27
9 40
9 00
1 00
1 oB
Noon.
8 40
8 19
R. &S.
Feet.
46 \v.
5 N.
6 N.
12 N W.
12W.N.W.
30 s.w.
24
6 K. S. E.
40 W.
42 S.S.W.
Noon. 9 N.
Noon.
4 00
4 00
3 30 7
76
TABLE OF POSITIONS.
SOUTH OF SO' — continued.
Round Cape (or Redondo Cape) — summit ...
Rowlett Cape — extreme
Rowley Cape — south-west pitch
Ragged Point — extreme south
Rugged Point — western extreme
Sanchez Cape
Sanderson Island — south extreme
Sandy Point — extremity
Santiago Cape — summit
Sarmiento Mount — north-east peak
Saturday Harbour — O.S
Schetky Cape — southern pitch
Schomberg Cape — western pitch
Scott Island — summit
Scourfield Cape — north-east pitch
Sea Rock — summit
Sebastian, San, Cape — northern height
Selina Island — summit
Sesambre — summit
Seymour Mount — summit
Sharp Peak — Wickhara Island — summit ...
Singular Peak
Skyring Mount — summit
Sloggett Bay — Island, south extreme of
Snowy Sound— extreme of Islet at entrance
South Cape — south extreme cliff
Southern Rock (Diego Ramirez)
Spaniard Harbour — n.w. extreme
Spencer Cape — south-east summit ,
Staines Peninsula— Isthmus centre
Stepout Mount
Stewart Harbour — O.S
Stokes Monument
Stokes Mount
Sulivan Head — south-west summit
Sunday Cape —north-east cliff
Sunday Cape— summit
Swim Bluff
Tapering Point — extremity
Tamar Cape — south extreme
Tame-seal Islet — middle
Tarn Mount — peak'at north end
Turn Cape — extremity
Tate Cape — summit
Tekeenica Sound— nortli-west extremity ...
Terhalten Island — summit
Terhalten, Island — Cape Caroline — south-1
extreme ._ ... f
Thomas Point — extreme
Three Peaks Mount — summit
Tiger Mount ,
Tower Point— tower
Tower Rocks— eastern rock
Townshend Harbour — O.S ,
Trafalgar Mount — summit ,
Treble Island — southern summit
Tres Puntas — Cape ,
Trigo Mount — summit ,
Tussuck Rock
Lat.
South.
Long.
West.
Var.
Eaot.
H.W.
R.
<SiS.
o 1 II
1 II
/
h. m.
Feet.
50 51 00
69 04 50
21 30
9 30 '40
N.
54 14 -IS
70 08 15
54 55 00
67 00 00
55 39 10
69 05 40
53 47 10
73 35 00
51 06 56
69 03 40
55 38 40
68 49 00
53 09 ^5
70 52 00
50 42 00
75 28 00
54 27 15
70 51 15
53 »o 15
74 18 00
24 20
2 00
5
S.E.
53 21 40
74 12 45
24 00
2 00
5
S.E.
54 39 00
72 07 00
24 40
2 30
5
55 16 50
67 46 00
55 45 15
67 08 00
55 15 00
70 28 30
A
N.W.
53 19 00
68 09 50
22 40
7 00
to
54 55 20
71 30 20
NNW.
55 27 15
^^ 59 30
54 19 05
69 50 20
54 06 50
70 26 45
50 24 00
74 33 45
54 24 48
72 11 20
24 30
2 30
5
55 02 15
66 20 00
53 31 00
72 40 00
54 51 00
64 45 40
56 29 52
68 42 20
25 00
4 00
6
E.
54 53 00
65 53 00
55 55 00
67 37 40
24 30
4 40
8
E.
51 40 35
73 41 40
50 11 45
70 16 45
54 54 24
71 29 02
24 14
2 50
5
S.E.
51 02 00
75 00 00
50 29 00
73 05 00
55 20 50
69 45 45
53 39 50
67 56 20
22 50
6 00
12
N.W.
53 10 30
74 22 00
50 04 20
69 33 00
50 28 55
74 41 45
53 55 30
73 48 10
23 24
2 30
6
E.
53 23 30
74 05 30
53 45 06
71 02 10
54 24 08
71 07 30
24 00
1 20
6
N. E.
53 37 15
73 51 30
55 15 00
68 54 00
55 26 15
67 01 30
23 40
4 30
8
E.
55 21 10
65 52 15
23 45
4 37
8
E.
52 26 00
72 48 00
53 42 40
72 44 15
51 21 36
69 01 46
54 59 30
66 01 30
54 36 40
73 02 50
25 00
54 42 15
71 55 30
24 34
2 30
5
E.
51 38 00
74 24 45
55 07 50
71 02 20
24 15
3 00
5
S.E.
50 02 00
75 21 00
51 15 04
74 15 45
54 34 00
72 12 10
25 00
2 30| 5
N.E.
TAULE OF POSITIONS.
77
SOUTH OF 30" — continued.
Twoboats Point — north extreme
Upright Cape— north extreme
Union Peak — summit
Valentyn Harbour — Observation Mount
Valentyn Cape — summit at extreme ...
Vancouver Port — head south-west of ...
Vauverlandt Islet — summit
Vernal Mount — summit
Vicente, San, Cape — extreme
Vicente, San, Cape — south-west summit\
(west coast) J
Vicente, San, Cape— west extreme ... .,
Victory Cape — extremity
Virgins Cape — south-east extreme
Walker Bay — height south of ,
Waller Point — extreme
Warping Cove — O.S
Walter Point — eastern pitch of
Webley Cape — Islet off extreme point
Webster Mount — summit •
Weddell Cape — south-west pitch ■
West Point — extremity
West Hill — Hermite Island— summit ... ..
West Mountain — summit
West Channel— nortli head, summit ... ..
West Channel — south head, summit ... •.
West Cliff Cape — cliff extreme ,
Western Station — Santa Cruz river
Westminster Hall — eastern summit ... .,
Wiiitshed Mount — summit
White Horse Islet — north summit ... ..
Wilson Cape — south-west summit
Windhond Bay
Windward Bay — beach
Wollaston Island — largest— summit of ... ..
WooUya — settlement
York Minster— summit
WEST COAST OF PATAGONIA.
Placed by Latitude from 50° Northwards.
Double Peak Mount — western peak ... .
Neesham Bay — beach
Cape Primero — extremity
Mount Corso — south-west summit
Cathedral — Mount — summit
Sandy Bay— east point
Mouit Corso — N.E. summit
Cape Brentou — summit
Falcon Inlet — south-east extremity ... .
Saumarez Island — Bold Head
Fury Cove — height east of
Falcon Inlet — Cape Wellesley — extremity .
Offshore Islet — centre
Picton Opening — middle of
Mount Jervis — summit
Level Bay— west point — extremity ... .
Cape Montague — western cliff
Western Rock — centre
Lat.
South.
54 52 30
53 04 03
54 50 45
52 55 00
53 33 30
54 49 50
55 19 30
54 06 28
54 38 40
51 30 00
52 46 20
52 16 10
53 20 10
50 22 00
55 10 10
54 24 08
54 55 15
55 16 15
54 47 12
55 33 00
55 50 15
55 50 30
54 50 00
50 22 15
50 33 30
50 36 30
50 12 40
52 37 18
54 08 00
51 07 50
55 04 45
55 15 00
50 03 12
56 27 44
55 03 40
55 24 50
49 58 20
49 53 54
49 50 05
49 48 00
49 46 30
49 45 40
49 45 15
49 39 00
49 38 00
49 32 48
49 31 50
49 28 30
49 25 10
49 15 00
49 08 30
49 07 45
49 07 30
49 01 00
Long.
West.
69 37 00
73 36 00
70 08 00
74 18 45
70 33 45
64 05 45
67 57 00
01
71
65
24
14 15
74 00 15
70 26 25
74 54 39
68 21 34
74 53 15
66 28 00
71 08 20
70 58 00
68 06 00
64 04 52
68 45 00
67 54 30
67 46 45
64 35 35
75 22 00
75 28 15
75 31 45
71 50 00
74 24 10
71 14 00
75 14 40
71 01 00
67 50 00
74 41 45
68 43 01
68 03 00
70 02 30
74 41 00
74 59 00
75 35 30
75 34 00
74 43 50
74 16 45
75 32 00
75 31 00
73 36 30
74 06 15
74 03 00
73 54 25
75 3S 00
75 23 00
74 11 15
74 14 00
75 37 00
75 48 40
Var.
East.
H. W.
23 30
24 00
23 50
22 50
22 30
24 57
23 40
24 20
20 58
20 20
h. m.
1 30
2 00
4 40
4 30
8 50
3 30
4 30
4 n
1 15
R. &S.
Feet.
7 E.
10 N.W.
38
/n. to
X, N.W.
9 E.
10
78
TABLE OF POSITIONS.
WEST COAST OF PATAGONIA-
continued.
Lat.
South.
Long.
West.
Wildcoast Head Cliff— summit
Eyre Sound — north-east extremity
Halt Bay — middle of islet close to
Dyneley Point — extreme
Parallel Point — extreme
Parallel Peak— summit
Station Head — summit of
Conglomerate Point — extreme ... ... .•
White Kelp Cove— summit over west side ..
Breaker Peak— summit
Middle Island — north point— extremity
Point Breakoff — extreme
Fallos Channel — Duplicate Mount — south"!
summit /
Black Island — south-east summit
Dundee Rock — summit
Cape Dyer — extremity
Miller Island — south extreme _ ...
Port Santa Barbara— Observation Point, l^
north extreme J
Bynoe Islands— northern centre
Millar Monument — at north extreme
Campanula Island — summit at south end ...
Good Harbour — Isthmus at the bottom
Bynoe Island— western extremity
Cape San Roman— north extremity
Wager Island — eastern point — extremity ...
Supposed position of Wager's Wreck
Speedwell Bay — hill at north-east point
Northernmost Islet — summit
Ayautau Island— summit of largest
Channel's Mouth — largest rock off entrance
Channel's Mouth — east side of northemmosti
Hazard Islet J
CHONOS ARCHIPELAGO.
Xavier Island — Ignacio Beach
Jesuit Sound — central mount
Xavier Island — Lindsay Point — north-east"!
extremity J
Kelly Harbour — south point extreme
Kelly Harbour — north point extreme
Cape Tres Montes — extremity
Cape Tres Montes— summit over
Purcell Island — summit
Cirujano Islet — north-east point
Forelius Peninsula — Isthmus (narrowest part)
Port Otway— Observation Spot
Port Otway— summit over southern entrance)
head , J
Cape Raper— rock close to
Bad Bay — summit west of
Point Rees — extreme
Sugar Loaf— summit
Mitford Head— summit
St. Paul's Dome — summit
Small Islet near Cape Gallegos
Cape Gallegos — summit
48 57 30
48 57 00
48 54 15
48 50 00
48 47 45
48 45 40
48 39 00
48 36. 15
48 30 15
48 28 00
48 27 35
48 26 00
48 19 00
48 12 00
48 06 15
48 06 00
48 03 20
48 02 20
47 58 00
47 55 50
47 45 00
47 45 00
47 44 40
47 44 30
47 41 00
47 39 30
47 39 30
47 38 10
47 34 15
47 29 30
47 28 55
47 10 00
47 09 30
47 03 15
46 59 30
46 59 00
46 58 57
46 57 50
46 55 20
46 51 10
46 50 oo
46 49 31
46 49 30
46 49 10
46 47 10
46 44 40
46 42 40
46 39 00
46 36 16
46 35 40
46 35 00
75 32 00
73 41 45
74 14 20
75 26 00
75 34 40
75 31 00
74 10 60
75 35 00
74 17 10
75 32 30
74 21 40
75 33 40
75 14 00
74 32 00
75 42 00
75 34 20
74 35 30
75 29 20
75 23 30
74 41 30
74 37 10
75 20 20
75 24 20
74 52 30
74 55 00
75 06 30
75 10 00
75 14 00
74 40 20
74 29 30
74 24 20
74 25 40
74 08 20
74 16 00
74 08 30
74 05 50
75 27 50
75 27 55
74 39 45
74 21 45
74 41 40
75 19 20
75 i8 00
75 40 55
74 51 40
75 42 20
75 15 00
75 40 30
75 13 40
75 40 00
75 28 30
Var.
East.
H.W.
R.&S.
Feet.
12 30
12 00
19 10
11 45
19 50
20 32
Noon.
d
TABLE OF POSITIONS.
79
CHONOS ARCHIPELAGO — Continued.
Christmas Cove — O. S. — atsoutli-east extre-"\
mityofcove ... J
Cone — summit
Point Pringle — extremity
Rescue Point — summit — northern
Hellyer Rocks— middle
Cape Taytao — western extreme
SJjyring Monument — summit
Mount Gallegos — summit
Patch Cove — O. S. — under Mount Gallegos
Pert Refuge— Puentes Island — summit
Inche Island — south-east summit
Anna Pink Bay — St. Julian Island— summit
Mount Haddington — summit
Mensuan Island — summit
Mount Riviere — summit
Midbay Rock — centre
Cape Garrido — northern extreme
Darwin Channel— north-east head
Mount Isquiliac — summit
Vallenar Road— O.S. — south-east extreme\
of Three-finger Island /
Lemu Island — summit
Paz Island — summit
Huamblin (or Socorro) Island — south extreme
Huamblin (or Socorro) Island — west head ...
Ypun (or Narborough) Island — John Point!
— extremity j
Stokes Island — summit
Cape Lort — summit over
Hulk Rocks — northern — above water...
Mount Main — summit
Melletsh Island — western extremity ...
Melimoyu Mountain — summit
Tuamapu Island— summit
Huaytecas Island — central summit
Point Huayhuin — western islet off
Port Low— O.S. on rocky islet in harbour
Point Chaylime — north extremity
Huacanec Islets — northernmost — small
Queytao Islet — largest — summit
ARCHIPELAGO OF CHILOE.
Huafo Island — south extremity
Huafo Island— east point (of coves) ...
Huafo Island — summit over north west, or
weather, point
Huafo Island — northern rock j...
Canoitad Rock— summit ...
Yanteles Mountain — summit— southern
Huapiquilan Islands — southern islet summit
Larger Island Huapiquilan— southern summit
San Pedro Mountain — summit
San Pedro Passage — O.S. in cove
Cape Quilan — south-west extreme
Laytec Island — south-east extremity
Corcorado Mountain — summit
Huildad Harbour
Point Sentinela — extremity
}
Lat.
Long
Var.
Soutl
.
West
East.
o /
//
1
II
/
46 35
00
75 34 05
20 40
46 34
10
75 31
GG
46 30
50
75 33
00
46 18
10
75 13
45
46 04
00
75 14
00
45 53
20
75 08
GO
45 53
10
75 04
00
45 52
45
74 56
45
45 52
15
74 55 50
20 31
45 '51
36
74 51
25
45 48
05
75 01
OG
20 36
45 47
25
74 55
OG
45 43
25
74 39
50
45 36
00
74 56
00
45 34
45
74 35
00
45 27
30
74 45
00
45 26
10
74 32
20
45 25
GO
74 25
00
45 20
00
74 21
40
45 18
30
74 36
•5
20 48
45 12
10
74 34
15
44 57
00
74 40
45
44 55 50
75 12
45
44,49
30
75 14
45
44 40 40
74 48
30
44 40
30
74 33
10
44 32
35
74 50
20
44 16
00
74 33
00
44 09
00
74 11
45
44 04
45
74 23
50
44 01
30
73 07
00
43 58
30
74 15
2G
43 52
45
74 01
00
43 51
00
74 13
00
43 48
30
74 03 05
19 48
43 46
10
73 65 40
43 46
05
74 03 30
43 43
00
73 35 30
43 41
50
74 46
00
43 38 40
74 34 40
43 35
30
74 48
40
19 00
43 32
00
74 44
20
43 30
GO
73 50
30
43 30
00
72 50
30
43 29
30
74 15
00
43 26
30
74 17 50
43 21
00
73 49
00
43 19
35
73 45
20
43 17
IG
74 26
00
43 15
05
73 36
00
43 11
2G
72 48
40
43 03
00
73 34
00
IB 30
42 59
25
73 22
30
H.W.
h. m.
o 45
G 14
o 45
o 45
o 40
11 45
o 30
o 37
o 48
R. i&S.
Feet.
5 N.]
5 N.E.
5 E.
5 E.
N.E.
80
TABLE OF POSITIONS,
ARCHIPELAGO OF ciiiLOE — continued.
Cape Ypuntad — north-west extremity
Quilaii Cove— O.S
Mount Vilcun — summit
Minchinmadom Mountain — south summit ...
Talcan Harbour— O.S
Pirulil Head - north-west extremity
Lemuy Island — Apabon peaked hil)
Yal Point — summit
Nihuel Islet— summit
Alao Island — summit
Huentemo Head — summit
Cahuache Island — summit
Castro Town— easternmost part
Dalcahue — Chapel
Cape Matalqui — west extreme
Chaugues Islands— north summit
Matalqui Height— summit
Quicavi BluflF
Quintergen Point— summit
Oscuro Port— O.S
Huapilinao Head— summit
Lobos Head— summit
Cocotue Height — summit
San Carlos — town — landing-place at Mole ...
Poloque Island— south point
San Carlos Harbour — Point Arenas — O.S.
San Carlos Harbour — English Bank
Point Tres Cruces — extreme pitch
Abtao Island — s. Point
Cape Guabun — north-west extreme
Point Sanoullan — north-eastern cliif
Calbuco Fort — east end of island
Calbuco — another observation
Corona Head— northern pitch
COAST OF CHILE.
Mount Yate (or Llebcan) — summit
Carelmapu Cove — O.S
MauUin — Amortajado — north extreme
River Coyhuin— mouth
Point Godoy— south-west extreme
Quellaype Mountain— summit
Osorno Mountain— summit
Point Coronel— south extremity
Cape Quedal — summit
Manzano Cove — rivulet — mouth ,
Milagro Cove — depth of
River Bueno — entrance (bar)
Point Galera — west extremity
Falsa Point — summit over (highest) ,
Valdivia — O. S. near Fort Corral ,
Gonzales Head— northern pitch
Valdivia Town — landing-place opposite
church (Hospital Mole)
Chanchan Cove — Islet off
River Tolten— mouth
Cauten (or Imperial) River — mouth ..
Cauten Head Cliff — summit
Mocha Island — south summit
}
Lat.
South.
Long.
West.
Var.
East.
H.W.
R.
&s.
O 1 II
/ //
/
b. m.
Feet.
42 59 15
74 16 50
4'2 52 00
73 33 00
18 40
29
4'2 48 50
72 52 50
42 48 00
72 34 30
42 47 00
72 58 00
1 03
16
»■'
43 44 40
74 11 00
42 40 00
73 35 30
55
(
42 39 00
73 43 00
55
1
42 36 10
72 58 10
1
1
42 35 00
73 22 00
31
18
N.!:
42 34 20
74 12 40
!■
42 28 05
73 18 45
42 27 45
73 49 20
18 35
11
18
N.
42 23 00
73 40 00
26
42 10 40
74 14 00
42 15 00
73 18 00
28
42 10 30
74 11 '0
42 15 00
73 24 00
51
20
N.
42 09 25
73 24 00
42 04 00
73 29 00
1 00
20
N.
41 57 36
73 32 20
1 25
15
N.|
42 04 00
73 27 00
29.
41 56 40
74 05 35
41 52 00
73 52 40
18 33
11 15
6
£.
41 51 00
73 06 00
1 05
'
41 51 20
73 56 00
iB 00
14
6
E.
41 49 00
73 54 00
04
41 49 30
73 31 40
1 13
i&
41 48 00
73 26 00
50
18
41 47 50
74 05 55
41 47 30
73 35 20
48
17
41 46 10
73 10 45
1 18
22
41 46 00
73 11 00
47
18
41 46 00
73 57 30
41 45 30
72 31 50
41 45 00
73 45 00
50
10
%
41 37 15
73 44 30
41 40 00
72 45 00
52
21
»,
41 34 15
73 50 20
41 22 00
72 43 30
41 09 30
73 36 45
41 07 40
73 31 45
41 03 00
73 59 50
40 33 20
73 45 50
40 16 00
73 45 00
40 11 00
73 44 00
40 02 00
73 46 40
40 00 50
73 40 50
39 52 53
73 29 00
18 15
10 35
5
39 51 15
73 30 00
39 49 02
73 '8 30
18 20
10 45
Varblel
39 26 40
73 18 30
1
39 07 45
73 19 00
1
38 47 40
73 26 00
1
38 40 40
73 30 20
1
38 24 10
73 56 50
1
TABLE OF POSITIONS.
81
COAST OF CHILE — conl'imied.
Cape Tinia — summit of islet off
Mocha Island — north summit
Mocha Island — O.S. — east side, near north 1
point j
Molguilla Point — south-west extreme
Point Tucapel— extreme
River Lelibu — entrance
Tucapel Head — summit
Carnero Head — western summit
Arauco Fort— middle
Tubul River — south head — entrance
Cape Rumena — north- \vest cliff — summit ...
Laraquete River — mouth
Point Lavapie — extremity
Colcura Village— western pitch of hill
Santa Maria Island — O. S. near rivulet (Iand-"l
ing place) J
Santa Maria Island — summit of west head ...
Point Coronei — west extremity
Concepcion City — middle — nearest to river...
River Bio Bio— south entrance point
Talcahuano — Fort Galvez
Point Tumbes — north-west cliff
Mount Neuke — summit
Coliumo Head — north extreme
Boquitata Point— western extreme
Bio Bio Paps — south-west summit
Carranza Point- — south-west extreme
Cape Humos — summit
Maule Church — rock near entrance
Maule River — south head entrance
Point Huachupure — extreme
Topocalmo Point — summit on extremity ...
Navidad Bay — River Rapel mouth
Rapel Shoal (wrongly called Topocalma) ...
Maypo River — south entrance head
White Rock Point— White Rock
Curaumilla Point — rock off
Valparaiso — Fort San Antonio ..
Quillota — Bell — summit
Quiritero Rocks — body
Quintero Point — summit
Horcon Rock — largest
Aconcagua— mountain— summit
Papudo — Gobernador Mount over Bay
Papudo Bay— O.S. lanaing-place
Pichidanque — south-east point of island — \
O.S /
Conchali Bay — islet in middle
Point Tablas — south-west extremity
River Chuapa — south entrance point '
Maytencilio Cove — north head
Talinay Mount — summit
Limari River — south head
Lengua de Vaca — extremity
Huanaquero Hill — summit
Sugar Loaf Hill— north-west summit
HeiTadura Port— south-west comer
Coquimbo Port — northern islet (rock)
Lat.
South.
Long.
West.
Var.
West.
H.W.
R. &S.
o / //
/ //
/
h. m.
Feet.
38 23 00
73 34 30
38 21 15
74 01 09
38 19 35
74 00 20
17 20
37 48 00
73 36 00
37 42 00
73 43 00
37 35 45
73 42 00
17 10
10 30
5 N.
37 35 20
73 43 10
37 21 20
73 44 00
37 15 00
73 23 00
37 14 25
73 27 30
37 12 45
73 42 00
37 10 30
73 14 00
37 08 50
73 38 20
37 02 50
73 14 00
37 02 48
73 34 00
17 GO
10 20
6 N.
37 01 45
73 36 30
36 57 00
73 15 00
36 49 30
73 05 20
36 48 45
73 13 00
36 42 00
73 10 00
16 48
10 14
5 N.
36 37 15
73 10 20
36 34 55
72 58 00
36 31 30
73 01 15
36 16 30
72 54 45
36 06 20
73 14 40
35 37 20
72 42 20
35 22 50
72 33 GO
35 19 40
72 29 20
16 24
35 19 15
72 28 00
34 57 30
72 16 30
34 00 50
72 05 00
33 54 00
71 52 20
33 51 00
71 56 30
33 39 20
71 43 >5
33 29 00
71 46 50
33 06 00
71 48 00
33 01 53
71 41 15
15 18
9 32
5 N.
32 57 10
71 10 20
32 52 20
70 37 00
32 46 00
70 35 30
32 41 50
70 35 30
32 38 30
70 00 30
32 31 00
71 31 30
32 30 09
71 30 45
15 12
32 07 55
71 36 00
15 24
9 20
5 N.
31 53 10
71 36 00
3' 51 45
71 37 30
31 39 30
71 38 00
31 17 05
71 42 05
30 50 45
71 41 45
30 44 53
71 46 25
30 13 40
71 41 30
30 12 50
71 30 45
30 GO 10
71 26 10
29 58 40
71 25 45
14 30
9 8
5 N.
29 55 10
71 25 10
14 24
9 8
5 N-
8^
TABLE OF POSITION'S.
COAST OF CHILE — continued.
Coquimbo City (La Serena)— Mr. Edwards's "\
house J
Arrayan Cove— south point
Juan Soldado, Mountain — summit
Pajaro Islet — southern summit
Yevba Buena, village — chapel
Pajaro Islet — northern summit
Trigo Ishmd—soutli-west point
Tortoralillo— south entrance point
Chungunga Islet— summit
Toro Rock
Chores Islands— south-west point of largest
Polillao Cove— south point extreme
Chafieral Bay— south-west point ...
Chaneral Island — south-west summit
Sarco Cove — middle of beach
Cape Vascufian — Islet oif (rock)
Alcalde Point — summit upon
Huasco — Captain of Port's house
Lobo Point outer pitch
Herradura de Carrisal- landing-place
Carrisal — middle point— south side ... ...
Mataraores Cove— outer point on south side
Pajonal Cove— south-east comer
Salado Bay— Cachos Point— summit
Copiapo — landing-place
Morro— summit (Morro of Copiapo)
Morro, Point — norihern extremity
Port Yngles— sandy beach in south-west cor-^
ner J
Cabeza de Vaca — point — extreme
Flamenco — south-east corner of bay
Las Animas — summit over point (outer) ...
Pan de Azucar — islet— summit
Ballenita — islet — off Ballenita
Lavata — cove near south-west point
Point San Pedro— summit
Point Taltal — northern extreme
Hueso Parado — south point of cove
Point Grande — outer summit
Point Grande — summit, amile and a-half in-'l
shore J
Paposo — white head
COAST OF PERU.
Mount Trigo — summit
Reyes Head — extreme pitch
Point Jara — summit
Jaron Mountain — summit
Moreno Mountain — summit
Constitucion Cove— shingle point on island...
George Mount — Morro Jorge — summit
Mexillones Hill — summit
Cobija— flagstaff — landing-place
Algodon Bay — extremity of point
Chipana Bay — O.S
San Francisco Head — west pitch
River Loa— mouth of
Point Lobo, or Blanca — outer pitch
Lat.
North.
29 54 10
29 42 20
29 41 30
29 35 00
29 34 00
29 32 50
29 32 35
29 29 15
29 24 15
29 21 10
29 15 45
29 10 00
29 02 40
29 01 15
28 50 00
28 50 00
28 34 16
28 27 15
28 17 50
28 05 45
28 04 30
27 64 10
27 43 30
27 39 20
27 20 00
27 09 30
27 06 45
27 05 20
26 51 05
26 34 30
26 23 35
26 09 15
25 45 45
25 39 30
25 31 00
25 24 45
25 24 30
25 07 00
25 07 00
Long.
W(.st.
West.
R. &S.
o / // o / h. m. ' Feet.
71 18 45
71 23
71 20
71 36
71 21
71 37
71 24
71 23
71 25
35
37
34
71 33
71 39
71 32
71 34
71 23
71 19
71 17
71 15
71 14
71 12
71 07
71 06
71 01
71 01
71 01
45
25
25
50
30
20
45
15
25
30
10
40
05
10
30
40
00
10
45
30
35
00
25
45
45
40
70 56 00
70 55 00
70 47 30
70 47 00
70 47 05
70 50 40
o 47 15
44 30
70
70 38
70 35
25 02
30
24 40
00
24 34
30
23 53
00
23 52
30
23 28
30
23 26
42
23 15
10
23 06
30
22 34
00
22 06
00
21 23
00
21 55
50
21 28
00
21 05
30
15
J 6
70
70
14 10
15
15
70 33 30
7" 33 45
70 33 05
70 36 15
70 39 45
70 35 45
70 32
70 38
70 40 30
70 39 45
70 35 00
70 21 05
70 17 05
10 50
14 45
7o 06 15
70 15 45
13 40
13 37
13 23
13 28
13 36
13 30
13 46
13 30
13 00
12 48
12 30
12 06
8 30
8 30
9 10
9 40
10 00
10 32
9 54
TABLE OF POSITIONS.
88
COAST OF PERU — continued.
Mount Carrasco — highest summit
Pica Pabellon— summit
Point Patache— extreme
Iqiiique — centre of island
Pisagua — Point Pichalo — extreme
Point Gorda — western low extreme
Point Lobo — summit
Arica— summit of Monte Gordo
Arica — Mole
Sama — Mountain— highest summit
Mollendo...
Point Coles — extremity
Ylo Town — rivulet mouth
Tambo Valley — Point Mexico — south-westl
extreme .f
Islay — Custom House
Islay — Mountain — summit
Quilca— Cove — west head
Pescadores Point — south-west extreme
Atico — east cove
Point Chala— extreme
Lomas — flagstaff on Point
San Juan— Needle Hummock
Point Beware — south-west extreme
Point Nasca — summit
Dona Maria — Table— central summit
Yndependencia Bay — south point of Santa "^
Rosa Island J
Mount Carreta — summit
Mount Wilson — summit
San Gallan — Island — northern summit
I Paraca Bay— west point— north extreme ...
I Pisco— Town — middle
ti Point Frayles — extreme
\ Asia Rock — summit
jl Chilca Point — south-west pitch • ...
|! Chilca Cove — Rock— summit
I Chorillos Bay
Morro Solar — summit
Callao Bay— Arsenal Flagstaff
San Lorenzo Island — north point
Hormigas Islet — largest (southern)
Pescador Islands— summit of largest
I Chancay Head — summit
Pelado Islet — summit
Salinas Hill — summit
Huacho Point— extreme pitch
Supe — west end of village
; Jaguay, or Gramadel, Head — west extremity
Huarmey — west end of sandy beach
Colina Redonda — summit
Mount Mongon— western summit
Casma Bay — inner south point
Samanco Bay— Cross Point
I Ferrol Bay — Blanco Island — summit
! Santa — centre of projecting point
Chao Islet — centre ,
' Guaiiape Islands — summit of higliest
Mount Wickham — summit
Lat.
South.
Long.
West.
20
9
20 58 30
20 57 40
20 51 05
12 30
36 30
19 00
8 45 40
8 28 55
8 28 05
58 35
00 00
42 00
37 00
7 10 50
00 00
56 05
42 20
23 50
13 30
48 00
33
20
08 35
57 00
41 00
4 18 15
4 09 50
4 04 50
3 50 00
3 48 00
3 43 00
3 01 00
2 48 00
2 31 00
2 29 20
2 11 30
2 04 00
2 04 00
1 58 00
1 47 10
1 35 55
1 27 10
1 15 30
1 08 45
o 49 45
o 25 15
o 06 15
38 35
38 15
28 00
15 30
06 30
9 00 00
8 46 30
8 34 50
8 20 00
70 09 45
70
70
70
14 00
18 15
«4 30
70 19 00
70 21 30
70 25 30
70 23 30
70 23 45
70 56 15
71 00 00"
71 26 15
71 23 45
71 52 00
72 10 15
72 08 30
72 31 00
73 20 25
73 45 '5
74 31 00
74 54 45
75 13 20
75 25 45
75 34 30
75 53 40
76 13 30
76 20 20
76 20 15
76 31 15
76 22 15
76 16 30
7^ 34 50
76 41 55
76 52 40
76 52 30
77 06
77 13
77 19
77 50
77 19
77 20
77 53
77 39
77 40
77 47
78 03
78 13
78 24
78 21
78 25
78 32
78 39
78 41
78 49
78 59
78 49
15
30
00
00
50
35
00
55
15
00
30
00
20
15
35
45
25
30
00
15
00
Var.
Eaot.
12 l3
11 30
11 10
11 00
11 05
11 00
11 00
10 45
11 12
10 48
10 30
9 30
II 00
H.W.
10 00
10 36
10 12
9 48
9 42
9 36
9 30
9 20
9 32
h. m.
8 45
8 00
8 00
8 20
8 53
8 00
8 53
8 19
5 10
4 50
4 50
3 37
5 47
R.&S.
Feet.
4 56
4 44 3
4 50
6 10
6 30
84
TABLE OF POSITIONS.
COAST OF PERU — cor.tmued.
Lat.
South.
Long.
West.
Var.
East.
H. W.
R.&S.
o / //
/ //
/
h. m.
Feet.
Truxillo — cliiirch
8 07 30
79 04 00
Huaiichaco Point— south-west extremity ...
8 05 40
79 09 00
9
30
Macabi Islet — summit
7 49 15
79 30 55
San Nicholas Bay
5 04
3
Malabrigo Bay — rocks
7 42 40
79 28 00
9
28
5 00
2
Pacasmayo Point — north-west extreme
7 25 15
79 37 25
9
30
Sana Point — extreme
7 10 35
79 43 30
Lobos de Afuera Island— Fishing Cove onl
east side J
6 56 45
Bo 43 55
9
20
Eten Head— summit over
6 56 40
79 53 50
Lambayeque— beach opposite
6 46 00
79 59 30
9
10
4 00
3
Lobos de Tierra — central summit
6 26 45
80 52 50
Point Ahuja — western cliff summit
5 55 30
81 10 00
Sechura Town— church
5 35 00
80 49 45
Lobos Island— near Payta— south extreme...
5 13 35
81 13 10
Payta — Silla (or Saddle) — south summit ...
5 12 00
81 09 20
Payta— new end of town
5 05 30
81 08 15
9
00
3 20
3
Pariiia Point— extreme
4 40 50
81 20 45
Cape Blanco— under middle high cliff
4 16 40
81 15 45
Picos Point — extreme cliff
3 45 10
80 47 30
Point Malpelo— mouth of Tumbes River ...
3 30 40
80 30 30
8
50
4 00
10
Pun4 Island— Consulate on Point Espanola
2 47 30
79 57 45
9
00
6 00
11
Guayaquil— south end of city
2 13 00
79 53 30
8
30
7 00
II
GALAPAGOS ISLANDS.
Hood Island — eastern summit
1 25 00
89 43 55
Charles Island— summit
1 19 00
90 32 00
Charles Island — Post Office Bay — south-"!
east corner J
I 15 25
90 31 30
9
40
2 10
6 N. w.
MacGower Rocks — middle
1 08 30
89 59 30
Albemarle Island — Iguana Cove — south-'l
west extreme J
59 00
91 32 15
9
30
2 00
6 N.
Chatham Island— Watering Cove beach
56 25
89 33 25
Barrington Island — summit at west end
50 30
90 10 00
Chatliam Island — south-west point of Ste- 1
phens Bay J
50 00
89 36 45
9
35
2 23
6i N.W.
Chatham Island — eastern summit
44 15
89 20 45
Indefatigable Island— summit of Islet in\
N.W. Bay— Eden Islet /
33 25
90 37 45
9
30
1 56
6 N.W.
Narborough Island — north-west extremity ...
20 00
91 44 45
Albemarle Island — Tagus Cove
15 55
91 26 45
James Island — Sugar Loaf near west end ...
15 20
90 56 40
9
36
3 10
5 N.
James Island — cove on N. E. side
10 00
90 50 00
9
30
2 34
5
James Island — Adam Cove
10 00
NORTH.
90 50 00
9
40
•^ .4
5
Bindloes Island— southernmost summit
18 50
90 33 55
-1
Towers Island — westernmost cliff'
20 00
90 02 30
Abingdon Island — summit
34 25
90 48 lO
9
35
2 10
^ N. W.
Culpepper Islet— summit
1 22 55
91 53 30
Wenman Islet — north-western summit
1 39 30
92 04 30
-*
From Callao to Guayaquil the longitudes depend upon Mr. Usboriie's survey, in the Consti-
tucion. He had three chronometers fixed on board the vessel, and one which was used for .
observations ; all four were good watches. If his whole meridian distance between Guayaquil 1 1
and Callao is incorrect, the error, whatever it may be, must be distributed equally along that {
j)ortion of coast, but I do not think there is an error of two miles ; probably, indeed, there is not '
near so great a deviation from truth, as Mr. Usborne landed for observations continually, and
can"ied a connected triangulation from Callao to Pun^.
85
OTHER POSITIONS
ASCERTAINED ANIJ USED TO CONTINUE THE CHAIN OF MERIDIAN DISTANCES.
Not included in the Survey.
Lat.
South.
Long.
Var.
East.
H.W.
R. iiS.
/
//
; //
/
h. m.
Feet.
Otaheite — Point Venus* — extremity
17 29
15
149 30 00
7 54
Noon-
1
* By continuing the chain of meridian dis-'
every
tances westward from Bahia (in Brazil),
day.
Otaheite (Point Venus extremity) would [
be in J
And by taking the measures eastward fromi
Bahia /
149 34 30
149 26 14
The mean of the two is ..
149 30 22
The longitudes in the following list, from New
Zealand to Ascension, are obtained by adding
the meridian distances eastivard from Bahia.
EAST,
New Zealand — Bay of Islands — Paihia Islet
36 16
30
174 09 45
14 00
9 «6
6 N.W.
Sydney — Fort Macquarrie — flag-staff
33 51
30
151 17 00
10 24
7 36
6
Paramatta — Observatory
151 04 00
Hobart Town— Fort Mulgrave
42 53
30
147 24 15
11 06
8 00
5 w.
King George Sound — Princess Royal Har-"!^
bour — New Government Buildings ... J
35 02
10
117 56 30
WEST.
5 36
8 00
4 E.
Keeling Islands — Direction Island— west!
point J
12 05
22
96 54 45
1 12
5 27
5 N. w.
Mauritius— Port Louis — Observatory
20 09
25
57 31 30
11 18
1 02
2 N.W.
Cape of Good Hope — Simons Bay^east end"\
of Dock Yard /
34 11
24
18 25 45
28 30
2 30
5
Royal Observatory
18 28 30
St. Helena — high water mark, in the meri-1
WEST.
dian of Observatory J
15 55
15
5 42 45
18 00
4 50
3w. N. w
Ascension — Barrack Square
7 55
33
14 24 15
«3 30
5 30
2 w.
By the Beagle's Chronometers, the meridian'
distances between Falmouth, Plymouth, 1
Portsmouth, aiid Greenwich, are as fol- (
lows : — J
Portsmouth Observatory — R.N. College — "1
from Greenwich Observatory J
1 0607-5
■
Devonport (Government House) — from^
Portsmouth Observatory /
3 03 49 '5
N.
B. — These are
Pendennis Castle — Falmouth — from Devon-\
port (Government House) J
And Falmouth — Pendennis Castle— west ofl
ident
\
ical with the
52 46-5
/ meas
Tiarc
ures ot Dr.
'ks.
Greenwich J
5 02 43-5
-
■
1
In the foregoing Table, every position, variation, and notice of tide, is the result of observations
' made by officers of the Adventure or the Beagle, therefore they are, strictly .speaking, original,
and have no reference whatever to observations made by other persons.
An explanation of the methods and instruments used, and of the basis on which the longitudes,
especially, are founded, is given, in an abridged form, at the end of the Appendix.
The positions of those points only are given which are considered to be, generally speaking,
satisfactorily ascertained by actual observation on shore, or well connected by triangulation to those
stations at which the artificial horizon was used.
Where tidal notices are given opposite to summits of mountains, or other places at some dis-
tance from the sea, it is to be understood that they refer to a point at which the sea approaches
nearest to that specified.
86
TABLE OF THE VARIATION OF THE COMPASS ;
OBSERVED ON BOARD (aFLOAt).
Date.
Lat.
North.
Long.
West.
Var.
West.
Date.
Lat.
South.
Long.
West.
Var.
West.
1831.
1
1832.
Dec.
30
43 20
12
00
23
50 Mi
irch 30
18 07
38 38
2 37
, ^
43 37
12
30
23
34
E\ST.
,.
42 31
12
40
24
18 Ai
)ril 3
23 22
42 07
2 19
..
3»
41 00
13
30
24
49
At Rio de Janeiro.
1 55
..
40 15
13
50
24
25
WEST.
1832.
M<
ly 13
18 14
38 52
1 04
Jan.
1
38 41
15
00
23
35
.. 14
17 12
38 47
1 00
2
37 20
15
30
23
54
..
17 14
38 48
1 15
4
33 00
16
10
23
00
16 35
38 48
1 52
5
29 32
16
20
20
41
. 15
15 01
38 4'
1 30
• >
29 30
16
22
20
48
■ 23
13 25
38 37
2 08
7
28 20
16
15
20
24
• 25
14 42
38 22
2 20
28 12
16
20
20
20
.
15 29
38 24
2 54
*8
26 59
16
48
20
04
.
15 25
38 24
2 42
9
25 26
18
02
19
59
. 26
16 20
38 24
1 59
24 40
18
42
19
63
.
17 31
38 23
2 12
10
23 09
19
47
18
47
.
17 35
38 23
2 20
• 9
22 39
20
14
18
45
. 27
18 59
38 44
1 14
11
22 02
20
2tf
i8
10 Ju
ne 1
22 42
40 21
03
, ,
21 44
20
39
18
22
EAST.
, ,
21 38
20
42
18
37
2
22 58
41 15
33
12
20 42
21
21
18
24
.
22 58
41 14
15
, ,
20 18
21
23
18
20 Ju
y 5
23 03
43 06
1 39
13
19 31
21
57
18
06
8
24 06
42 53
1 57
19 06
22
'7
17
39
12
26 33
43 48
3 39
14
17 50
23
10
17
06
■ 13
27 13
45 48
4 35
15
15 29
23
52
15
52
•
27 14
45 50
4 34
16
15 17
23
35
15
22
• 14
27 it)
46 16
5 10
Feb.
7
14 54
23
30
15
55
■ 17
29 53
43 13
6 52
9
13 20
25
20
14
49
.
29 52
43 12
6 02
10
12 17
2fi
25
13
43
. 18
31 09
48 57
7 50
11
8 50
27
02
12
44
21
34 09
52 03
10 27
14
2 10
27
50
11
08 All
g. 20
35 20
56 47
12 30
15
1 20
29
05
10
39
21
35 49
56 49
11 21
16
1 00
29
23
09
23
.
35 54
56 47
11 36
• •
51
SOUTH.
29
25
07
20
22
36 53
36 55
56 34
56 35
12 17
12 23
17
01
29
59
8
58 '.
• 23
37 02
56 36
13 07
28
30
18
8
18 Oc
t. 27
At Mont
e Video.
12 42
• ,
28
30
18
8
03
■ 31
34 5"
57 »3
12 09
19
3 29
31
57
8
00 No
V. 1
34 42
57 28
12 24
20
Fernando d
e Noroiiha.
7
53
2
34 35
57 55
11 06
21
3 09
32
02
7
54
• 14
34 55
56 19
12 00
23
5 04
32
01
7
45
. 26
34 58
56 10
12 56
March 1 8
13 12
38
34
2
07
• 27
34 48
56 42
12 26
19
13 29
38
30
1
47
• 29
35 07
56 0.5
12 29
20
13 11
38
29
2
11 De
c. 3
40 46
62 06
15 26
13 38
38
20
1
21
5
42 16
Cl 32
16 12
22
15 03
37
25
3
22
6
43 14
61 17
16 20
..
15 38
37
20
2
44
7
43 56
61 25
16 40
23
16 29
36
57
3
44
8
45 12
62 23
17 25
25
18 10
35
55
3
13
. 11
51 18
65 14
20 26
18 09
35
58
2
50
• 13
50 42
65 45
. 20 41
27
17 54
37
31
2
20
• 14
52 06
66 58
21 35
28
18 04
38
30
1
55
• 15
52 39
67 14
21 3'
30
17 59
38
46
2
24 1
TABLE OF THE VARIATIONS OF THE COMPASS.
87
Y\~
Lat.
Long,
Var.
Date.
Lat.
Long.
Var.
jjaic.
South.
West.
East.
South.
West.
East.
1833.
1834.
Marcl
12
51
30
57
54
18
42
Dec. 2
44 26
75 15
20
05
14
51
30
57
54
18
45
. .
44 29
75 44
20
15
April
16
41
58
64
35
17
00
3
44 48
75 02
20
30
17
42
18
64
19
16
47
.. 18
44 52
76 18
21
24
'Aug.
2
41
17
61
13
14
23
.. 19
45 09
77 48
21
09
. ,
3
40
50
61
30
i5
55
. .
45 10
77 51
21
53
4
40
53
61
50
16
27
.. 20
46 31
75 43
22
35
• •
5
40
53
61
30
16
44
.. 29
45 48
75 06
21
33
• •
6
40
27
62
00
16
16
.. 30
45 48
75 06
21
39
.«
22
39
10
60
41
15
07
1835.
• •
26
38
57
61
58
15
11
Jan. 6
44 30
74 20
20
18
..
30
38
57
61
58
14
56
7
43 58
74 20
20
36
; Sept.
1
38
57
61
58
15
25
Feb. 28
38 18
72 30
17
22
iNov.
25
34
53
56
13
11
45
March 1
38 18
72 30
17
54
1 • •
29
34
53
56
13
11
21
.. 25
35 11
71 45
16
34
iDec.
7
34
45
56
48
12
11
!
15
42
34
58
54
16
01
Note. — I:
ence to the
Galapagos Islands the 1
19
43
27
59
59
15
46
variations were all observed on
shore
• •
20
44
30
(ji
18
18
14
23
47
1 1
65
04
19
50
Sept. 12
4 42
84 48
9
27
1834.
.• 13
2 58
85 16
9
23
i Jan.
1
47
45
66
00
20
30
NORTH.
WEST.
i •■
7
48
10
67
30
20
50
Oct, 22
10
97 27
8
43
..
, .
48
46
64
24
19
18
FOUTH.
1 ..
8
48
47
67
15
21
23
.. 24
1 12
99 59
8
37
..
48
45
66
00
18
22
.. 25
4 32
103 56
6
10
"
9
49
10
67
15
19
47
. .
3 39
102 54
8
20
1 * *
23
48
20
66
12
19
56
.. 26
5 31
105 02
7
47
1 « •
48
26
66
09
19
31
.. 27
6 09
106 26
7
20
1 * *
26
52
07
68
05
21
40
.. 28
7 07
109 09
6
33
30
52
45
70
08
23
38
• .
7 47
100 24
6
03
iFeb.
11
53
18
67
15
22
00
.. 29
7 40
112 40
6
00
1
13
52
45
70
08
23
45
.. 30
8 21
113 51
6
00
. .
14
53
23
69
08
24
40
8 47
115 18
6
19
1
17
53
15
67
61
24
12
.. 31
9 38
)i8 20
6
08
i ••
19
54
00
67
15
23
05
Nov. 1
10 04
119 48
5
04
1
24
55
48
66
23
23
31
• .
10 27
121 16
4
35
■ April
1 1
50
15
64
15
19
52
2
11 14
123 59
4
54
12
49
47
65
16
22
50
■• 3
11 33
125 10
6
06
..
13
49
39
67
55
20
18
11 42
126 06
4
43
1
14
50
08
68
27
20
21
.. 4
11 52
127 21
5
38
1 ..
20
50
08
68
27
21
28
4
12 07
128 43
5
31
May
22
52
16
67
30
22
22
.. 6
13 11
132 11
6
20
June
13
52
51
11 ■
28
25
47
.. 27
17 16
150 02
7
57
Nov.
10
33
04
72
09
17
16
.. 28
17 22
151 52
7
59
..
18
38
08
77
12
17
27
> •
17 22
152 02
7
56
19
40
12
77
15
18
30
. .
17 19
152 24
6
45
• •
40
12
76
56
17
30
-• 29
17 26
152 50
8
52
••
• •
39
06
77
09
17
36
• •
17 26
152 51
7
46
••
20
40
30
76
45
18
58
• • • •
17 32
152 30
7
03
• •
40
30
76
46
18
65
... 30
18 20
156 31
8
11
••
27
41
42
74
00
19
09
Dec. 1
18 21
157 16
7
14
1 ..
30
43
46
77
05
19
42
2
18 32
158 01
8
23
1
• .
43
46
11
05
20
11
• • • •
18 33
158 13
8
33
I Dec.
I
44
22
76
42
18
54
.. 3
18 42
159 24
10
14
: ••
44
26
75
39
19
13
..
18 44
159 27
9
25
..
44
26
75
15
19
43
4
19 47
161 47
9
20
i
1
..
44
22
76
42
19
01
. .
20 17
163 05
8
38
••
44
27
76
33
19
57
•• 5
21 17
165 24
9
28
1
1
88
TABLE OF THE VARIATIONS OF THE COMPASS.
Date.
Lat.
South.
Long.
West.
Var. '•
East.
Date.
Lat.
South.
Long.
East.
Var.
West.
1835.
1836.
Dec. 6
21 51
166 37
10 27
May 15
27 33
40 52
21
10
7
22 41
169 01
10 56
.. 16
27 21
40 13
21
36
22 41
169 1
1 1 00
.. 17
27 45
33 18
21
43
10
25 42
177 6
11 15
.. 18
28 12
36 08
20
48
• > • •
26 30
178 26
11 15
•• 23
34 45
23 11
26
22
11
27 26
179 20
1 1 22
. .
34 53
22 33
28
59
• •
28 45
179 27
11 54
June 29
22 56
5 06
24
09
EAST.
.. 30
22 17
4 36
24
12
.. 12
29 41
179 08
13 24
WEST.
. •
29 41
179 08
13 16
July 8
15 57
5 34
19
43
• • 14
31 25
175 59
14 15
.. 16
13 02
9 07
19
56
.. 15
32 36
175 05
14 14
,. 18
9 52
12 34
17
43
21
35 00
174 00
14 05
. . 21
7 57
14 24
17
36
1836.
.. 24
9 30
17 32
15
56
Jan. 1
34 04
172 56
13 05
.. 25
10 07
18 58
15
57
4
34 40
165 37
13 26
.. 26
11 25
23 23
13
06
• • 7
34 29
1 63 26
13 28
.. 28
12 04
28 31
8
26
Feb. 21
42 53
141 45
8 21
• • ■ •
12 12
29 39
9
00
.. 22
42 48
140 40
7 37
.. 31
12 48
35 55
4
29
WEST.
. .
12 49
36 52
4
07
March 2
39 46
123 42
3 35
Aug. 6
13 09
38 30
2
•44
•• 3
38 20
123 36
2 50
7
12 44
37 54
3
18
• •
37 52
123 13
3 48
8
12 32
37 39
3
11
• •
37 54
123 11
3 02
•• 9
12 44
37 29
2
46
5
36 27
119 50
5 24
. .
12 40
37 00
4
16
.. 15
35 33
117 30
6 06
.. 13
8 03
34 49
5
11
.. 16
35 38
117 09
8 15
•• 15
8 03
34 50
6
09
..
35 34
116 16
6 31
NORTH.
.. 17
34 48
114 00
7 20
22
2 32
29 07
10
23
.. 21
27 28
108 50
4 59
.. 23
3 39
29 11
10
27
. .
27 27
108 47
5 19
.. 24
5 45
27 11
14
26
•■ 23
23 44
106 17
3 58
Sept. 4
14 43
23 39
17
02
•• 25
20 24
104 09
3 22
.- 9
23 43
33 50
15
26
April 1 3
12 21
94 04
04
. .
23 39
33 47
15
13
•• 16
13 17
88 13
18
.. 10
25 00
34 19
16
05
• • • >
12 59
90 33
57
11
28 07
36 00
17
06
.. 21
16 56
73 02
3 55
.. 12
28 29
36 18
16
25
. •
16 56
73 01
3 38
.. 13
29 59
36 23
17
54
.. 22
16 58
72 59
3 28
.. 14
31 04
35 57
18
28
. .
17 13
71 48
4 04
.. 15
32 03
35 05
18
22
i .
17 24
71 51
4 10
.. 16
35 38
31 32
21
34
•• 23
17 36
70 27
5 07
.. 17
37 15
28 5+
22
09
.. 24
17 52
68 30
5 39
.. 18
37 49
28 00
24
00
.. 26
18 35
63 34
7 36
.. 19
38 35
27 o3
25
21
.. 27
18 43
62 20
8 06
.. 25
38 54
25 03
23
21
~.
18 43
62 14
8 11
.. 26
40 35
22 45
25
00
.. 28
19 20
60 12
8 59
• •
41 28
21 31
25
38
May 13
25 42
46 42
16 16
.. 27
42 06
20 06
26
00
.. 15
27 30
41 08
20 37
•• 27
42 20
19 50
26
03
All the (
jbservations
for variatic
)n, afloat, were taken w
ith a very \
jood Gilber
t's compass,
placed oil a
itanchionab
Dvethe poop
where it was found, by t
rials in varic
us latitudes
to be
nearly
free from an
f effect of lo
cal attractior
1.
Err
ATUM in pag
e 65, line 4<,
of figures, /o>
•015 read 2
15.
APPENDIX.
No. 1.
Sir: March 19, 1831.
Accompanying this letter, I have the honour to transmit to you,
for their Lordships' information, six charts and sixteen plans of
harbours and portions of the coast of Tierra del Fuego, the results of
Commander Fitz-Roy's surveys in H.M.'s sloop Beagle, between
April 1829 and June 1830.
Their Lordships wiU, I trust, permit me, as the senior officer
of that expedition, to state the pecuhar nature and extent of this
service, as well as the complete manner in which it has been
effected.
On the melancholy occasion of Commander Stokes's death, I was
fortunate, through the Commander-in-chief Sir Robert Otway's just
discrimination of Commander Fitz-Roy's qualifications, on account of
which alone he was selected, to receive him as my colleague, in the
command of the Beagle.
In April I detached the Beagle, and Adventmre's tender, to complete
portions of the Strait of Magalhaens that were then imperfect ; and by
him, and under his superintendence and able direction, the Mag-
dalen and Barbara Channels through the Tierra del Fuego were
surveyed ; a considerable portion of the interior sounds on the
western coast was examined ; and the discovery of the Otway and
Skyring Waters was made, by Commander Fitz-Roy himself, in the
depth of the severe winter of that climate, and on which he was
absent from the ship thirty-three days in an open whale-boat.
In August the Beagle joined me at Chiloe, and sailed again early
in November following, with a view to examine the outward or sea-
n
'^
90 ' APPENDIX.
coast of Tierra del Fuego, from its westernmost extremity to the
Strait Le Maire, including Cape Horn and the islands in the
vicinity.
The difficulties under which this service was performed, from the
tempestuous and exposed nature of the coast, the fatigues and priva-
tions endured by the officers and crew, as well as the meritorious and
cheerful conduct of every individual, which is mainly attributable to
the excellent example and unflinching activity of the commander, can
only be mentioned by me in terms of the highest approbation.
For the results of the voyage, and the services of Commander
Fitz-Roy, I beg to refer their Lordships to their Hydrographer and the
charts herewith transmitted, which I hope vdll be satisfactory.
I trust their Lordships will permit me once again to express how
much I feel that Commander Fitz-Roy, not only from the important
service he has rendered, but from the zealous and perfect manner in
which he has effected it, merits their distinction and patronage ; and
I beg leave, as his late senior officer, to recommend him in the
strongest manner to their favourable consideration.
I have, &c.
Phillip P. King, Captain.
To the Hon. George Elliot,
Secretary of the Admiralty, &c. &c. &c.
No. 2.
Sir, London, May 23, 1831.
Enclosed is a copy of the letter sent to Captain P. P. King (then
commanding H. M.'s sloop Adventure), by the Secretary of the
Admiralty, relative to the natives of Tierra del Fuego, who were
brought to England in the Beagle ; and I have to request that you
will honour me by submitting the enclosed copy, and the purport of
this letter, to my Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty.
The proper season for the return of these Fuegians is now
drawing near. They have been with me fourteen months, and at
least five months more must elapse before they can reach their own
shores.
APPENDIX. 91
They have always expected to return during the ensuing winter
(summer of their country), and should they be disappointed, I fear
that discontent and disease may be the consequence.
Having been led to suppose that a vessel would be sent to South
America to continue the survey of its shores, and to explore parts
yet unknown, I hoped to have seen these people become useful
as interpreters, and be the means of establishing a friendly dispo-
sition towards Englishmen on the part of their countrymen, if not
a regular intercourse with them.
By supplying these natives with some animals, seeds, tools, &c.,
and placing them, vdth some of their own tribe, on the fertile
country lying at the east side of Tierra del Fuego, I thought that,
in a few years, ships might have been enabled to obtain fresh pro-
visions, as weU as wood and water, during their passage from the
Atlantic to the Pacific Ocean, on a part of the coast which can
always be approached with ease and safety.
If their Lordships should so far approve of these ideas as to grant
me any assistance in carrymg them into execution, I shall feel deeply
gratified, and shall exert every means in my power ; but should they
not be thought worthy of attention and support, I humbly request
that their Lordships will grant me twelve months' leave of absence
from England, in order to enable me to keep my faith vidth the natives
of Tierra del Fuego, by restoring their countrymen, and by doing
them as much good as can be effected by my own very limited means.
I have, &c.,
Robert Fitz-Rot, Commander.
To the Hon. George Elliot,
Secretary to the Admiralty, &c. &c. &c.
In June I received twelve months' leave of absence from England,
and made the following agreement with Mr. Mawman, a ship-
owner, of London.
No. 3.
Memorandum of Agreement made the eighth day of June, in
the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and thirty-one,
between John Mawman, of Stepney Causeway, London, merchant.
92 APPENDIX.
o-\vner of the brig or vessel called The John, of two hundred
tons register burthen, now lying in the London Dock, whereof
John Davey is Master, on the one part, and Robert Fitz-Roy, a
Commander in His Majesty's Royal Navy, of the other part.
The said John Mawman agrees with the said Robert Fitz-Roy,
in manner following : —
Tliat the said master, or such other master as the said John
MsLwraan shall appoint, shall receive the said Robert Fitz-Roy and
his friends and servants, not exceeding in the whole six persons, on
board the said brig or vessel, and proceed v/Ith them forthwith to
South America, to such one or two port or ports, or place or places,
as the said Robert Fitz-Roy shall order and direct, such port or ports,
or place or places, not to be north of Valparaiso ; and at the first port
or place, or so near thereto as the said vessel may safely get, to be
named by the said Robert Fitz-Roy, to land the said Robert Fitz-
Roy and his said friends and servants, or such of them as the said
Robert FItz-Roy shall require, and receive them, or such of them as
the said Robert Fitz-Roy shall require, on board again ; and thence
forthwith to proceed to the second port or place, or so near thereto as
the said vessel may safely get, to be named by the said Robert Fitz-
Roy, there to land such of them, the said Robert FItz-Roy and his
friends and servants, as shall not have been already landed at the
said first-named port or place, and receive the said Robert FItz-Roy,
and such other or others of the last-mentioned persons, as he shall
require again on board the said vessel, and forthwith proceed to and
land him or them at Valparaiso.
That the said Robert FItz-Roy shall be at liberty to put on board
stock and provender, at such places as may be agreed upon, port
charges and pilotage being paid by the said Robert FItz-Roy.
That John Mawman wIU find and provide the said Robert FItz-
Roy, and the said other persons, vnth aU suitable and proper cus-
tomary provisions, stores, wines, beer, and spirits.
And the said Robert Fitz-Roy agrees with the said John Mawman,
his executors and administrators, as foUows : —
That he will not detain the said brig or vessel at either of the
ports or places to be named by him, as hereinbefore mentioned, any
longer than shall be reasonably necessary to enable him and the said
other persons safely to land, re-embark, and finally land at the said
ports respectively.
APPENDIX. 93
That he will pay to the said John Mawman, his executors or
administrators, as the compensation for the agreement liereinbefore
contained on the part of the said John Mawman, the sum of one
thousand pounds sterling, to be paid down prior to embarkation.
As witness the hands of the said parties.
Witness, Robert Fitz-Roy.
W. H. WooLLETT. John Mawman.
W. Wackerbarth.
No. 4.
Salisbury Square,
My dear Sir, November 10, 1831.
Matthews left town this morning to join the Beagle at Plymouth,
being detained tiU to-day for the steamer.
We have provided Matthews vdth all such articles as appeared
to be necessary for him, and which could be most advantageously sup-
plied in this country. These had aU been completed before I learned
from Mr. Wilson that you are short of stowage. I hope, however,
they vdll not be found to amount to a quantity to occasion you
inconvenience ; and I think you will be of opinion that no part of
his outfit could, with propriety, be dispensed with, in case Matthews
becomes a permanent resident in Tierra del Fuego.
Mr. Wilson and myself concurred in opinion that a letter should
be addressed by us to Matthews, in reference to the undertaking on
which he is about to enter. This I have drawn up at Mr. W.'s
request, and hoped to have procured the addition of his signature
to it ; but a pressure of other engagements has compelled me to
drive it off tUl it is too late to send it to him for that purpose. I
have no doubt, however, that it expresses his general views on the
subject. If you should think I have dwelt too much on the religious
bearing of Matthews's future labours, you must kindly call to your
recollection that I am a Missionary Secretary, and could not
altogether divest myself of that character on the present occasion.
The letter is enclosed, and we shall feel obhged by your giving it
to Matthews, when he comes on board. You will, of course, take a
copy of it, if you wish to do so.
94 APPENDIX.
I much regret that we could not meet with a suitable companion
for Matthews. I trust, however, you will find him to possess many-
valuable qualifications for the undertaking.
With very cordial wishes for your safety and welfare,
I remain,, &c.
D. Coaxes.
To Capt. FiTz-RoY, R.N.
&c. &c. &c.
No. 5.
Salisbury Square, London,
Dear Mr. Matthews, Nov. 10, 1831.
The friends by whose means you are enabled to proceed to Tierra
del Fuego cannot suffer you to depart without offering to you some
suggestions and counsel with regard to your future course.
The undertaking in which you are about to be engaged springs
from the benevolent interest taken by Captain Fitz-Roy in the natives
of the island of Tierra del Fuego, with whom he became acquainted
during his survey of that part of the coast of South America, in
which he was employed by His Majesty's Government. Some of
them were brought hither by Capt. F. on his return home, about
twelve months ago. These individuals, through Capt. F.'s kind
exertions, were, during their stay in England, placed under circum-
stances to receive instruction in the English language, in the prin-
ciples of Christianity, and in some of the most simple arts of civilized
life.
These natives will be your companions on board the " Beagle,"
a passage to Tierra del Fuego having, at the instance of Capt. F.,
been granted to them and to you on board that ship, by the hberality
of the Lords of the Admiralty.
Some Christian friends having become acquainted with these
foreigners, and with Capt. Fitz-Roy's soHcitude to promote their
welfare and that of the tribes with which they are connected, have
Bupplied the means of providing the outfit, which was requisite to
APPENDIX. 95
enable you, advantageously, to enter on the work before you. Among
these friends you are especially indebted to the kindness and
liberaUty of the Rev. W. Wilson. His solicitude to forward Capt.
Fitz-Roy's views has been manifested toward these Fuegians, as well
as yourself, by his having had them under his immediate care at
Walthamstow for many months, in order to impart to them such
knowledge and information as seemed calculated to promote their
present and eternal welfare, and by contributing largely to the fund
raised for your use.
From what has been just stated, you wUl perceive the peculiar
obhgations under which you lie to Capt. Fitz-Roy and to Mr.
Wilson, and the interest which they both take in your undertaking.
You will especially consider yourself as bound to act under the
superintendence and direction of Capt. Fitz-Roy. We earnestly
recommend you to consult Capt. F. on all your plans and pro-
ceedings, and ever to act toward him with entire openness and un-
reserve. He is cordially desirous to promote the welfare of the
Fuegians, and is possessed of information and experience, authority
and influence, calculated, under the Divine blessing, powerfully to
advance the object you have in view. To him, therefore, you will
do well to refer on all occasions, and cheerfully conform to his
wishes.
We trust that, in entering on this undertaking, you have been
influenced by a sincere desire to promote the glory of God and the
good of your fellow- creatures. These are the ends which those
friends have in view who have assisted you, and these they trust
that you, by the grace of God, will ever steadily keep in view
yourself. The means to be employed for the attainment of these
ends may be summed up in very few words : it is to make it
your study and endeavour to do these poor creatures all the good in
your power in every practicable way. By evidencing this to them
in the whole of your spirit and conduct, you wHl gain their con-
fidence and obtain influence over them, without which you cannot
expect to succeed. But it is not easy, steadily and consistently,
to maintain a line of conduct like this. To enable you to do it, you
must be "strong in the grace which is in Christ Jesus," and this gi-ace
must be sought by diUgent prayer and a constant reading and
meditating on the word of God. Here lies your strength, and
hence, under God, must your success be derived. " Draw nigh to
96 APPENDIX.
God, and He vnll draw nigh to you." Walk closely -with Him, and
his name will be glorified in you. Pursuing this course, you will
be sure of enjoying His blessing, and may cheerfully leave all events
in His hands.
Your first object must be to acquire the language of the Fuegians.
To this you must apply with the utmost dihgence, fuUy availing
yourself for this purpose of your intercourse with the natives on the
voyage ; as, till this point is gained, you can hold no free communi-
cation with the tribes on the island. In prosecution of this object,
we recommend you carefully to note down in writing every new
word which you bear. These vocabularies you will, at your leisure,
classify and reduce to order, to form the basis of a grammar and
dictionary, and iiltimately of translations into the language. In
prosecution of this design, it will be requisite that you should
ascertain, if practicable, which dialect is most extensively used in
the island, if it should be found that there are more than one ; as it
is obviously desirable that you should fix that which is most ex-
tensively used.
In imparting religious instruction to the natives, you will make
the Bible the basis of all your teaching. You must never lose sight
of that great theological principle laid down in the sixth article of
the Church of England : — " That Holy Scripture containeth all
things necessary to salvation ; so that whatsoever is not read therein,
nor may be proved thereby, is not to be required of any man that it
should be beUeved as an article of the faith, or be thought requisite
or necessary to salvation." By this sound and salutary principle,
let the whole of the religious instruction which you impart to the
natives be governed. And we earnestly pray that God may give
you a mouth to speak, and them ears to hear, that they may so
" know the Holy Scriptures that they may be made wise unto salva-
tion through faith in Christ Jesus."
In your intercourse vsdth the Fuegians, you will bear in mind that
it is the temporal advantages which you may be capable of commu-
nicating to them that they will be most easily and immediately
sensible of. Among these may be reckoned the acquisition of better
dwellings, and better and more plentiful food and clothing. Conse-
quently, you will consider it a primary duty to instruct them in cul-
tivating the potato, cabbage, and other vegetables ; to rear pigs,
poultry, &c., and to construct a commodious habitation, &c. You
APPENDIX. 97
will probably find in this, as well as in more important things, that
example is the most influential instructor. You must therefore take
care to have a comfortable habitation yourself, furnished with all
necessary articles for use, and kept clean and orderly. You will
also fence in a piece of ground for a garden, and get it well stocked
with the most useful vegetables ; and also surround yourself as
quiclvly as possible with a plentiful supply of pigs> poultry, goats,
&c. lliis, indeed, you will find absolutely necessary for your own
future subsistence, as weU as with a view to the civilization and
comfort of the natives.
Captain Fitz-Roy will, we doubt not, afford you assistance in
selecting a proper spot for your residence, and raising a dweUing
upon it ; and also in procuring the requisite seeds and animals for
your subsistence, and for the successful prosecution of your work.
A very Hberal supply of European clothing, implements and tools,
ironmongery, earthenware, &c., is included in your outfit.
We trust that these general hints, with the information and assist-
ance which you may acquire from Captain Fitz-Roy and the books
■with which you are supplied, will suffice to enable you to carry on
your work with comfort and efficiency.
You W'Ul have the kindness to vmte to Mr. Wilson, with full par-
ticulars of your proceedings and prospects, by every practicable
opportunity, sending your letters to Buenos Ayres, or any other
point where they may be lilcely to get into a channel to reach
England.
In conclusion, I have only to add that Captain Fitz-Roy has very
kindly and considerately offered to bring you back with him to this
country, should circumstances, contrary to our anticipations, turn
out to be such that you should deem it unadvisable to remain at
Tierra del Fuego.
Earnestly praying that the blessing of God may rest on you and
your important and interesting labours,
I remain, truly yours,
D. COATES.
No. 6.
Memorandum of Agreement made this eleventh day of September,
one thousand eight hundred and thirty-two, between Mr. James
98 APPENDIX.
Harris, resident at the River Negro, and Robert Fitz-Roy, Com-
mander of His Britannic Majesty's surveying sloop Beagle.
Mr. James Harris will provide and furnish two decked schooner-
rigged vessels, with their rigging, sails, masts, and all other things
necessary for their use and safety, both at sea and in harbour ; also,
sufficient crews and two pUots, together with provisions for the said
pilots, their crews, and eight other persons.
The said Mr. James Harris hereby agrees that the said schooner-
rigged vessels, and all on board of them, shall be under, and obey
the directions of, the said Robert Fitz-Roy, or those whom the said
Robert Fitz-Roy may appoint ; and that the said vessels shall con-
tinue to perform this expressed service during eight lunar months
from the date of this agreement, unless the said Robert Fitz-Roy
shall end this agreement at an earlier period ; and the said Robert
Fitz-Roy shall be at liberty to put an end to this agreement at th
end of any month after December of this year.
In consideration of the above useful service to be thus rendered to
His Britannic Majesty and the pubhc, the said Robert Fitz-Roy
hereby agrees and promises to pay to the said Mr. James Harris, his
executors or administrators, the sum of one hundred and forty
pounds sterUng per lunar month, during the whole time that the
said schooners are employed as herein agreed.
As witness the hands of the said parties,
James Harris, Resident at the Rio Negro.
Robert Fitz-Roy, Commander.
Witnesses to the signatures and agreement.
J. C. WicKHAM, Senior Lieutenant.
B. J. SuLivAN, Second Lieutenant.
No. 7.
Robert Fitz-Roy, Esq., Commander of H.M.S. Beagle, Dr. to Mr.
James Harris, for the hire of two schooner-rigged vessels, &c., as
per annexed agreement, £1,680 sterUng. — 11th August, 1833.
Received from Robert Fitz-Roy, Commander of H.M.S. Beagle,
the sum of £1,680 sterling, in full payment for the hire of two
APPENDIX. 99
schooner-rigged vessels, &c., as per annexed agreement, dated 11th
July, 1832.
John Harris.
H.M.S. Beagle, at Sea,
15th Sept., 1833.
No. 8.
By Robert Fitz-Roy, Commander of His Britannic Majesty's
surveying ship Beagle.
You are hereby required and directed to take command and charge
of the two vessels, " La Paz" and " La Liebre," and of all on board
of them.
They are engaged by me upon the terms specified in the accom.
panying agreement.
With these vessels you will execute as much of the survey,
herein pointed out, as your means and other circumstances will
allow.
Between Blanco Bay and New Bay the sea-coast should be
accurately examined and charted.
Particular plans should be made of the entrances to False Bay,
Brightman Inlet, Union Bay, the Bay of San Bias, and the River
Negro.
The plans already made of Port San Josef and Port San Antonio
should be verified.
The sea-coast ought to be completed before you undertake any
examination of the interior waters ; and I have to request that you
will be cautious of information which maybe coloured or exaggerated
by individual interest.
As you are well acquainted with the excellent Memoir, drawn up
by the Hydrographer for our guidance, I need only recall your
attention to the accompanjdng extracts.
I wish you to be at the Bay of San Bias on the 10th of November,
and there to await my arrival.
Robert Fitz-Roy, Commander.
Blanco Bay, 19th Sept., 1832.
To Lieut. J. C. Wickham,
Senior Lieutenant of H. M. S. Beagle.
100 APPENDIX.
No. 9.
(Memorandum.)
H. M. S. Beagle, Blanco Bay,
19tli September, 1832.
It is my direction that you take command and charge of the hired
vessel " La Paz," and of all on board of her.
You will be extremely careful to keep company -ndth Lieutenant
Wickham, unless otherwise directed ; and you will obey his orders,
and assist him in carrying my orders into execution.
Robert Fitz-Roy, Commander.
To Mr. J. L. Stokes,
Assistant- Surveyor, H.M.S. Beagle.
No. 10.
H.M.S. Beagle, off San Bias Bay, Coast of Patagonia,
Sir, 4th December, 1832.
As you have already executed a considerable part of the service
pointed out to you in my order, dated September 1832, and are
ready for a more arduous task than I had supposed your limited
means could undertake, you are hereby required and directed to
examine and survey as much of the sea-coast between Port Desire
and Blanco Bay as time and your means will allow.
In the first instance, you wiU hasten to Blanco Bay, and dehver
the accompanying despatches to the Commandant of the Buenos
Ayrean settlement.
Afterwards, your route will be that which appears to you the most
proper for the verification of the charts with which you are fur-
nished, and for the execution of the above-mentioned service.
You vdli endeavour to pass the month of March in the River Negro,
and, if we do not meet sooner, you will look for the Beagle in Blanco
Bay at the beginning of July.
Should she not arrive there in July, you wiU go vsdth both vessels
to Monte Video. I have, &c.,
Lieut. J. C. Wickham, Robert Fitz-Roy.
Commanding the hired Schooners
"La Paz" and "La Liebre."
APPENDIX. 101
No. 11.
Extract from Falkner, pp. 61, 62, 63.
I shall here give an account of a strange amphibious animal,
which is an inhabitant of the river Parana, a description of which
has never reached Europe ; nor is there even any mention made of it
by those who have described this country. What I here relate
is from the concurrent asseverations of the Indians, and of many
Spaniards, who have been in various employments on this river :
besides, I myself, during my residence on the banks of it, which was
near four years, had once a transient view of one ; so that there
can be no doubt about the existence of such an animal.
In my first voyage to cut timber, in the year 1752, up the Parana,
being near the bank, the Indians shouted, "yaquaru!" and look-
ing, I saw a great animal, at the time it plunged into the water from
the bank ; but the time was too short to examine it with any degree
of precision.
It is called yaquaru, or yaquaruigh, which (in the language of that
country) signifies the water tiger. It is described by the Indians
to be as big as an ass, of the figure of a large overgrown river-wolf
or otter, with sharp talons and strong tusks, thick and short legs,
long shaggy hair, with a long tapering tail.
The Spaniards describe it somewhat differently : — as having a
long head, a sharp nose like that of a wolf, and stiff erect ears.
This difference of description may arise from its being so seldom
seen, and, when seen, so suddenly disappearing; or perhaps there
may be two species of this animal. I look upon this last account as
the most authentic, having received it from persons of credit, who
assured me that they had seen this water-tiger several times. It is
always found near the river, lying on a bank, from whence, on
hearing the least noise, it immediately plunges into the water.
It is very destructive to the cattle which pass the Parana, for
great herds of them pass every year ; and it generally happens that
this beast seizes some of them. When it has once laid hold of its
prey, it is seen no more, and the lungs and entrails soon appear
floating upon the water.
It Hves in the greatest depths, especially in the whirlpools made
by the concurrence of two streams, and sleeps in the deep caverns
that are in the banks.
J 02 APPENDIX,
No. 12.
Extract of a Letter from Thomas Pennant, Esq. to the Hon.
Daines Barrington. (Written in 1771.)
Dear Sir :
I now execute the promise I made in town some time ago, of
communicating to you the result of my \dsit to Mr. Falkner, an
antient Jesuit, who had passed thirty-eight years of his life in the
southern part of South America, between the river la Plata and the
Straits of Magellan. Let me endeavour to prejudice you in favour
of my new friend, by assuring you, that by his long intercourse with
the inhabitants of Patagonia, he seems to have lost all European
guile, and to have acquired all the simplicity and honest impetuosity,
of the people he has been so long conversant with. I venture to
give you only as much of his narrative as he could vouch for the
authenticity of; which consists of such facts as he was eye-witness
to, and such as will (I believe) estabUsh past contradiction the
veracity of our late circumnavigators, and give new lights into the
manners of this singular race of men. It will not, I flatter myself,
be deemed impertinent to lay before you a chronological mention
of the several evidences that will tend to prove the existence of a
people of a supernatural height, inhabiting the southern tract. You
will find that the majority of voyagers who have touched on that
coast have seen them, and made reports of their size, that wiU very
well keep in countenance the verbal account given by Mr. Byron,
and the printed, by Mr. Clarke ; you wUl observe, that if the old
voyagers did exaggerate, it was through the novelty and amaze-
ment at so singular a sight ; but the latter, forewarned by the pre-
ceding accounts, seem to have made their remarks with coolness,
and confirmed them by the experiment of measurement.
A.D. 1519. The first who saw these people was the great Ma-
gellan ; — one of them just made his appearance on the banks of the
river La Plata, and then made his retreat ; but, during Magellan's
long stay at Port St. Julian, he was visited by numbers of this tall
race. The first approached him singing, and flinging the dust over
his head, and shewed all signs of a mild and peaceable disposition :
his visage was painted ; his garment, the skin of some animal, neatly
APPENDIX.
103
sewed ; his arms, a stout and thick bow, a quiver of long arrows
feathered at one end, and armed at the other with flint. The height
of these people was about seven feet (French) ; but they were not
so tall as the person who approached them first, who is represented
to have been of so gigantic a size that Magellan's men did not, with
their heads, reach as high as the waist of this Patagonian. They
had with them beasts of burden, on which they placed their wives.
By Magellan's description of them, they appear to have been the
animals now known by the name of Llama. These interviews ended
with the captivating two of the people, who were carried away in two
diiFerent ships ; but, as soon as they arrived in a hot climate, each
of them died. I dwell the longer on this account, as it appears ex-
tremely deserving of credit ; as the courage of Magellan made him
incapable of giving an exaggerated account through the influence of
fear ; nor could there be any mistake about the height, as he had not
only a long intercourse with them, but the actual possession of two
for a very considerable space of time.* It was Magellan who first
gave them the name of Patagons, because they wore a sort of slipper
made of the skin of animals. " Tellement," says M. de Brosse,t
qu'ils paroissoient avoir des pattes de betes." In 1525 Garcia de
Loaisa saw, within the Straits of Magellan, savages of a very
great stature, but he does not particularize their height. After
Loaisa, the same Straits were passed in 1535 by Simon de Alcazova,
and attempted in 1540 by Alphonso de Camargo, but without being
visited by our tall people. The same happened to our countryman.
Sir Francis Drake ; but, because it was not the fortxme of that able
and popular seaman to meet with these gigantic people, his contem-
poraries considered the report as the invention of the Spaniards.
In 1579, Pedro Sarmiento asserts that those he saw were three ells
high. This is a writer I wordd never venture to quote singly, for
he destroys his own credibility by saying the savage he made pri-
soner was an errant Cyclops. I only cite him to prove that he
fell in with a tall race, though he mixes fable with truth. In 1586
our countryman. Sir Thomas Cavendish, in his voyage, had only
* Vide Ramusio's Coll. Voyages, Venice, 1550; also the Letter of Maxi-
milian Transylvanus, Sec. to Charles V. ; and in the first volume, p. 376,
A. and B.
t This account, as well as the others where I do not quote my autliority,
are taken from that judicious writer, M. de Brosse.
104 APPENDIX.
opportunity of measuring one of their footsteps, which was eighteen
inches long : he also found their graves, and mentions their customs
of burying near the shore.* In 1591, Anthony Knevet, who sailed
with Sir Thomas Cavendish in his second voyage, relates that he
saw, at Port Desire, men fifteen or sixteen spans high, and that he
measured the bodies of two that had been recently buried, which
were fourteen spans long.f In 1599, Sebald de Veert, who sailed
with Admiral de Cordes, was attacked in the Strait of Magellan by
savages whom he thought to be ten or eleven feet high. He adds,
that they were of reddish colour, and had long hair.t
In the same year, Oliver Van Noort, a Dutch admiral, had a ren-
contre with this gigantic race, whom he represents to be of a high
stature, and of a terrible aspect.
1614. — George SpHbergen, another Dutchman, in his passage
through the same Strait, saw a man, of a gigantic stature, climb-
ing a hni as if to take a view of the ship.§ 1615. — Le Maire and
Schouten discovered some of the burying-places of the Patagonians
beneath heaps of great stones, and found in them skeletons ten or
eleven feet long.||
Mr. Falkner supposes that formerly there existed a race of Pata-
gonians superior to these m size ; for skeletons are often found of
far greater dimensions, particularly about the river Texeira. Per-
haps he may have heard of the old tradition of the natives mentioned
by Cieza,^ and repeated from liim by Garcilasso de la Vega,** of
certain giants having come by sea, and landed near the cape of St.
Helena, many ages before the arrival of the Europeans.
1618. — Gracias de Nodal, a Spanish commander, in the course of
his voyage, was informed by John Moore, one of his crew, who
landed between Cape St. Esprit and Cape St. Arenas, on the south
side of the Straits, that he trafficked with a race of men taller, by
the head, than the Europeans. This and the next are the only
instances I ever met with of the tall race being found on that side of
the Strait.
* Purclias, i. 58. t Purclias, i. 1232.
J Col. Voy. by the Dutch East-India Company, &c. London, 1703,
p. 319.
§ Purchas, i, 80. || Purchas, i. 91.
t SeventPen years travels of Peter de Cieza, 138.
*» Translated by Ricaut, p. 263.
APPENDIX. 105
1642. — Henry Brewer, a Dutch admiral, observed, in the Strait
Le Maire, the footsteps of men which measured eighteen inches.
This is the last evidence, in the seventeenth century, of the existence
of these tall people. But let it be observed, that out of the fifteen
first voyagers who passed through the Magellanic Straits, not
fewer than nine are undeniable witnesses of the fact we would
estabhsh.
In the present century, I can produce but two evidences of the
existence of the tall Patagonians ; the one in 1704, when the crew
of a ship belonging to St. Maloes, commanded by Captain Harring-
ton, saw seven of these giants in Gregory Bay. Mention is also
made of six more being seen by Captain Carman, a native of the
same tovra, but whether in the same voyage, my authority is
silent.*
But as it was not the fortune of the four other voyagers f who
sailed through the Straits in the seventeenth century, to fall in with
any of this tall race, it became a fashion to treat as fabulous the
account of the preceding nine, and to hold this lofty race as the
mere creation of a warm imagination. In such a temper was the
public, on the return of Mr. Byron from his circumnavigation, in
the year 1766. I had not the honour of having personal confer-
ence with that gentleman, therefore will not repeat the accounts
I have been informed he had given to several of his friends ; I rather
chuse to recapitulate that given by Mr. Clarke,^ in the Philosophical
Transactions for 1767, p. 75. Mr. Clarke was officer in Mr. Byron's
ship, landed with him in the Straits of Magellan, and had for two
hours an opportunity of standing within a few yards of this race,
and seeing them examined and measured by Mr. Byron.
He represents them in general as stout and well-proportioned, and
assures us that none of the men were lower than eight feet, and that
some even exceeded nine, and that the women were from seven feet
and a half to eight feet. He saw Mr. Byron measure one of the
men, and, notwithstanding the Commodore was near six feet high,
he could, when on tip-toe, but just reach with his hand the top of
* Frezier's Voy. p. 84.
t Sir John Narborough, in 1670; Bartholomew Sharp, in 1680 ; De Geimes,
in 1696; and Beauchesne Goiiin, in 1699,
\ This able officer commanded the Discovery, in Capt. Cook's last voj-age,
and died off Kamtschatka, August 22d, 1779.
o-
106 APPEN'DTX.
the Patagonian's head ; and Mr. Clarke is certain that there were
several taller than him on whom the experiment was made, for there
were about five hundred men, women, and children. They seemed
very happy at the landing of our people, and expressed their joy by
a rude sort of singing. They were of a copper colour, and had long
lank hair, and faces hideously painted. Both sexes were covered
with skins, and some appeared on horseback and others on foot.
A few had on their legs a sort of boot, with a sharjD-pointed stick
at the heel, instead of a spur, llieir bridles were made of thong,
the bit wood ; the saddle as artless as possible, and without stir-
rups. The introduction of horses into these parts by the Europeans
introduced, likewise, the only species of manufacture they appear to
be acquainted with. All their sldU seems to extend no farther than
these rude essays at harness, and to equip themselves for cavaliers.
In other respects they would be in the same state as our first
parents, just turned out of paradise, clothed in coats of skins ;
or, at best, in the same condition in which Caesar found the ancient
Britons ; for their dress was similar, their hair long, and their bodies
like those of our ancestors, made terrific by M'ild painting. Tliese
people, by some means or other, had acquired a few beads and
bracelets ; otherwise, not a single article of European fabric B.p-
peared among them. These they must have gotten by the inter-
course with the other Indian tribes ; for had they any intercourse
with the Spaniards, they never would have neglected procuring
knives, the stirrups, and other conveniences, which the people seen
by Mr. Wallis had.
I should have been glad to have closed, in this place, the relations
of this stupendous race of mankind, because the two following
accounts, given by gentlemen of character and abihties, seem to
contradict great part of what had been before advanced, or at least
ser\'e to give scoffers room to say, that the preceding navigators
had seen these people through the medium of magnifying glasses,
instead of the sober eye of observation. But before I make my
remarks on what has been before related, I shall proceed with the
other navigators, and then attempt to reconcile the different ac-
counts.
In 1767 Captain Wallis, of the Dolphin, and Captain Philip
Carteret, of the Swallow slooj), saw and measured with a pole
several of the Patagonians who happened to be in the Straits of
AFfEXDIX. 107
Magellan during his passage.* He represents them as a fine
and friendly people, clothed in skins, and on their legs a sort of
boots ; and many of them tied their hair, which was long and black,
with a sort of woven stuff of the breadth of a garter, made of some
kind of wool ; that their arms were slings, formed of tw^o round balls
fastened one to each end of a cord, which they fling with great force
and dexterity. He adds : " They hold one ball in their hand, and
swing the other, at the full length of the cord, round their head,
by which it acquires a prodigious velocity ; they will fling it to
a great distance, and with such exactness, as to strike a very small
object." These people were also mounted on horses ; their saddles,
bridles, &c., were of their omti making ; some had iron, and others
metal bits to their bridles, and one had a Spanish broad-sword ; but
whether the last articles were taken by war, or procured by com-
merce, is uncertain ; but the last is most probable. It seems
evident that they had intercourse with Europeans, and had even
adopted some of their fashions, for many had cut their dress into the
form of Spanish ponchos, or a square piece of cloth with a hole cut
for the head, the rest hanging loose as low as their knees ; they also
wore drawers. — So these people had attained a few steps farther
towards ci^^Hzation than their gigantic neighbours ; others, again,
wiU appear to have made a far greater advance, for these still de-
voured their meat raw, and drank nothing but water.
M. Bougainville, in the same year, saw another party of the
natives of Patagonia. He measured several of them, and declares
that none were lower than five feet five inches French, or taller
than five feet ten ; i. e. five feet ten, or six feet three, English
measure. He concludes his account with saying, that he afterwards
met with a taller people in the South Sea, but I do not recollect
that he mentions the place.
I am sorry to be obhged to remark, in these voyages, a very
illiberal propensity to cavil at and invahdate the account given by
Mr. Byron, but at the same time exult in having had an opportunity
given me by that gentleman of vindicating his and the national
honour. M. Bougainville, in order to prove that he fell in with the
identical people that Mr. B)rron conversed with, asserts that he saw
numbers of them possessed of knives of an Enghsh manufactory,
certainly given them by Mr. Byron. But he should have considered
« Phil. Trans. 1770, p. 21. Hawkesworth's Voy. vol. i. 374.
o "i
108 APPEKDIX.
that there are more ways than one of coming at a thing — that the
commerce between Sheffield and South America, through the port
of Cadiz, is most uncommonly large — and that his Indians might
have got their knives from the Spaniards, at the same time that
they got their gilt nails and Spanish harness. But for farther
satisfaction on this subject, I have liberty to say, from Mr. Byron's
authority, that he never gave a single knife to the people he saw — •
that he had not one at that time about him — that, excepting the
presents given with liis ovra hands, and the tobacco brought by
Lieutenant Cummins, not the least trifle was bestowed. I am" fur-
nished with one other proof that these lesser Indians, whom Mr.
WalKs saw, were not the same as those described by Mr. Byron, as
has been insinuated ; for the first had with him some officers who
had been wdth him on the preceding voyage, and who bear vntness
not only to the difference of size, but declare that these people had
not a single article among them given by Mr. Byron.* It is
extremely probable that these were the Indians that Mr. Bougain-
ville fell in with ; for they were furnished with bits, a Spanish
scymeter, and brass stirrups, as before-mentioned.
My last evidence of these gigantic Americans is that which I
received from Mr. Falkner : he acquainted me that, about the j^ear
1742, he was sent on a mission to the vast plains of Pampas, which,
if I recollect right, he to the south-west of Buenos Ayres, and
extend near a thousand miles towards the Andes. In these plains
he first met with some tribes of these people, and was taken under
the protection of one of the caciques. The remarks he made on
their size were as follows : — that the tallest, which he measured
in the same manner that Mr. Byron did, was seven feet eight inches
high — that the common height, or middle size, was six feet — that
there were numbers that were even shorter — and that the tallest
woman did not exceed sue feet ; that they were scattered from the
foot of the Andes over that vast tract which extends to the Atlantic
Ocean, and are found as far as the Red River, at Bay Anegada,
lat. 40°. 1' ; below that the land is too barren to be habitable, and
none are found, except accidental migrants, till you arrive 9X the
river Gallego, near the Straits of Magellan.
" M. Frezier was assured by Don Pedro Molino, Governor of
* See Mr. Byron's letter at the end.
AITENDIX. 109
Chiloe, that he once was visited by some of these people, who were
four varas, or about nine or ten feet high ; they came in company
with some Chiloe Indians,* with whom they were friends, and who
probably found them in some of their excursions."
" Those whose height is so extraordinary as to occasion a great
disbeUef of the accounts of voyagers, are indisputably an existent
people ; they have been seen by Magellan, and six others, in the
sixteenth century, and by two, if not three, in the present."
Thomas Pennant.
Copy of a Paper transmitted from Admiral Byron to Mr. Pennant,
through the hands of the Right Reverend John Egerton, late
Bishop of Durham, after he had perused the manuscript of the
foregoing account.
" The people I saw upon the coast of Patagonia were not the
same that were seen the second voyage. One or two of the officers
that sailed with me, and afterwards with Captain Wallis, declared to
me that they had not a single thing I had distributed amongst
those I saw.
" M. Bougainville remarks, that his officers landed amongst the
Indians I had seen, as they had many English knives among them,
which were, as he pretends, undoubtedly given by me. Now it
happened that I never gave a single knife to any of those Indians,
nor did I even carry one ashore with me.
" I had often heard from the Spaniards that there were two or
three different nations of very tall people, the largest of which in-
habit those immense plains at the back of the Andes : the others,
somewhere near the river Gallegos. I take it to be the former that
I saw, and for this reason : — returning from Port Famine, where I
had been to wood and water, I saw those people's fires a long way to
the westward of where I had left them, and a great way inland, so,
as the winter was approaching, they were certainly returning to a
better climate. I remarked that they had not one single thing
amongst them that shewed they ever had any commerce Avith Euro-
peans. They were certainly of a most amazing size : so much were
* Frezier's Voyage, p. 86.
110 APPENDIX.
their horses disproportioned, that all the people that were with me
in the boats, when very near the shore, swore that they were all
mounted upon deer ; and, to this instant, I believe there is not a
man that landed with me, though they were at some distance from
them, but would swear they took them to be nine feet high. I do
suppose many of them were between seven and eight feet, and strong
in proportion.
" Mr. Byron is obUged to Mr, Pennant for the perusal of his
manuscript, and thinks his remarks very judicious."*
No. 13.
Extracts from " Diario de Antonio de Viedma, 1783."
Communicated by Don Pedro de Angelis to Sir Woodbine Parish,
F.R.S., and by him to Capt. Fitz-Roy, in 1837.
Los Indios todos son de una misma nacion en esta vecindad : su
estatura es alta, de dos varas k nueve palmos por lo comun en los
hombres, siendo muy raro el que pasa de esta talla. Las mugeres
no son tan altas, pero lo bastante con proporcion & su sexo. Todos
son de buenos semblantes, y entre las mugeres las hay muy bien
parecidas y blancas, aunque curtidas del viento y del sol como ellos.
No se encuentra hombre ni muger flaco, antes todos son gruesos con
proporcion a su estatura : lo que y usar las ropas del cuello a los
pies, habra contribuido a que algunos viageros los tengan por
gigantes.
Su idioma es gutural, y repiten en sus conversaciones una misma
voz muchas veces. No interrumpen al que esta hablando, aunque
su oracion dure todo el dia : comunmente habla uno de mas auto-
ridad 6 el mas elocuente. Las mugeres no hablan entre los hombres
sin ser preguntadas, y entonces solo contestando a la pregunta : los
que hablan mucho sin ocasion ni asunto, no tienen partido entre
ellos, ni se les oye.
El vestido de los hombres es un cuero de guanaco, zorillo 6 liebre,
* Extract from Pennant's Literary Life, p. 47 to 69.
APPENDIX. Ill
de dos varas en cuadro, el pelo para adentro, y la tez pintada de
Colorado, verde 6 amarillo : este los cubre desde el cuello a, los pies
con tal arte y manejo, que raramente se les ve parte alguna de su
cuerpo, excepto los brazos, y estos, cuando usan de ellos para algo.
Llevan ademas otro cuero muy sobado, atado a la cintura con una
correa por debajo de aquel, con que tapan el vientre y hasta la mitad
de los muslos, descendiendo desde aqui en punta hasta los tobillos.
En los pies se atan con unas correillas unos cueros de buey, si le
tienen 6 de caballo 6 del cuero de los guanacos grandes, formando a
manera de sandalias. Para andar a caballo usan de botas que hacen
de los garrones 6 piernas de los mismos caballos 6 guanacos grandes ;
y las espuelas son se madera, que labran ellos con bastante primor.
Se cinen la cabeza con una cinta de lana como de dos dedos de
ancho, tegida por ellos de varios colores, con que se sugetan el pelo
doblado por arriba, con las puntas al aire como plumage por el lado
izquierdo, dandose con la cinta seis 6 ocho vueltas, y colgando las
puntas de ella con unos cabetes de metal amariUo 6 laton. Para
montar a caballo sujetan el cuero grande con una correa, que se
rodean por encima de todo a la cintura, de la cual cuelgan las bolas
y daga, que son las annas que generalmente traen : y cuando
necesitan de los brazos para usarlas, dejan caer por las espaldas el
cuero sobre las ancas del caballo, quedandose desnudos de medio
cuerpo arriba, y hacen de este modo buena vista cuando van de
huida 6 en seguimiento de la caza, jiorque el cuero cubre las ancas
del cabaUo, y ofrece a los ojos el pelo que tiene por dentro de varios
colores. El aparejo de montar es a manera de un albardon, sin
pretal ni grupa, hecho tambien de cuero de guanaco grande, reenchi-
dos los bastos de paja fuerte. Los estribos labrados por eUos de
madera, y tan pequenos, que tasadamente cabe el dedo pulgar del
pie. Se ponen mal a caballo, pero son muy firmes en el, y lo mismo
corren cuesta abajo que cuesta arriba. El freno del cabaUo se com-
pone de un pahto, 6 hueso de canilla de avestruz, labrado con dos
perillas a los estremos, tan largo como ancha la boca del caballo, y
en dichas perillas estan sujetas las riendas y dos correitas que atan
en la barbada, con lo que queda seguro para que no se le saiga de la
boca. Las riendas son cordones de ocho ramales, de correitas de
cuero muy sobadas.
Las mugeres tienen el vestido de la misma especie de cueros,
puesto del mismo modo, con sola la diferencia de que sobre el pecho
112 APPENDIX.
lo sugetan, pasandole dos agujetas de a tercia de largo, heclias de
madera 6 de fierro, quedando las puntas del cuero colgando como las
faldillas de los capingotes, hasta lo bajo de la cintura. Las otras
dos puntas les cuelgan, y arrastran atras como media vara, estando
suelto, pero para andar se lo recogen y afianzan con la mano izqui-
erda, de la que no hacen mas uso que este, y el de cubrirse con ella
en alguna urgencia sus partes. Encima de estas llevan debajo de
aquel cuero una especie de mandil cuadrado, que cuelga hasta mas
de las rodillas ; de bayeta, pano li otro genero si le pueden haber, y
sino, de cuero sobado muy bien, el cual atan con un cinto de lo
mismo que las rodea el cuerpo, el que guarnece las de alguna auto-
ridad entre ellas, con abalorios. No llevan sandalias en los pies
como los horabres, pero cuando montan a caballo, calzan botas como
ellos. Llevan descubierta la cabeza, dividido el pelo en dos partes, y
de cada una hecha una coleta, que baja por las orejas y hombros
hasta el pecho y cintura ; cuya cinta es de lana parda de dos dedos
de ancho, guarnecida, si es muger rica, en dias de gala con abalorios,
y lo mismo las mugeres de aiguna autoridad.
Tambien se jjonen los abalorios en las agujetas con que sujetan
el cuero en el pecho, y en las canas de las piernas como pulseras,
y en el cuello por gargantillas de cualesquiera colores. En las
orejas Uevan zarcillos de laton, y lo mismo los hombres. Los arreos
de las caballerias en que las mugeres montan, que por lo comun son
yeguas, se componen de unos sillones de vaqueta 6 de zuela, (si la
pueden conseguir) muy bien hechos, claveteados con clavitos de
laton amarillo, guamecidos sus extremes con abalorios de diferentes
colores, (cuando los tienen) formando dibujos 6 labores a su modo
y fantasia. La cincha tiene tres argoUas, la una en un extreme,
y las otras dos en cada tercio una ; la evilla con que la abrochan 6
cinen es muy grande. El freno se compone de cabezada, bocado y
riendas : la cabezada es rica, guarnecida de abalorios, 6 de cuantas
cosas tienen 6 pueden adquirir al proposito : las riendas y el bocado
son del mismo modo que los que usan los hombres. Ponen a la
yegua un collar al cuello que cae hasta las rodillas, con cuantos cas-
cabeles y colgajos pueden conseguir. Estos arreos son para gala y
fiestas, pero en sus marchas ordinarias no usan estos adomos, y en
lugar de dicho collar ponen un cordon de lana azul o Colorado, de
un dedo de grueso, con el cual dan tres vueltas al cuello de la cabal-
leria, y les sirve tambien de estribo para montar en el sillon, donde
APPENDIX. 113
se asientan con la cara a la cabeza del caballo, recogiendo las piernas
arriba sobre las faldillas del mismo sillon, en una postura muy vio-
lenta y trabajosa, que solo la costumbre puede hacerles sufrir ; por
lo que estan espuestas a muchas caidas. Parar andar a caballo y
para montar guardan suma honestidad, no permitiendo que se les vea
parte alguna de su cuerpo. Las mugeres de alguna autoridad Uevan
en las marchas sombreros de paja, que vienen a ser un redondel con
cabo, sin copa, que se lo atan por debajo de la barba con cualesquiera
cosa ; y con esto se cubren del sol y agua cuando van a caballo.
El egercicio 6 ocupacion ordinaria de los hombres es cazar, para
mantener con las cames sus familias, y hacer del cuero los toldos 6
chozas en que viven, y todos sus vestidos : cuidan tambien de los
cabaUos que tienen, y trabajan todos sus arreos. Sus divertimientos
se reducen a jugar a los dados y la perinola, y egercitarse en su mode
de batallar y correr parejas a caballo.
Las mugeres tienen obligacion de guisar la comida, traer el agua
y la lena, armar y desarmar el toldo en las marcbas, y cargarlo y
descargarlo : sin que para nada de esto le ayude el hombre, avuique
este elle enferma, porque ha de sacar fuerzas de flaqueza. Ademas
de esto ha de coser el toldo, que es siempre de cuero de guanaco
grande, y tambien ha de coser todos los demas cueros de cama y
vestidos, que regularmente se componen de cueros de hebre, zorriUo
y guanacos nonatos, 6 recien nacidos, de los que hacen prevencion
y cosecha en la primavera, para con los sobrantes comerciar con los
indios del Rio Negro, por cabaUos, ropas, frenos abalorios y dagas,
que aquellos adquiren del comercio, € invasiones que hacen en las
fronteras de Buenos Aires : porque los indios, de que aqui se va
hablando, jamas han tratado espanoles hasta ahora, ni ban visto
ninguna de sus poblaciones, ni estas costas tienen fierro, metal, laton,
herramientas ni armas ; todas estas piezas y generos las adquieren
mediante dicho comercio. Para coser estas mugeres los expresados
cueros, usan de alesnas, que forman del fierro que les dan los re-
feridos indios del Rio Negro, y en lugar de hilo emplean nervios, que
adelgazan, segun necesitan, delas piernas de losavestruces.
El cacicazgo es hereditario, su jurisdiccion absoluta en cuanto a
mudarse de un campo a otro en seguimiento de la caza, que es su
subsistencia. Cuando al cacique le parece tiempo de mudar el campo,
el dia antes al ponerse el sol hace su platica a grandes voces desde
su toldo : todas le escuchan con suma atencion desde los suyos. Les
11^ APPENDIX.
dice se lia de marchar al otro dia : les senala hora para recoger los
caballos, batir los toldos, y empezar a marchar : nadie le replica,
y a la hora senalada todos estan prontos como se les ha mandado.
Las mugeres van por veredas que hay hechas para todas las
aguadas donde deben parar: son las conductoras de todo el equipage.
Los hombres, luego que las mugeres empiezan la marcha, se van
apostando en el campo para cercar los guanacos y bolearlos a la
travesia : porque son tan violentos en la carrera, que ningun ca-
baUo ni perro les puede alcanzar : cuando estan con las bolas
enredados, les sirven los perros para acabarlos de rendir. El mismo
cacique senala los puestos de la batida, por lo que, y en testi-
monio de senorio, el tributan parte de la caza : asi nunca corre, ni
hace otra cosa mas que andar de apostadero en apostadero : sus
jornadas mas largas son de 4 leguas. En llegando al destino que
esta asignado, arman las mugeres los toldos, recogen lena, y lo
tienen todo pronto para cuando los hombres vengan : estos al ponerse
el sol marchan a sus toldos, sin que jamas se verifique llegue a eUos
ninguno, obscurecida la noche. Si se ha de continuar la marcha
al otro dia, hace el cacique la misma arenga y prevenciones ;
y si no dice nada, ya saben que por entonces han de permanecer
alli, y esta mansion por lo comun es adonde saben que se ha retirado
la caza. Aqui, cuando el cacique ve que estan escasos de came, al
ponerse el sol, y en la misma forma que para las marchas, les dice
recojan los caballos a la hora que senala para el dia siguiente, lo
que egecutan sin falta : luego que tienen los caballos en los toldos,
les hace otra platica, paseandose a caballo, y senalandoles los apos-
taderos con lo que cada cuadrilla debe egecutar. Van con eUos
algunas mugeres para cargar la caza, porque ni aun este trabajo
quieren los hombres hacer : los toldos quedan armados, y en ellos las
restantes mugeres, muchachos 6 impedidos. Al ponerse el sol se
retlran otra vez a sus toldos, reduciendose a solas estas funciones
todo el mando de este cacique, el cual por ningim delito castiga a sus
indios, aunque en los puntos de obediencia que van expresados jamas
se verifica le falten a ella. Cuando quiere hacer guerra a sus vecinos,
6 a algunos otros de que hayan recibido agravio, ha de ser con apro-
bacion de su indios principales, para lo cual se juntan en el toldo del
cacique : este pondera y explica los agravios y modo de vengarlos ;
fuerzas, facilidad 6 inconvenientes que hay en hacer la guerra. Los
de la junta confieren sobre el asunto, y aprueban 6 reiirueban lo
APPENDIX. 115
propuesto por el cacique: este no fee agravia. La guerra, por lo
regular, se aprueba, y solo ventilan el modo de hacerla, y cuando ; y
suele tardar esta resolucion algunos dias. Luego que estan con-
venidos en salir a campafia, el cacique tres noches seguidas desde su
toldo a grandes voces leshace saber k todos los indios la declaracion de
la guerra, el tiempo para cuando esta resuelta, la forma en que ha de
hacerseenemigoscontra'quien, ysu motivo; avisan que estenprevenidos,
Una de las principales causas que tienen para declarar guerra es,
que como cada cacique tiene seSalado el terreno de su jurisdiccion,
no puede ninguno de sus indios entrar en el terreno de otro sin pedirle
licencia para ello. El indio que vk a pedirla ha de hacer tres huma-
radas, y hasta que le correspondan con otras tres no puede llegar a
los toldos : en ellos da razon a aquel cacique del motive que le trae,
ya sea de paso, 6 ya porque pretenda permanecer alli. Si al
cacique le parece, consiente en su pretension, y si no, le manda
salir inmediatamente de sus terrenos y dominios. Si el indio
va como embajador de su cacique 6 de otros indios, bien pidiendo
paso por aquel terreno, 6 bien para comerciar con eUos 6 para visi-
tarlos, se le senala por el cacique el tiempo, y por donde deben entrar,
camino que han de tomar para seguir su viage, 6 terreno que han de
ocupar donde hagan su comercio. Luego hacen sus tres humaradas,
y en habiendoles correspondido los indios del terreno, entran todos
en este, y a cosa de una legua de la tolderia, se detienen todos los
hombres, y pasando adelante las mugeres y criaturas, arman sus
toldos a donde se les senala, y en estandolo, todos llegan a ellos los
hombres. Nadie sale a recibirlos, quedandose asi a la vista unos de
otros, hasta que despues de mucho rato va el cacique, 6 cualquiera
otro que haga cabeza entre los forasteros, k visitar y cumplimentar
al del pais, que le recibe en su toldo acompanado de sus principales
indios, que acuden alli luego para cortejar al forastero. Esta visita
suele durar todo un dia, porque como cada uno habla sin que nadie
le interrumpa, si el forastero trae muchas noticias y quiere enterarse
de las del pais, suele durar la oracion de cada uno, dos 6 tres horas,
y aun mas, porque tambien repiten muchas veces ciertas voces. El
que oye, y los demas estan con grande atencion, diciendo con fre-
cuencia, a, a, que quiere decir si, si ; y con ninguna otra voz inter-
rumpen al que habla. En estas juntas se hacen las alianzas, se
otorgan amistades ampUas, y otros contratos, acuerdos 6 convenios,
para todo lo cual tienen los caciques facultades absolutas. Cuando
116 A1>1>ENDIX.
para entrar en terreno 6 tolderia agena, no se observan las expre-
sadas formalidades, es senal de mala %, y en consecuencia se toca
luego al arma.
Tambien sedeclaran a menudo guerra por robarse algunos caballos,
de cuyas resultas quedan los vencidos k pie, y cautivas del vencedor
las mugeres mozas, y muchachos ; que k las viejas y los hombres no
se les da cuartel, como no lo consigan en la fuga.
El cacique tiene obligacion de amparar y socorrer a los indios de
su dominio y territorio en sus necesidades, y por lo tal es mas
estimado, tiene mas partido entre ellos, y mas preferencia para
cacique el que es mas dispuesto a socorrerlos, mas galan, y mas
inteligente en la caza ; porque si le faltan estas calidades, se van a
buscar a otro que las tenga, dejandolo solo con sus parientes, y ex-
puestos a continuas invasiones de sus vecinos : bien que no pierde
aquella familia el derecho del terreno, y con el tiempo suele haber otro
que restablece la tolderia que su padre, abuelo 6 hermano ha des-
truido por su desgracia, 6 mala conducta. Cuando esta viejo el ca-
cique, y en estado que por falta de fuerzas no puede cumplir con las
obligaciones de su ministerio, deja el mando en el sucesor.
Los casamientos se hacen por compra que el hombre hace de la
muger al padre, 6 cualquiera otro a cuyo cargo esta ella, que segun
su calidad, buen parecer, conducta, &c., es mas cara 6 mas barata,
sin que pueda oponerse a la venta que celebre su padre 6 su tutor,
quienes no cuentan con su voluntad para otorgarla. Puede cada
hombre tener una, dos 6 mas mugeres propias, segun tengan haberes
para comprarlas, pero raramente tienen mas de una, a menos de ser
cacique 6 indio de grande autoridad. El que mas Uega a tener son
tres mugeres, y todo marido tiene facultad de vender las suyas d
otros, cuya segunda venta hace poco apreciable a la muger, y se da
por lo mismo en muy poco precio, comprandolas solamente los
pobres que se surten de este modo, porque carecen de medios con
que adquirirlas de primera mano. No hay tampoco inconveniente
en venderlas a cualquiera pariente, como no sea hijo 6 hermano de
la vendida, porque todos los demas grados los tienen dispensados.
Son muchos los casamientos que hacen de esta especie, por lo caro
que cuestan las mugeres solteras, las cuales, interin son mozas, y
tienen esperanza de casarse guardan la virginidad; pero en perdiendo
aquella esperanza, se entregan a todos. Las casadas, cuyo marido que
les trato su padre 6 tutor ha sido de su gusto, le guardan suma fide-
APPENDIX. 117
lidad, pero en las que no, hay muchos trabajos ; bien que el adulterio
no es delito, como no sea a vista del marido, y en este caso culpan
al adultero y no a ella : y tampoco asi se castiga, pues por medio de
algun corto in teres perdona este agravio el marido. El cacique
siempre tiene por muger una hija 6 hermana de otro cacique ; la
cual es la principal entre las demas mugeres suyas, y estas la sirven
en todo. Aunque se lialle cansado de ella no la puede vender, por-
que seria agravio y motivo de romper una guerra con sus parientes.
Todas estas cacicas manifiestan gravedad, hablan poco, se estan re-
cogidas en su toldo, ocupadas en algun trabajo correspondiente a
ellas, y no intervienen en las vulgares conversaciones de las demas
indias. Los hombres por ningun motivo castigan de obra a las
mugeres, excepto cuando estan borrachos ; y aun entonces el cacique a
la cacica preferente jamas le pega, aunque las otras Ueven todas golpes.
Las ceremonias del casamiento solo se reducen, una vez ajustada la
muger, llevarsela su padre al novio a su toldo, a menos que ella no
se adelante a irse con 61 sin que la lleve nadie, que en esto no hay
inconveniente. Entonces el novio hace matar uno 6 dos yeguas,
segun tenga de ellas, y convida a los parientes y parientas, amigos y
amigas de la novia y suyos, y comiendo todos de aquella came,
queda concluido el casamiento. Asi hombres como mugeres son
muy celosos y amantes de sus hijos, ii quienes luego que nacen atan
con muchas fajas de cuero que tienen preparadas, muy sobadas y
suaves, contra una a manera de tabla, que forman, porque no las
tienen, de palitos cruzados y atados, forrados con fajas de cuero, en
donde los tienen sugetos mas de un mes, dandoles el pecho sin de-
satarlos de alii. Asi dicen que se crian derechos, y efectivamente
temto ellos como ellas son todos muy derechos, tienen buenos cuer-
pos, y no se ve uno que sea cargado de espaldas. En quitandolos
de estas ataduras, los traen regularmente siempre consigo las ma-
dres, metidos en las espaldas entre su came y el cuero con que van
vestidas, con la cabeza sacada por el cogote de la madre. Cuando
van de marcha, hacen de cuero y unos palitos una especie de cuna,
atumbada y cerrada por todas partes, menos por los pies y la cabeza,
las cuales forran y adornan con bayeta, pano 6 lo que tienen, guar-
neciendolas con abalorios, cascabeles, &c., segun pueden, y las ase-
guran encima de las ancas del caballo, donde va la madre. Entre
estas gentes se ve que los muchachos nunca lloran, sino Uevan golpes
6 alguna caida.
118 APPENDIX.
Su religion viene a ser solamente una especie de creencia en dos
potencias ; la una benigna que solo gobierna el cielo, independiente
y sin poderio en la tierra y sus habitantes, de la cual hacen muy poco
caso ; y la otra a un tiempo benigna y rigorosa, la cual gobierna la
tierra, dirige, castiga y premia a sus habitadores, y a esta adoran bajo
cualquiera figura que fabrican, 6 que se hayan hallado en las playas,
procedidas de algunos navios naufragos ; como son mascarones de
proa, 6 figuras de las aletas de popa, y estas son las que estiman y
prefieren para sus cultos por suponerlas aparecidas. A esta deidad
dan por nombre el Camalasque, que equivale a " poderoso y valiente."
De estas figuras, cada uno que la tiene defiende y cree ser aqueUa la
verdadera deidad, y que las de los otros son falsas, aunque no llega
el caso de empefiar estas disputas, ni armar quimeras sobre ello,
porque se persuaden que la misma deidad vengara sus agravios con
las supersticiones que se figuran : creyendo que las enfermedades y
las muertes son venganzas de estas deidades, a menos de suceder en
los ya muy viejos, que solo entonces las tienen por naturales. Estas
figuras las guardan en sus toldos, muy cubiertas y liadas con cuero,
paSo, bayeta b lienzo, segun cada uno puede, y no se descubre a
nadie sin dictamen del santon 6 hechicero, que puede ser muger li
hombre. Tiene de continue dias en que debe egercer su oficio, can-
tando a la deidad al son de dos calabazas con chinas dentro, — mii-
sica tan desagradable como su misma voz. Tambien hace en esta
forma rogaciones, por que la deidad enferme 6 mate a los que tienen
por enemigos : pero esto suele salirles muy mal a los tales hechi-
ceros, porque si acaso tienen sus enemigos algun contagio, 6 muere
algun indio principal 6 cacique, procuran por todos los medios posibles
haber a las manos a los referidos hechiceros, y los hacen m^rtires del
diablo. Tambien deben cantar a la deidad estos hechiceros por los
enfermos de sus tolderias, para contradecir a los otros hechiceros sus
enemigos, y sino consigue el alivio el enfermo, suelen tambien los
amigos de este darle su merecido a aquellos, k lo menos quitandoles el
empleo, y tratandole en adelante como a infame : y si la muerte ha
sido de muger o hijo del cacique, suele pagar con la vida el hechicero
su mala cura, que solo se reduce al canto, porque no usan de otras
medicinas en sus enfermedades. Y por tanto tienen muchos contra-
tiempos estos medicos cantores, siendo pocos de eUos los que mueren
de muerte natural : pero siempre sobran pretendientes para este
empleo, porque tienen facultad de usar de las mugeres de los indios.
APPENDIX. 119
si ellas consienten, 6 de ellos, si el hechicero es muger. De estos
hechiceros casi hay tantos como familias, 6 como idolos, porque
regularmente cada cabeza de familia tiene su idolo en su toldo, y si
la tolderia se compone de cuatro, cinco 6 mas familias, hay otros
tantos idolos y otros tantos hechiceros 6 santones : en la inteligencia
de que una familia entre ellos se compone no solo del marido, muger
e hijos, sino tambien de todos los parientes del dicho marido, que es
cabeza y gefe de esta familia, en la cual viene a ser como un cacique
subaltemo, del que tiene el general gobiemo de todos, y derecho en
propiedad de aquel terreno.
Cuando enferma alguno en la famUia, acude el santon de ella
k cantarle al oido, con voces tan fuertes y desentonadas, y tan
desagradables, que eUas por si solas bastarian a matarle. Si se
agrava, convida a los demas de su oficio, y a todas las viejas, para
que le ayuden a cantar, a fin de que de noche y de dia no cese el
canto : pero nadie queda responsable si el enfermo muere, porque este
cargo es solo del hechicero. Cuando el enfermo esta ya enteramente
postrado, si es doncella y joven, le forman un toldo de ponchos,
separado de la tolderia, la ponen en 61, y alii es el canto mas fuerte ;
porque todas cuantas viejas hay, van a cantarle, y una de ellas arma
en un palo todos los cascabeles que puede juntar, y haciendo con
ellos gran ruido, da una vuelta al rededor del toldo de cuando en
cuando, a cuyo tiempo esfuerzan las de adentro su griteria. Durante
la enfermedad se matan yeguas y caballos, en ofrenda 6 sacrificio
al idolo para que mejore el enfermo ; pero esta ofrenda se la comen
entre el mismo enfermo y los cantores. Si el enfermo muere, bien
sea en el nuevo toldo de ponchos, siendo doncella, b en el suyo
mismo, siendo hombre 6 muger casada, se trae al toldo el caballo
mas estimado, lo aparejan, y poniendole encima todas las alhajas del
difunto, montan en ^l un muchacho, y le hacen dar una vuelta
al rededor del toldo, donde esta el cadaver : bajan al muchacho
y ponen al cuello del caballo un lazo, de cuyos dos cabos tiran dos
indios hasta que lo ahogan. Tienen ya prevenida una hog-uera,
donde van arrojando a quemar el aparejo y alhajas que Ueva el
caballo; y la persona que hace cabeza de duelo se va quitando el
vestido y cuanto tiene puesto, y lo va arrojando tambien al fuego ;
como tambien todos los parientes y amigos echan una prenda cada
uno, que al efecto traen de sus toldos 6 se quitan de su vestidura,
compitiendose en entregar al fuego las mejores, en que denotan mas
120 APJ'ENDIX.
obligaciones al muerto, 6 mas amistad, amor, &a. Luego desuellan
el caballo ahogado, y se reparte su came entre todos los que echaron
sus prendas al fuego. La doliente se esta en su toldo muy tapada
y sin hablar una palabra. Todas las mugeres parientas y amigas
las van a hacer compania, y para ello se cortan del pelo unos
mechones, de modo que les caiga por la frente hasta las cejas, se
aranan la cara, se sajan los carrillos, y lloran aunque no tengan
gana, con unos gemidos y estilo tan lamentable y lastimoso, que
parece se les arranca el alma. A la noche se entregan las viejas del
cadaver, y eUas lo entierran donde les parece, sin que lo sepan
dolientes ni otro alguno, porque ni se les pregimta, ni eUas pueden
decLrlo a nadie. Sigue el duelo por qmnce dias, con los mismos
gemidos, y se van matando cada dia caballos del difunto hasta no
dejar ni uno, porque todos sus bienes han de quedar destruidos sin
que puedan darse a nadie, ni menos habria quien los admitiese,
sabiendo que eran del muerto, porque este es un sagrado para eUos
inviolable. Todas las lunas se repite un dia el duelo y llanto, y se
mata caballo 6 yegua si hay amigo o pariente que quiera darlo,
porque al difunto ya no le ha quedado ninguno. Cumplido el afio,
se repite el duelo por tres dias, con llantos, hoguera, arrojar en eUa
prendas, y demas ceremonias, cuantas pueden hacer para que se
renueve el funeral, como en el dia de la muerte. Despues de estos
tres dias, ya no vuelven a acordarse mas del difunto para nada.
Toda esta funebre pompa y ceremonias se hacen solo por j6venes
6 personas de buena edad y robustas, pues a los que mueren viejos
ni se les hace duelo ni se les Uora, ni se acuerdan mas de ellos,
creyendo que su muerte era precisa, y se contentan con matar en
eUa un caballo, el peor 6 mas desechado que tenga.
Se matan caballos por casamientos y muertes, por la salida de los
dientes a los muchachos, cuando comienza la menstruacion a las
mugeres, por cualquiera leve mal, por aplacar al idolo enojado, que
creen lo esta cuando tienen enfermedades, cuando les cuesta mucho
trabajo el tomar la caza, cuando otros indios los hostigan y no
tienen fuerzas suficientes para hacerles guerra, porque en este caso
aguantan las injurias que les quieran hacer : y toda esta matanza de
caballos 6 yeguas es la causa de no estar toda la costa poblada de
este ganado ; pues aunque las yeguas paren todos los anos, con
todo, como dejan pocas, no hay suficientes cabaUos para surtirlos,
sino fuera por los que los indios Pampas de Buenos Aires les
APPENDIX. 121
cambian por los cucros que les llevan cuando bajan al Rio Negro, de
que resulta tener los de San Julian menos ganado de este que
los del golfo de San Jorge y Santa Elena, porque no pueden bajar
al Rio Negro con la continuacion que estos.
Creen en la transmigracion del alma, y que las de los que mueren
pasan a los que nacen en la familia, en esta forma : el que muere
viejo transmigra el alma sin detencion, y por eso no se le llora
ni hacen sentimiento, porque dicen va aquella alma k mejorar de
puesto : pero la del que muere joven 6 robusto, queda detenida
debajo de tierra, sin destino hasta que se cumple el tiempo que
le faltaba para ser viejo, que entonces pasa al primero que nace,
y por esta detencion, en que juzgan esta comprimida y violenta, le
hacen todos los sacrificios al idolo, para que le de algun desahogo,
interin llega el tiempo decretado. Y son tan super sticiosos en esta
materia, que unos se persuaden es conveniente poner en el sepulcro
h. los difuntos alguna comida y aUiajas para que coman sus almas
y se diviertan, y otros lo tienen esto por ocioso, creyendo que el
idolo les dara todo lo necesario. Esta matena se gobierna en
cada familia segun el modo de pensar del embustero santon, que
se engana y los engana como quiere, sin que se repare en sus
inconsecuencias, aun cuando sus pensamientos y sus disposiciones
varien a cada paso. Estos embusteros les hacen creer que el idolo
hace gestos y habla, haciendolos ellos conforme les dicen que les
vieron hacer ; y aunque los mismos indios se hallen presentes al
tiempo que el santon descubre el idolo, y con sus mismos ojos
vean que es mentira, como el santon diga que hablo 6 hizo gestos,
basta para que ellos lo crean asi ciegamente.
Jiizganse incapaces de poder ofender con alguna de sus opera-
ciones a la deidad que adoran, y asi creen que los contratiempos
6 castigos que les envia, no es porque ellos los merezcan por sus
delitos, sino porque le da gana al idolo de tratarlos mal. Asi
la benignidad de esta potencia consiste en tener buenos caballos,
salud y paz, haUar mucha y buena caza, y lograr fidelidad de parte
de sus vecinos.
El niimero de indios que se haUan aqui establecidos, ser^n hasta
4,000 personas : ocupan el terreno de la costa que queda seSalado.
No pueden salir de el, impidiendoselo por el E la mar, por el N el
Rio Negro fe indios Pampas de Buenos Aires, y por el O y S la
Cordillera, imposible de pasar aqui por su altura, y por hallarse
P
Igg APPENDIX.
en todo tiempo cubierta de nieve, sin que se verifiqne la habitan
en estos parages ni aun las aves.
En sus batallas pelean a pie, dejando a las mugeres en custodia
de los cabaUos, y se ponen unas como camisas de hombre con
mangas cerradas. hechas de diez 6 doce cueros de venado, bien
sobados, qne no los puede pasar el sable ni la daga. En la cabeza
se ponen una especie de sombrero, 6 casco hecho tambien de cuero
de buey d de caballo, con cuyos resguardos procuran tirarse las
cuchilladas a las piemas por ser mas facil herir en ellas, cortando
las botas. Son muy firmes y constantes en la batalla, y no la
dejan, una vez que entran en eUa, hasta ser vencidos 6 muertos.
Usan tambien de las bolas, y todo partido que es vencido, ordi-
nariamente son muertos, porque se ensangrientan de manera que
ninguno huye i y esta es la causa de no ser mucho mas poblados
estos terrenos, porque las mugeres son muy fecundas, y padecen
muy pocas enfermedades.
Los toldos los ponen clavando en tierra, dos palos de dos 6 tres
varas de alto, y una y media distantes uno de otro ; al lado de cada
palo, y a igual distancia clavan otros dos mas cortos, y al O de los
seis, clavan otros seis mas cortos a la misma distancia, y al O de
estos con igual distancia otros seis de poco mas de media vara de
largo. Sobre estos diez y ocho palos echan el cuero con el pelo para
afuera, y lo asegiiran a las cabezas de todos los palos, de los cuales
cuelgan como cortinas de cuero por dentro, que forman las divisiones
segun las necesitan, atandolas de alto abajo £l los mismos palos a
manera de mamparos firmes : por afuera llega el cuero hasta el suelo
por el NO y S, dejandole siempre la puerta al E de toda la anchura
del toldo, el cual queda como si fuese una cueva ovalada. A la
puerta no se le pone cosa alguna eon que cerrarla, sino en el rigor
de los yelos, que la tapan, colgando de eUa otro cuero. Las sepa-
raciones interiores las acomodan desde el centre hasta el fondo para
cada matrimonio, y los hijos y demas familia y parentela duermen
todos revueltos en el resto, que queda franco hasta la puerta,
uniendose aqui midos, viudas, solteros, solteras, parientes, criados y
esclavos, y en fin, cuantos dependen 6 tienen relacion con la caheza
principal 6 amo del toldo. Las donceUas aqui, sin embargo de esta
ocasion, procuran, como queda dicho, guardar su virginidad, mientras
APPENDIX. 123
tienen esperanza de casarse : pero si llegan a perderla se dan a cual-
quiera, y tanto ellas como las vtiidas pasan buena noche, acomo-
dandose indistintamente con el que primero se les acerca a dormir
con eUas.
Las querellas de los hombres dentro de una misma tolderia se
deciden entre ellos a moquetes, sin que puedan usar para ello de
otras annas, ni que se atreva nadie a separarlos hasta que ellos se
rinden 6 separan, y los demas estan mirando, celebrandolos 6
riendose. Las mugeres cuando rinen se estan muy asentadas, di-
ciendose palabras ofensivas, hasta que la una echa mano a deshacerse
las ti'enzas del pelo con mucha flema, lo que igualmente hace la otra
con la misma, continuando en los improperios : y en teniendo ambas
el pelo todo suelto, se lo sacuden, se levantan y se arremeten furiosas,
d^ndose buenos tirones de el, en que se quitan una a otra cuanto
pueden sacar, enredado en las ufias, y las demas mugeres y hombres
se las estan mirando, sin que se atreva nadie a separarlas ; hasta que
eUas mismas se apartan en estando cansadas, y se quedan tan
amigas de resultas de esto, como si nunca hubiesen renido, per-
maneciendo todo aquel dia con el pelo suelto : y en la querella no
pueden darse como los hombres moquetes, ni tirarse a romper el
vestido, sine solamente el pelo, siendo de lo contrario corregidas de
las circunstantes espectadoras. En tiempos de duelo, en marchas,
en dias de mucho viento, muchos frios 6 heladas, se pintan el rostro
de negro o morado, tanto hombres como mugeres, para que no se
les corte el cutis.
Generalmente tienen estos indios indole muy dulce 6 inocente, y
me tomaron tanto afecto y trataron con tanta senciUez, principal-
mente el cacique de San Julian, que si hubieramos tenido caballos
bastantes, pienso no quedaria un palmo de aqueUos terrenos que no
pudiese registrar en su compaiiia.
Antonio De Viedma,
Buenos Aires,
10 de Diciembre de 178.3.
p2
124 APPENDIX.
No. 14.
Extract from Byron's Narrative of the Loss of the "Wager.
" These people* were of a small stature, very swarthy, having long,
black, coarse hair, hanging over their faces. It was evident, from
their great surprise, and every part of their behaviour, as well as
their not having one thing in their possession which could be derived
from white people, that they had never seen such. Their clothing was
nothing but a bit of some beast's skin about their waists, and some-
thing woven from feathers over the shoulders ; and as they uttered
no word of any language we had ever heard, nor had any method of
making themselves understood, we presimied they could have had no
intercourse vdth Europeans. These savages, who, upon their de-
parture, left us a few muscles, returned in two days, and surprised
us by bringing three sheep." . . . . "At this interview we
bartered with them for a dog or two, which we roasted and eat."
" In one of my walks, seeing a very large bird of prey upon an
eminence, I endeavoured to come upon it unperceived with my gun,
by means of the woods which lay at the back of that eminence ; but,
when I had proceeded so far in the wood as to think I was in a line
with it, I heard a growUng close by me, which made me think it
advisable to retire as soon as possible : the woods were so gloomy I
could see nothing ; but, as I retired, this noise followed me close till
I had got out of them. Some of our men did assure me, that they
had seen a very large beast in the woods ; but their description of it
was too imperfect to be rehed upon."t
" The first night we put into a good harbour, a few leagues to the
southward of Wager Island ; where, finding a large bitch big with
puppies, we regaled upon them. In this expedition we had our
usual bad weather and breaking seas, which were grown to such a
height the third day, that we were obUged, through distress, to push
in at the first inlet we saw at hand. This we had no sooner entered
than we were presented with a view of a fine bay, in which, having
secured the barge, we went ashore, but the weather being very rainy,
and finding nothing to subsist upon, we pitched a bell tent, which
we had brought with us, in the wood opposite to where the barge
lay. As this tent was not large enough to contain us aJl, I proposed
• Natives of the Guaianeco Islands.
t Showing; that the puma crosses arms of the sea R. F,
APPENDIX. 125
to four of the people to go to the end of the bay, about two miles
distant from the bell tent, to occupy the skeleton of an old Indian
wigwam, which I had discovered in a walk that way upon our first
landing. This we covered to windward with sea-weed ; and, lighting
a fire, laid ourselves down in hopes of finding a remedy for our
hunger in sleep ; but we had not long composed ourselves before one
of our company was disturbed by the blowing of some animal at his
face ; and, upon opening his eyes, was not a little astonished to see
by the glimmering of the fire, a large beast standing over him. He
had presence of mind enough to snatch a brand from the fire, which
was now very low, and thrust it at the nose of the animal, who
thereupon made off." . . . . "In the morning, we were not
a little anxious to know how our companions had fared ; and this
anxiety was increased upon om: tracing the footsteps of the beast in
the sand, in a direction towards the bell tent. The impression was
deep and plain, of a large round foot well furnished vnth. claws.
Upon acquainting the people in the tent with the circumstances of
our story, we found that they too had been visited by the same un-
welcome guest, which they had driven away by much the same ex-
pedient. "We now returned from this cruise, with a strong gale, to
Wager's Island ; here we soon discovered, by the quarters of dogs
hanging up, that the Indians had brought a fresh supply to our
market. Upon inquiry, we found that there had been six canoes of
them, who, among other methods of taking fish, had taught their dogs
to drive the fish into a comer of some pond, or lake, from whence they
were easily taken out by the skill and address of these savages."
" Upon returning up the Lagoon,* we were so fortunate as to kill
some seal, which we boiled and laid in the boat for sea-stock. While
we were ranging along-shore in detached parties, in quest of this
and whatever other eatable might come in our way, oiu- surgeon,
who was then by himself, discovered a pretty large hole, wliich
seemed to lead to some den, or repository, within the rocks. It was
not so rude, or natural, but that there were some signs of its having
been cleared and made more accessible by industry. The surgeon
for some time hesitated whether he should venture in, from his un-
certainty as to the reception he might meet with from any inha-
bitant ; but his curiosity getting the better of his fears, he deter-
mined to go in ; which he did upon his hands and knees, as the
* HoUoway Sound — near Port Otway.
126
APPENDIX.
passage was too low for him to enter otherwise. After having pro-
ceeded a considerable way thus, he arrived at a spacious chamber ;
but whether hollowed out by hands, or natural, he could not be
positive. The light into this chamber was conveyed through a hole
at the top ; in the midst was a kind of bier, made of sticks laid
crossways, supported by props about five feet in height. Upon this
bier, five or six bodies were extended, which, in appearance, had been
deposited there a long time ; but had suffered no decay or diminu-
tion. They were without covering, and the flesh of these bodies was
become perfectly dry and hard ; which, whether done by any art or
secret the savages may be possessed of, or occasioned by any drying
virtue in the air of the cave, could not be guessed. Indeed, the sur-
geon finding nothing there to eat, which was the chief inducement
for his creeping into the hole, did not amuse himself with long dis-
quisitions, or make that accurate examination which he would have
done at another time ; but, crawling out as he came in, he went and
told the first he met of what he had seen. Some had the curiosity
to go in lilcevidse. I had forgot to mention that there was another
range of bodies, deposited in the same manner, upon another plat-
form under the bier. Probably this was the biurial-place of their
great men, called caciques ; but from whence they could be brought,
we were utterly at a loss to conceive, there being no traces of any
Indian settlement hereabout. We liad seen no savage since we left
the island, or observed any marks in the coves or bays to the north-
ward, where we had touched, such as lire-places, or old wigwams,
which they never fail of leaving behind them ; and it is very pro-
bable, from the violent seas that are always beating upon this coast,
its deformed aspect, and the very swampy soil that every where
borders upon it, that it is little frequented."
" A few days after our return, the mystery of the nailing up of
the hut, and what had been doing by the Indians upon the island in
our absence was partly explained to us ; for about the fifteenth day
after there came a party of Indians to the island in two canoes,
who were not a httle surprised to find us here again. Among these
was an Indian of the tribe of the Chonos, who live in the neighbour-
hood of Chiloe. He talked the Spanish language, but with that
savage accent which renders it almost unintelhgible to any but those
who are adepts in that language. He was likewise a cacique, or
APPENDIX. 1S7
leading man of his tribe, •which authority was confirmed to him by
the Spaniards ; for he carried the usual badge and mark of distinc-
tion by which the Spaniards and their dependents hold their military
and civil employments, which is a stick with a silver head."
" This report of our shipwreck (as we supposed) having reached
the Chonos by means of the intermediate tribes, v/hich handed it to
■one another, from those Indians who visited us ; this cacique was
•either sent to learn the truth of the rumour, or, having first got the
intelligence, set out with a view of making some advantage of the
wreck,"
" Having understood my necessities, they (the two women) talked
together some httle time ; after which, getting up, they both went
out, taking with them a couple of dogs, which they train to assist
them in fishing. After an hour's absence, they came in trembling
with cold, and their hair streaming %Yith water, and brought two
iish, which, having broiled, they gave me the largest share; and
then we all laid down, as before, to rest."
" After rovnng some time, they (the women) gained such an
offing as they required, where the water was about eight or ten
fathoms deep, and there lay upon their oars. And now the youngest
of the two women, talking a basket in her mouth, jumped overboard,
and diving to the bottom, continued imder water an amazing time ;
when she had filled the basket with sea-eggs, she came up to the boat-
side, and delivering it so filled to the other women in the boat, they
took out the contents, and returned it to her. The diver then, after
having taken a short time to breathe, went dovra and up again, with
the same success ; and so several times for the space of half an hour.
It seems as if Providence had endued this people with a kind of
amphibious nature, as the sea is the only source from whence almost
all their subsistence is derived. This element, too, being here
very boisterous, and falling with a most hea\y surf upon a rugged
coast, very little, except some seal, is to be got any where but in the
quiet bosom of the deep. What occasions this reflection is, the early
propensity I had so frequently observed in the children of these
savages to this occupation, who, even at the age of three years,
might be seen crawling upon their hands and linees among the rocks
128 APPENDIX.
and breakers, from which they would tumble themselves into the
sea, without regard to the cold, which is often intense, and showing
no fear of the noise and roaring of the surf."
" The water was at this time extremely cold, and when the divers
got into the boats, they seemed greatly benumbed ; and it is usual
with them, after this exercise, if they are near enough to their wig-
wams, to run to the fire, to which presenting one side, they rub and
chafe it for some time ; then turning the other, use it in the same
manner, till the circulation of the blood is restored. This practice,
if it has no worse effect, must occasion their being more susceptible
of the impressions of cold than if they waited the gradual advances
of their natural warmth in the open air. I leave it to the decision of
the gentlemen of the faculty, whether this too hasty approach to the
fire may not subject them to a disorder I observed among them,
called the elephantiasis, or swelling of the legs. The divers having
returned to their boats, we continued to row tiU towards the evening,
when we landed upon a low point. As soon as the canoes were
hauled up, they employed themselves in erecting their wigwams,
.which they despatch with great address and quickness. I still en-
joyed the protection of my tw'o good Indian women, who made me
their guest here as before. They first regaled me with sea-eggs, and
then went out upon another kind of fishery, by the means of dogs
and nets. These dogs are a cur-Uke looking animal, but very
sagacious, and easily trained to this business. ITiough, in appear-
ance, an vincomfortable sort of sport, yet they engage in it readily,
seem to enjoy it much, and express their eagerness by barking
every time they raise their heads above the water to breathe. The
net is held by two Indians, who get into the water ; then the dogs,
talving a large compass, dive after the fish, and drive them into the
net ; but it is only in particular places that the fish are taken in tliis
manner."
" I now understood that the two Indian women with whom I
sojourned were wives to this chieftain, though one was young enough
to be his daughter ; and as far as I could learn, did really stand in
the different relations to him both- of daughter and vdfe. It was
easy to be perceived that aU did not go well between them at this
time ; either that he was not satisfied with the answers they returned
APPENDIX. 129
him to his questions, or that he suspected some misconduct on their
side ; for, presently after, breaking out into savage fury, he took the
young one up in his arms, and threw her with violence against the
stones ; but his brutal resentment did not stop here, he beat her
afterwards in a cruel manner. I could not see this treatment of my
benefactress vnthout the highest concern for her, and rage against
the author of it ; especially as the natural jealousy of these people
gave occasion to think that it was on my account she suiFered. I
could hardly suppress the first emotions of my resentment, which
prompted me to return him his barbarity in his own kind ; but, besides
that this might have drawn upon her fresh marks of his severity, it
was neither poHtic, nor, indeed, in my power, to have done it to any
good purpose at this time."
" Our imtoward circumstances now found some relief in the
arrival of the Indians we waited for ; who brought with them some
seal, a small portion of which feU to our share. A night or two Eifter
they sent out some of their young men, who procured us a quantity
of a very dehcate kind of birds, called shags and cormorants. Their
manner of taking these birds resembles something a sport called
' Bat-fowling.' They find out their haunts among the rocks and
cliffs in the night, when, taking with them torches made of the bark
of the birch tree, which is common here, and grows to a very large
size (this bark has a very unctuous quality, and emits a bright and
clear hght, and in the northern parts of America is used frequently
instead of candle), they bring the boat's side as near as possible to
the rocks, under the roosting places of these birds ; then, waving
their Hghts backwards and forwards, the birds are dazzled and con-
founded so as to fall into the canoe, where they are instantly Imocked
on the head with a short stick the Indians take with them for that
purpose. Seals are taken in some less frequented parts of these
coasts with great ease ; but when their haunts have been two or
three times disturbed, they soon learn to provide for their safety, by
repairing to the water upon the first alarm. This is the case with
them hereabouts ; but as they frequently raise their heads above
water, either to breathe or look about them, I have seen an Indian at
this interval throw his lance with such dexterity as to strike the
animal through both its eyes at a great distance ; and it is very
seldom that they miss their aim."
130 APPENDIX.
" These Indians are of middling stature, well set, and very active;
and make their way among the rocks with an amazing agility. Their
feet, by this kind of exercise, contract a callosity which renders the
use of shoes quite unnecessary to them. But before I conclude the
few observations I have to make on a people so confined in all their
notions and practices, it may be expected I should say something of
their religion ; but as their gross ignorance is in nothing more con-
spicuous, and as we foimd it advisable to keep out of their way when
the fits of devotion came upon them, which are rather frantic than
rehgious, the reader can expect very httle satisfaction on this head.
Accident has sometimes made me unavoidably a spectator of scenes
I should have chosen to have withdrawn myself from ; and so far I
am instructed. As there are no fixed seasons for their religious
exercises, the younger people wait till the elders find themselves
devoutly disposed, who begin the ceremony by several deep and
dismal groans, which rise gradually to a hideous kind of singing, from
which they proceed to enthusiasm, and work themselves into a dis-
position that borders on madness; for suddenly jumping up, they
snatch fire brands from the fire, put them in their mouths, and run
about burning every body they come near : at other times, it is a
custom with them to wound one another with sharp muscle-shells
till they are besmeared with blood. These orgies continue till those
who preside in them foam at the mouth, grow faint, are exhausted
with fatigue, and dissolve in a profusion of sweat. When the men
drop their part in this frenzy, the women take it up, acting over
again much the same kind of wild scene, except that they rather
outdo the men in shrieks and noise. Our cacique, who had been
reclaimed from these abominations by the Spaniards, and just knew
the exterior form of crossing himself, pretended to be much offended
at these profane ceremonies, and that he would have died sooner
than have partaken of them. Among other expressions of his dis-
approbation, he declared, that whilst the savages solemnized these
horrid rites, he never failed to hear strange and uncommon noises in
the woods, and to see frightful visions ; and assured us, that the
devil was the chief actor among them on these occasions."
" Here I must relate an anecdote of ovu: nominally Christian ca-
cique. He and his wife had gone off, at some distance from the shore,
in their canoe, when she dived for sea-eggs ; but not meeting with
APPENDIX.
131
great success, they returned a good deal out of humour. A little
boy of theirs, about three years old, whom they appeared to be
doatingly fond of, watching for his father and mother's return, ran
into the surf to meet them : the father handed a basket of eggs to
the child, which being too heavy for him to carry, he let it fall, upon
which the father jumped out of the canoe, and catching the boy up
in his arms, dashed him with the utmost violence against the stones.
The poor httle creature lay motionless and bleeding, and in that
condition was taken up by the mother ; but died soon after. She
appeared inconsolable for some time; but the brute, his father,
shewed little concern about it."
" The first thing that the Indians did in the mommg, was to take
their canoes to pieces : and here, for the information of the reader,
itwiU be necessary to describe the structure of these boats, which are
extremely well calculated for the use of these Indians, as they are
frequently obliged to carry them over-land a long way together,
through thick woods, to avoid doubling capes and head-lands, in seas
where no open boat could hve. They generally consist of five pieces,
or planks ; one for the bottom and two for each side ; and as these
people have no iron tools, the labour must be great in hacking a
single plank out of a large tree with shells and flints, though with
the help of fire. Along the edges of the plank they made small holes,
at about an inch from one to the other, and sew them together with
the supple-jack, or woodbine ; but as these holes are not filled up by
the substance of the woodbine, their boats would be immediately full
of water if they had not a method of preventing it. They do this
very effectually by the bark of a tree, which they first steep in
water for some time, and then beat it between two stones till it
answers the use of oakum, and then chinse each hole so well, that
they do not admit of the least water coming through, and are easily
taken asunder and put together again. When they have occasion
to go over-land, as at this time, each man or woman caixies a plank,
whereas it would be impossible for them to drag a hea%y boat
entire."
" Quite worn out ^\dth fatigue, I soon feU asleep, and awaking
before day, I thought I heard some voices at no great distance from
me. As the day appeared, looking further into the wood, I per-
132 APPENDIX.
ceived a wigwam, and immediately made towards it ; but the re-
ception I met with was not at all agreeable ; for stooping to get into
it, I presently received two or three lacks in my face, and at the
same time heard the sound of voices seemingly in anger, which made
me retire and wait at the foot of a tree, where I remained till an old
woman peeped out, and made signs to me to draw near. I obeyed
very readUy, and went into the wigwam : in it w^ere three men and
two women ; one young man seemed to have great respect shewn
to him by the rest, though he was the most miserable object I ever
saw. He was a perfect skeleton, and covered with sores from head
to foot. I was happy to sit a moment by their fire, as I was quite
benumbed with cold. Tlie old woman took out a piece of seal,
holding one part of it between her feet, and the other end in her
teeth, and then cut off some thin slices with a sharp shell, and
distributed them about to the other Indians. She then put a bit
on the fire, taking a piece of fat in her mouth, which she kept
chevnng, every now and then spirting some of it on the piece that
was warming upon the fire ; for they never do more vnth. it than
warm it through. When it was ready, she gave me a little bit,
which I swallowed whole, being almost starved. As these Indians
were all strangers to me, I did not know which way they were going ;
and, indeed, it was now become quite indifferent to me which way I
went, whether to the northward or southward, so that they would
but take me with them, and give me something to eat. However,
to make them comprehend me, I pointed first southward, and
after to the lake, and I soon imderstood they were going to the
northward. They all went out together, excepting the sick Indian,
and took up the planks of the canoe, which lay near the wigwam,
and carried them upon the beach, and presently put it together ;
and, getting everything into it, they put me to the oar. We rowed
across the lake to the mouth of a very rapid river, whei'e we put
ashore for that night, not daring to get any way down in the dark,
as it required the greatest skill, even in the day, to avoid running
foul of the stumps and roots of trees, of which this river was fuU.* I
passed a melancholy night, as they would not suffer me to come near
the wigwam they had made ; nor did they give me the least bit of
any one thing to eat since we embarked. In the morning we set off
again. The weather proved extremely bad the whole day. We
• In March — April : beginning of autumn. — Caflo de Perdon ?— R, F.
APPENDIX. ISS
went down the river at an amazing rate ; and, just before night,
they put ashore upon a stony beach. They hauled the canoe up,
and all disappeared in a moment, and I was left quite alone : it
rained violently, and was very dark. I thought it was as well to Ue
down upon the beach, half- side in water, as to get into a swamp
under a dropping tree. In this dismal situation I fell asleep, and
awaked three or four hours after in such agonies with the cramp,
that I thought I must die upon the spot. I attempted several times
to raise myself upon my legs, but could not. At last, I made
shift to get upon my knees, and, looking towards the wood, I
saw a great fire at some distance from me. I was a long time
crawling to it ; and when I reached it, I threw myself almost into it,
in hopes of finding some relief from the pain I suffered. This in-
trusion gave great offence to the Indians, who immediately got up,
kicking and beating me till they drove me to some distance from it ;
however, I contrived, a httle after, to place myself so as to receive
some warmth from it ; by which I got rid of the cramp. In the morn-
ing, we left this place, and were soon after out of the river. Being
now at sea again, the Indians intended putting ashore at the first
convenient place to look for sheU-fish, their stock of provisions
having been quite exhausted for some time. At low water we
landed upon a spot that seemed to promise well ; and here we found
plenty of limpets. Though at this time starving, I did not attempt
to eat one, lest I should lose a moment in gathering them ; not
knowing how soon the Indians might be going again. I had almost
filled my hat, when I saw them returning to the canoe. I made
what haste I coidd to her ; for I believe they would have made no
conscience of leaving me behind. I sat down to my oar again,
placing my hat close to me, every now and then eating a Hmpet.
The IndiEins were employed the same way, when one of them seeing
me throw the shells overboard, spoke to the rest in a violent passion ;
and, getting up, fell upon me, and seizing me by an old ragged hand-
kerchief I had about my neck, almost throttled me ; whilst another
took me by the legs, and was going to throw me overboard, if the
old woman had not prevented them. I was aU this time entirely
ignorant by what means I had given offence, till I obser\'ed that the
Indians, after eating the limpets, carefully put the shells in a heap at
the bottom of the canoe. I then concluded there was some super-
stition about throwing these shells into the sea, my ignorance of
134 APPENDIX.
which had very nearly cost me my life. I was resolved to eat no
more limpets till we landed, which we did some time after, upon an
island. I then took notice that the Indians brought aU their sheUs
ashore, and laid them above high-water mark. Here, as I was going
to eat a large bunch of berries I had gathered from a tree, for they
looked very tempting, one of the Indians snatched them out of my
hand and threw them away, making me to understand that they
were poisonous. Thus, in all probability, did these people now save
my life, who, a few hours before, were going to take it from me for
throwing away a shell."
" One day, we fell in with about forty Indians, who came down
to the beach we landed on, curiously painted.* Our cacique seemed
to understand but little of their language, and it sounded to us very
different from what we had heard before. However, they made us
comprehend that a ship had been upon the coast not far from where
we then were, and that she had a red flag : this, we understood
some time after, to have been the Anna Pink, whose adventures are . ,
particularly related in Lord Anson's voyage ; and we passed through
the very harbour she had lain in."t
• Probably in the neighbourhood of the ' Estero de Aysen.' in lat.
45° S — R. F. '
t No — not through the harbour, but within^ twenty miles of it, I shonld
suppose. — R. F. V
APPENDIX.
135
No. 15.
In the foUowing^ fragment of a Vocabulary the vowels should be
sounded as in the English syllables, bah, bat, eel, bet, I, bit, no, top,
rule, but, hay ; and the consonants as in English, but giving to kh a
very guttural sound. One Fuegian expression, something lilie the
cluck of a hen, can scarcely be represented by our letters ; its mean-
ing is " no."
FRAGMENT OF A VOCABULARY OF THE ALIKHOOLIP AND THE
TEKEENICA LANGUAGES.
Also some Words of those spoken by the PATACoKLiN (Tehuel-het) and
Chonos Indiaks.
ENGLISH.
ALIKHOOLIP.
TEKEENICA.
York Minster's nanae
el'leparu
Jemmy Button's name
o'rfindemco.
Fuegia Basket's name
yok'cushla
Ankle
aciil'labe
tuppalla.
Arm
to'quim'be
ear'mine.
Arm (fore)
yiic'caba
dow'ela.
Arrow
an'naqua
te'acu.
Beads (necklace)
acon'ash.
Back
tuccaler'khitS
am'miickti.
Bark (as a dog)
stuek'sta
wo'ona.
Basket
ka'ekhu(or)klia'K
ka'ekhem (or) kiish.
Beads
ca'ecol
ah'kliJnna.
Belly
kuppudde
Birch apple
a'fish-kha.
Bard (little)
tow'qua
be'ghe.
Bite
eck'hanTsh
e'taum.
Black
fcal
Blood
shiib'ba
shiib'ba.
Baby
cos* he-
yariimate'a.
Boat
ath'le
watch.
Bone
osh'kia,
ah'tush
Bow
kerec-cana
why-an'na.
Boy
a/il-walkh
yar' annua.
136
APPENDIX.
ENGLISH.
ALIKHOOLIP.
TEKEENICA.
Break
ficca'n
iittergu'shu.
Brother
ar're
mar'cos.
Butterfly-
ktkee6w'l
yumerte'le.
Children
patete
yar'ham.
Catch
ca
tit'ta.
Chain
paru
Chest
j^a'bfshaciin'ne
cup'piinea.
Child
patete
yar'ham.
Chin
uf'ca
won'ne.
Cloud
tul'lu
Cold
ktshash'
iic'cowe.
Cheek
clit'khopca
ches'La.
Come here
yamaschun'a
Come
hab'relua
ah'e.
Cry
yelk'esta
iirra.
Cut
ciip'pa
at'kliekiim.
Cough
yilkea
utta.
Day
an'6qual
Dead
wtllacar'wona
Death
apal'na.
Die
vvillacar'wona
Sppan'na, or Spat'nJl. .
Dive
sko
Dog
sliil'oke
shi'lake, or eashiil'la.
Drink
afkhel'la
iiria, or alle.
Duck
ye'ketp
mah'e.
Duckling
wen.
Ear
tel'dil
uf'khea.
Earth
bar'be
tann.
East
yul^ba
yah'ciif.
Egg
ITth'le
herch.
Eight
yul'carame.
Elhow
yoc'ke
dowtlla.
Eat
luf'ftsh
at'tema, or et'tiima.
Eye
telkh
della.
Eyebrow
teth'liu
utkhel'la.
Firestone
catli'ow
Fall (to)
ah'lash
liip'ae.
Fat
Qf'ki
tiit'fla.
Father
cha'iil
ay'mo.
Feather
i-ish
ol'tuku.
Fright (to)
uth'lethal
che'ne.
Fist
iif'sheba
iik-ke.
Finger-
skiil'la
APPENDIX.
137
ENGLISH.
ALIKHOOLIP.
TEKEENICA.
Fire
tet'tal
piishah'ke, or posh'aky.
Five
cup'aspa.
Fish
ap'piiWn, or appuff in
ap'pur'ma (small fish).
Fish (to)
ker'riksta
ap'piirma.
Fly (to)
ah-lash
miir'ra.
Flower
yik'sta
a'neaca.
Fly (a)
tomat'tola
Foot
ciit'lTculcul
eoeea.
Forehead
tel'che
oshcar'she.
Four
Tn'adaba
carga.
Fresh water
shea'ma, or shaa'mS.
Girl
an'na
yariimatea.
Guanaco
harmaiir
armaua.
Go away
lis'hae
khat'drTsh.
Good
ly'Tp
Gown
uckwul
archi.
Grass
kitta're
hianam'ba.
Grey
owkush.
Grease
kTn'
kune.
Grandmother
caushilKsh
ghuluonna.
Grandfather
cow'ish, or cafiwTsh
ghu'luvvan.
Grand daughter
yarriikepa
Grass
khall
Hair
ay'u
osh'ta.
Hand
yuc'caba
mar'po.
Head
of'chocka
luk'abe.
Hear (to)
tel'lTsh
miir'ra
Heavy
pah'ciil
hah'shu
Humming-bird
amowa'ra,
iit'tush.
Hip
col'khistal
wash'niie.
Hog
tethl
Hot
ket'khtk
lick'hula.
House
hut
ukh'ral.
Hut
aht
iick'a.
Husband'
ar'rtk
dugu.
Ice
atkhur'ska
ye atea.
Jump
ah'culu
Kelp
ut'cha.
Kill
ttf'tucla
iit'tul.
Knee
tiil'dul
tid'lapua.
Knife
afta're, or aftai'Ia
tet'lowal, or teciew'el.
Knuckles
ah'telis'habe
yash.
Land
champth
o'she
138
APPENDIX.
ENGLISH.
ALIKHOOLIP.
TEKEENICA.
Large
ovv'quel
o'olu.
Laugh (to)
feay'l
tush'ca.
Leaf (fall of)
ooshS.
Lean (of seal)
tildum
iindiippa.
Leg
cut
hie'ta.
Little
ylco'-at
yuc'ca.
Look
iirruks-i.
Man (Vir.)
acktntsh
oha.
Many men
ackliTnesh
owey.
Man (old)
ker'owKsh
ciit'tSas.
Moon
con'ak'ho
anSco.
Moon
cuunequa
han'niika.
Moon (full)
ow'quel
hul'ush.
Moon (new)
yeco^t
tu'qutlle.
Moon (set)
iko
cay'-e a.
Moon (rise)
iarsh
carsh.
Morning
ush'qual, or ilqualef
mawla.
Mother
chahp
dah'be.
Mouth
rif'feare
ye'ak.
Nail (finger)
esh'ciil
giil'mf.
Neck
chah'fikha
yarek'.
Night
yul'lupre, or j'ow'leba.
uc'ciish.
Nine
yiir'toba.
No
quit'tuk
bar'be.
North
ya'ow
uffa'hu.
Nose
nohl
ciis'hush.
Oar (man's)
wy'ic
ciin'na.
Oar (woman's)
wor'rTc
ap'pe.
One
tow'quMow
o'coale.
Owl
tilkibbol
luf'quea.
Otter
hiap'po
hiap'po.
Owl (horned)
shlptshi
yaputella.
Pain
ahf
iim'maya.
Porpoise
showan'nike
shSwan'nTke.
Rain
cap'pocabsh, or
ab'quabsh
jiib'basha, or wert.
Rope
shu'c&me
cufYennS.
Run
cak'ash
dahdu.
Rush
ahl
mumpe.
Sail
ahnayr (made of seal
skin)
Salt water
chaiiVash
shem'a, or shea'ma.
Sand
piintel.
APPENDIX.
139
EKGLISH.
ALIKHOOLIP.
TEKEENICA.
Sea
chah'biicl
hay'-eca.
Seal
af'feilo, or af'afIS
diip'pa.
Sea shore
wan n lie
winnygata.
Sea-weed
utcha.
Seven
liow'casta.
SheU
car'ntsh
ters'hoTn.
Shore
wan'niic
wm'negayta.
Shoulder
cho'&ks
ah'keka.
Sickness
yau'hol
om'a, or om'ey.
Side
uesharfiqiia
iicshan'siqua.
Sit
shucka
mu'tu.
Sister
cholTcI
way kip'pa.
Six
cura'ua.
Skin
uc'colayk
appiilla.
Sky
ac'cuba
how'ucca.
Sleep
kay'keol, or khak'hon
licka, or asha.
Sling
shen'nekay
wat'towa.
Small
shoks
Smell
iic'she
ar've.
Smoke
tel'licks, or telk'hasli
ush'c6, or ochat.
Snow
as'ho
Sppii'naca.
Son
paral
marrm.
South
uc'cSay
ah'ne.
Spear
ihlca, or f ishca
uway' ea, or 6\vay ea.
Spear handle
aire
-
Speak
yac'afta
auru'oshe.
Spunge
allufshe.
Stand (to)
arco
cummart.
Stars
quo'unasli, or conash'
appernts'h, or ap-
pan'na.
Straw
goshe.
Stone
kehtla'6, or cath'ow
ow'ey.
Sun
lum
lum.
Sunrise
ahlacur'rtc
card"(c
Sunset
arshe
coshu
Sunshine
lum alka
lum pushe.
Swimming
Itm'pi
cal'g.
Teeth
caiiwash, or car'lTsh
tu'un.
Thigh
cut'laba
liick'ha.
Three
cup'eb
mut'ta.
Thumb
ushciic'cun
iishciig'gen.
Thunder
cayru'
kekTka.
Tired
ftch'la
gusha.
q2
140
APPENDIX.
ENGLISH.
ALIKHOOLIP.
TEKEENICA.
Tongue
luc'kin
lun.
Tree
e'ariicka, or kafs'ha
wu'uriish.
Two
tel'keow
com'babe.
Vessel
a'un
al'la.
Vulture
ahcflr'rtga
Walk (to)
ahsh
car'dlk.
Water
chau'ash
sha'mea.
West
uthqualdal'
iippah-ush.
Whistle
ufshexca
liifkey.
White
akTf'ca
Wife
ashwa'lliik
to'ucu.
Wind
hiir'ruquash
wur'iip.
Woman
atlarabTsh,orack'l)anash
kepa, or shepush.
Wood
iif'sha
ah'-schtf, orospatash.
Wrist
accal'laba
tiippul'la.
Yes
&o
das.
A few Fuegian Words which have some similarity to corresponding
Huilliche terms.
ENGLISH.
FUEGIAN.
HUILLICHE.
Belly
kiip'pude
puay. •
Bones
osh'kia
voso, or voro.
Cold
uc'cowe
chosay.
Day
an'oqual
antu, or antuigh.
Fire
tet'tal
k'tal, or cutal.
Hand
yiic'caba
cuugh, or cuu.
Moon
cuunequa
cuyen.
Moon (new)
tu'qutlle
chum cuyen.
Salt-water
chau'ash, or shea'ma
chasi- CO, or chadi-co.
Sea
chahljuel, or hay'eea
lavquem.
Sun, (or bright light)
lum, or 16m
antu pelon, or luv.
Shine, to
lumulmen.
* The words in this column are taken from Molina, but compared with
Falkner and Febres.
APPENDIX.
141
ENGLISH.
PATAGONIAN.
Another
Sark.
Axe
pTkel, or ptckel.
Band, worn round hair
cochin.
Barberry (the)
calga.
Boat
ta lina car'ro.
Balls (two)
somSy, or somSt.
Balls (three)
achtcS.
Boots
choca.
Bridle
sum6.
Clothes
terona.
Comb made of a coarse dry
grass
par 'chin.
Dog
warchin, or wauchtn, or wachtn
Fire
se ak, or ze ak.
Give it to me
ey' nt ots.
Giianaco
CO.
Go away
ailros, or ords, and cha'n6s.
Horse
cal'go.
Knife
pa'tka.
Knife (small)
pepa.
Mantle
chortllTo.
Me
catTam.
Meat
sey'pra, or zeypra.
No
comps.
Ostrich
mas'hiors.
Pole
ask.
Put
cae.
Ship
carro.
Sinews of the Ostrich, used for
sewing mantles, &c.
illoyu.
Skunk
siirrena.
Slave
zapallo.
Spurs
ta.
Sword
cuchillo.
Tent
cow, or cau, or toldo.
Water
la.
Wood
cark.
Yes
ohai.
A particular root which is eaten
for food
tiis.
Another similar root
chalas.
142
APPENDIX.
ENGLISH.
PATAGONIAN.
The Arbutus
The Cranberry
Barberry, drinkmade with the
amacoro,
pileco.
licone.
ENGLISH.
CHONOS.
Good Deity
Bad Spirit
White Men of the Moon
yerrt yiipon.
yaccy-ma.
cubba.
No. 16.
Remarks on the Structure of the Fuegians.
The general form of the Fuegians is peculiar ; the head and body
being particularly large, and the extremities unusually small : but the
feet are broad though short. This peculiarity, no doubt, is owing to
their mode of life : being a people who take httle exercise, but sit con-
stantly huddled together in their canoes or wigwams ; the blood, the
source of nourishment, can only circulate freely, and must in greater
quantity, in the head and trunk, from the obstruction to its passage into
the hmbs, owing to their bent position. From the same cause, the
want of exercise, this is the form of the Esquimaux and Laplanders.
A man whom I examined was of the middle size, five feet seven
inches, and his muscular power about a medium ; the circumference
of the—
Ft. in.
Thorax 3 1
Abdomen ... ... ... 2 7
Pelvis 2 5
Thigh 1 10
Calf of the leg 1
Arm 1
Fore-arm ... ... ... 11
Length of the head from the
chin upwards 9
Length of body, from the
symphisis pubis to the top
of the sternum ... ... 2
Length of thigh 17
Length of leg
of arm
of fore-arm and hand
from spine to ster-
num, externally ...
same internally
Breadtii of thorax
of hypochondriac re-
gions
of pelvis between
superior and spinous pro-
cesses ... ... ...
Ft.
1
In.
17
17
13
10
13
II
Al'PENDIX. 343
I consider that this man was about the average stature of the
Fuegians : they are generally short and broad.
The Fuegian, like a Cetaceous animal which circulates red blood
in a cold medium, has in his covering an admirable non-conductor of
heat ; the corpus adiposum envelopes the body to preserve that tem-
perature necessary to continue the vital functions and circulation of the
fluids. In this individual it was particularly tliick over the abdomen
and dorsum ; on the hips it formed a perfect cushion, and fiUed
up the interstices between the muscles in general. Unlike the limbs
of porters, smiths, and other athletae in Europe, where the form and
size of each muscle may be traced while in action, the limbs of these
people are round and smooth, like the female sex, or the child
in infancy. The quantity of fat is to be imputed to their diet ; their
food is shell-fish and birds, but the greatest dainty is fat of all kinds,
that of the seal and penguin in particular ; as for vegetable aUment
they have none,* nor any taste for it. The muscles were soft, and
the viscera (in particular the heart, Uver, and lungs,) in good order,
— a circumstance which but rarely occurs : the bones were well-
formed, with their processes, foramina, and sutures complete.
The complexion of this man was dark ; his skin of a copper colour,
the native hue of the Fuegian tribes ; the eyes and hair black (this
is imiversal, as far as I have seen, and predominates throughout all
the aborigines of America, from the Fuegians to the Esquimaux) ;
the epidermis is thicker than in white men ; but in the rete mucosum
I saw no difference, the copper hue arising from the vessels of the
cutis, shining through a thickened scarf-skin, and from its incorpo-
rating the particles of smoke and ochre with which their bodies are
continually covered.
The hair on this man's head was jet-black, straight, long, and
luxuriant, but scanty on other parts of the body. The Fuegians
have httle beard and no whiskers.
The features of this individual were rounder than they generally
are among those of his nation ; the form of whose countenance
resembles that of the Laplanders and Esquimaux ; they have broad
faces with projecting cheek-bones ; the eyes of an oval form, and
drawn towards the temples ; the tunica sclerotica of a yeUow-white,
and the iris deep black ; the cartilage of the nose broad and de-
* Mr. Wilson \vas not aware that thuy eat birch excrescences, and
berries. — R. F.
144 Al'PKNDIX.
pressed; the orifice of the mouth large, when shut forming a
straight Kne, when open an ellipsis. The head is bulky, and the
hair straight.
The phrenological marks in the skull (said by some persons to
include corresponding organs in the brain,) taken on the spot, were
as follows : —
The Propensities.
Amativeness— full. Destructiveness— very large.
Philoprogenitiveness— moderately full. Constructiveness— small.
Concentrativeiiess— ditto. Acquisitiveness— small.
Adhesiveness— fii41. Secretiveness— large.
C ombativeness— large.
The Sentimexts.
Self-esteem— moderately small. " Veneration— small.
Love of approbation — large. Hope — ditto
Cautiousness— very large. Ideality — ditto
Benevolence— small. Conscientiousness— ditto
Firmness — moderately full.
The Intellectual Organs.
Individuality — small. Form— small.
Time— ditto Number — very small.
Tune— ditto Language— full.
Comparison — small. Causality — small.
Wit — ditto Imitation — ditto
The facial angle, according to Camper, 74°, the occipital, 80°.
The warhke propensities in this man were large, agreeing with
the httle which I know of his history. Taking a general view
of the head, the Propensities (the organs most exercised by a bar-
barian) are large and fuU ; the Sentiments small, few of which are
ever called into action, except cautiousness and firmness, which are
large ; finally, the Intellectual organs, which are chiefly used by
man In a civolized state, are small.
The teeth are perfect, and of the usual number ; the incisores flat
and apparently worn downi ; other instances of which I have seen.
From this it is probable they are sometimes used as grinders.* The
reverse of this has been frequently noticed among savages ; some, it
is said, file their teeth to render them more terrible in battle, while
others puU out the two centre incisores, or the cuspidati, by way
* This man could not have been more than forty : probably he was
many years younger. — R. F.
APPENDIX. ' 145
of ornament. Their teeth are generally good, regular, and healthy,
arising in all probability from the sj'stem being free from any con-
stitutional taint.
The viscera of the thorax were healthy, the heart particularly so,
with its valves and columna carnosa in good order ; the lower part
of the thorax and the whole parietes of the abdomen were unusually
expanded ; the liver very large though healthy, occupying the right
hj'pochondriac and lumbar, the epigastric, and left hypochondriac
regions; the spleen remarkably small; the stomach of a moderate
size, and containing some muscles and limpets in a half-digested
state ; the intestines were filled with flatus, which probably took
place after death. The large size of the abdomen is to be referred
to the squatting position these people assume, the knees and thighs
being brought up against the lower part of the belly, force the
viscera and intestines upward and forw'ard, thereby distending the
lower part of the thorax and front of the abdomen. Here is a
peculiarity from habit becoming inherent in the constitution, and
descendmg to posterity, as the children, male and female, are bom
with large bellies. In like manner Chinese children, from their
parents' custom of compressing the feet, are born ^^-ith them remark-
ably small.
Besides distending the abdomen mechanically — to this bent posi-
tion is to be traced the enlarged state of the abdominal viscera, the
passage of blood to the extremities being obstructed ; an unusual
quantity is thereby determined to, and circulated in, the coehac and
mesenteric arteries ; the want of support from dress is also to be
taken into account. From this stretched and distended state of the
abdomen, separating the fibres of the obhque and transverse muscles,
and the open state of the inguinal rings, these people must be
peculiarly liable on any exertion to ventral hernia : these passages I
found open in this individual ; and they appeared to be in the same
state in other men whom I examined. Cardiac affections mostly
prevail among those who are subject to ^'iolent exercise, as porters,
carriers, and artillerymen. The healthy state of this heart, which
it is probable wiU be generally the case among the Fuegians, is to be
imputed to their moderate exertions. In their canoes they are
employed fishing or paddling ; in their wigwams, which are seldom
many yards from the beach, cooking or maldng small wares of the
bones or skins of beasts. The cremaster muscle was strong and
146 APPENDIX.
fleshy ; the lower extremities were short and ill-proportioned ; the
thigh of a moderate size, but from the smallness of the muscles
of the leg in general, and gestatorii in particular, it looked
large ; the calf of the leg was very small. The diminutive size
of these muscles must be referred to the cause already mentioned —
the want of a due circulation in these parts, produced by a cramped
position and want of exercise. Having the feet broad and short
is common to all who do not M^ear shoes, the bones being somewhat
separated, the hgaments stretched, and the muscles flattened from
constantly sustaining the weight of the body unsupported by any
covering to the feet. The kidneys were healthy, but unusually
destitute of fat. There was no tunica adiposa ; the adeps, in this
instance, was chiefly collected on the surface, but little in the in-
ternal parts. If this is universally the case, it is a wonderful
provision of nature to protect their bodies from the inclemency ■ of
this inhospitable region. This is the method adopted by nature
during the first years of infancy, to habituate the constitution to
the vicissitudes and variations of the atmosphere, which otherwise
would be incompatible with existence. The arms were better pro-
portioned than the lower extremities ; and this is general throughout
the Fuegian tribes ; the muscles being firmer, and better formed,
from the more constant use of these parts, paddling in their
canoes, climbing, and making their wig^vams. The muscles in
general, throughout the body, were healthy, but soft and flabby,
unlike the firm sinewy muscle of hardy mountaineers : and the bones
less indented than is usual in those who have been accustomed
to vigorous exertion.
In another Fuegian, whom I examined, the marks of the Phre-
nological organs, as taken from the skull, were as follows : —
The Propensities.
Amativeness— small. Destructiveiiess— full.
Philoprogenitiveness — very large. Constructiveness — snial!.
Coiicentrativeness— full. Acquisitiveness- full.
Combativeness— very large. Secretiveness— large.
The Sentiments.
Self-esteem— very large. Veneration— full.
Love of approbation— full. Hope— small.
Cautiousness-large. Ideality— small.
Benevolence— small. Firmness— large.
appendix. 147
The Intellectual Organs.
Form— small. Colouring— small.
Size— large. Locality— ditto.
Weight— small. Order— ditto.
Time— very small. Number— ditto.
Tune— ditto Language— ditto
Comparison— small. Wit— ditto
Causality— ditto Imitation— ditto
The facial angle, 76°, the occipital, 82°.
In this skull also, the propensities were large ; the moral sentiments
larger than in the former, but the intellectual organs equally small.
Destructiveness, secretiveness, and cautiousness, large — faculties,
as I have remarked, necessary to a savage vi'arrior : the more refined
sentiments, as benevolence, ideality, and conscientiousness were
small, with nearly all the intellectual organs.
In this man, also, the teeth were complete ; but the incisores not
worn down, as in the former : their general regularity and good
arrangement were greatly owing to the expanded state of the jaws,
giving good space for their grovrth and shedding. In those persons
who have sharp features, where the sides of the face meet at an acute
angle, the teeth are often small ; or, if large, from want of room,
they overlap each other, or push one another out of the natural
positions. The broadness of the face and features is owing to the
breadth of the base of the cranium, which gives shape and form to
the bones of the face. With respect to the arms and legs of this
man, I have only to remark, that they agreed exactly with those of
the other, in the largeness of the thigh compared to the leg, breadth
of the feet, and better proportion of the upper extremities.
John Wilson, (d) Surgeon.
148 APPENDIX.
No. 17.
Phrenological Remarks on three Fuegians.*
YoKCusHLu, a female, ten years of age.
Strong in attachment.
If offended, her passions strong.
A little disposed to cunning, but not duplicity.
She will manifest some ingenuity.
She is not at aU disposed to be covetous.
Self- win at times very active.
Fond of notice and approbation.
She vnll show a benevolent feeUng when able to do so.
Strong feelings for a Supreme Being.
Disposed to be honest.
Rather incHned to mimicry and imitation.
Her memory good of visible objects and localities, with a strong
attachment to places in which she has lived.
It would not be difficult to make her a useful member of Society
in a short time, as she would readily receive instruction.
Orundellico, a Fuegian, aged fifteen.
He will have to struggle against anger, self-viill, animal inclina-
tions, and a disposition to combat and destroy.
Rather inclined to cunning.
Not covetous ; not very ingenious.
Fond of directing and leading.
Very cautious in his actions : but fond of distinction and appro-
bation.
He will manifest strong feelings for a Sujireme Being.
Strongly inclined to benevolence.
May be safely intrusted vidth the care of property.
Memory, in general, good ; particularly for persons, objects of
sense, and localities.
To accustomed places he would have a strong attachment.
Like the female, receiving instruction readily, he might be made a
useful member of society ; but it would require great care, as self-vidll
would interfere much.
* Made in London, in 1830.
APPENDIX. ' 149
El'lepahu, about twenty-eight.
Passions very strong, particularly those of an animal nature ; self-
willed, positive and determined.
He will have strong attachment to children, persons, and places.
Disposed to cunning and caution.
He will show ready comprehension of things, and some ingenuity.
Self will not be overlooked, and he will be attentive to the value
of property.
Very fond of praise and approbation, and of notice being taken of
his conduct.
Kind to those who render him a service.
He vdll be reserved and suspicious.
He will not have such strong feelings for the Deity as his two
companions.
He will be grateful for kindness, but reserved in showing it.
His memory, in general, good : he would not find natural history,
or other branches of science, difficult, if they can be imparted to
him ; but, from possessing strong self-will, he will be difficult to
instruct, and will require a great deal of humouring and indulgence
to lead him to do what is required.
No. 17 (a).
Instrument executed by Mons. Louis de Bougainville for the
deUvering up of the Malvinas.
" I, Monsieur Louis de Bougainville, colonel of his most Christian
Majesty's army, have received six hundred and eighteen thousand
one hundred and eight livres, thirteen sols, and eleven deniers, being
the amount of an estimate that I have given in, of the expenses incur-
red by the St. Malo Company in equipments for founding their intru-
sive establishments in the Malvina Islands, belonging to his Catholic
Majesty, in the following manner : —
" Forty thousand livres delivered on account to me in Paris, by his
Excellency the Count de Fuentes, ambassador of his CathoUc Majesty
to that court, for which I gave the proper receipt.
" Two hundred thousand livres, which are to be deUvered to me
at the same court of Paris, according to bills drawn in my favour by
150 APPENDIX.
the Marquess of Zambrano, treasurer-general of his Catholic Majesty,
upon Don Francisco Ventura Llorena, treasurer-extraordinary of the
same; and sixty-five thousand six hundred and twenty-five hard
dollars, and three-fourth parts of another, vi'hich are equivalent to the
three hundred and seventy-eight thousand one hundred and eight
livres three sous and eleven deniers, at the rate of five livres per dol-
lar, which I have to receive in Buenos Ayres, on account of bills
which have been deHvered to me, dravvTj by his excellency the BayHo
Fray, Don Julian Arriaga, secretary of state for the general depart-
ment of the Indies and navy of his CathoUc Majesty.
" In consideration of these payments, as well as in obedience to
his Most Christian Majesty's orders, I am bound to dehver up, in
due formahty, to the coiirt of Spain, those establishments, along with
the families, houses, works, timber, and shipping built there, and
employed in the expedition ; and, finally, every thing therein belong-
ing to the St. Malo Company, as included in the accounts which are
so settled, and to his Most Christian Majesty, by this voluntary cession,
making void for ever all claims that the company, or any person
interested therein may have, or might produce, upon the treasury of
his Most CathoUc Majesty ; nor can they henceforth demand more
pecuniary, or any other compensation whatsoever. In testimony
whereof, I set my name to this present instrument and voucher, as
one princijDally interested, as well as authorized to receive the whole
of this sum, agreeably to a registry in the department of state in St.
Ildefonso, 4th October, 1766.
(Signed) " Louis de Bougainville."
Viscount Palmerston to M. de Moreno.
Foreign Office, January 8, 1824.
The undersigned, &c. has the honour to acknowledge the receipt
of the note of M. Moreno, &c. dated the 17th of June last, in which
he formally protests, in the name of his government, " against the
sovereignty lately assumed in the Malvina (or Falkland) Islands, by
the crovni of Great Britain."
Before the undersigned proceeds to reply to the allegations advanced
in M. Moreno's note, upon which his protest against this act on the
part of his Majesty is founded, the undersigned deems it proper to
draw M. Moreno's attention to the contents of the protest which Mr.
APPENDIX. ' 151
Parish, the British Charg^ d' Affaires, at Buenos Ayres, addressed, in
the name of his court, to the Minister for Foreign Affairs of the
Republic, on the 19th of November 1829, in consequence of the British
Government having been informed that the president of the United
Provinces of the Rio de la Plata had issued decrees, and had made
grants of land, in the nature of acts of sovereignty over the islands
in question.
That protest made known to the government of the United Pro-
vinces of the Rio de la Plata : —
1st. That the authority which that government had thus assumed^
was considered by the British Government as incompatible with the
sovereign rights of Great Britain over the Falkland Islands.
2dly. That those sovereign rights, which were founded upon the
original discovery and subsequent occupation of those islands, had
acquired an additional sanction from the fact, that his Catholic Majesty
had restored the British settlement, which had been forcibly taken
possession of by a Spanish force, in the year 1771.
3dly. That the withdrawal of his Majesty's forces from the Falk-
land Islands, in 1774, could not invalidate the just rights of Great
Britain, because that withdrawal took place only in pursuance of the
system of retrenchment adopted at that time by his Majesty's Govern-
ment.
4thly. That the marks and signals of possession and of property,
left upon the islands, the British flag still fl}dng, and all the other
formalities observed upon the occasion of the departure of the gover-
nor, were calculated not only to assert the rights of ownership, but to
indicate the intention of resuming the occupation of the territory at
some future period.
Upon these grounds Mr. Parish protested against the pretensions
set up on the part of the Argentine Republic, and against all acts
done to the prejudice of the just rights of sovereignty heretofore
exercised by the crown of Great Britain.
The Minister for Foreign Affairs of the Republic acknowledged the
receipt of the British protest ; and acquainted Mr. Parish that his
government would give it their particular consideration, and that he
would communicate to him their decision upon the subject, so soon
as he should receive directions to that effect.
No answer was, however, at any time returned, nor was any objec-
tion raised, on the part of the government of the United Provinces of
152 APPKNBIX.
the Rio de la Plata, to the rights of Great Britain, as asserted in that
protest ; but the Buenos Ayrean government persisted, notwithstand-
ing the receipt of that protest, in exercising those acts of sovereignty
against which the protest was specially directed.
Tlie government of the United Provinces of the Rio de la Plata
could not have expected, after the explicit declaration which had been
so formally made of the right of the cro%vn of Great Britain to the
islands in question, that his Majesty would sUently submit to such a
course of proceeding ; nor could that government have been surprised
at the step which his Majesty thought proper to take, in order to the
resumption of rights which had never been abandoned, and which
had only been permitted to he dormant, under circumstances which
had been explained to the Buenos- Ayrean government.
The claim of Great Britain to the sovereignty of the Falkland
Islands having been unequivocally asserted and maintained, during
those discussions with Spain, in 1770 and 1771, which nearly led to
a war between the two countries, and Spain having deemed it pro-
per to put an end to those discussions, by restoring to his Majesty the
places from which British subjects had been expelled, the government
of the United Provinces could not reasonably have anticipated that
the British Government would permit any other state to exercise aright,
as derived from Spain, which Great Britain had denied to Spain
herself ; and this consideration alone would fuUy justify his Majesty's
Government Lq declining to enter into any further explanation upon
a question which, upwards of half a century ago, was so notoriously
and decisively adjusted with another government more immediately
concerned.
But M. Moreno, in the note which he has addressed to the imder-
signed, has endeavoured to shew that, at the termination of the
memorable discussions referred to between Great Britain and Spain,
a secret understanding existed between the two courts, in virtue of
which Great Britain was pledged to restore the islands to Spain at a
subsequent period, and that the evacuation of them, in 1774, by his
Majesty, was the fulfilment of that pledge.
The existence of such a secret understanding is alleged to be
proved ; first, by the reservation, as to the former right of sovereignty
over the islands, which was contained in the Spanish declaration,
delivered at the time of the restoration of Port Egmont and its depen-
dencies to his Majesty ; and, secondly, by the concurrent description
APPENDIX. 153
of the transaction, as it took place beween the parties, given in certain
documents and historical works.
Although the reservation referred to cannot be deemed to possess
any substantial weight, inasmuch as no notice whatever is taken of it
in the British counter-declaration, which was exchanged against it ;
and although the evidence adduced fi-om unauthentic historical pubU-
cations cannot be regarded as entitled to any weight whatever with a
view to a just decision upon a point of international rights ; yet as
the allegations above-mentioned involve an imputation against the
good faith of Great Britain, to which his Majesty's Government cannot
but feel sensibly alive, the undersigned has been honoured with the
King's commands to cause the official correspondence with the court
of Madrid, at the period alluded to, to be carefully inspected, in order
that the circumstances which really took place upon the occasion
might be accurately ascertained.
That inspection has accordingly been made, and the undersigned
has the honour to communicate to M. Moreno the following extracts,
which contain all the material information that can be gathered from
that correspondence relative to the transaction in question : —
The Earl of Rochfokd to James Harris, Esq.
" St. James's, 25th January 1771.
" I enclose to you a copy of the declaration signed on Tuesday
last by Prince Masserano, with that of my acceptance of it in his
Majesty's name."
Spanish Declaration.
" Sa Majeste Britannique s'etant plainte de la violence qui avoit
ete commise le 10 Juin de I'annee 1770, al'Ile communement appe-
lee la Grande Maloiiine, et par les Anglais dite Falkland, en obhgeant
par la force le Commandant, et les sujets de sa Majeste Britannique,
a evacuer le port par eux appele Egmont, demarche oifensante a
I'honneur de saCouronne, le Prince de Masseran, Ambassadeur Extra-
ordinaire de sa Majeste Catholique, a recu ordre de declarer, et
declare, que sa Majeste Catholique, considerant I'amour dont elle est
animee pour la paix, et pour le maintien de la bonne harmonie avec
sa Majeste Britannique, et reflechissant que cet evenement pourroil
I'interrompre, a vu avec deplaisir cette expedition capable de la trou-
bler ; et dans la persuasion ou elle est de la reciprocite de ses senti-
r
154 APPENDIX
mens, et de son eloignement pour autorlser tout ce qui pouiToit
troubler la bonne intelligence entre les deux Cours, sa Majeste Catho-
lique desavoue la susdite entreprise violente, et, en consequence, le
Prince de Masseran declare, que sa Majeste Catholique s'engage a
donner des ordres immediats pour qu'on reraette les choses dans la
Grande Maloiiine, au port dit Egmont, precisement dans I'etat ou
elles etoient avant le 10 Juin 1770, auquel effet sa Majeste Catho-
lique donnera ordre a un de ses officiers, de remettre a I'officier
autorise par sa Majeste Britannique, le fort et le port Egmont, avec
toute I'artillerie, les munitions, et eiFets de sa Majeste Britannique et
de ses sujets, qui s'y sont trouves le jour ci-dessus nomme, conforme-
ment a I'inventaire qui en a ete dresse.
" Le Prince de Masseran declare en meme tems, au nom du Roi
son Maitre, que I'engagement de sa dite Majeste Catholique, de resti-
tuer a sa Majeste Britannique la possession du port et fort dit
Egmont, ne pent ni ne doit nullement affecter la question du droit
anterieur de souverainete des lies Maloiiines, autrement dites Falk-
land.
" En foi de quoi, moi, le susdit Ambassadeur Extraordinaire, ai
signe la presente Declaration de ma signature ordinaire, et a icelle
fait apposer le cachet de nos armes. A Londres, le 22 Janvier 1771.
(L.S.) (Signe) " Le Prince de Masseran."
British Counter Declaration.
" Sa Majeste Catholique ayant autorise son Excellence le Prince de
Masserano, son Ambassadeur Extraordinaire, a ofFrir, en son nom
royal, au Roi de la Grande Bretagne, une satisfaction pour I'injure
faite a sa Majeste Britannique, en la depossedant du port et fort du
port Egmont ; et le cUt ambassadeur ayant aujourd'hui signe une
Declaration, qu'il vient de me remettre, y exprimant, que sa Majeste
Catholique, ayant le desir de retablir la bonne harmonie et amitie
que subsistoient ci-devant entre les deux couronnes, desavoue I'expe-
dition contre le port Egmont, dans laquelle la force a ete employee,
contre les possessions, commandant, et sujets de sa Majeste Britan-
nique, et s'engage aussi que toutes choses seront immediatement
remises dans la situation precise dans laquelle elles etoient avant le
10 Juin 1770 ; et que sa Majeste Catholique donnera des ordres en
consequence a un de ses officiers de remettre a I'officier, autorise par
APPE^'r)Ix. 155
sa Majeste Britannique, le port et fort du Port Egmont, commc aussi
toute I'artillerle, les munitions, et efFets de sa Majeste Britannique,
et de ses sujets, scion I'inventaire qui en a ete dresse ; et le dit ambas-
sadeur s'etant de plus engage, au nom de sa Majeste Catholique, que
le contenu de la dite declaration sera efFectue par sa Majeste Catho-
lique, et que des duplicatas des ordres de sa dite Majeste Catholique
a ses ofRciers seront remis entre les mains d'un des Principaux Secre-
taires d'Etat de sa Majeste Britannique, dans I'espace de six semaines ;
sa dite Majeste Britannique, afin de faire voir les memes dispositions
amicales de sa part, m'a autorise a declarer, qu'eUe regardera la dite
declaration du Prince de Masserano, avec I'accomplissement entier du
dit engagement de la part de sa Majeste Catholique, comme une
satisfaction de I'injure faite a la Couronne de la Grande Bretagne.
En foi de quoi, moi, soussigne, un des Principaux Secretaires d'Etat
de sa Majeste Britannique, ai signe la presente de ma signature
ordinaire, et k icelle fait apposer le cachet de nps armes. A Londres,
ce 22 Janvier 1771.
(L.S.) (Signe) " Rochford."
James Harris, Esq. to the Earl of Rochford.
" Madrid, 14th February 1771.
" They keep the declaration here as secret as possible. I do not
find any to whom they have sho'rni it, except those to whom they
are obhged to communicate it. They also report that we have given
a verbal assiu-ance to evacuate Falkland's Island in the space of two
months."
The Earl of Rochford to James Harris, Esq.
" St. James's, 8th March 1771.
" His Majesty has been pleased to order the Juno frigate of thirty-
two guns, the Hound sloop, and Florida store-ship, to be prepared to
go to Port Egmont, in order to receive the possession from the Spa-
nish commander there ; and as I have spoken so fuUy to Prince Mas-
serano on the manner of its being executed, it is needless for me to
say any more to you upon it.
" I think it right to acquaint you, that the Spanish ambassador
pressed me to have some hopes given him of our agreeing to a mutual
abandoning of Falldand's Islands, to which I repHed, that it was
impossible for me to enter on that subject with him, as the restitution
must precede every discourse relating to those islands.
r 2
156 APPENDIX.
" You will endeavour, on all occasions, to inculcate the absurdity
of Spain having any apprehensions, from the state in wliich Port
Egmont was before its capture, or the force now sent out, of his
Majesty's intending to make use of it for the annoyance of their set-
tlements in the South Sea, than which nothing can be farther from
the King's inclination, who sincerely desires to preserve peace between
the two nations."
The Earl of Rochford to the Lords of the Admiralty.
" St. James's, 15th March 1771.
" Your lordships having acquainted me that, in consequence of
his Majesty's pleasure, signified in my letter of 22d last, you had
ordered the Juno frigate, the Hound sloop, and Florida store-ship,
to be prepared to proceed to Falkland's Islands, I am commanded to
signify to your lordships his Majesty's pleasure, that you order the
commander of the said frigate, as soon as those ships are ready for
sea, to repair directly with them to Port Egmont, and presenting to
Don FeHpe Ruiz Puente, or any other Spanish officer he finds there,
the duplicates of his Catholic Majesty's orders sent herewith, to
receive, in proper fonn, the restitution of possession, and of the
artillery, stores, and effects, agreeably to the said orders, and to the
inventories signed by the Captains Farmer and Maltby (copies of
which are annexed), and that you direct him to take an exact account
of any deficiency which there may be of the things mentioned in the
said inventories, in order that the same may be made good by his
CathoUc Majesty ; giving a copy of the said account, signed by him-
self, to the Spanish officer, and desiring an acknowledgment under
his hand of the same .being a true account.
" After the said restitution shall have been completed, it is the
King's pleasure that Captain Stott should return immediately to
England with the Juno frigate and the Florida store-ship, unless he
find it necessary to leave the latter behind ; and that the Hound
sloop should remain stationed in the harbour till his Majesty's further
orders.
" Your lordships will cUrect Captain Stott to behave with the
greatest prudence and civility towards the Spanish commander and
the subjects of his Cathohc Majesty, carefully avoiding any thing
that might give occasion to disputes or animosity, and strictly
APPENDIX. 157
restraining the crews of the ships under his command in this respect ;
but if, at or after the restitution to be made, the Spanish commander
should make any protest against his Majesty's right to Port Egmont,
or Falkland's Islands, it is his Majesty's pleasure that the commander
of his ships should answer the same by a counter-protest, in proper
terms, of his Majesty's right to the whole of the said islands, and
against the right of his Catholic Majesty to any part of the same.
" In case, from any accident or otherwise. Captain Stott should
not, on his arrival at Port Egmont, find any officer there on the part
of the King of Spain, your lordships will direct him (supposing he
should find it necessary to put any of his men on shore) to avoid
setting up any marks of possession, or letting his Majesty's colours
fly on shore, as it is for the King's honour that the possession should
be formally restored by an officer of his CathoHc Majesty ; and for
that reason it will be proper that the King's commanding officer
should keep a good look-out, and, upon perceiving the approach of
any vessel of his Catholic Majesty, should re-embark any of his men
who may at that time be on shore, that the possession may be indis-
putably vacant. '
" If it should happen that after the King's ships shall have
remained as late as all October, no Spanish officer should yet appear,
your lordships will direct Captain Stott, in such case, either to pro-
ceed himself, or send an officer to Soledad, to deliver his Catholic
Majesty's orders to the Spanish commander there, taking care not to
salute the fort as a Spanish garrison, and making a protest, in civil
terms, against that settlement of his Catholic Majesty's subjects in an
island belonging to his Majesty.
" If, within a reasonable time after the delivery of the said order
to the Spanish commander, at Soledad, there stiU shall not an-ive at
Port Egmont any officer of his Catholic Majesty to make the restitu-
tion, it is the King's pleasure that the commanding officer of his
ships should then draw up a protest of the inexecution of his Catholic
Majesty's late declaration, and should take formal possession, in his
Majesty's name ; hoisting his Majesty's colours on shore ; and that,
leaving there the Hound sloop, and Florida store-ship (if the latter is
necessary), and sending a duplicate of his protest to the Spanish
officer at Soledad, he should proceed to England to lay before youf
lordships, for his Majesty's information, his report of the manner in
which he has executed his commissioii.
158 APPKNDIX.
" Your lordships will take care that a sufficient quantity of provi-
sions and necessaries of all kinds may be sent out in the said three
vessels ; and will, at a convenient distance of time, despatch another
store-ship for a further supply.
" P.S. I also enclose to your Lordships the copy of his Catholic
Majesty's order to Don Felipe Ruiz Puente, with its translation."
Order of the King of Spain.
(Translation.)
" It being agreed between the King and his Britannic Majesty, by
a Convention signed in London on the 22d of January last past, by
the Prince of Masserano and the Earl of Rochford, that the Great Ma-
louine, called by the EngHsh Falkland, should be immediately replaced
in the precise situation in which it was before it was evacuated by
them on the 10th June last year ; I signify to you, by the King's order,
that, as soon as the person commissioned by the Court of London,
shall present himself to you with this, you order the delivery of the
Port de la Cruzada or Egmont, and its fort and dependencies, to be
effected, as also of all the artillery, ammunition and effects, that were
found there, belonging to his Britannic Majesty and his subjects,
according to the inventories signed by George Farmer and "William
Maltby, Esqs., on the 11th July of the said year, at the time of their
quitting the same, of which I send you the enclosed copies, authen-
ticated under my hand ; and that, as soon as the one and the other
shall be effected with the due formalities, you cause to retire imme-
diately the officer and other subjects of the King which may be there.
God preserve you many years. Pardo, 7th February 1771.
" The Balio Fray, Don Julian de Arriaga.
" To Don FeUpe Ruiz Puente."
Captain Stott to the Admiralty.
" Juno, Plymouth, 9th December 1771.
" I must beg leave to refer their lordships to the letter I had the
honour of writing you from Rio de Janeiro, the 30th of July last,
for the occurrences of my voyage to that time ; from whence I sailed,
with his Majesty's ships under my command, the next day, and
arrived at Port Egmont the evening of the 13th of September fol-
lowing. The next morning, seeing Spanish colours flying, and
APPENDIX. 159
troops on shore, at the settlement formerly held by the English, I
sent a lieutenant to know if any officer was there on behalf of his
Catholic Majesty, empowered to make restitution of possession to
me, agreeably to the orders of his Court for that pvirpose, dupli-
cates of which I had to deliver him : I was answered, that the com-
manding officer, Don Francisco de Orduna, a lieutenant of the royal
artillery of Spaim, was furnished with full powers, and ready to effect
the restitution. He soon after came on board the Juno to me, when
I dehvered him liis CathoHc Majesty's orders. We then examined
into the situation of the settlement and stores, adjusted the form of
the restitution and reception of the possession — instruments for
which were settled, executed, and reciprocally delivered (that wliich
I received from the Spanish officer, and a copy of what I gave him,
are here enclosed). On Monday, the 16th of Sejitember, I landed,
followed by a party of marines, and was received by the Spanish offi-
cer, who formally restored me the possession ; on which I caused his
Majesty's colours to be hoisted and the marines to fire three volleys,
and the Juno five guns, and was congratulated, as were the officers
with me, by the Spanish officer, with great cordiality on the occa-
sion. The next day Don Francisco, with all the troops and subjects
of the King of Spain, departed in a schooner which they had with
them. I have only to add, that this transaction was effected with the
greatest appearance of good faith, without the least claim or reserve
being made by the Spanish officer iji behalf of his Court."
Lord Grantham to the Earl of Rochford.
" Madrid, 2d January 1772.
" I have received the honour of your lordship's despatch, contain-
ing the agreeable intelligence of the restitution of Port Egmont and
its dependencies, with the due formalities. On receiving this notice I
waited on the Marquis de Grimaldi, to assure him of his Majesty's
satisfaction at the good faith and punctuality observed in this trans-
action. M. de Grimaldi seemed aware of the intention of my visit,
and was almost beforehand with me in communicating notice of this
event's being known in England. He seemed well pleased at the
conclusion of this affair, but entered no further into conversation
upon it."
160 APPENDIX.
The Lords of the Admiralty to the Earl of Rochford.
" Admiralty Office, I5th February 1772.
" Having received by the Florida store-ship, lately arrived at Spit-
head, a letter from Captain Burr, of his Majesty's sloop the Hound,
dated at Port Egmont, in Falkland's Islands, the 10th of November
last, giving an account that, in the preceding month, tvi^o Spanish
vessels had arrived there with the artillery, provisions, and stores,
which had been taken frpm thence by the Spaniards, and that he had
received the same from a commissary appointed by Don Philip Ruiz
Puente, to deliver them up to him ; we send your lordship herewith
a copy of Captain Burr's said letter, together with a copy of the
inventory of the artillerjs provisions, and stores, w^hich he had
received as aforesaid, for his Majesty's information."
The Earl of Rochford to Lord Grantham.
" St. James's, 6th March 1772.
" It may be of use to inform your Excellency, that his Majesty
has determined to reduce the force employed at Falkland's Island to
a small sloop with about fifty men, and twenty-five marines on shore,
which will answer the end of keeping the possession : and, at the
same time, ought to make the court of Spain very easy as to our
having any intention of making it a settlement of annoyance to
them."
The Earl of Rochford to Lord Grantham.
" St. James's, February 11th, 1774.
" I think it proper to acquaint your Excellency that Lord North,
in a speech some days ago in the House of Commons, on the sub-
ject of the Naval EstabUshment for this year, mentioned the inten-
tion of reducing the naval forces in the East Indies, as a material
object of diminishing the number of seamen ; and at the same time
hinted, as a matter of small consequence, that, in order to avoid
the expense of keeping any seamen or marines at Falkland's Island,
they would be brought away, after leaving there the proper marks or
signals of possession, and of its belonging to the Crown of Great
Britain. As this measure was publicly declared in Parliament, it
wiR naturally be reported to the Court of Spain ; and though there
is no necessity of your Excellency's communicating this notice offi-
APPENDIX. 161
cially to the Spanish ministers, since it is only a private regulation
with regard to our owti convenience ; yet, as I am inclined to think,
from what passed formerly upon this subject, that they will rather
be pleased at this event, your Excellency may, if they mention it to
you, freely avow it, without entering into any other reasonings
thereon. It must strike your Excellency that this is Ukely to dis-
courage them from suspecting designs, which they must now plainly
see never entered into our minds. I hope they will not suspect, or
suffer themselves to be made believe, that this was done at the re-
quest, or to gratify the most distant wish, of the French court ; for
the truth is, that it is neither more nor less than a small part of an
economical naval regulation."
M. Moreno will perceive that the above authentic papers, which
have been faithfully extracted from the Volumes of Correspondence
with Spain, deposited in the State Paper Office, contain no allusion
whatever to any secret understanding between the two Governments,
at the period of the restoration of Port Egmont and its dependencies
to Great Britain, in 1771, nor to the evacuation of Falkland's
Islands, in 1774, as having taken place for the purpose of fulfilling
any such understanding. On the contrary, it will be evident to
M. Moreno, that their contents afford conclusive inference that no
such secret understanding could have existed.
The undersigned need scarcely assure M. Moreno, that the cor-
respondence which has been referred to, does not contain the least
particle of evidence in support of the contrary supposition, enter-
tEiined by the Government of the United Provinces of the Rio de la
Plata, nor any confirmation of the several particulars related in
M. Moreno's note.
The imdersigned trusts, that a perusal of these details will satisfy
M. Moreno, that the protest which he has been directed to deliver
to the undersigned, against the re-assumption of the sovereignty of
the Falkland Islands by his Majesty, has been dravra up under an
erroneous impression, as well of the understanding under which the
declaration and counter-declaration relative to the restoration of Port
Egmont and its dependencies were signed and exchanged between
the two courts, as of the motives which led to the temporary i-ehn-
quishment of those islands by the British Government; and the
162 APPENDIX.
undersigned cannot entertain a doubt but that, when the true cir-
cumstances of the case shall have been communicated to the know-
ledge of the government of the united provinces of the Rio de la
Plata, that government will no longer call in question the right of
sovereignty which has been exercised by his Majesty, as undoubtedly
belonging to the CrovvTi of Great Britain.
The undersigned requests, &c.
(Signed) Palmerston.
Foreign Office, January 8th, 1834.
No. 18.
By Robert Fitz-Roy, Commander of H. M. slooji " Beagle," off
Watchman Cape, on the coast of Patagonia, 22d January 1 834.
You are hereby required and directed to proceed in his Majesty's
schooner. Adventure, under your command, to survey the Falldand
Islands.
New Island appears to me an eligible place for beginning your
operations.
Proceeding round the southern coasts, you will endeavour to meet
me, in Berkeley Sound, early in March.
After meeting me, or after the twenty-fifth of March, you wUl
proceed to the northern shores of the Falkland Islands, and into Falk-
land Sound.
If, after going round the islands, you have time enough to make
particular plans of any of the best harbours, you will do better than
I now anticipate.
All that I think time and weather will allow you to accomplish is
a coast survey on a scale of one quarter of an inch to a mile of
latitude.
You wiU time your departure from the Falklands, so as to meet
me at the west end of EUzabeth Island, in the Strait of Magalhaens,
on or before the first day of next June.
R. F.
To Lieut. J. C. Wickham,
commanding H. B. M. schooner " Adventure."
APPENDIX, 163
No. 19.
Winds, "Weather, and Currents off Chiloe and the Chonos
Archipelago.
So much has been stated by Captain King (vol. i.) respecting the
weather at Chiloe ; and also with regard to that of the Gulf of Pefias,
and neighbouring coast, that I need make but few remarks.
There is much less difference between the climate ; the prevailing
winds, and the order in which they follow ; the tides ; and the cur-
rents on the outer coast of Chiloe, and at the west entrance of Magal-
haens Strait, including the intermediate coasts, than persons would
suppose who judge only by their geographical positions. North-
westerly winds prevail, bringing clouds and rain in abundance.
South-westers succeed them, and partially clear the sky with their
fury ; then the wind moderates, and hauls into the south-east
quarter, where, after a short inter\'al of fine weather, it dies away.
Light airs spring up from the north-east, freshening as they veer
round to north, and augment the store of moisture which they always
bring ; from the north they soon shift to the usual quarter, north-
west, and between that point and south-west they shift and back
sometimes for weeks before they take another round turn. When
the wind backs (from south-west to west-north-west, &c.), bad
weather and strong winds are sure to follow. On that coast wind
never backs suddenly, but it shifts with the sim (with respect to that
hemisphere) very suddenly, sometimes flying from north-west to
south-west or south in a most violent squall. Before a shift of this
kind there is almost always an opening, or hght appearance, in the
clouds towards the south-west, which the Spaniards call an eye (ojo),
and for that signal the seaman ought to watch carefully. As the
sudden shifts are alw^ays with the sun, no man ought to be taken
aback unexpectedly ; for so long as a north-wester is blowing with
any strength, accompanied by rain, so long must he recollect that
the wind may fly round to the south-west quarter at any minute. It
never blows hard from east ; rarely with any strength from north-
east ; but an occasional severe gale from south-east may be expected,
especially about the middle of winter (June, July, August). In the
summer southerly winds last longer and blow more frequently than
they do in winter, and the reverse. The winds never go completely
164 ATPENDIX.
round the circle ; tliey die away as they approach east ; and after an
interval of calm, more or less in duration, spring up gi-adually be-
tween north-east by east and north. Heavy tempests sometimes
blow, from west-north-west to south-west ; and those winds blowing
directly on shore are most to be guarded against. As to the tides,
they are simple and uniform in the extreme. High water, at fuU and
change, takes place within half an hour of noon, from Valdivia to
Landfall Island ; and the rise of tide is every where, on the outer
coasts Avithin those hmits, nearly the same, namely, from four to
eight feet. In the offing no stream of tide is any where discernible,
and even close to the land it does not exceed one knot, or at most
two knots an hour. On this extent of coast what Httle current is
felt, sets southward, except during or before strong or lasting sou-
therly winds : its influence is, however, but trifling, upon a ship out
of soundings.* A heavy swell, from the westward, drives in upon all
the coast. A barometer is invaluable.
No. 20.
El Presidente de la Republica de Chile, &c.
El Senor Roberto Fitz-Roy, comandante del buque de su Mages-
tad Britiinica Beagle ha recibido de su Gobierno el encargo de reco-
nocer estas Costas y levantar mapas de eUas ; y el Gobierno de Chile
desea franquear a una operacion de tan conocida utihdad para la
navegacion y comercio, y para el adelantamiento de las ciencias,
todas las facihdades y auxihos que de el dependan. En su conse-
cuencia, ordeno a todos los Intendentes de Provincia, Gobemadores
Departamentales, Jueces de Districto y demas empleados y Ciuda-
danos per cuyos territories transitare el Comandante Fitz-Roy que
no solo se le ponga embarazo para que entre con su buque en
todos los puertos, bahias y radas de la Republica que le pareciere
conveniente a su empresa, saltando a tierra y ejecutando en ella
los reconocimientos y operaciones que crea necesarias, sino que se
le proporcione todo el favor de que pueda menester ; haciendo y
procurando se le haga la mas amistosa acojida por todos los funci-
* By the term out of soundings, I mean in deeper water than three
hundred fathoms.
APPENDIX. 16*5
onarios y Ciudadanos con quienes entable relaciones ; cual conviene
a la importancia de los objetos cientificos de que esta encargado, y
a la amistad y buena harmonia que cultivamos con la Gran Bretana.
Sala de Gobierno, en Santiago, k cuatro de Agosto de mil ocho-
cientos treinta y cuatro.
Joaquin Prieto.
No. 21.
By Robert Fitz-Roy, Commander of his Majesty's surveying Sloop
" Beagle."
You are hereby required and directed to proceed, with the boats
and party placed under your orders, to examine and sur\'ey the
eastern coast of the island of Chiloe, and the islands, channels, &c.
near that coast.
You will endeavour to meet, or wait for the " Beagle," near the
island of San Pedro, at the south-east end of Chiloe, on the 10th of
December.
Given on board the "Beagle" at San Carlos de
Chiloe, this 24th day of November 1834.
To Lieut. B. J. Sulivan, R. F.
H. M. S. " Beagle."
By Robert Fitz-Roy, Commander of his Majesty's Surveying Sloop
" Beagle."
You are hereby required and directed to proceed, with the boats
and party placed under your orders, to continue the examination and
survey of the eastern coasts of Chiloe, and the islands, channels, &c.
lying between it and the main land.
You wiU endeavour to reach San Carlos on or before the 10th of
January, and there await the arrival of the " Beagle."
Given on board the "Beagle" at the island of
Chiloe, this 9th day of December 1834.
To Lieut. B. J. Sulivan, R. F.
H. M. S. " Beagle."
166 APPENDIX,
No. 22,
By Robert Fitz-Rot, Commander of his Majesty's Sun-eying Sloop
" Beadle."
•'£)*
You are hereby required and directed to proceed in the whale-
boat to sun-ey such parts of the western coasts of the Chonos Archi-
pelago between Lemu Island and the northernmost island, as your
very hmited time and means will allow.
You will endeavour to reach Port Low, and there meet the Beagle,
on or before the 31st of this month.
Given on board the " Beagle " in \'allenar Road,
Chonos Archipelago, this 1 3th day of Decem-
ber 1834.
To Mr. John LoRT Stokes, R. F.
Mate and Assistant- Surveyor,
H.M.S. Beagle.
No. 24*.
Extracts from Agiieros.
Francisco Machado, Piloto que fue a la expedicion que se acaba
be hacer a la parte del Sud, gn obedecimiento del Decreto del Sefior
Gobemador, y Comandante General de esta Provincia, su fecha
29 de Mayo de este presente elSo, y para su cumplimiento, segun
instruye, dando principio desde la Isla de San Fernando, situada en
la latitud 45g. 47m., dice: Que el Puerto que tiene esta Isla es
pequeno, manso ; pero con mal fondo en partes. La Isla de Inche,
que demora al S. j al S. E. de la aguja, no tiene Puerto, ni caleta
alguna, bien que lona embarcacion puede dar fondo a su abrigo por la
parte del E. y esto a necesidad, y por poco tiempo.
Ada la Tierra Firme se hallan dos Puertos muy mansos, y segu-
ros :f el que esta mas al S. es el estero de Diego Grallegos, que hace
ima ensenada acia el S. y el estero que sigue al E. muy hondable.
En la entrada de este tiene ima Isla que, aunque estrecha la boca,
no por eso dexa de haber bastante fondo para qualquiera embar-
cacion. De la boca de este dicho estero, corriendo la Costa al Nd.
• No. 23 is placed after this. — R. F. t 46 grades. S.
APPENDIX. 167
como tres leguas, 6 poco menos, se halla el Puerto donde anclo el
Pingue-Ana de la Esquadra de Anson : tiene varias Islitas a
entrada : la mayor es la del S. donde dexa un canal de 10 brazas
de agua.
Este Puerto se compone de una ensenada acia el S. S. O. y un
estero al S. E. por qualquiera parte de las Islitas que tiene en la boca
se puede entrar : es buen Puerto, manso, y seguro para qualquier
embarcacion. Desde la punta que avanza mas E. O. como una y
media legua del estero de Diego Gallegos, que se ve desde San Per-'
nando al S. corre la Costa al N d. haciendo como ensenada, y en ella
esta la dicha Isla de Inche, que es el principio del Archipielago de
los Chonos, entre la qual y la Tierra-Firme estil otio de FaraUones
grandes, ypequefios. Los vientos que se experimentaron por tiempo
de 17 dias por el mes de Enero fueron S. O. y O. que es el que Ua-
man Travesia, y regularmente viene con zerrazon.
La Tierra-Firme es de serrania alta, y pelada, de piedra aspera,
color de ceniza, y en las faldas y quebradas bosque, que me parece
nada cultivable : todo es peninsula que cercan los dos mares : per
la parte del N. termina en un golfito casi circular, que llaman la
laguna de San Rafael, y por el S. da principio al golfo de San Este-
van donde desemboca el rio de San Tadeo ; de uno a otro mar habra
de 2 a 3 leguas, aunque lo navegable del rio pasa de 5, por las
^oieltas y revueltas, que son muchas. De la dicha laguna al embar-
cadero del mismo rio habra como 20 quadras ; y ^ste es el Istmo que
llaman de Ofqui, y vulgarmente por otro nombre el Desecho. Este
rio de San Tadeo baxa de una cordillera, cuya abra se ve muy cerca
de la laguna, y desemboca, como he dicho, en el golfo de San Estevan,
cuya boca es algo pehgrosa porque tiene poco fondo, y estrecha tanto
que solo se puede entrar 6 salir quando el mar esta tranquilo. Al
frente de su boca al S. como 4 leguas esta la Isla de San Xavier, y
al S. O. de 2 -^ a 3 leguas una punta 6 peninsula donde hay varias ense-
nadas, y caletas que son buenos Puertos ; y de estos N. O. un bello
estero directo mas de 2 leguas, muy sereno, de suficiente fondo, y
bueno ; pero con un pequeno baxo que tiene en su entrada del medio
al S. : se le puso el nombre de San Quintin.
De la expedicion que los Padres Fr. Benito Marin, y Fr. Julian
Real, Misioneros del Colegio de Ocopa, y destinados a las Misiones
168 APPENDIX.
del Archipielago de Chiloe, hicieron a ultlmos del ano de 1778, y
principios del de 1779, a los Archipielagos de Guaitecas, y Guaia-
neco, al Sud de aquella Provincia, en solicitud de los Indies Gentiles.
El 10 se hicieron a la vela, y con viento favorable navegaron casi
todo el golfo que media entre Chayamapu, y Tagau, y Uegaron per
la tarda al Puerto de Tualad.
Surgieron de este al amanecer, (11) no obstante que el N. estaba
considerablemente fresco, y que les ponia en cuidado, porque per-
maneciendo anclados conocian mayor riesgo ; y lograron en pocas
horas anclar en Charraguel, aunque habian antes arribado a Tagau
para comer ; y para seguir desde este el rumbo para el otro dexaron
el canal que se dirige a la lagima de San Rafael, y tomaron el de
Aii, cuya boca tiene como un quarto de legua de ancho por el O. E.
Tomaron este rumbo con el fin de reconocer si habia otra salida mas
facU para el mar de Guaianeco : y dieron fondo en Yepusnec, en
donde por la noche estuvieron en manifiesto peligro, porque sentan-
dose la piragua grande sobre una piedra luego que la vaciante tomo
su curso, se bolco por un costado ; pero mediante el favor de Dios,
y patrocinio de Maria Santisima, cuyo nombre tenia la embarcacion,
y poniendo por su parte las diligencias que en tan arriesgado caso
eran necesarias, consiguieron salir libres en todo, y sin dano alguno
en la piragua.
Enderezada esta, y \4endola ya voyante salieron de aquel Puerto,
yfueron a comer a otro Uamado el Obscuro. (12) Surgieron luego,
y continuaron la navegacion por el misrao canal, dexando al E.
otros dos pequenos con rumbo al S. y Uegaron a hacer noche en
Tuciia : y porque entraron en el canal la vispera de San Diego, y
navegaron por el todo el dia de este glorioso Santa, le titularon con
su nombre.
El siguiente dia no pudieron salir por la manana por lo mucho
que llovio, pero aprovecharon la tarde saliendo para otro sitio, que
hallaron muy incomodo por la fuerza de la corriente que en el expe-
rimentaron Uevaban las aguas.
De este surgieron a la manana siguiente (li) con el fin de entrar
por la primera boca de los dos referidos canales ; y habiendo nave-
gado hora y media con este designio, no pudieron romper contra la
^fuerza de las corrientes que haUaron, viendose obligados a arribar : a
pocas horas se volvi^ron a levar, y navegaron por la primera boca ;
pero encontrandose despues con otra, que tampoco les fu6 posible
APPENDIX. 169
romper contra su corrlente impetuosa, y arribaron a una ensenada
para esperar proporcion favorable. Por la tarde fueron algunos ma-
rineros, y un practico con el Padre Fr. Benito a reconocer la boca
que esperaban pasar ; y regresaron asombrados de haber visto lo
encrespado, y entumecido de las olas por el encuentro de unas con
otras, todo lo que les causo considerable horror, y Ueno su corazon
de temor al considerar les era forzoso haber el pasar por tan mani-
fiesto peligro.
Luego que dixeron Misa, (15) y estando el mar en creciente, salieron
de la ensenada, y no obstante el sobresalto que todos llevaban lo-
graron pasar con felicidad la boca : continuaron navegando, y dieron
fondo antes de medio dia. Experimentaron alii el Ueno de las aguas
entre ima y dos de la tarde, siendo en el mar a las nueve.
Prosiguieron suviage, yvieronel finde ungrande estero. (16) Re-
gresaron, y aunque al O. E. encontraron otro canal no entraron a
reconocerle por no perder tiempo, y poder Uegar adonde estuviesen
asegurados para desembocar por la arriesgada boca referida.
Este dia entre dos y tres de la tarde consiguieron pasarla feliz-
mente, y fueron a anclar en un pequeno canal que se dirige al
Desecho. (17)
Prosiguieron la navegacion, y halLiron el canal principal que va al
Desecho, nombrado Celtau, y Uegaron a hacer noche en el Puerto
Mosado. (18)
SaUeron de este, y antes que principiase la vaciante ganaron la
boca de Celtau, lo que no hubieran conseguido con corta detencion
que hubiesen tenido, como sucedio a una de las piraguas pequenas,
que se quedo fuera por su demora.
Al siguiente dia navegaron un pequeno golfo que se encuentra
antes de la boca de la laguna de San Rafael, y tomando Puerto
anclaron en el, y permanecieron toda la mafiana del otro dia, espe-
rando terminase la vaciante, no obstante haber viento N. claro, y
favorable. (21)
Continuaron su derrota, y desembocaron en dicha laguna, la que
rebalsaron con tiempo apacible, y tambien lo era su vista por los
muchos farallones de nieve que en eUa haUaron, unos grandes, otros
pequenos, y medianos otros. Esta situada entre los 46 gr. 55 min.
y 47 gr. 5 min. de latitud. Dieron fondo a las nueve de la manana
en el Puerto de San Rafael, el que solamente estii resguardado por el
S. y O. E. Pasaron luego los practices, y el Piloto Oyarsum a
reconocer el Desecho, y regresaron con las funestas noticias de que
s
170 APPEXDIX.
el palo donde se enganchaba, y afianzaba el aparejo para su1)ir las
piraguas se habia ya caido, y que el rio San Tadeo habia rebentado,
y formado varies brazos, y diversos rumbos.
Este dia fueron los PUotos, (23) con lo mas de la tripulacion, esta
con herramientas para abrir el camino, y aquellos para reconocer, e
informarse si era 6 no transitable dicho rio : y juzgandose conveniente
que todo esto lo presenciase uno de los Religiosos, fue el Padre Fr.
Benito con los referidos al reconocimiento. Hecho este se resoMo
continuar el viage. Despues de puesto el sol amenazo el tiempo de
borrasca, la que se verifico, y llego a tanto, que pasaron la noche con
mucha afliccion y temores, sin poder descansar en toda eUa. Resulto
de esta tormenta, que de las dos piraguas pequenas, la una perdio
el codaste, y la otra quedo tan maltratada, que solo su plan y una
falca quedaron servdbles. Continue el tiempo en esta disposicion
hasta el dia 28.
En este, aunque ajoido poco, pasaron hasta el principio del Dese-
cho, y luego dieron disposicion, y probaron a subir la piragua entera ;
pero habiendo conseguido llegase su proa a lo ultimo de la escalera,
falto el puno de la garita, y descendio precipitada al principio, jsero
sin dano alguno.
Este dia, (29) aunque festivo por Domingo, considerando por sufi-
ciente y justa causa la notable necesidad en que se hallaban, le emplea-
ron en trabajar, y prevenir lo necesario para subir la piragua : y al
siguiente despues de la Misa se principio la maniobra ; pero aun con
las muchas y eficaces diligencias que hicieron no pudieron conseguir
el fin que deseaban, y resohderon quitar las falcas a la piragua, con
lo que lograron su deseo, y la subieron hasta lo mas penoso.
Conseguido esto emplearon este dia (Die'. 1°.) en que algunos de
la tripulacion fuesen a trabajar para levantar nueva piragua, y otros
!i conducir las cargas : y el dia 2 despacharon la piragua Santa Teresa
a la Ciudad de Castro para que diese noticia de quanto hasta este
dia les habia acaecido.
El 3 pasaron a pie el Desecho, y baxaron al rancho que ya estaba
prevenido en la playa del rio de San Tadeo. Permanecieron alli
hasta que se aprestaron con todo lo necesario las dos piraguas. El
dia 17 continuaron el viage navegando rio abaxo. Padecieron algu-'
nos peUgTos y aflicciones por haberse quebrado las piraguas, y con
especialidad la San Joseph ; pero pudieron Uegar a la boca, 6 desem-
bocadero del rio San Tadeo en el golfo de San Estevan, y tomar
Puerto en un estero estrecho y largo.
APl-ENDIX.
171
(A la vuelta.)
Al siguiente dia* emprendieron la subida por el rio, y logrando la
creciente favorable hicieron buen viage ; y el .16 llegaron a comer al
Desecho, en donde dentro de un rancho hallaron una carta del P.
Fr. Francisco Menendez, por la que vieron les esperaba en la laguna
de San Rafael : gozosos con tan plausible noticia pasaron por la
tarde el Desecho, y encontraron a dicho Religioso en la escalera.
Los dos siguientes dias permanecieron alii, empleando la tripu-
lacion en conducir a la laguna lo que venia en las piraguas (las que
dexaron en piezas en el rancho del embarcadero del rio) y pusieron
boyante la piragua del Patrocinio.
El dia 19 salieron despues de comer, y navegando a remo toda la
tarde llegaron al anochecer a tomar Puerto ; pero antes de dar fondo
se asento la piragua, y pasaron en ella la noche, hasta que con la
creciente a la madrugada pudieron lograr que boyase ; y no obstante
que habia N. se aprovecharon de la vaciante, y pasaron la segunda
boca. Refresco el viento, y continuaron navegando el golfo atra-
cados al E., y fueron a comer en el Puerto Uamado Chauguaguen, y
de alii se levaron, y siguieron por el E. hasta cerca de la boca de
Celtau, donde pasaron la noche. (20)
Segunda Expedicion.
Hecha a los referidos Archipielagos de Guaitecas, y Guaianeco,
por los Religiosos Misioneros P. Fr. Francisco Menendez, y P. Fr.
Ignacio Bargas, en solicitud de la reduccion de los Gentiles, a fines
del ano de 1779, y principios del de 1780.
Primeramente, nuestro viage hasta la lagunaf (es la de San Rafael)
fue feUz, sin otra novedad que algunos sustos a la salida del golfo :
llegamos el dia de los Difuntos despues de haber dicho los dos Misa
enVicufiamo al Desecho. J Descargose en la escalera el mismo dia,
y por la tarde se saco la piragua el Patrocinio hasta media quiUa del
agua : y al otro dia de maiiana se aseguro del todo, y por la tarde la
otra. Intentamos hacer otra piragua mas, y por haber caido enfer-
mos cinco marineros no se concluyo ; quedo hecho el plan, y cos-
tados. El Viernes siguiente (3) comenzaron los temporales, y conti-
nuaron con algmias nevadas, hasta que se hallaba el bastimento en
el embarcadero del rio, y las piraguas ya levantadas, que fue a los
24 dias de nuestra llegada.
* Feb°. 15, 1779. t Oct^ 11, 1779. t Nov^ 2.
s 2
172 APPENDIX.
Parecia que el tiempo se oponia todo a la expedicion. Para botar
las piraguas se seco el rio, y comenzo el S. ; todo nos iba en contra ;
pero su Divina Magestad permitio que con buen tiempo creciese el
rio, y a los 26 dias, el de San Jacome de la Marca, y primera Domi-
nica de Adviento, baxamos el rio, y fui a decir Misa a la boca del
rio San Tadeo. (Nov^ 28.)
:(: ^ * * * *
Uno de los Gentiles nos dixo habia visto por aquellos parages
Huampus mas grandes, que andaba la gente por las bergas, y falcas
mayores que las nuestras : todas noticias deseadas ; pero no lo
quieren averiguar.
Nuestro Senor guarde a V. R. muchos anos, Castro y Marzo 14
de 1780.
:f: :^ :}: :}: H^ ^
Huampus es nombre propio del idioma Veliche, y significa qual-
quiera embarcacion ; y en este dicho di6 a entender aquel GentH a
los Religiosos que en aquella altura habia visto navios, como clara-
mente se infiere de expresar que la gente andaba por las bergas.
No. 23.
Extract from Burney's History of the Discoveries in the South
Sea. Vol. iv. p. 118, &c.
Oct. 11th, 1681, they* were in latitude 49° 54' S., and estimated
their distance from the American coast to be 120 leagues. The wind
blew strong from the S.W. and they stood to the S.E. On the
morning of the 12th, two hours before day, being in latitude by
account 50° 50' S., they suddenly found themselves close to land-
The ship was iU prepared for such an event, the fore-yard having
been lowered to ease her, on account of the strength of the wind.
" The land was high and towering ; and here appeared many islands
scattered up and down." They were so near and .so entangled, that
there was no possibility of standing off to sea ; and, with such light
as they had, they steered as cautiously as they could in between some
islands and along an extensive coast, which, whether it was a larger
island, or part of the continent, they could not know. As the day
advanced, the land was seen to be mountainous and craggy, and the
tops covered with snow.
* The buccaneers under Shnrp.
APPENDIX. 17g
Sharp says, " we bore up for a harbour, and steered in northward
about five leagues. On the north side there are plenty of harbours."
" At eleven in the forenoon they came to an anchor in a harbour in
forty-five fathoms, within a stone's cast of the shore, where the ship
was land-locked and in smooth water. As the ship went in, one of
the crew, named Henry Shergall, fell overboard as he was going into
the spritsail top, and was drowned ; on which account this was named
ShergaU's Harbour."
The bottom was rocky where the ship had anchored ; a boat was
therefore sent to look for better anchorage. They did not, however,
shift their berth that day ; and during the night, strong flurries of
wind from the hills, joined with the sharpness of the rocks at the
bottom, cut their cable in two, and they were obliged to set sail.
They ran about a mUe to another bay, where they let go another
anchor, and moored the ship with a fastening to a tree on shore.
They shot geese, and other \Adld-fowl. On the shores they found
large muscles, cockles like those in England, and limpets : here were
also penguins,* which were shy, and not taken without pursuit ; "they
paddled on the water with their wings very fast, but their bodies
were too heavy to be carried by the said wings." The first part of
the time they lay in this harbour, they had almost continual rain.
On the night of the 15th, in a high north wind, the tree to which
their cable was fastened gave way, and came up by the root, in con-
sequence of which, the stern of the ship took the ground and damaged
the rudder. They secured the ship afresh by fastening the cable to
other trees ; but were obliged to unhang the rudder to repair.
The 18th was a day of clear weather. The latitude was observed
50° 40' S. The difference of the rise and fall of the tide was seven
feet perpendicular : the time of high- water is not noted. The arm
of the sea, or gulf, in which they were, they named the English Gulf ;
and the land forming the harbour, the Duke of York's Island ; " more
by guess than any thing else ; for whether it were an island or con-
tinent was not discovered."
Ringrose says, " I am persuaded that the place where we now are,
is not so great an island as some hydrographers do lay it down, but
rather an archipelago of smaller islands. Our captain gave to them
the name of the Duke of York's Islands. Our boat which went east-
ward found several good bays and harbours, with deep water close to
the shore ; but there lay in them several sunken rocks, as there did
* Steamer ducks. Penguins swim like fish. — R. F.
174 APPENDIX.
also in the harbour where the ship lay. These rocks are less dan-
gerous to shipping, by reason they have weeds lying about them."
From all the preceding description, it appears that they were at
the south part of the island named Madre de Dios in the Spanish
atlas ; which island is south of the channel, or arm of the sea, named
the Gulf de la S""" Trinidada ; and that Sharp's English Gulf is the
Brazo de la Con^epcion of Sarmiento.
Ringrose has dra^^^l a sketch of the Dulce of York's Islands, and
one of the English Gulf ; but which are not worth copying, as they
have neither compass, meridian line, scale, nor soundings. He has
given other plans in the same defective manner, on which account
they can be of little use. It is necessary, however, to remark a dif-
ference in the plan which has been printed of the English Gulf, from
the plan in the manuscript. In the printed copy, the shore of the
gulf is drawn in one continued line, admitting no thorouglifare ;
whereas, in the manuscript plan, there are clear openings, leaving a
prospect of channels through.
Towards the end of October, the weather settled fair. Hitherto
they had seen no inhabitants ; but on the 27th, a party went from
the ship in a boat on an excursion in search of provisions, and un-
happily caught sight of a small boat belonging to the natives of the
land. The ship's boat rowed in pursuit, and the natives, a man, a
woman, and a boy, finding their boat would be overtaken, all leaped
overboard and swam towards the shore. This villanous crew of buc-
caneers had the barbarity to shoot at them in the water, and they
shot the man dead ; the woman made her escape to land ; the boy, a
stout lad about eighteen years of age, was taken, and with the Indian
boat, was carried to the ship.
The poor lad thus made prisoner had only a small covering of seal
skin. " He was squint-eyed, and his hair was cut short. The doree,
or boat, in which he and the other Indians were, was built sharp at
each end and flat bottomed : in the middle they had a fire burning
for dressing victuals, or other use. Tliey had a net to catch penguins,
a club like our bandies, and wooden darts. This young Indian
appeared by his actions to be very innocent and foolish. He could
open large muscles with his fingers, which our buccaneers coidd
scarcely manage with their knives. He was very wild, and would eat
raw flesh."
By the beginning of November the rudder was repaired and hung.
Ringrose says, " we could perceive, now the stormy weather was
APPENDIX.
175
blo\\'n over, much small fry of fish about the ship, whereof before we
saw none. The weather began to be warm, or rather hot ; and the
birds, as thrushes and blackbirds, to sing as sweetly as those m
England."
On the 5th of November, they sailed out of the English Gulf,
taking -with them their young Indian prisoner, to whom they gave
the name of Orson. As they departed, the natives on some of the
lands to the eastward made great fires. At six in the evening the
ship was without the mouth of the gulf : the wind blew fresh from
the N.W., and they stood out S.W. by W., to keep clear of breakers,
which lie four leagues without the entrance of the gulf to the S. and
S.S.E. Many reefs and rocks were seen hereabouts, on account of
which they kept close to the wind till they were a good distance clear
of the land. Their navigation from here to the Atlantic was, more
than could have been imagined, like the journey of travellers by night
in a strange country without a guide. The weather was stormy, and
they would not venture to steer in for the Strait of Magalhaens,
which they had purposed to do, for the benefit of the provision which
the shores of the strait afford, of fresh water, fish, vegetables, and
wood. They ran to the S. to go round to the Tierra del Fuego, hav-
ing the wind from the N.W., which was the most favourable for this
navigation ; but they frequently lay to, because the weather was thick.
On the 12th, they had not passed the Tierra del Fuego. The lati-
tude, according to observation that day, was 55° 25', and the course
they steered was S.S.E.
On the 14th, Ringrose says, " the latitude was observed 57° 50' S.,
and on this day we could perceive land, from which at noon we were
due W." They steered S. by E., and expected that at dayUght the
next morning they should be close in with the land ; but the weather
became cloudy, with much fall of snow, and nothing more of it was
seen. No longitude or meridian distance is noticed, and it must
remain doubtful whether what they took for land was floating ice ;
or their observation for the latitude erroneous, and that they saw the
Isles of Diego Ramirez ?
Three days afterwards, in latitude 58° 30' S., they feU in with ice
islands, one of which they reckoned to be two leagues in circum-
ference. A strong current set here southward. Tliey held on their
course eastward so far, that when at last they did sail northward,
they saw neither the Tierra del Fuego nor Staten Island. (End of
November 1681.)
176
APPENDIX.
No. 24 (a).
Extract from the Voyage of Lionel Wafer in 1686, describing the
Island of Santa Maria, under the mistaken name of Mocha.
" The island afforded both water and fresh provision for our men.
The land is ver}^ low and flat, and upon the sea coast sandy ; but the
middle ground is good mould, and produces maize, wheat, and barley,
with variety of fruits, &c. Here were several houses belonging to the
Spanish Indians, which were very well stored with dunghiU fowl.
They have here also several horses : but that which is most worthy of
note, is a sort of sheep they have, which the inhabitants call ' camero
de tierra.' This creature is about four feet and a half high at the back,
and a very stately beast. These sheep are so tame that we frequently
used to bridle one of them, upon whose back two of the lustiest men
would ride at once round the island, to drive the rest to the fold.
His ordinary pace is either an amble or a good hand-gallop ; nor
does he care for going any other pace during the time his rider
is upon his back. His mouth is like that of a hare ; and the hare-lip
above opens as well as the maLa-hps, when he bites the grass, which
he does verj^ near. His head is much hke an antelope, but they had
no horns when we were there ; yet we found very large horns much
twisted, in the form of a snail-shell, which we suppose they had shed ;
there lay many of them scattered upon the sandy bays. His ears
resemble those of an ass, his neck is small, and resembhng a camel's.
He carries his head bendmg and very stately, Hke a swan ; is full-
chested, like a horse, and has his loins much like a well-shaped grey-
hound. His buttocks resemble those of a full-gro^-n deer, and he has
much such a tail. He is cloven-footed, like a sheep, but on the mside
of each foot has a large claw, bigger than one's finger, but sharp,
and resembhng those of an eagle. These claws stand about two
inches above the di%-ision of the hoof; and they ser^-e him m chmb-
ing rocks, holding fast by whatever they bear against. His flesh eats
as hke mutton as can be : he bears wool twelve or fourteen inches
long upon the beUy ; but it is shorter on the back, shaggy, and a
httle incHnmg to curl. It is an innocent and very sendceable beast,
fit for any drudgery. Of these we killed fortj-three ; out of the maw
of one of which I took thhteen bezoar stones, of wliich some were
ragged, and of several forms ; some long, resembhng coral ; some
APPENDIX. 177
round, and some oval, but all green when taken out of the maw ;
yet by long keeping they turned of an ash colour."
No. 25.
By Robert FitzRoy, Captain of H.M. Surveying Sloop Beagle.
You are hereby required and directed to take charge and command
of the schooner Constitucion, and the party placed by me under
your orders.
Directly the vessel is ready for sea, you will proceed to survey
those parts of the coast of Chile which lie between the parallels of
thirty-one and thirty -five : and on or before the 3 1st of July, you
Avill endeavour to meet me in Callao Roads.
Memoranda :
At this time of year, unfavourable foggy weather may be expected
to impede your progress very materially ; but successful, or the con-
trary, you must endeavour to be punctual at your rendezvous.
At many places the landing will be bad. Do not on any account
land then in a boat. Go near only in a boat ; land on a balsa.
On so straight a coast, subject to a continuance of cloudy weather,
views of the land may be particularly useful. Mr. King is added to
your party, because he draws such views very correctly.
Do not delay in attempting to get deep-sea soundings, when not
hove-to for other purposes.
Be very particular in noticing characteristic appearances of the
land about anchorages ; and such peculiarities of marks, or other-
wise, as may help to guide a stranger.
Notice where and how wood and water are to be procured.
Let Mr. King keep a journal for you, to be given afterwards to me.
No log will be required by me ; but let that journal contain every
note which you consider likely to be useful.
I shall be anxious to send away a tracing of your work, as soon as
possible after your arrival at Callao.
Remember that Paposo is the northernmost inhabited place over
which the government of Chile has authority. In approaching vessels
or places on the coast of Peru, be particularly on your guard.
Inquire about the earthquake and waves of the 20th of February.
At each place make the chief Authority acquainted with your busi-
178 APPEXDIX.
ness, and the accompanying letter from the government of Chile, as
soon as possible.
H.M. sloop Beagle, in Port Herradura, Coquimbo,
6th day of June 1835.
To Lieutenant B. J. Sulivan, R. F.
H.M.S. Beagle.
No. 26.
By Robert FitzRoy, Captain of His Majesty's Surveying
Sloop Beagle.
You are hereby required and directed to take charge and command
of his Majesty's surveying sloop Beagle, until I rejoin you atCaUao.
You vnR conform your conduct, in all respects, to the instructions
sent to me for my gmdance by the Lords Commissioners of the Ad-
miralty.
You will sail from Valparaiso on the 28th of this month, or as soon
after as possible, and proceed direct to Copiapo.
Thence you will proceed to Callao, calling at Iquique, if circum-
stances are favourable ; and at Callao you will await my arrival.
H.M. sloop Beagle, in Valparaiso Bay,
18thof June 1835. R. F.
To Lieut. J. C. Wickham,
H.M.S. Beagle.
N.B. Remember that Peru is in a state of anarchy.
No. 27.
Journal of the Proceedings on board the hired schooner. Carmen,
in search of the crew of his Majesty's late ship Challenger.
June 22d, 1835. — H.M.S. Blonde's boats getting the schooner
Carmen ready for sea; at thirty minutes past eight, p.m. went on
board the schooner vidth the Beagle's whale-boat and surveying instru-
ments.
Tuesday, 23d. Blowing a strong gale from the northward all day,
with very heavy rain ; a great deal of surf on the beach, made it
impossible to land; therefore nothing was done to forward the
schooner's sailing.
Wednesday, 24th. More moderate, but very unsettled weather ;
Blonde's boats preparing schooner for sea ; at four, weighed and ran
APPENDIX. ' 179
under the commodore's stern. Asked the commodore for some ballast,
a few muskets, and a little powder ; was refused. Thirty minutes past
four, received final orders ; made all sail, with the wind fresh from
the southward, and ran through the small passage.
On board the Carmen were :
Mr. Wm. Thayer, master of the vessel.
George Biddlecombe, 2d master of H.M.S. Blonde.
Alex. B. Usbome, 2d assist, surveyor, ,, Beagle.
James Bennett, gunner's mate, „ Beagle.
John Nutcher, boatswain's mate, . „ Blonde.
John Macintosh, A.B. „ Blonde.
John Mitchell, A.B. „ Blonde,
and ten men hired at Talcahuano, who were of very little, indeed
almost no use as seamen.
At about ten, p.m. the wind died away to nearly a calm, which
continued throughout the night.
Thursday, 25th. Daylight. Saw the Paps of Bio Bio E.S.E. by
compass, nine miles distant ; light, variable airs from the northward
throughout the day. Sun-set: north end of St. Mary S.b.W. six
miles, calm aU night.
Friday, 26th. Daylight. North end of St. Mary S.E. five miles ; light
winds from the northward, until four, p.m., when thevdnd freshened
from north-north-west, with heavy squalls of wind and rain ; sun-set,
Camero Head, E. distant five miles. At thirty minutes past six,
observed a fire on Tucapel Head, bearing south-east ; burnt a blue
light, supposing it might be part of the Challenger's crew on their
road to Concepcion ; but finding no alteration in the size of the fire,
and it not corresponding vdth the signal agreed on, continued our
course towards the supposed place of the Lebu, or Leiibu.
Satiu-day, 27th. Strong winds from the northward, and squally
weather, with heavy rain ; stood off and under foresail until two, p.m.,
when the weather cleared a little ; made all possible sail, and stood
in for the point on which the Chaillenger was lost. At three, Mol-
guilla Point E. two miles and a half distant, saw nothing of the
wreck ; bore up, and stood along the land toward the southward,
from one to two miles oiF shore, in search of the river Lebu. At five,
P.M., having run ten miles south of Point Molguilla, and five miles
south of the supposed place of the Lebu, and not seeing any thing of
the wreck or crew of the Challenger, hauled off, and hove-to ; at
180 APPENDIX.
this time any people on the shore could have seen the vessel five
miles north or south of her, she not being more than a mile and a
half from the beach, and having a large blue ensign at the fore-top-
gallant-mast-head.
At six, fired a rocket, as a signal to the shore ; no answer of any
description being made, filled and stood off and on, to keep our posi-
tion during the night ; fresh vidnds and squally, vi^ith heavy rain.
Sunday, 28th. Strong vidnds from north-west, and squally wea-
ther, with heavy rain ; shortened saU to foresail, and headed to the
westward ; thirty minutes past ten, saw the island of Mocha south,
distant eight miles, sounded in fifteen fathoms ; wore to north-east,
and carried all possible sail to get out of the bight ; fresh gales and
squally, with a heavy cross sea.
Monday, 29th. More moderate, but wind still from the northward.
At nine a.m. spoke the Blonde, on her way to the supposed place of
the Lebu ; kept our wind, endeavouring to fetch Tucapel Head, where
we had seen the fire three days before ; noon, Tucapel Point east-
north-east, three-quarters of a mile distant ; obser\'ed two fires on
Tucapel Head ; tacked to the westward, to fetch the Head.
At thirty minutes past two, Tucapel Point east-north-east, nine
mUes ; while four men were aloft (James Bennett, gunner's mate.
Beagle ; John Nutcher, boatswain's-mate ; John Macintosh, A.B. ;
John Mitchell, A.B., of Blonde), bending the fore-topsail, which had
been split the previous night, the vessel gave a very hea\y pitch,
which sprung the foremast, a little below the cross-trees ; and on
her recovering herself, the head of the mast snapped short off, a foot
below the fore-yard, bringing with it aU above, and also the four
seamen who were aloft ; the mainmast, having no support left from
the tryatic stay, and the deck-stay being aft, ready for tacldng, the
great weight of the main-boom, added to the pressure of the wind
on the mainsail, brought the mainmast by the board, fore-and-aft
the deck, striking the taffraU in its fall, which again carried it away,
leaving the head of the mast hanging by the rigging over the stern,
striking heavUy against the rudder and the middle-piece in midships
on the deck. Fortunately, none of the seamen were seriously injured,
as they resolutely kept their hold of the topsail-yard, and were carried
with it into the sea, out of which they soon escaped by means of the
rigging that was hanging over the side.
Every effort was immediately used to clear the wreck, and get
APPENDIX. ' 181
the temporary rigging up, to secure the stump of the foremast which
had carried away the wedges in the partners, and had about three
inches play in the step, from the heel of the mast being decayed ;
nearly the whole of the standing rigging was lost, from night coming
on, and it being necessary to get the wreck clear of the vessel as
soon as possible, lest it should carry away the rudder, and other-
wise damage the hull of the vessel.
Not ha^'ing an axe, or any thing but a cooper's drawing-knife, that
would cut the rigging in the eyes, which had hide on them that had
been placed there several years before, we were obUged to haul it up
taut and cut on the rail, thereby rendering it useless for any thing
but junk.
There were scarcely any nails on board the vessel ; and it was
with the greatest difficulty we succeeded, by shifting two cleats up a
slippery mast, in getting a tackle each side for shrouds, and a hawser
for a stay. At eight, p.m., observed the Blonde north-west one
mile ; fired a rocket, and burnt three blue lights ; no answer re-
turned.
At about midnight we set the jib, peak of foresail, and Beagle's
boat sail for a main- sail ; during the whole of this time it was blow-
ing fresh from the north-west, wdth heavy rain and a cross sea, which
caused the vessel to roll her gunwale under each time ; every one
was quite exhausted, particularly those men who had been hanging
on the mast, getting the tackles secured, the watch therefore was set
until daylight.
Tuesday, 30th. Employed getting the foremast better secured, by
raising sheers vdth fore-yard and jib-boom, and placing a pair of
shrouds on each side, about twenty feet from the deck, and an extra
stay to set a stay-sail on, the whole kept up by a few spikes di-awn
out of the beams. At ten, a.m. strong winds from the westward, with
heavy rain ; saw the north-west extreme of Mocha, bearing south-
south-east, three miles distant ; wore to the north-east, to give time
to get more sail on the vessel, intending to weather the island, if
possible ; if not, to run to leeward, and then stretch off to the south-
ward and westward. Noon ; wore, strong vraids and squally, with a
heavy head sea ; at two, set foresail, double-reefed ; observed the north-
west extreme of Mocha, south by east, one mile and a quarter dis-
tant. At three, p.m., when the north-west extreme bore north-east,
the wind changed suddenly to south-west, bringing the rocks off the
182 APPENDIX.
south-west extreme of the island about four points on the lee-bow ;
but the wind increasing and gi^'ing the vessel more way, enabled her
to pass about three-quarters of a mile to windward of the outer
breaker, on which the sea was breaking furiously ; the island itself
was only visible at intervals, owing to the thickness of the weather,
and constant, heavy rain.
At five, the weather being a little clearer, saw the island, its
centre bearing north-east, four miles distant ; stood to the southward
during the night, fresh breezes from south-west throughout.
Wednesday, July 1st. Daylight, employed rigging the fore-yard as
a jury main-mast ; calm, with drizzling rain and a heavy swell ; by
noon got the jury main-mast up, and set fore stay-sail for a main-
sail, secured the boat's mast to the taflrail, and set the sail for a
mizen. At five, a light air from the southward, stood to the west-
ward during the night (no stars \'isible).
Thursday, 2d. Strong winds from west-north-west ; stood to the
south-west ; at thirty minutes past eight, observed a schooner west,
standing to the northward ; hoisted the ensign union down in the
fore-rigging ; but she passed within a mile to windward, and took
no notice of us. Noon, weather the same ; wore to north-west ; thirty
minutes past four, observ^ed the land east-north-ea^t, supposed
Cocale Head ; wore, and stood to the south-west ; fresh breezes and
squally, with rain at times ; no stars visible throughout the night.
Midnight, wore to the northward.
Friday, 3d. Moderate from the westward, with rain at times,
employed setting up rigging and securing masts ; latitude observ^ed
(within a few miles) 39° 23' S.
Repaired the Beagle's boat, which had been badly stove by the
fall of the masts, as well as our means would allow. Moderate from
the westward, until two, a.m., when the wind shifted to the north-
ward ; wore to the westward.
Saturday, 4th. Moderate, ■wdth rain at times, wind north-west ;
employed as most necessary, fitting grummets for sweeps, in case of
a calm, and being drifted near the land. Latitude observed nearly
38° 40'. S. P.M. Employed as before ; at eight o'clock, wore to the
northward ; moderate throughout the night.
Simday, 5th. Light winds from north-west, and fine clear weather ;
employed repairing sails, chafes, &c. Latitude obsen'ed, 38° 35' S.
At one, P.M., observed the island of Mocha, south extreme bearing
APPENDIX. ' 188
north-east about twenty miles ; at five, the south extreme bore north
fifty- six east, and by the angle to the north extreme eighteen miles
distant. Light airs from north-west and fine weather ; at nine, the
wind shifted to south ; trimmed and steered north by west ; mid-
night, strong winds and fine.
Monday 6th. Strong breezes from south-south-east; at daylight,
Tucapel Head north-north-east ; hauled up for it ; at ten, observed
a vessel in shore ; but suddenly lost her, and could not again get
sight of her.* Noon, Ccimero Head east (true), distant ten miles;
found a strong current setting along shore to the southward, with at
times a heavy ripple, until one, p.m., when it changed and set to the
northward, and off'-shore withal ; at six, Dormido Rocks south-south-
east, distant two miles ; steered north-east by north for the Paps of
Bio Bio ; but found it necessary to haul up north-east, and latterly
north-east half-east, owing to a strong current setting to the north-
ward and westward ; at thirty minutes past nine. Paps of Bio Bio
south-south-east, distant three miles ; and at two, a.m. (Tuesday,
7th), the north point of Quiriquina bore south one cable distant;
stood into the bay, hoping to fetch ' Tome,' there to anchor, untU the
wind came more favourable for Talcahuano ; but the wind being
scant, were obliged to wear (as the vessel would not stay), thereby
losing more than she gained on each tack. At eleven, saw H.M.S.
Blonde coming dovsm to us ; at one, we were taken in tow by the
Blonde, and carried into Talcahuano Harbour, at the south-west cor-
ner of the bay of Concepcion ; and at midnight we anchored.
A. B. UsBORNE, July 7th, 1835.
No. 28.
Winds and Weather.
On the southern coasts of Chile, winds from the southward, or
from the northward, prevail more than those from the west ; and
very much more than those few which come from the east.
From south-south-east to south-west, and from north-west to
north (magnetic) are the points whence the wind usually blows —
with less or more strength, according to the time of year.
During the summer months, or from September to March, southerly
* The Blonde, shut in by a point of land — R. F.
184 APPENDIX.
winds are prevalent, almost always. They are frequently strong in
the afternoon, and sometimes during a part of the night. Towards
morning, and during the early part of the day, moderate winds,
light breezes, or calms, are to be expected.
Near the land, it is generally calm at night, excepting about once
or twice in a month, when the wind blows strongly from the south-
ward until about midnight. Occasional northerly winds are expe-
rienced, it is true, duriag the summer ; but they are usually so mode-
rate, during that season, that they pass almost unheeded.
About the end of March, the ' northers,' as they are called, begin
to remind one that fogs, heavy and frequent rains, thick gloomy
weather, and strong winds, often trouble the southern coasts of
ChUe.
During a part of March, and throughout April, May, and June,
foggy weather is frequent ; and although it is not often that a thick
fog lasts longer than a few hours, a day, even two days, of continued
thick fog, is not an unknown occiu-rence.
With northerly and north-west winds the sky is overcast, the
weather unsettled, damp, and disagreeable. These winds are always
accompanied by clouds, and usually by thick rainy weather. From
the north-west the wind in general shifts to the south-west, and
thence to the southward. Sometimes it flies round in a violent
squall, accompanied by rain, thunder, and lightning. At other times
it draws gradually round. Directly the wind is southward of west,
the clouds begin to disperse, and as a steady southerly wind ap-
proaches, the sky becomes clear and the weather healthily pleasant.
A turn of fresh southerly wind is usually followed by a moderate
breeze from the south-east, with very fine weather. Light variable
breezes foUow, clouds gradually overspread the sky, and another
round turn is generally begun by light or moderate north-easterly
breezes, with cloudy weather, and often rain.
This is the general order of change. When the vrind shifts against
this order, or backs round, bad weather with strong wind may be
expected.
Lightning is always a sign of bad weather. It accompanies or pre-
cedes a change for the worse ; which, howesv^er, is usually a prelude to
clearing up. Squalls are rare, excepting at the shift from north-west
to south-west, already mentioned. From the westward (south-west
by west to north-west by west) the wind does not usually, if ever.
APPENDIX. 185
blow nearly so strong as from north-west to north, or from south-
west to south.
Currents.
Near the island of Mocha, and to the westward of Cape Rumena,
the cun-ent usually runs to the north-west, from half-a-mile to one
mile and a half, each hour. Distant in the ofRng, more than twenty
or thirty miles from land, this set of current is so diminished that it
is hardly sensible ; but near Mocha, and especially near the very
dangerous out-lying rocks oiF the south and south-west extreme of
that island, it is increased to two, and, at times, even three miles an
hour.
From the great river Bio Bio, and from other rivers in the vicinity,
floods, escaping to seaward, often cause strong and irregular currents
which set to the southward — passing the island of Santa Maria,
sweeping round Point Lavapie, and Cape Rumena, and Tucapel
Point — into the bay where his Majesty's ship Challenger was wTecked.
These southerly currents are usually found to set strongly along-
shore, but seldom reach an offing of six miles to the westn^ard of
Cape Rumena.
A very intelligent Hanoverian, Anthony Vogelborg, employed
during several years upon these coasts, was once drifted in a small
vessel, from six miles south of the Paps of Bio Bio, to the rocks
oif the north end of the Island of Santa Maria, in one night, during
a dead calm.
After the great earthquake of the 20th of February, which affected
all the coast about Concepcion, and especially the Island of Santa
Maria, the currents set to the south-eastward so strongly, that a boat
belonging to the above-mentioned Anthony Vogelborg (which he was
steering) running near the Island of Mocha, under sail, with a fresh
southerly breeze, could hardly make head against the strong stream
that was passing along shore from the north-westward. It is, there-
fore, to be apprehended, that the strength and direction of the cur-
rents in the neighbouring ocean are unsettled and extremely uncer-
tain for some time after a serious earthquake.
186 APPENDIX.
No. 29,
Santiago, 12 de Agosto de 1835.
Senor :
He instruido al Presldente del contenido de la carta de V.S. de
ayer, en que me incluye una copia de los resultados del viaje de ob-
servacion del Capitan FitzRoy, de la fragata de S.M.B. Beagle, en
cuanto a la parte de la costa de Chile comprendida en el.
Su E. ha recibido esta prueba de la atencion del Capitan FitzRoy,
con el mayor interes y reconocimiento, y me encarga rogar a V.S. se
lo manifieste de su parte.
Reitero a V.S. las espresiones de mi mayor consideracion y esti-
macion ; y tengo la honra de ser su mas atento,
Seguro serv'idor,
(Firmado) Joaquin Tocornal.
Senor Consul Jeneral,
de S.M.B.
I
No. 30.
By Robert Fitz-Roy, Captain of His Britannic Majesty's
Surveying Sloop Beagle.
You are hereby required and directed to take upon yourself the
charge and command of the schooner Constitucion (tender to the
Beagle), and all on board of, or belonging to her.
As soon as you axe ready for sea, you will proceed to that part of
the coast of Chile, near the Desert of Atacama, at which the survey
of Lieut. B.J. Sulivan ended.
From that part you vnU coast along and survey the shores north-
ward towards Callao, and thence toward Puna, near Guayaquil.
At Puna your survey is to terminate.
You win thence return to Callao in the schooner Constitucion, or
you will sell the said schooner, and, with your party, make your way
to Callao, by the means which you consider best for his Majesty's
service : combining economy with efficiency.
If opportunity should offer, a measurement from Puna to the Gala-
pagos woiild be very desirable.
APPENDIX. 187
On arriving at Callao, from Fund, you will wait upon his Majesty's
Consul-general, and request him to assist in procuring a passage to
England, for yourself and your party, at the least expense to the
pubUc which will be consistent with the necessary accommodation
which you will require, in order to prosecute your work during the
homeward passage.
When you arrive in England, you will repair -with your party to
Plymouth, there report yourself to the Commander-in-chief, and
request him to inform the Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty.
You will also request him to allow your party to be borne, for
victuals only, on the books of one of his Majesty's ships, until the
arrival of the Beagle, or the receipt of orders from the Admiralty.
You will endeavour to leave Callao finally before the month of
June, and arrive in England before the month of October 1836.
You are furnished with the documents herein named :
Copy of my instructions.
Letter from the President of Chile.
Circular letter from the Government of Peru.
Copies of correspondence with his Majesty's Consul-general
in Peru.
Letter to the Bolivian authorities.
And with instruments, stores, and provisions sufficient to last for
eight months.
Money for the purchase of fresh provisions is supplied to you ; and
you wUl keep a minute account of all money which passes through
your hands on account of Government.
When no longer wanted for the survey, the schooner is to be sold,
and the produce of her sale carried to your contingent account.
Previous to sale, you will hold a smT^ey on the vessel, her boat,
and all such stores as you cannot advantageously carry with you to
England ; taking to your assistance in the survey the most competent
persons whom you can obtain.
Clear reports of survey, and accounts of sale will be requii-ed.
You will not on any account take part in, or in any way interfere
mth any disturbance or disagreement of any kind, which may arise
or be pending in your neighbourhood, bearing always in mind that
the exclusive object of your mission is of a scientific nature.
You will not on any account, or for any reason whatever, allow a
passenger, letters, effects of any kind, gold, silver, or jewels, to be
t2
188 APPENDIX.
received or carried on board of the schooner Constitucion, or in her
boat, excepting what actually belongs to your own party.
Remembering how frequent and uncertain are political changes,
you will be very guarded in your conduct. You will show your
instructions ; explain distinctly that you are detached from the Beagle
in her tender, for the puq^ose of continuing the survey of the coast
of Peru ; and you wUl most carefully avoid every act which might
unnecessarily offend.
You wiU communicate frequently with his Britannic Majesty's
Consul-general in Peru, whose influence and zealous support will be
of the utmost consequence ; and you wall endeavour upon all occa-
sions, to follow his advice as exactly as possible.
Given imder my hand on board his Majesty's
Sloop Beagle, in Callao Bay, this 24th day of
Auo'ust 1835.
o
R.F.
To Mr. Alex. B. Usborne, Master's Assistant,
H.M.S. Beagle.
No. 31.
Ministerio de Relaciones Esteriores del Peru.
Palacio del Gobierno, en Lima,
Senor ; Setiembre 4 de 1835.
El Infrascrito Ministro de Relaciones Esteriores tiene la honra de
acompaiiar al Sefior Consul Jeneral de S. M. Britanica los documen-
tos que ha credido necesarios para que la " Constitucion" practique
sin inconveniente en la Costa del Peru el Viage y esploracion cien-
tifica a que esta destinada.
Dichos docmnentos son, unas Ordenes libradas por el Ministerio
de la Guerra a las Autoridades de su Dependencia, afin de que no
impiden el aceso a cualquier pun to de la Costa del Buque Espedi-
cionario, ni el desembarco de las personas que conduce, y se faciliten
en lo posible sus trabajos :
Ordenes del mismo tenor de la prefectura de este departamento h.
los funcionarios locales subaltemos suyos, y finalmente im amplio
pasavante para todas las Autoridades Ciyiles y MiUtares del litoral
de la Republica.
APPENDIX. 189
Tiene el Suscrito la complacencia de dar con estas medidas un Tes-
timonio del Interes que Su Gobiemo toma en el ecsito de la ilustrada
empresa del Gobierno Britanico ; y de Suscribirse.
Su Muy Atento Servidor,
(Firmado) M. Ferreyros.
Senor Consul Jeneral de S.M. Britanica.
Republica Peruana.
Ministerio de Estado del Despacho de Relaciones Esteriores.
Palacio del Gobierno en Lima a 22 de Julio de 1835, 16°.
Senor ;
Ha sido muy satisfactorio para el Infrascrito impartir A los Prefec-
tos de este Departamento y del de la Libertad, la Orden que acom-
paSa en Copia a esta comunicacion, relativa al permiso y ausilios que
el Senor Consul Jeneral de S.M. Britanica solicita en su apreciable
nota de 20 del que exije, se franqueen a los Oliciales del Bergantin
"Beagle" para el desempenode laComision cientifica que se les ha
confiado.
Ya que las Ciencias practicas que mas conspiran k la prosperidad
y adelantamiento del Genero humano deben al Gobierno Britanico una
proteccion tan decidida, no seria conforme, con los principios ni con
los intereses del Gobiemo Peruano negarse a dar las facdidades que
puede franquear 4 los Marinos Comisionados para absolver la impor-
tante Comision de rectificar al mapa y k contribuer del modo que le
es dado A dilatar los limites de la Ciencia, y asegurar el ecsito del
Comercio Universal.
Se han hecho prevenciones semejantes al ministerio de Guerra y al
de Hacienda para que las trasmita a sus subordinados, y espera el
Infrascrito que el Seiior Consul Jeneral le indique si aun seran nece-
sarias recever disposiciones que librarA gustoso para la consecuciou
de tan util trascendencia.
Acepte el Senor Consul Jeneral la distinguida consideracion con
que es : —
Su Atento Servidor
f (Firmado) M, Ferreyros.
Senor Consul Jeneral, de S.M, Britanica.
190 APPENDIX.
MInisterio de Estado de Despacho del Kelaciones Esterlores,
Palacio del Gobierao a 22 de Julio de 1835. 16°.
A los Senores Prefectos de los Departamentos de Lima y de la
Libertad.
Seiior ;
Se halla surto en el Puerto del Callao y puede ser que recorra
al literal de este Departamento el Bergantin de S.M. Britanica
" Beagle" que ha venido al Pacifico espresamente con el designio de
determinar con exactitud la posicion geografica de los Puntos prin-
cipales de la Costa para corregir cualquier error que hubiese en los
Mapas y perfeccionar por este medio la ciencia de la navegacion de
que dependen en gran manera las seguridades y ventajas del Co-
mercio. Deseando vivamente S.E. contribuir por su parte al bien exito
de esta espedicion cientifica en que la humanidad y la civilizacion se
interesan al mismo tiempo y dar al Gobiemo de S.M. Britanica una
muestra de consideracion me ha ordenado prevenir a V.S., bajo de
la mas estricta responsabilidad, que permita acercar y desembarcar
sin el menor embarazo en cualquier punto de la Costa de su mando
a los oficiales del " Beagle" para que puedan hacer con sus instrumen-
tos todas las Observaciones Astronomicas y cientificas que quisieran
practicar ; y que ademas se les proporcionen todas los auxilios y
recursos que puedan necesitar, y pidieren V.S. quien deberas reco-
mendarlos a sus subordinados con la eficacia y esmero que merecen
por su caracter y por la grande importaneia de su comision. Digolo
a V.S. de Orden Suprema a fin de que sin la menor demora espida
la necesaria a su cabal cumplimiento.
(Firmado) M. Ferreteos."
A todas las Autoridades civiles y militares de la costa de Yquique y
provincia de Tarapaca hasta Puna.
Palacio del Gobiemo en Lima.
Sabed : que la Goleta Constitucion construida en Maule y del
porte de treinta y cinco toneladas, patache del Bergantin de S.M.B.
" Beagle" conduce a su bordo Oficiales de la Marina Real Inglesa,
encargados por S.M.B. de recorrer las costas del Pacifico € islas ad-
yacentes, con el fin de rectificar los Mapas hidrograficos. El Gobiemo
de la Repiiblica, i^o solo les ha permitido toda libertad en la practica
APPENDIX. 191
de sus observaciones, sino que quiere y manda bajo de la mas estricta
responsabilidad a las autoridades litorales de cualesquiera clase y
rango que sean, que no les pongan embarazo alguno para acercarse
a todos los pantos de la costa sin ecepcion ; permanecer en ellos el
tiempo que crean conveniente, y desembarcar y morar en tierra a
cualquiera hora, y ademas, que les ministren todos los ausilios que
pudieren. A este fin me ordena expedir este documento ligando a
su obsers'ancia a los funcionarios a quienes se presentare, y recomen-
dandoles muy encarecidamente que si en el distrito de su mando
ecsisten algunos pianos geograficos de la costa, trabajados en el Peru,
interesen a su nombre a los que los posean para que se sirvan mos-
trarlos a los referidos Oficiales, a fin de que puedan llenar mds cum-
plidamente el important! simo objeto de su comision. Dado de orden
suprema en el Palacio del Gobierno en Lima a 1° de Setiembre de
1835.
(Firmado) M. Ferheyros.
No. 33.
(Duplicado.)
El Ciudadano Mariano de Sierra, JenertJ de Brigada de los Ejercitos
Nacionales, Benemerito a la Patria, Ministro de Estado, Secretario
Jeneral de S.E. el Presidente de la Republica, &c.
A las autoridades Civiles y Militares de las Costas de la Republica,
Sabed; Que la Goleta " Constitucion " patache delBergantin de
S.M. Britanica Beagle, construida en Maule del porte de veintecinco
toneladas, conduce a su bordo Oficiales de la Marina Real de su
Nacion con el objeto de recorrer las costas del Pacifico e Yslas adya-
centes para la rectificacion de las cartas hidrograficas, que les ha sido
encargadopor S.M. Britanica, yhabiendo el Supremo Gobierno de la
Republica permitidoles la necesaria libertad en la practica de sus
observaciones, quiere que leis Autoridades litorales no les pongan
impedimento ni embarazo alguno en la aprocsimacion a los puertos,
desembarque y permanencia en ellos por el tiempo que creyesen con-
veniente los referidos Oficiales Ingleses, y que les proporcionen los
ausilios que pidiesen en el orden debido.
A este objeto es que S.E. me ordena espedir el presente documento.
192 APPKNDIX.
quedando legada su observancia bajo responsabilidad a losiuncionarios
a quienes estas letras se presentasen. Dado en la Casa del Supremo
Gabierno en Lima a 18 de Enero de 1836. 17o de la Independencia :
15° de la Repiiblica.
El Ministro Secretario Gral.
Mariano de Sierra.
No. 34.
That multitude of islands, of which the native name is Paamuto,
to us more commonly known as the Dangerous Archipelago of the
Low Islands, may be said to lie strewed between the parallels of
thirteen and twenty-five south, and the meridians of 120 and 150
west : though stricter limits would be 13° and 22° S. ; 135 and 150
west ; because some of those south of 22, and east of 135, are high
islands, and but rarely have communication with the groups in a
lower latitude.
Easter Island, though without the boundaries specified, is but an
outpost, as it were, of the Dangerous Archipelago ; and, no doubt,
was first peopled from that extensive region of (generally speaking)
low coral islands. The high, or rather hilly exceptions, such as
Gambler, Osnaburgh, Pitcairn, Easter, &c. are few, in comparison
with the seventy or eighty groups of islets which surround lagoons,
besides many mere dry reefs.
By far the larger number of the lagoon islands have at least one
harbour in each cluster accessible to shipping ; and a considerable
trade has been carried on with the natives for pearl oyster- shells.
What the number of inhabitants may be, who are dispersed
through the Archipelago, it is exceedingly difficult to estimate, for
two reasons : we know very little of them ; and they are migratory.
From the httle I have learned on the subject, I think they cannot
be less than ten thousand, nor more than thirty thousand, exclusive
of children.
Fish, and shell-fish, hogs, and cocoa-nuts, are the principal sub-
sistence of the Low islanders ; but the natives of Gambler, and a few
other hUly islands, have plenty of vegetable food in addition.
Those Paamuto islands which are not very remote from Otaheite,
affect to receive laws from her sovereign : they have, however, no resi-
dent authority among them, except the head of eaeh family.
i
» APPENDIX. 193
The language of these islanders differs from that of the Ota-
heitans so much that they do not easily understand each other :
yet I believe that both are radically the same. Taata is man, at
Otaheite ; in Paamuto, Tanaka ; which is almost the same as Ka-
naka, the word for man in the Sandwich Islands ; and not very dif-
ferent from Tangata in New Zealand. Some of the Low islanders
say their ancestors came from the south-eastern islands ; others say
from the Marquesas; again there are some who assert that their
forefathers arrived from islands to the westward : so that no reli-
ance can be placed upon the little yet known of their origin. There
is, however, reason for supposing that the earlier inhabitants were
not of one famUy, or tribe ; but that they were emigrants from more
than one quarter.
In most of the entrances to harbours in the lagoon islands, there
is a strong current of tide, which sets in and out alternately, about
six hours each way. The tide rises nearly two, or at most three,
feet. It is high water at about one, on the days of fuU and new moon,
among the western groups of islands, and from half an hour to an
'hour later among those which lie towards the south-east. The cur-
rents which do not appear to be caused by tide are irregular ; and,
as yet, too little is knovra of their usual direction to enable any one
to say more than that during settled weather, and a steady trade
wind (south-easterly), the surface waters in general move westward
from five to twenty miles a day ; and that in the rainy season, from
October to March, when westerly vpinds, squalls, and rain are fre-
quent, the currents vary most, and occasionally set eastward, at the
rate of from half a mile to two miles an hour.
Numerous instances are upon record of canoes being drifted out of
their course — even several hundred miles — by currents and westerly
winds : few narratives of voyages in the Pacific are without a notice
of them : and they materially assist in explaining how remote, and
perhaps very small, islands, may have been first peopled from the
west : against the direction of the generally prevalent wind.
No. 35.
The British Resident at New Zealand, to His Britannic Ma-
jesty's Subjects, who are Residing or Trading in New Zealand.
The British Resident announces to his countrymen that he has
received from a person who styles himself "Charles, Baron de
194 APPENDIX. ,
Thierry, sovereign chief of New Zealand, and king of Nuhahiva,"
(one of the Marquesas Islands) a formal declaration of his intention to
establish in his own person an independent sovereignty in this coun-
try, which intention he states he has declared to their Majesties the
Kings of Great Britain and France, and to the President of the
United States ; and that he is now waiting at Otaheite the arrival
of an armed ship from Panama, to enable him to proceed to the Bay
of Islands with sti-ength to maintain his assumed sovereignty.
His intention is founded upon an alleged invitation given to liim
in England by Shunghi and other chiefs, none of whom as indivi-
duals had any right to the sovereignty of the country, and, conse-
quently, possessed no authority to convey a right of sovereignty to
another. Also, upon an alleged purchase made for him in 1822, by
Mr. Kendall, of three districts on the Hokianga River, from three
chiefs who had only a partial property in these districts, parts of
which are now settled by British subjects, by virtue of purchase from
the rightful proprietors.
The British Resident has also seen an elaborate exposition of the
views of this person, which he has addressed to the missionaries of the
Church Missionary Society, in which he makes the most ample pro-
mises to all persons, whether whites or natives, who \\t11 accept his
invitation to live under his government ; and in which he offers a
stipulated salary to each individual missionary in order to induce
them to act as his magistrates. It is also supposed, that he may
have made similar communications to other persons or classes of
his Majesty's subjects, who are hereby invited to make such com-
munications, or any information on this subject they may possess,
knovra to the British Resident, or to the additional British Resident
at Hokianga.
The British Resident has too much confidence in the loyalty and
good sense of his countrymen, to think it necessary to caution them
against turning a favourable ear to such insidious promises. He
firmly believes that the paternal protection of the British govern-
ment, which has never failed any of his Majesty's subjects however
remote, wiU not be withheld from them, should it be necessary to
prevent their lives, liberties, or property, from being subjected to the
caprice of any adventurer, who may choose to make this country, in
which British subjects have now by the most lawful means acquired
so large a stake, the theatre of his ambitious projects : nor, in the
British Resident's opinion, will his Majesty, after having acknow-
APPENDIX. 195
ledged the sovereignty of the chiefs of New Zealand in their col-
lective capacity, by the recognition of their flag, permit his humble
and confiding aUies to be deprived of their independence upon such
pretensions.
But, although the British Resident is of opinion that such an
attempt as is now announced must ultimately fail, he, nevertheless,
conceives, that if such a person were once allowed to obtain a foot-
ing in the country, he might acquire such an influence over the
simple-minded native as would produce effects which could not be
too much deprecated or too anxiously provided against ; and he has
therefore considered it his duty to request the British settlers of all
classes, to use all the influence they possess vsdth the natives of
every rank, in order to counteract the efforts of any emissaries which
may have arrived or may arrive amongst them : and to inspire both
chiefs and people with a spirit of the most determined resistance to
the landing of a person on their shores, who comes with the avowed
intention of usurping a sovereignty over them.
The British Resident will take immediate steps for calUng toge-
ther the native chiefs, in order to inform them of this proposed
attempt upon their independence, and to advise them of what is due
to themselves and to their country, and of the protection which
British subjects are entitled to at their hands. And he has no doubt
that such a manifestation will be exhibited of the characteristic
spirit, courage, and independence of the New Zealanders as will stop
at the outset such an attempt upon their hberties by demonstrating
its utter hopelessness.
James Busby,
British Residency, at New Zealand, British Resident.
Bay of Islands, 10th Oct. 1835.
No. 36.
Declaration of the Independence of New Zealand.
1 . We the hereditary chiefs and heads of the tribes of the northern
parts of New Zealand, being assembled at Waitangi in the Bay of
Islands, on this 28th day of October 1835, declare the Indepen-
dence of our country ; which is hereby constituted and declared to
bean independent state, under the designation of "The United
Tribes of New Zealand."
190 APPENDIX.
2. All sovereign power and authority within the territories of the
United Tribes of New Zealand is hereby declared to reside entirely,
and exclusively, in the hereditary chiefs and heads of tribes in their
collective capacity : who also declare that they will not allow any
legislative authority separate from themselves in their collective
capacity to exist ; nor any functions of government to be exercised
within the said territories, unless by persons appointed by them,
and acting under the authority of laws regidarly enacted by them in
congress assembled.
3. The hereditary chiefs and heads of tribes agree to meet in
congress at Waitangi, in the autumn of each year, for the purpose
of framing laws for the dispensation of justice, the preservation of
peace and good order, and the regulation of trade ; and they cordi-
ally invite the southern tribes to lay aside their private animosities,
and to consult the safety and welfare of our common country, by
joining the confederation of the United Tribes.
4. They also agree to send a copy of this declaration to his Ma-
jesty the king of England, to thank him for his acknowledgment of
their flag : and in return for the friendship and protection they have
she^\^l, and are prepared to shew to such of his subjects as have
settled in their country, or resorted to its shores for the purposes of
trade, they entreat that he will continue to be the parent of their
infant state, and that he will become its protector from all attempts
upon its independence.
Agreed to unanimously on this 2Sth day of October 1835, in the
presence of his Britannic Majesty's Resident.
Here follow the signatures, or marks, of thirty-five hereditary
chiefs and heads of tribes, which form a fair representation of the
tribes of New Zealand, from the North Cape to the latitude of the
river Thames.
English witnesses,
(Signed) Henry Williams, Missionary C. M. S.
Geo. Clabke, C. M. S,
James C. Clendon, Merchant.
Gilbert Maix, Merchant.
I certify that the above is a correct copy of the declaration of the
chiefs, according to the translation of missionaries who have resided
APPENDIX. 197
tCH years and upwards in the country, and it is transmitted to his
most gracious Majesty the King of England, at the unanimous
request of the chiefs.
James Busby,
British Resident at New Zealand.
No. 37.
Colonial Secretary's Office, Sydney,
Sir: 29th June 1835.
I am directed by the governor to inform you that he has received
a despatch from the right honourable the Secretary of State for the
Colonies, communicating the representation made by you of the
advantages which would result to you personally, as well as to other
Europeans who have settled in the district in which you reside, by
your being invested with an appointment corresponding to that
lately conferred upon Mr. James Busby : — the extreme distance of
that gentleman from the quarter in which you and other European
settlers reside, preventing him from rendering that assistance which
he might otherwise be expected to afford : — and I am accordingly
commanded by Sir Richard Bourke to acquaint you, that in pursu-
ance of the authority thus conveyed, his Excellency has been pleased
to nominate j^ou to be an "Additional British Resident" at New
Zealand.
The creation of the appointment held by Mr. Busby originated in
the desire of checking the atrocities and irregularities committed
at New Zealand by Europeans, and of giving encouragement and
protection to the well-disposed settlers and traders from Great Bri-
tain and this colony ; and as the general rules by which it is the
wish of this government that the British resident should regulate his
proceedings, should also guide you in cases in which you may feel
yourself called upon to act —
I am directed by his Excellency to transmit to you the enclosed
extract of the instructions (13th April 1833) issued to Mr. Busby on
his departure to assume the duties of his office.
By an adherence to the principles laid down in these orders, and
their discreet application to circumstances, it is hoped that you will
not be disappointed in your expectation of being enabled to benefit
198 APPENDIX.
not only yourself, but others, and it will, his Excellency conceives,
be unnecessary to do more than impress upon you the importance of
obtaining the objects you seek by a moral influence over chiefs and
natives.
It should further be your particular study not only to act in con-
cert with the British resident, but to maintain with him that good
understanding which is necessary to give eflFect to your appointment,
and to preserve the influence of both.
The British resident wiU be requested to make known your
appointment to masters of vessels, and others resorting to New Zea-
land ; and, on your arrival at your destination, you will take such
measures as your own experience, and that of any missionaries who
may be on the spot, may suggest as the best for apprising the British
settlers and the natives, of the nature of your office and objects.
Upon this subject Mr. Busby, to whom I have the honour of
transmitting you a letter of introduction, wUl no doubt be able to
aflFord you valuable information.
The Secretary of State has intimated that you have disclaimed
all desire of emolument in soliciting the appointment now conferred
upon you.
I have the honour to be.
Sir,
Your most obedient servant,
(Signed) Alexander M' Leay,
To Thomas M' Donnell, Esq., Colonial Secretary.
Additional British Resident
at Hokianga, in New Zealand.
No. 38.
Extract from the Instructions of his Excellency, the Governor of
New South Wales, to James Busby, Esq., British Resident at
New Zealand, dated 13th April 1833.
To check as much as possible the enormities complained of, and to
give encouragement and protection to the weU- disposed settlers and
traders from Great Britain and this colony, it has been thought pro-
per to appoint a British subject to reside at New Zealand, in an
accredited character, whose principal and most important duty it wUl
APPENDIX. 199
be to conciliate the good will of the native chiefs, and establish upon
a i^ermanent basis that good understanding and confidence which it
is important to the interests of Great Britain, and of the colony, to
perpetuate.
It may not be easy to lay down any certain rules by which this
desirable object is to be accomphshed ; but it is expected, by the
skilful use of those powers which educated man possesses over the
wild or half-civilized savage, an influence may be gained, by which
the authority and strength of the New Zealand chiefs wdl be arranged
on the side of the resident for the maintenance of tranquillity
throughout the islands.
It will be fitting that you explain to the chiefs the object of your
mission, and the anxious desire of his Majesty to suppress, by your
means, the disorders of which they complain ; you will also announce
your intention of remaining among them, and will claim the protec-
tion and privilege which you will tell them are accorded in Europe
and America to British subjects, holding, in foreign states, situations
similar to yours.
You will find it convenient to manage this conference by means of
the missionaries, to whom you wUl be furnished with credentials,
and with whom you are recommended to communicate freely upon
the objects of your appointment, and the measures you should adopt
in treating with the chiefs.
The knowledge which the missionaries have obtained of the lan-
guage, manners, and customs of the natives may thus become of ser-
vice to you. Assuming, however, that your reception will be as
favourable as has been anticipated, I will endeavour to explain to
you the manner of proceeding, by which I am of opinion you may
best succeed in efFectiag the object of your mission ; you will at the
same time understand, that the information I have been able to obtain
respecting New Zealand is too imperfect to allow of my presenting
you with any thing more than a general outline for your guidance,
leaving it for your discretion to take such further measures as shall
seem needful, to arrest British subjects offending against British or
colonial laws in New Zealand.
By the 9th of George IV., chap. 83, sec. 4, the Supreme Court
in New South Wales and Van Diemen's Land have power to enquire
into, hear and determine all offences committed in New Zealand, by
200 APPENDIX.
the master and crew of any British ship or vessel, or by any British
subject hving there ; and all persons convicted of such offences may.
be punished as if the offence had been committed in England. The
law having thus given the court the power to hear and determine
offences, it follows, as a necessary incident, that it has the power of
bringing before it any person against whom any indictment should be
found, or information filed, for any offences within its jurisdiction.
I would here observe, that I can propose no other means by which
you can secure the offender, than the procuring his apprehension and
deUvery on board some British ship, for conveyance to this country,
by means of the native chiefs with whom you shall be in communi-
cation. It is weU known, that amongst those Europeans who are lead-
ing a wandering and irregular life at New Zealand, are to be found
transported felons, and offenders, escaped from this colony and Van
Diemen's Land. It is desirable that opportunities for the apprehen-
sion and transmission of those convicts to either colony should be
promptly embraced.
The chiefs are, it is said, well acquainted with the descriptions of
the different Europeans residing in their country, and wiU be found
able and wilhng to point cut and secure, at a convenient time, those
whom they know to be fugitives from the Austrahan colonies. You
will be furnished from the office of the principal superintendant, with
the names and descriptions of those convicts from New South Wales
who are known or suspected to be concealed in the islands of New
Zealand ; and you wiU use your discretion as to the fittest time for
causing their apprehension, and removal of such as may be within your
reach, or are guilty of any offence against the peace and tranquillity
of the coimtry. You vidll, of course, take every precaution to avoid
the apprehension of a free person in mistake for a convict, as an
action for damages would probably follow the commission of such an
eiTor.
This government vsdll indeed be disposed to save you harmless in
all such cases, where becoming circumspection has been used.
When any of his Majesty's ships are off the coast, you will request
the commander to receive the convict, or other person, arrested by
your means, for conveyance to tliis place.
I would further observe, that, by means of the information which
you are likely to receive from the chiefs, you may become acquainted
APPENDIX. ^01
with the criminal projects of Europeans before their execution ; and
by a timely interference you may be able altogether to prevent their
mischievous designs, or render them abortive.
In the character which you hold you will be justified in addressing
any British subject, to warn him of the danger to which he may be
exposed, by embarking or persevering in any undertakmg of a crimi-
nal or doubtful nature.
In the manner I have now described, and by proceedings of a simi-
lar character, it may be possible to repress the enormities which have
heretofore been peqjetrated by British subjects in New Zealand.
It may also happen that this salutary control wiU not affect British
subjects only, but that the knowledge of there being a functionary
stationed in New Zealand, through whom offences committed by the
subjects of any other State against the people of that country wiU be
made known to the British Government, and through that Govern-
ment to the other European and American powers, may induce the
subjects of those powers to adopt a less licentious conduct towards
the New Zealanders, and other inhabitants of the South Sea Islands.
There is still another form in which the influence, it is hoped, the
British Resident may obtain over the minds of the New Zealand
chiefs, may be more beneficially exhibited.
It is possible, by your official moderation, that the evils of intestine
war between rival chiefs or hostile tribes may be avoided, and their
differences peaceably and permanently composed. It is also pos-
sible, that at your suggestion, and by the aid of your councils,
some approach may be made by the natives towards a settled form of
government ; and that by the establishment of some system of juris-
prudence among them, their courts may be made to claim the cogni-
zance of all crimes committed within their territory : and thus the
offending subjects, of whatever state, may be brought to justice by a
less circuitous and more efficient process than any which I have been
able to point out.
If, in addition to the benefits which the British missionaries are
conferring on those islanders, by imparting the inestimable blessings
of Christian knowledge and a pure system of morals, the Zealanders
should obtain through the means of a British functionary, the insti-
tutions of courts of justice, established upon a simple and compre-
hensive basis, some sufficient compensation would seem to be rendered
for the injuries heretofore inflicted by our delinquent countrymen,
u
902 APPENDIX.
Having thus explained to you, generally, the course of proceeding
by which I think your residence in New Zealand may be made condu-
cive to the suppression of the enormities which British subjects, and
those of other states, have been in the habit of committing in these
islands, I have only further to observe, that it wiU be your duty to
assist, by every means in your power, the commercial relations of
Great Britain and her colonies with New Zealand. It would indeed
be desirable that you should become the medium of all communica-
tions between the New Zealand chiefs and the masters of British or
colonial vessels frequenting the coasts, and the merchants and set-
tlers estabUshed in the islands. This arrangement will probably grow
out of your residence in the country, and you should keep it in view
as an important object. You wiU be pleased to forward by every
opportunity a shipping report, setting forth the names, masters,
number of crew, tonnage, and countries, of vessels arriAing at the
Bay of Islands, or other parts of New Zealand, whence you can
obtain correct accounts ; with the cargoes of such vessels, their
objects in touching at New Zealand, as far as you are informed ; and
any other particular concerning them that may be worthy of notice.
I beg to call your attention to the strange and barbarous traffic in
human heads, which certainly did exist to some extent, but which, I
am given to understand, is now nearly abandoned. Should it be
foimd to continue or revive, some legislative act may be necessary to
prohibit, in this colony, the crime and disgrace of participating in so
brutalizing a commerce.
Having already mentioned the assistance which I anticipate you
win receive from the missionaries, I have now only to impress on you
the dut}' of a cordial co-operation with them in the great objects of
their sohcitude, namely, the extension of Christian knowledge
throughout the islands, and the consequent improvement in the
habits and morals of the people.
RiCHAED BOUEKE.
No. 39.
The modes of surveying coasts, where there is anchorage, and
water smooth enough to admit of boats being frequently employed,
have been so often detailed, that, without repeating what is said
i;Q every treatise on the subject, I will only try to describe in this
APPENDIX. 203
place the methods adopted by the officers of the Beagle, in the exa-
mination of a wild sea-coast — such, for example, as that of the
south-western part of Tierra del Fuego.
On that coast the weather was so continually bad, there was so
much swell, and the water near the steep precipitous shores always
so deep, that anchorage (except in harbours) was impracticable :
boats were seldom able to assist (while under way), and the bearing
compass, though particularly good, and well placed, was of very little
use : it was therefore never trusted in important bearings. Another
impediment, and not a slight one, was the current ; which set irre-
gularly from one knot to three knots an hour, along the shore.
But there are seldom evils, unbalanced by remedies. The stormy
and desolate shores of Tierra del Fuego are broken into numerous
islands, about which anchorages are abundant, and they are excel-
lent, when once a vessel is in them. To find, and enter, or leave
them in most instances, was troublesome, and often dangerous. But,
with the help of those havens, and the distinct marks afforded by a
high rocky shore ; and by tlie sharp peaks of more distant heights,
a correct survey was effected.
Beginning at the western extreme, near Cape Pillar (because the
prevaihng winds are westerly, and the current sets to the eastward),
our first object was to find a safe harbour in which to secure the
ship. There we made observations for latitude, time, and true bear-
ing ; on the tides, and magnetism. We also made a plan of the
harbour and its environs ; and triangulations, including all the
visible heights, and more remarkalile features of the coast, so far as
it could be clearly distinguished from the summits of the highest
hills near the harbour. Upon these summits a good theodolite was
used, which was set, invariably, to a well-defined mark, near the
observatoiy ; from which mark the true bearings of the stations
on the summits of the hills were ascertained by observations of the
sun made with a theodolite.
Many leagues of exposed, and difficult coast, were looked down
upon, in this manner ; and, at the least, their exact bearings from
one fixed spot ascertained. But if more than one height afforded a
round of angles with the theodolite, and the position of each of
those heights was accurately known by triangulation depending
upon a base measured at the harbour, then the positions of various
other hills or marks were ascertained ; and so much easier became
204 APPENDIX.
the sea- work afterwards executed in the ship. I need hardly allude
to the facilities, afforded by heights, for making eye sketches of the
coast line, and other details, such as the ranges of lulls, forms of
banks, &c. Ascending heights near the sea is advantageous in ano-
ther point of view ; for not a rock or a shallow escapes notice, if the
day is tolerably clear. While in harbour, every place in the vicinity
which could be examined in boats, or overland excursions, was ex-
plored, as far as our means and time would allow.
Before I speak of the sea-work, it may be useful to say a word
about ' bases/ of four kinds, arranged according to their relative
value.
The first are those derived from good astronomical or chronome-
trical observations, made at two stations several mUes apart.
The second are deduced from angular measurements of small
spaces exactly known.
The third are obtamed by actual measurement with a chain, with
rods, or with a line : —
And the fourth are the rather uncertain bases obtained by sound.
This statement of the relative value of bases, is only meant to refer
to their employment in sea-surveying. I need hardly remind the
reader of these notes, that the third description of bases, however
exact nominally, requires a host of minute precautions, in addition
to what I never found between Valdivia and Cape Horn, namely, a
nearly level and accessible space, of considerable length, on which to
measure.
To attain the utmost precision is a laudable endeavour, no doubt,
when carrying on extensive trigonometrical operations on land ; but
it should be borne in mind, that every hour employed in what is
commonly called ' hair-sphtting' — in minute details that do not affect
the chart or plan which is the result of a sea-survey, is not only an
hour lost, but an hour taken away from useful employment.
The second kind of bases are so quickly and easily measured, either
with a sextant or micrometer, across any kind of land or water, and
have been so repeatedly proved in every part of the Beagle's surveys,
that I consider them unobjectionable, when used for such limited
•operations as making plans of harbours, or fixing the positions of
objects only a few miles distant. By multiplying bases, which with
such easy methods is soon effected ; and by a frequent use of the
sextant, artificial horizon, and chronometer, material errors may be
APPENDIX. 205
kept out of the work of a practised surveyor. With a sextant, hori-
zon, and chronometer (in a sheltered spot), a micrometer and board,*
a theodolite, and intelligent assistants, much work may be done in a
short time.
When ready to proceed, the chronometer rates being ascertained,
and the weather glasses affording reasonable hope of a day or two
without a gale of wind, we started at day-light, and worked against
time. Those officers who were engaged particularly with the survey,
did not take part in the routine duties of the vessel. One attended
to the bearing compass, and usually wrote the various angles and
bearings, taken by others as well as himself, in a bearing-book.
Another officer took angles. A third attended to the ship's course, the
soundings, and the patent log. When many angles were required at
one time, or when observations for time, latitude, or true bearing,
were made while taking a round of angles, other officers assisted.
If the bearing compass was steady enough it was used, even
when true bearings were obtained ; or when, if cloudy, the triangu-
lation was carried on by points fixed from the last harbour. As the
compass was so placed as to be uninfluenced by local attraction,
the bearings it gave, when steady, were satisfactory ; yet it was
never trusted imphcitly ; nor at all in matters of consequence. Its
use was as an auxiliary ; not as a principal. Bearings, or angles, of
the highest points, or of marks so well defined as not to be mis-
taken in consequence of a change of the place of an observer, were,
of course, always selected, if such were visible : and vertical angles
of all notable heights were not omitted.
For the sake of perspicuity, we considered that positions, fixed
points, or marks, were separated into three classes. In the first
class, were obsen^atories or places at which the latitude, longitude,
and true bearing, were accurately ascertained ; besides those high
peaks, or other well-defined objects which could be seen at a dis-
tance of some leagues, and whose exact places were known by a
triangulation which connected them with an observatory ; and the
highest points of islands, which were neither low, nor small enough
for the eye to overlook them at the first glance.
* A board some feet long, painted black on one side, white on the
other; exactly measured, and suspended horizontally, at right angles to
the observer.
206 APPENDIX.
In the second class we considered all the minor fixed points
wliich were included in the triangulation, excepting the details of the
coasts and ' boundary lines,'* which belonged to the tliird class.
We supposed that the ship had sailed from the ' first' harbour. f At
six, in the morning, (marked 6) the position of the vessel was fixed
by two or more angles between marks, already fixed, upon the land.
At 6'30, and at 7 similar means were used to fix the ship's place.
Soundings were taken, and laid down by proportioning to the times
of each sounding, the portions of distances run between the two
stations, as shewn by patent log, by bearings of a mark, such as
6 (in the figure) while sailing from 6 30 to 7 : by independent
double angles, (two angles between three marks), orliy simple cross-
bearings.
Transit bearings were always sought for, by compass as well as by
noting when marks were ' on ;' or, in a line, one with another, with-
out reference to the compass. We endeavoured to ascertaiii (or fix)
the ship's position at the same moment, by the most available of the
numerous methods so readily occurring Mobile the log was going, the
time noted carefully (as often as angles or bearings were taken),
and several first class marks in sight. Transit bearings were useful
in the details of the coast line, as may be seen by the lines dra^vn
from 6-30, 7 and 8 ; and they corroborated the correctness of the
triangulation, when applied to first and second class marks.
By a judicious selection of objects, and a clever application of
transit bearings, I have seen extensive and correct triangulations
carried on from data, obtained at sea, which appeared uttei-ly in-
adequate. | I do not imply that the absolute position of any one
point was independently correct, because all depended at first upon
observations at sea ; but tkat the points of the triangulation were all
so correct, relatively, that, upon after examination, when the regular
routine of harbour work had been combined with the data obtained
afloat, and their truth ascertained by connection with the previous
observatory, no alteration was found necessary.
Perhaps I should explain, that in the plan of the ' first ' harbour
all depended upon the base Ab ; by which also were fixed B and C.
From the summits B and C ; — G, D, E, F, were fixed, as well as a
* By ' boundary lines ' [ mean limiting outlines of shoals, or rocky
place?. f See figure, t By Mr. Stokes.
7^.
Oji.s£HrATIOJ\rS 6'.V" SIIORi: AT A
o/i o/i.si-uiiA'iiiny at^I
ojiSMjuiirojn.rr /.
nf
ilibliahtdly/'Heray CcdbumU.Gjeat ilaTLboroxi^ 3+wat.]6S9
APPENDIX. 207
number of inferior marks ; by a ' round ' of angles taken with a
theodolite, at each station (B and C), the instrument being in each
case set to A. From A, the true bearings of B and C were ascertained
astronomically. When the position of L was exactly determined by
latitude, and distance from the meridian of A, the long and accu-
rate base AL became known. With that, as a foundation, the work
was laid down : and by that base, if necessary, the former positions
of G, D, E, and F, were corrected. But so well did angular mea-
sures answer, that it was scarcely ever requisite to make such cor-
rections.
It has been shewn that the log served only to place soundings, or
help to fill up a space, while clouds obscured marks. I should add
that it was serviceable in ascertaining the direction and strength of
currents. Currents altering in strength, as well as in direction,
prevented our applying the patent log to other uses, although we
had every reason to put implicit confidence in its indications, and
have often proved their value in the still waters of a deep sound,
where no stream of tide^ or current, existed : as well as in harbours,
where angular bases were measured for the special purpose. Views
of the lands, both in plan and profile, were very frequently taken.
When boats could be lowered, and a sufficient object demanded their
employment (as at 11, of the first day, and at 10 of the second day)
they did not hang idly at their davits.
In the example I have given, circumstances conspired in our
favour, a rare event in Tierra del Fuego, or on any similar coast,
exposed to the prevailing westerly winds of high latitudes ; but when
we failed to find anchorage, the triangulation was carried on by first
class marks ; and by the ship's positions, when fixed by good observa-
tions at sea. But however well such a method may answer in a fine
climate— on that coast it was in general unsatisfactory, and very
inferior to that of going from one harbour to another.
Among many kinds of notation useful in svirveying, the annexed
sketch shews a method used by Mr. Stokes, which I had not then
seen adopted. It is very convenient, and assists the memory more
than any other. In figure 2, A and B are stations, at which the
angles specified were taken right and left of a mark, whose bearing
was ascertained. Or, the angles only were taken, and the triangles
afterwards calculated, or protracted, by reference to the base upon
which they depended, such as AB. A sketch on this principle, how-
208
APPJiNDlX.
ever slightly made, brings the place to mind in an instant, and
avoids any necessity for names* or letters.
No. 40.
Nautical Remarks on the Northern Coast of Chile.
Scarcely any extensive coast less requires particular description
than that of Chile. With a tolerable chart, and the lead going, a
stranger may saQ into, or out of, almost any Chilian port without hesi-
tation. As there are, however, some anchorages and landing-places
hitherto little known, except to coasters, it may be useful to give
a few notices of them.
Valparaiso, and the ports southward, have been described so often,
that I will not occupy any of these crowded pages with remarks on
such well-known places ; although in another publication, strictly
nautical, they will appear.
QuiNTERO, HoRcoN, and Papudo, have no hidden dangers. The two
former lie to the southward and northward, respectively, of a strag-
gling cluster of black rocks, above water : the first is now little fre-
quented, being rather shallow, and out of the way : the second is a
summer roadstead, with a good landing-place, and easy communica-
tion thence to Puchancavi. Papudo is a small open bay, with a good
landing-place. Northerly wdnds throw in a heavy swell. Its situation
is pointed out by a high, peaked hill, called Gobernador, immediately
over the port.
Pichidanque, sometimes called Herradura, has a rock near the
middle, on which, at low tide, there are but fifteen feet of water : it
is in a line between the north end of the little island in front of the
harbour, and a gully at the north-east side, through which a river runs
from Quilimari, and four cables' lengths from the island. The tide
rises five feet, and syzygial high water is at nine. The Silla, over
Pichidanque, I have already mentioned Cp. 426).
Conchali is an exposed roadstead, seldom used but by smugglers.
The landing is everywhere bad, excepting in one httle cove at the
north side of the bay.
• Short characteristic names are preferable to letters, or numbers,
because thej' help the memory so much.
APPENDIX. 209
Maytencillo is a little cove, fit only for a boat to land in at
particular times.
The next opening in this high rugged coast is that of the river
LiMARi, which looks large from seaward, but is inaccessible. The
coast near Limari is steep and rocky. Two miles from the en-
trance of the river, there is a low, rocky point, with a small beach
on which boats sometimes land ; but a heavy surf breaks on it. Near a
mile from the coast the land rises suddenly to a range of hills, about
one thousand feet high, which runs parallel to the coast, and extends
two or three miles north and south of the river ; the summits of the
hills to the northward are covered with wood. The north entrance
point is low and rocky ; the south is a steep slope, with a remarkable
white sandy patch on the side of it. The river at its mouth is about
a quarter of a mile wide ; but the surf breaks heavily right across ;
inside it turns a little to the north-east, and then runs to the east-
ward through a deep gully in the range of hiUs before-mentioned.
Moimt Tahnay is a remarkable hiU, 2,300 feet high ; it is three
miles from the coast, and seven miles southward of the river ; it is
thickly wooded on the top ; the sides are quite bare. Ten mUes
southward of Mount Talinay lies a deep valley, with a remarkable
sandhill on its north side, close to the coast ; at the mouth of the
valley there is a small sandy beach. Within five miles of Maytencillo
there is a point with several rocks, miming oiF it about a quarter of a
mile ; from which to Maytencillo the coast is composed of blue rocky
cliffs, about one hundred and fifty feet high ; the land above the
cliffs rises to between three and four hundred feet ; and then about
three miles in shore the range of hills runs from three to four thou-
sand feet high.
About fourteen miles northward of Limari is a small bay, with a
sandy beach in the north corner ; but a heavy surf. From this bay
northward the coast is rocky and much broken : about eight miles
southward of Point Lengua de Vaca is a small rocky peninsula, with
a high, sharp rock in the centre of it, southward of which Ues a
smaU, deep cove, vdth a sandy beach at the head ; but the entrance
is nearly blocked up by small islets, and rocks both above and below
water. The entrance is too bad for the smallest vessel ; though in fine
weather boats can land in the cove. The outer breaker is not more
than two cables from the shore ; but when calm the swell sets
directly on it. This cove is Tortoral de Lengua de Vaca.
210 APPENDIX.
Point Lengua de Vaca is a very low, rocky point, rising gradually
in- shore to a round hummock, about a mile to the southward of the
Point. There are rocks nearly awash about a cable's length from
the Point, and at two cables' lengths distant there are but five feet.
After rounding Point Lengua de Vaca, the coast runs to the south-
east, and is rocky and steep for about two miles from the Point,
where there are fifteen fathoms about half a mile from the shore.
About three miles from the Point, a long, sandy beach commences,
which extends the whole length of the large bay as far as the island
or peninsula of Tongoy. The south part of the beach is called Play a
de Tanque, the north and north-east side of the bay Playa de Tongoy.
Off the south-west extreme of the beach there is anchorage about
half a mile from the shore, in from five to seven fathoms ; the bot-
tom is a soft, muddy sand in some places, but in others it is hard.
With a southerly wind it is very smooth, and the landing is very
good, but a heavy sea sets in with a northerly breez^. This is an
anchorage that was once frequented by American whalers. The vil-
lage, which is called the Rincon de Tanque, consists of about a dozen
' ranchos.' The only water to be got is brackish ; about two miles and
a half to the E.N.E.* where there is good water, the landing is gene-
rally very bad, and the water is some distance from the beach.
From Tanque to the peninsula of Tongoy there is anchorage in
any part of the bay, at from one to two miles from the shore, in from
seven to ten fathoms, sandy bottom. There is good anchorage with
a northerly wind for small vessels, to the southward of the peninsula,
abreast of the small village on the Point, with the outer Point bear-
ing W.N.W. in four fathoms sandy bottom, with clay underneath it ;
but no vessel, however small, should go into less than four fathoms,
as the sea breaks a little inside that depth when blowing hard from
the north^vard. Large vessels would also find a little shelter with
the wind to the northward of north-west. With a strong southerly
breeze a vessel would not be able to remain at anchor to the south-
ward of the peninsula ; but there is a small b \j on the north side,
which is completely sheltered from southerly winds. In the south-
east corner of this bay there is a small creek, into which, when
smooth, boats can go ; it runs about a mile inland, and near the head
there is fresh water for which the whalers sometimes send their boats.
* All bearings are magnetic, unless otherwise specified.
APPENDIX. 211
The village of Tongoy consists of half a dozen small houses, built
on a high point at the south side of the peninsula.
The coast on the west side of Huanaquero Hill is broken and
rocky, affording no shelter for any thing but a boat ; to the north-
ward there is a deep bay, well sheltered from southerly and westerly
winds, but open to the northward : between this and Port Herradura
there is no place fit for a vessel.
Herradura and Coquimbo are well known. Teatinos is a bold
rugged point, the land behind it rising in ridges, which gradu-
ally become higher as they recede from the coast to Copper Hill,
which is 6,400 feet high. The point which makes as the north
extremity of the bay, in coming from the northward, is a low rocky
point, called Poroto ; about four miles to the northward of Point
Poroto, is the port of Arrayan, or Juan Soldado ; but it does not
deserve the name : it is merely a small bight behind a rocky point,
scarcely affordmg shelter for a boat from southerly winds, and en-
tirely open to northerly. A little to the northward of Copper Hill is
another hiU, on the same range and about the same height : the
north side of the hill is steep, and at the foot of it is the small Bay
of OsoRNO, which is about half a mile long, but not deep enough to
afford any shelter for the smallest vessel. About half a mile to the
northward of the bay there is a hamlet, consisting of a few small
houses, called Yerba Buena.
The Pajaros Islands are two low rocky islands, lying about
twelve miles from the coast ; the northern is much smaller than the
southern, and, as far as could be seen from the shore, there is no
danger round or between them. A little to the northward of Yerba
Buena there is a small island, called Trigo, separated from the shore
by a channel about a cable's length broad ; but it is only fit for boats ;
the island, oxcept when very close, appears to be only a projecting
point ; there is a large white rock on the west point of it.
About three miles to the northward of Trigo Island, is the Port
of ToRTORALiLLO, which is formed by a small bay facing the north,
with three small islands off the west point. In coming from the
southward, the best entrance for small vessels is between the south-
ernmost island and the point, where there is a channel about a cable's
length wide, with from eight to twelve fathoms water. Tlie dry rock
off the point on the main land, should not be approached nearer than
half a cable, as a sunken rock lies nearly that distance from it. There
212 APPENDIX.
is no channel between the northern and middle islet, as it is blocked
by breakers : a vessel may anchor about half a mile from any part of
the beach in from six to eight fathoms, sandy bottom. The landing
is not good, the best is on the rocks near the entrance ; but nothing
could be embarked from there : the east end of the beach is the best
for that purpose. From the land to the northward, running so far
westward, it is not Hkely that a heavy sea would be caused by a
northerly gale.
Temblador is a small cove in the east side of TortoraliUo, but
the landing there is worse than on the other beach, and it is not so
well sheltered.
About three miles to the northward of TortorahUo, there is the
small island of Chungunga ; it is about a mile from the shore, and
is a good mark for knowing the port : there is a rocky point a-breast
of it ; a little in-shore of which there is a remarkable saddle hill,
with a nipple in the middle, which, to a person coming from the
southward, appears as the extreme of the high range, that runs
thence to the eastward of TortoraliUo, and is from two to three
thousand feet high.
A little to the northward of Point Chtmgunga, there is a large
white sand-patch, which is seen distinctly from the westward ; it is
at the south end of the Chores beach, which runs for seven or eight
miles to the north-west, to Point Chores ; a heavy surf always breaks
Upon it.
Off Point Chords there are three islands, the inner one is low
and nearly joins the shore ; nothing but a boat can pass inside it.
About a mile to the westward of this island, there is another small
island ; between them the channel is clear of danger. To the south-
west of this island about a mUe, is the largest of the Choros islands ;
it is about a mUe long, the top is very much broken, and at the
south-west end it very much resembles a castle : there is a small
pyramid off the south end, and rocks break about a quarter of a mile
from the shore. Tlie channel between the two outer islands is clear
of danger ; but about half a mUe to the westward of the small island,
there is a rock nearly awash. Five miles to the south-east of the
southern Choros Island, there is a very dangerous reef of rocks
only a little above the water.
Point Carrisal is a low rocky point, about five miles to the north-
ward of Point Choros, with a remarkable round hummock ; to the
APPENDIX. 213
southward of it is the small cove of Polillao, where there is shelter
for small vessels, but the landing is bad : there are two small rocky
islets off the south point of the cove. To the northward of Point
Carrisal is the bay of the same name, but it is not fit for vessels ; at
the bottom of the bay a heavy surf breaks about half a mile from the
shore. The north side of the bay is formed by a rocky point, with
outlying rocks and breakers about a quarter of a mile off all sides of
it. There is a landing-place in the bay, near the south-east corner,
where the rocky coast joins the beach, but in bad weather the surf
breaks outside it.
Nearly one mile to the northward of the north point of Carrisal
Bay is the Port of Chaneral ; it is well sheltered from northerly
and southerly winds, but the swell sets in heavily from the south-
west, which makes the landing bad ; the best is in a small cove on
the north side of the port, near the beach at the head of it : there is
also a landing-place on the south side, but it is bad when there is
any swell. On the beach at the head of the port there is always too
much surf to land, except after very fine weather. About four miles
and a half to the westward of it is the Island of Chaneral ; it is nearly
level, except on the south side, near which there is a remarkable
mound %vith a nipple in the centre of it. Tliere are rocks nearly half
a mile from the south point of the island, and one about the same
distance off the north-west point. On the north side there is a small
cove, where boats can land with the wind from the southward ;
there is anchorage close off it, but the water is deep. An Ameri-
can sealing schooner was lost there a few years ago, from a norther
coming on while she was at anchor.
The land round Chaneral is low, with ridges of low hUls running
from the points, the tops of which are very rugged and rocky, and
the land is sandy and very barren ; the range of high hiUs is several
miles from the shore at this part, but between the range and coast
there are several smaller hiUs rising out of the low land. The vil-
lage of Chaiieral is about three nailes from the port, and is said to
consist of about twenty houses. There are no houses near the port.
We were told by some of the people that came off, that the only
vessel that had ever been here was a small schooner, called the Con-
stitucion (our vessel), which had taken a cargo of copper to Huasco.
There was a large quantity of copper, said to belong to Mr. Edwards,
ready to be embarked.
214 APPENDIX.
To the northward of Chaneral Bay the coast is low, and projects
to the N.W. for about ten miles. The extreme west point. Point
Pajaros, has a small rocky islet off it, about two cables from the
shore : the land in-shore rises gradually to a low ridge, about half
a mile from the coast, the high range is about three miles in-shore.
To the northward of Point Pajaros the coast runs to the East, forming
a small bay, open to northerly, but well sheltered from southerly
winds ; there is anchorage in from eight to twelve fathoms, about
one-third of a mile from the shore, but the landing is bad.
About four miles N.E. of Point Pajaros is another point, with a high
rock off it, to the northward of which is the Bay of Sarco, in
which there is also shelter from southerly winds. A deep gully runs
inland from the S.E., corner of the bay, at the mouth of which is a
sandy beach, with anchorage about one-third of a mile off, in from
eight to twelve fathoms, but the landing is not good. There are
two or three small huts close to it. To the northward of Sarco the
high land runs close to the coast, the sides of the hills are covered
with yeUow sand, the summits are rocky, and the whole coast has a
miserably barren, appearance. To the northward of the deep gully
about four miles, there is a projecting rocky point, at the foot of a
high range of hills, with a very remarkable black sharp peak near
its extreme, the coast to the northward of this runs nearly north
and south, and is very rocky for about eight miles, when it turns to
the westward, forming a deep bay, in the N.E. comer of which is a
small beach called Tongoy. To the northward of the bay a high
range runs out towards Point Alcalde, the extreme point of the bay,
which is nearly seven miles to the southward of Huasco ; the point is
very rocky with small detached rocks close to it : in-shore it rises a
little, and there are several small rocky lumps, running out of the
sand, one of which, from the southward, shows very distinctly : it
is higher than the rest, and forms a sharp peak ; a little in-shore of
which the land rises suddenly to the extreme of the high range.
About seven miles to the northward of Point Alcalde, is the point
forming the Port of Huasco, it is a low rugged point, with several
islands off it, one of which only is of any size, it is separated from
the main by a very narrow channel, and appears from sea-ward to be
the point of the main ; it is covered with low rugged rocks, one of
which on its north side is much higher than the rest, and shows
distinctly coming from the southward, but from the northward it is
APPENDIX. 215
nii:sed with the other rocks behind it ; to the south-west of this
island there are several other small rocky islets, which appear as
two small islands when seen from a distance. A little in-shore of
the extreme point there is a short range of low hUls, forming four
rugged peaks, which show very distinctly from the southward and
westward : the land falls again inside them for a short distance
more, and then rises suddenly to a high range running east and
west, which is directly to the southward of the anchorage. The
top of the range forms three roimd summits, the easternmost of
which is a little higher, and the middle a Httle lower than the other.
Nearly three miles to the N.E. of the anchorage, there is another
range of hills about 1 ,400 feet high : on the south slope of which
there is a sharp peak, from which it slopes to the valley that the
river runs through. The river is small, and a heavy surf breaks
outside it, the water however is excellent ; there is another lagoon
small river in the valley, neai-er the port, but the water is very
brackish. The anchorage is very much exposed to northerly winds,
and a heavy sea then rolls in, but a heavy norther does not occur
more than once in two or three years. The village consists of about
a dozen small houses, scattered among the rocks on the point
dividing the old and new ports. Tlie country rovmd presents a
more barren and miserable appearance than any part even of this
desolate coast : the ground is composed of a mass of small stones
mixed -with sand, out of which project masses of rugged, craggy
rocks. A Httle in-shore the stony ground is changed for a loose
yeUow sand, which covers the sides and bases of nearly all the hills
round : the summits are stony without any appearance of vegeta-
tion ; but in the low grounds a few stunted bushes grow among the
stones, and after rain (a rare blessing) they look much fresher than
might be expected in such soU, and then the vaUey through which
the river runs also appears green, forming a striking contrast to
the country around.
Point Lobo, about ten miles to the northward of Huasco, is
rugged, with several small hummocks on it ; to the southward of
this there are several small sandy beaches with rocky points between
them, but a tremendous surf breaks on them, allowing no shelter
even for a boat. A httle in-shore of the point, there are two low
hills, and within them the land rises suddenly to a range about
1,000 feet high. In the bay to the northward of Point Lobo, there
216 APPENDIX.
are several small rocks, and about six miles from it there is a reef
which runs perhaps half a mile off a low rocky point : the outer rock
is high and detached from the others.
About eleven miles to the northward of Point Lobo, is a very-
rugged point, with several sharp peaks on it, about half a mile to
the northward of which is the small port of Herradura, which can
hardly be distinguished till quite close to it. Off the rugged point,
and between it and the entrance to Herradura. there are outlying
rocks and breakers, about a quarter of a mile from the shore : off
the south entrance point there is a patch of low rocks, which in
coming from the southward appear to extend right across the
mouth of the port. The entrance faces the N.W., and is between
this low patch of rocks, and a small islet to the N.E. of it : there is
no danger witliin half a cable of either point. The port runs in
about three-quarters of a mile to the eastward of the islet, and is
sheltered from both northerly and southerly winds, but with a
strong northerly breeze a swell rolls in round the islet. It is rather
small for large vessels, and they would not be able to he at single
anchor in the inner part of the cove, but there is quite room enough
to moor across it. about a quarter of a mile above the islet, in four
fathoms, fine sand. In this place an American ship, the Nile, of
420 tons, was moored during a northerly gale, which blew very hea-
vily ; and she was perfectly sheltered. The landing is better than in
any place between it and Coquimbo : but there is a very serious
inconvenience in the want of water. There is a small lagoon
about a mile from this place, in the valley at the head of Car-
risal Cove, but it is worse than brackish ; yet the ' peones,' who
are at work shipping the ore, make use of it. A deep valley runs
in from the head of the cove, separating the high ranges of hills,
and is a good mark to know it by. The range to the southward of the
valley is the highest near the coast, and is distinctly seen from both
the northward and southward ; there is a small nipple in the highest
part of it. Carrisal is a small cove about a mile to the N.E. of
Herradura, well sheltered from southerly winds, but as it is so close
to Herradura, which is so much superior, it is not likely to be of
much use.
To the northward of Carrisal the coast is bold and rugged, with
outlying rocks a cable's length off most of the points. About nine
miles to the northward of Herradura there is a high point with a
APPENDIX. 217
round hummock on It, and several rugged hummocks a little in-
shore. To the northward of this there is a cove, sheltered from the
southward, where small vessels may anchor, but it is not fit for
large vessels ; there is another cove similar to it about a mile to the
northward of it. A Httle to the northward of the second cove, there
is a high rocky point, which is the termination of the high part of
the coast ; to the northward of the point there is a small port, wliich
from the chart appears to be Tortoralillo : it is well sheltered from
southerly winds, and the landing is good. In the inside part of it a
vessel, not drawing more than ten or twelve feet, might moor shel-
tered from northerly winds, in three and four fathoms, but with a
northerly wind there would be a heavy swell in : there is anchorage
farther out imder the point, in from eight to ten fathoms ; but a ves-
sel should not go nearer the shore than eight fathoms, as the bottom
inside is rocky.
During the summer months this would be a very good port for
small merchant vessels ; but there is no appearance of water near.
Abreast of it the high range of hills recedes from the coast, which
is low, with some low rocky hills a little in-shore.
About two miles to the northward of Matamores there is a low
rocky point, a little to the northward of which there is a small deep
bay, at the mouth of a valley, in which, apparently, there is an-
chorage for a vessel ; but there was a hea^y surf on the beach, and
as the landing was bad we did not w^ait to examine it. To the
northward of this the low hills are not so rocky, but are covered
with yellow sand, except near the summits, where they are stony.
About six miles to the northward of this bay there is a remarkable
rocky point, with a detached white rock off it, and a lump with a
nipple on it, a little in-shore. About half a mile to the northward
of this, is the small port of Pajonal, which, in coming from the
southward, may be easily known by this nipple, and a small island,
with a square topped lump in the centre of it, which is off the point
to the northward of the port. A range of hUls, higher than any
near, rises directly from the north side of the port ; and in the valley,
about a mUe from it, there is a range of small and very rugged
Mils rising out of the low land.
The anchorage is better sheltered from southerly winds than any
to the southward, except Herradura, and there would not be much
swell, as the point and island to the northward project considerably
218 APPENDIX.
to the westward. The southerly swell rolls into the mouth of the
port, but on the south shore it is smooth, and the landing pretty-
good : there is a dangerous breaker about a quarter of a mile to the
south-west of the south extreme point, which only shows when
there is much swell. The best anchorage is about half way up the
cove, near the south shore, in five fathoms : near the head it is very
flat. We found a cargo of copper ore ready to be shipped here, but
no vessel had ever been in the port : there is no water within two
miles, and there it is very bad indeed. The name of Pajonal was
told to us by a young man who was getting the ore down, but he
appeared to know scarcely anything of the coast, and there were no
inhabitants near the place.
About a mUe and a half to the northward of the island before
mentioned, there is another point, with an island and several rocks
off it ; both the islands may be passed M^thin half a mile, but there
is no passage mside them. To the northward of the northernmost
island, the coast runs to the eastward, forming a large and deep bay,
which at a distance looks very inviting; but before we were within
a mile of the depth of it, we were in three fathoms, with rocks all
round us, some above and others a little below water. From the
bay being well sheltered from the southward, they do not show till
close to, except two patches which are off the north point, and are
always uncovered. A mile to the northward of these rocks there is'
another bay, which is quite clear of danger ; and in the south corner
of it, a small cove, there is good anchorage in seven fathoms,
well sheltered from southerly winds, but very open to northerly.
The water is perfectly smooth vidth a southerly wind, and no swell
could ever reach it imless it blew from the northward. There is a
small bay, half a mile to the northward of this, where a vessel may
anchor, but it is not so well sheltered ; there were no signs of inha-
bitants, nor the least appearances of water in the valleys. The land
at the back of the bay is low, but to the northward of the north
bay it rises to a ridge of sand hills, nmning east and west, and ter-
minating in a steep rocky point, with a cluster of steep rocky islets
off it. To the northward of this point the coast is rocky and
broken, Avith rocks a short distance from the shore for about four
miles, where there is a rugged point with a very high, sharp-topped
hill a little in-shore, which from the southward shews a double
peak ; directly to tlie northward of this point, there is a deep rocky
APPENDIX. 219
bay, with a small cove close to the point where we anchored in
five fathoms, but half a cable off shore on either side : it is not
fit for a vessel. The bay is partly sheltered from northerly winds,
but a northerly swell rolls in, and it does not appear to be a proper
place for a vessel to enter.
From an old fisherman, who was living in a hut, we learned that
the name of the place is Barranquilla de Copiapo, and to our
surprise saw a cargo of copper prepared for shipping. He also told
us that another cargo had been shipped from the same place about
a year before ; though the cove is too small for any vessel to anchor
in with safety, and outside it the water deepens very suddenly.
Tliere is no anchorage in the cove at the head of the bay, and the
landing there is very bad ; in the small cove the landing is good.
There is no fresh water nearer than the river of Copiapo, which is
about fifteen miles off.
The deep bight to the southward of this, in which are the three
bays before mentioned, is called Salado Bay ; the south point of it,
with the island off it, is Point Cuernos. No vessel had ever been in
either of these bays, but the middle one is much superior to Bar-
ranquilla, and might be a much better place to embark the ores.
From BarranquiUa to Point Dallas the coast is rocky and broken,
without any place sufficient to shelter the smallest vessel. Point
Dallas is a black rocky point, with a hummock on its extreme,
which, coming from the southward, appears to be an island ; the land
rises to a range of low sandy hiUs, with rocky summits.
The Caxa Grande is a small sharp-topped rock, which is the only
one of the reef that shows above water ; the patch near the point
was a-wash when we passed.
The channel between it and Point Dallas appears to be wider than
it is given in former charts, but the reef off the point projects
much farther. The sea was high, and there was occasionally a
breaker above a quarter of a mUe from the point ; at about that
distance from the breakers cm the reef, the least water we had was
eleven fathoms ; when the swell is not high, the breaker off the
point would not show ; it appeared to be detached from the reef
which joins the point.
Copiapo is a very bad port ; the swell roUs in heavily, and the
landing is worse than in any port to the southward ; it may easily
be known by the Morro, to the northward, which is a very
X 2
'220
APPENDIX.
remarkable hill, nearly level at the top, but near the east extreme
of it there are two small hummocks ; the east fall is very steep,
the end of another range of hills shews to the northward. To
the S.W., apparently forming part of the same range, is another
hill, the west side of which forms a steep bluff ; in coming from
the southward, these hUls wiU be seen in clear weather, before
the land about the port can be made out. From a fisherman, who
knew the coast to the southward, we learned that the small port we
passed the night in, to the northward of Port Herradura, is called
Matamores ; the high point to the southward of it is Point Mata-
mores. Tortoral, or Tortoral baxo, is the bay between it and Pajonal.
He described it as having always a heavy surf in it, and the landing
bad. The south point of the Bay of Salado, vdth the islet off it,
is called Point losCachos. He was in the vessel that took the carso
of copper from Barranquilla. She was a large brig of 300 tons,
and was anchored off the mouth of the cove. The island to the
north of Copiapo Bay, called Isla Grande, is very remarkable ; it
has a small nipple on each extreme, that on the eastern is the
highest : to the westward of the middle of the island, there is ano-
ther small round nipple.
The channel between Isla Grande and the main is clear of danger
in the middle ; but such a heavy swell rolls through, that it is
scarcely fit for any vessel. Off the north extreme of the island
there is a reef under water, projecting two cables to the eastward ;
at a cable's length distance from the reef we had eight fathoms ; the
point on the main appeared to have no danger off it ; the rocks to
the southward of it are inside the line of the points. The swell in
the channel was by far the worst we had experienced on this coast :
to the northward of the island there are several small rocks, one of
which is high. There is no danger within a quarter of a mile of
them.
The point on the main, to the northward of the islcind, is very
rocky ; on the S.W. point there are two rugged hummocks, and
several rocks and islets close to the shore, but no danger outside
them : from this to Point Morro, the shore is steep and cliffy, with
remarkable patches of white rock in the cUffs to the south of the
point, which is steep, with rugged lumps on its summit. The
Morro rises suddenly, a Uttle in-shore.
On rounding the point, you open a deep bay which runs in to the
APPENDIX. 221
S.E.; there are several small rocky patches in it, and at the north end
of the long sandy beach there is a piece of rocky coast, the north ex-
treme point of which has a small island off it. The entrance to Port
Yngles is to the southward of this point, round a low rocky point, to the
southward of which, close in-shore, there is a small island off a sandy
cove ; there is a rock a- wash at high-water, about a cable's length to
the N.W. of the south extreme point, but it always shows ; after
passing this rock the point is steep-to, and may be approached w'ithin
a cable's length. The harbour inside forms several coves, in the first of
which, on the starboard hand going in, there is anchorage for small
vessels, but the bottom is stony and bad. There is a low island to
the S.E. of this cove, above which is the best anchorage, with
southerly winds. About half-way between it and a projecting rocky
point on the east shore, small vessels may go much closer into the
cove, to the southward of the island, where the landing is very good.
The bay in the N.E. corner is well sheltered from northerly winds,
and no sea could ever get up in it ; but the landmg is not so good
there, the best is at a rocky point at the south end of the northern-
most beach, where there is a small cove among the rocks perfectly
smooth : it is by far the best harbour, but there is no fresh water
near. The cove at the head of the harbour is very shoal; no
vessel should go higher up than abreast of the projecting rocky
point on the east shore, where she would have four and five
fathoms in mid-channel. The bottom is hard sand, and may be seen
in twelve fathoms water, which makes it appear very shallow. In
the entrance there are eighteen fathoms close to the shore on both
sides.
PoBT Caldera is close to the northward of Port Yngles, and is
directly round the point with the small island ofF it ; it is a fine bay,
well sheltered, but the entrance more open than Port Yngles, and
the landing not so good. There was a cargo of copper ore ready to
be shipped in the south comer of the bay ; but no vessel had then
ever taken a cargo away. There were a few fishermen Hving in a hole
in the cliflT during the fishing season : the only vessel they had ever
seen in the port was a brigantine, with provisions for the mines.
No vessel had ever been in Port Yngles. There is water near
the beach, on the east side, but it is very salt ; it appears wonderful
how they can make use of it. but they have no other nearer than
Copiapo. The land is entirely covered with loose sand, except a few
222 APPENDIX.
rocks on the points ; the bottom of the bay is low, but the bulls rise
a Uttle inland,. and the ranges become higher as they recede from the
coast : the first hill to the eastward is a very remarkable sharp-topped
hiU, the sides of which are covered with sand, with two low paps to
the eastward of it. They have had strong northers here for two
days, and sometimes a good deal of sea in the south corner of the
bay ; but in the north-east corner, which they call CalderiUo, it is
then smooth; they very seldom have heavy northers. There are'
fish to be got in the bay, but only with a net : in all the ports we
visited we caught none alongside. Near the outer points of the ports
there are rock fish to be caught, but there is always a heavy swell
in such places.
Point Cabeza de Vaca is a remarkable point, about twelve miles
to the northward of Caldera : it has two small hummocks near its
extreme ; inside them the land is nearly level for some distance in-
shore, where it rises to several low hills, which form the extremity of
a range. The coast between Caldera and the point forms several
small bays, with rocky points between them, off all of which there
are rocks a short distance : there is no danger within a quarter of
a mile from Point Cabeza de.Vaca. To the northward of the point
there is a small rocky bay, called Tortoralillo, oiF the north entrance
point of which there is a reef of rocks, with a high rock at the extreme
of it, which extends above a quarter of a mile from the shore : about
half a mile to the north-west of this there is a heavy breaker when
there is much swell.
To the northward of this the coast is steep and rocky for three or
four miles, with a high range of bills running close to the shore ; then
there is a small cove, called Obispito, with a white rock on the south
point of it : to the northward of this the land is low and very rocky,
with breakers about a quarter of a mile from the shore. About two
miles from the cove there is a point, with a small white islet off it ; to
the northward of which the coast trends to the eastward, and forms
the small cove of Obispo, in which we anchored, but it is not fit for any
vessel. There was a fire on shore in the night, but we saw no ore, and
ias the landing was bad we did notattempt it. There is a very high sand
hill, with the summit stony, a little in-shore of the cove, and to the
northward of it a higher range of stony hiUs running close to the
* For more inronnation respecting- the vicinity of Copiapo, see pages
22D and 230.
APPENDIX. 223
coast for about seven miles, where it terminates in low rugged hills
a little in-shore of a brown rugged point, with a large white patch
on its extreme, which is an islet, but does not show as one from the
sea. To the northward of this point there is a fine bay, in which
we anchored, and, from a fisherman who came otF, learned that it is
Flamenco : it is a very good port, well sheltered from southerly
winds, and better from northerly, as the point projects far enough
to prevent a heavy sea getting up. The lauding is good in the S.E.
corner of the bay, either on the rocks, or on a beach in a small cove
in the middle of a patch of rocks, a little more to the northward,
where there are a few huts, in which two brothers, with their fami-
lies, were living ; their chief employment was catching and salting
fish, called cougre, and drying them to supply Copiapo. In one
day they had caught foiu: hundred. They appeared to live in a
miserable way, in huts made of seal and guanaco skins, much worse
than a Patagonian "toldo"; the only water they had to drink was
half salt, and some distance from the shore. They sometimes get
guanacoes, that they run down with dogs, of which they have a
great number. ^
The only vessel they had ever seen here, was a ship which
anchored one night, on her way to Las Animas for copper ore, six
years ago ; they described Las Animas as a very bad place, not fit for
any vessel, and in consequence no cargo had ever been shipped again,
but taken to Chaneral, which was better, but not so good as Fla-
menco. There are no mines so near Flamenco as to Chaneral.
Flamenco may be known by the white patch on the brown
rugged point, to the southward of which, in-shore, there are low
jugged bills, rising to a high range. On the north side of the bay
the land is very low: the north point is a low rocky point, with a
detached hUl rising out of the low land a little in-shore. To the
northward there is another lull very much Uke it ; in the depth of
the bay the land is very low, and a deep valley runs back between
two ranges of rugged hills. The hiUs are all covered wdth yellow
sand near their bases, and to about half way up their sides, the tops
•axe stony, with a few stunted bushes.
In the bay, to the northward of Flamenco, in which Las Animas
was said to be, we could see no place fit even for a boat to land; the
whole bay is rocky, with a few little patches of sand, and a heavy
surf was breaking on the shore. The north point of this bay is
224 APPENDIX.
low, but a little In-shore there is a high range of hills, the outside
of which is very steep : to the northward of this point there is a
small rocky bay, which appears to answer better to the description
of Las Animas than the other ; it did not appear a fit place for ves-
sels, and the landing was bad. The north point of this bay is a
steep rocky point, with a round brown hill rising directly from the
water's edge ; the sides of the hiUs are crossed by dark veins, run-
ning in different directions, which are very remarkable. To the
northward of this point there is a deep bay, which, from the descrip-
tion, must be Chaneral : the south side of it is rocky with small
coves, but the landing appeared to be bad ; the east and north
sliores of it were low and sandy, and a heavy surf was breaking on
the beach. We could see no signs of any people, or piles of ore,
along the coast ; and as it did not appear a good place for vessels,
and our time was short, it was not thought worth a more particular
examination. Tlie north point of the bay is low and rocky, with a
high range a little in-shore. To the northward of this point the
hills and coast are both composed of brown and red rocks, with a
few bushes on the summits of some cf the hills : the sandy appear-
ance the hills have to the southward ceases, and the prospect is, if
possible, more barren.
Nearly nine miles to the northward of the point of this bay is
Sugar Loaf Island, which is about half a mile from the shore ; in
coming from the southward, there is a high sugar loaf hill on the
main, a little to the southward of the island, for which it may be
mistaken, but the island is not so high and the summit is sharper.
Between Sugar Loaf Island and Chaneral, the coast is rocky and
affords no shelter : there is a small bay to the southward of the
passage, between the island and the main, which would afford shelter
from northerly winds, but with southerly it is exposed, and the
landing is very bad. In the middle of the passage there are five
fathoms in the shallowest part : the water in the northern end of it
is smooth, and a vessel might anchor off the point of the island,
sheltered from southerly winds, in six or seven fathoms ; but after
eight fathoms it deepens suddenly to thirteen and twenty fathoms,
about half a mile from the island. There is a small bay on the
main, to the northward of the channel, where a vessel would be
sheltered from southerly winds, but we did not examine it.
About twenty miles to the northward of the Sugar Loaf Itland
APPENDIX. 225
there is a projecting point, with some small rocky islets off it, which
we supposed to be Point BaUena, from the description given at Port
Caldera. Between the point and the Sugar Loaf Island, the coast
runs hack a Uttle, and is rocky, with a high range of hills running
close to the shore. A Httle to the northward of Point Ballena there
is a small bay, with a rocky islet about half a mile off the south
point of it ; the top of the islet is white, and answers the descrip-
tion given to us of a port called Ballenita : but it is not worth
the name of a port; it is very rocky, with two or three small patches
of sandy beaches, in which a heavy surf was breaking ; the hills
run close to the water, and have a very rugged appearance. A
little to the northward of this there is another bay, which seemed to
be Lavata : the south point has several low rugged points upon it,
and in-shore the hills rise very steep. There is a small cove with
excellent landing, directly behind this point, on which we anchored ;
there was a better-looking port inside, but it was so far from the
outer coast, that our time would not allow more than a hasty glance.
The inner cove of the bay in which we anchored appeared to
afford good shelter from southerly winds, and the water was very
smooth. A little to the northward of this bay there is a point,
which, till close, appears to be an island: but it is joined to the
shore by a low shingle spit : the summit of it is rugged, with several
steep peaks on it : several rocky islets lie scattered off the point.
Near three miles and a half to the northward of this, there is ano-
ther point, very rugged, and with a high round hummock a little
in-shore : to the southward of this point there is a deep bay, in which
we expected to find Paposo, as we were some distance to the north-
ward of its position in the old charts, but there were no appearances
of any houses or inhabitants : the bay is very rocky, and does not
afford good anchorage ; several rocks lie off the south point, and a
little inside it there is a reef running half-a-mile from the shore: in
the bottom of the bay there are several small white islets ; and two
or three small sandy coves, which are not large enough to afford
shelter for a vessel. This bay is called Isla Blanca.
About three miles from the north point of the bay, there is a
white islet, with some rugged hummocks upon it : a little in-shore
there is a hill of a much lighter colour than any round it ; to the north-
ward of this there is a deep bay, in which we were certain of finding
Paposo, and, as wc were becalmed, I went in a boat to search for it ;
226 APPENDIX,
on landing at the point we saw a smoke on the east side of the bay,
and, on pulling over there, found two fishermen, who told us that
the place was Hueso Parado, and that Paposo was round another
point about eight miles to the northward. On inquiring for water,
they brought us some, which was better than what was used in some
other places to the southward, but it was still scarcely fit for use ;
they said it was similar at Paposo, and they thought it very good.
In the south comer of the bay there appeared to be fit anchorage for
vessels, and the landing good, but very open to northerly winds.
No vessel had ever been there in the recollection of the men that we
spoke to, neither had they heard of any ; they described Paposo as
having only four ' ranchos ' and a few fishermen : the port not good.
The bay that Paposo is in they called Nuestra Senora, the north
point of the bay Point Rincon, and the south. Point Grande ; the
projecting point, answering to the Point Nuestra Senora of the
Spanish charts, they called Point Plata. The bay to the north-
ward of Point Ballena, is BaUenita ; the bay in which we anchored
to the northward of it is called Lavata ; the point, with the penin-
sula, is Isla de las Tortolas : the point to the northward of it Point
San Pedro ; the bay which we were in afterwards is Isla Blanca,
and the point of Hueso Parado Bay, Point Taltal.
The only place at which we observed the time of syzygial high-water,
quite satisfactorily, was Huasco,* where it is 8.30, and the rise four
feet at neap tides ; at springs, it rises about two feet more. From
the swell on all this coast, it is very diflicult to get the time of high-
water at aU near the truth ; the rise and fall appeared to be five
or six feet on aU parts of the coast. The only perceptible ciurent
we experienced was in the channel between Sugar Loaf Island and
-the main, where there was a very slight one to the northward, not
more than a quarter of a mile an hour; and this was after a fresh
breeze from the southward for several days. It is said, however, by
•coasters, that there is usually a set, towards the north, of about
half a mUe an hour.
• And here the tide was very carefully observed in a cove, where
there was no swell ; yet from the small rise, the exact time could not be
taken within a few minutes. The water remained at the same level
about half an hour.
I
APPENDIX. -227
Winds on the Coast of Chile.
Very few words will suffice to give strangers to the coast of
Chile a clear idea of the winds and weather they may expect to
find there, for it is one of the least uncertain climates on the face
of the globe.
From the parallel of 35° S., or thereabouts, to near 25° S., the
wind is southerly, or south-easterly, during nine months out of
twelve ; in part of the other three there are calms, or hght
variable breezes, and the remainder is really bad weather ; northerly
gales and heavy rain prevailing, not only on the coast, but far
across the ocean in parallel latitudes.
From September to May is the fine season, during which the skies
of Chile are generally clear, and, comparatively speaking, but httle
rain falls. I do not, however, mean that there are not occasional
exceptions to the general case : strong northers have been known
(though rarely) in summer ; and two or three days of hea^y rain,
with but Httle intermission, now and then disturb the equanimity
of those who have made arrangements with imphcit confidence in
the serenity of a summer sky. Tliese im welcome interruptions are
rarer, and of less consequence, northward of 31° than they are to
the south of that parallel : so nearly uniform, indeed, is the climate
of Coquimbo, that the city is called ' La Serena.'
In settled weather a fresh southerly wind springs up a little before
noon (an hour sooner or later), and blows till about sunset, occa-
sionally till midnight. This wind is sometimes quite furious in the
height of summer ; so strong, indeed, that ships may be prevented
from working into anchorages, especially Valparaiso Bay, although
they may take every previous precaution, by sending down top-
gallant yards, striking top-gallant masts, and close-reefing their
sails. But the usual strength of the southerly sea-breeze (as it is
called, though it blows along the land from the south) is such as a
good ship would carry double-reefed top-sails to, while working to
vnndward.
This is also nearly the average strength of a southerly wind in
the open sea, between the parallels above-mentioned, and there it is
neither so strong by day, nor does it die away at night. Within
sight of the land a ship finds the wind freshen and diminish,
228 APPENDIX.
nearly as much as in the ports of this coast, where the nights are
generally calm, till a land breeze from the eastward springs up.
This light message from the Cordillera is never troublesome, neither
does it last manyhours. "With these winds the sky is almost always
clear ; indeed, when the sky becomes cloudy it is a sure sign of little
or no sea breeze in summer, and probably a fall of rain : in the
winter it foretels an approaching northerly wind, with rain.
In summer, ships anchor close to the land, to avoid being driven
out to sea by strong southerly winds ; but as the winter approaches
a more roomy berth is advisable, though not too far out, because
near the shore there is always an undertow, and the wind is less
powerful. Seamen should bear in mind that the course of the
winds on this coast, as in all the southern hemisphere, is from
north to south, by the west : that the hardest northerly blow, with
most sea, comes from the westward of north, and that, therefore,
they should get as much as possible under the shelter of rocks or
land to the westward of them, rather than of those which only
defend from north winds, ' Northers,' as they are called, give good
warning : an overcast sky ; little or no wind unless easterly ; a swell
from the northward; water higher than usual; distant land remar-
kably visible, besides being raised by refraction ; and a falling baro-
meter ; are their sure indications : but all northers are not gales :
some years pass without one that can be so termed ; though few years
pass in succession without ships being driven ashore on Valparaiso
beach. Thunder and lightning are rare : wind of any disagreeable
strength from the east is unknown. West winds are only felt while
a ' norther ' is shifting round, previous to the sky clearing and the
wind moderating. The violence of southerly winds lasts but a few
hours : that of a northerly gale seldom continues beyond a day and
a night, generally, indeed, not so long.
Some persons say that the strength of northerly winds is not felt
to the northward of Coquimbo, but I have evidence of gales, with
heavy seas, at Copiapo : and Captain Eden informed me that he had
a very heavy gale of wind in H. M.S. ' Conway,' in latitude 25° S.,
and longitude 90° W., where such an interruption to the usual
southerly winds was little expected.
How to make passages is easy to tell, for there are but two ways.
When going northward, steer direct to the place, or as nearly so as
is consistent with making use of the steady winds which j)revail in
APPENDIX. 229
the offing : and if bound to the south, steer also du-ect to the place,
if fortunate enough to have a wind which admits of your doing so ;
but if not, stand out to sea, by the wind, keeping every sail clean full :
tiie object being to get through the adverse southerly winds as soon
as possible, and reach a latitude from which the ship will be sure of
reaching her port, on a direct course. Every experienced seaman
knows that no method is more adverse to making quick passages
than that of ' hugging the wind,' as it is called. When Sir Thomas
Hardy was on this coast, he used to cross the southerly winds with
a topmast studding-sail set, as many men cross the trades, his object
being to get into other winds. The current on the coast of Chile is
northerly, about half a mile an hour ; varying a little with the wind.
The idea some persons have of Copiapo being a difficult place to
make is rather unfounded ; the following is the manner in which we
made it in the Beagle, when strangers to that part of the coast.
July 3. A dull gloomy day, wind moderate from the southward ;
at 10 A.M. we were thirty miles south of Copiapo, by the dead rec-
koning from noon yesterday ; but being aware of the northerly set,
which near the shore is half a mile an hour, we steered an E.N.E.
course in for the land ; at noon it was in sight, forming two long
rounded-topped hills : the northern one was the highest, it ended in
a bluff, with a low point sloping off it ; this we rightly supposed
was the Morro of Copiapo, it bore N.E. ; and the other which was
a-head the high land of Tortoral ; this had a gradual slope to sea-
ward. A roimd and rather peaked black rock, about ten feet high, a
little open, of a low level (eighty-five feet high) of a light brown
colour, with some remarkable white patches on it, was seen at three ;
and a little before it, about a point south of the Morro, was a low,
black, rocky island. The latter was Isla Grande, and the former the
Caxa Grande rock, with the west point of the anchorage cove, on
which there is a flag- staff : as we neared the land the wind gradually
left us ; and, as the day closed, we were four miles from the Caxa
Grande. The clouds that covered the high land in-shore of Copiapo,
lifted off a little in the evening, showing us two remarkable hills, one
with a notched top, and the other like a sugarloaf, with rather a flat
top ; this was in a direction a little south of the Caxa Grande, and
230 APPENDIX,
the other nearly over Isla Grande. (Head to the westward during
the night with light variable airs.)
July 4. A perfect calm aU day, and no observation : we were
drifted abreast of the bluff under the Morro by the afternoon ; it has
some very curious white patches, which are seen at some distance ;
indeed the whole of the land is very remarkable. Plyed to the south-
ward during the night, wind light.
July 5. Wind light from the N.N.E., and gloomy weather; at 10
A.M., passed one mile to the N.E. of the reef; north of the Caxa
Grande rock we had eighteen fathoms, between it and the Isla
Grande, -with, fifty-seven outside, and sixteen in. As we stood in we
could not, from the mast-head, see any thing of the breakers said to
be off the Caxa Grande rock : as the breakers ran high on the other
reefs ; had there been any thing of the sort there, we should most
likely have seen it : all the information we have been able to get on the
.subject denies their existence. Detached, but close to the N.E. part
of the anchorage point, are two black rocks, ten feet high ; they
show well from the northward. About twenty-five miles to the N.E.
of the Morro, are two singular peaks : they are higher than any of
the other land ; the summit of the northern one is very pointed, and
the southern is rather saddle-topped ; these, it would seem, mu6t be
very remarkable from seaward. We anchored in seven fathoms, Caxa
Grande rock bearing S. 67° W., distant three cables from the two
rocks before-mentioned.
As Iquique is situated on a part of the coast where calms are fre-
quent, and exposed to a constant swell from the westward, there may
perhaps exist some difficulty in finding it ; indeed, from this very cir-
cumstance, persons do not go sufficiently near the shore, although
the position of the spot is nearly correct in the common charts.
The centre of the island Hes in lat. 20° 12' 30" S. and long.
70° 15' W. The sUght indentation the bay makes in this high precipi-
tous coast is not perceptible from an offing of nine or ten miles, neither
is the collection of sand behind and south of the bay likely to catch
the eye of a stranger : should there happen to be a vessel there, her
dark masts against the white sand make an excellent mark ; without
which, there is nothing to guide a stranger until he gets within sight
of the church steeple, or some white patches in the cliffs under Ta-
APPENDIX. ggi
rapaca Mountain ; the latter will probably be seen first ; they are nine
mUes to the southward of the anchorage.
The houses in thevillage, when first seen, have just the appearance
of so many black rocks on a sandy beach. The anchorage is very
tolerable, as it is sheltered from the S.W. swell by the islaind; which
is surrounded by numerous small detached rocks, particularly on the
N.E. and W. sides; therefore it should not be approached nearer
than half a mUe.
This island was once much higher ; the many cargoes of birds'
dung* it has afforded have reduced it to its present low state. The
landing is bad at the best time, as you have to thread your way
among patches of sunken rocks ; on which the sea breaks with great
violence at the fvdl and change of the moon : several boats have been
knocked to pieces, and lives lost. In the summer it is a calm nearly
all night, sometimes there is a light air from the land. The sea breeze
sets in from the southward or south-west about ten or eleven in
the forenoon ; it seldom blows fresh, but lasts imtil eight or ten at
night. In the winter, calms, hazy weather, and light northerly winds
are common.
The only trade now to Iquique is for saltpetre ; the rich silver
mines formerly worked are exhausted.
The water the inhabitants use is brought from Pisagua, a small bay
thirty miles to the northward, for which they pay dearly, brackish
as it is. Forty houses and an old chiu-ch, situated on a bare sandy
flat, without a vestige of verdure of any kind near, are the features
Iquique presents ; in vain does the eye wandei for something green
to rest upon — extreme desolation reigns every where, from shore
to summit.
No. 41.
Remarks on the Coast of Peru.
All the bearings are magnetic.
From Point San Pedro (the south point of the bay of Nuestra
Sefiora), at the distance of twenty miles, is Point Grande, the
north point of the before-named bay. This point, when seen from
the S.W., appears high and rounded, terminating in a low rugged
* Called ' guano :' it is a valuable manure.
235i APPENDIX.
spit, with several hummocks on it, and surrounded by rocks and
breakers to the distance of a quarter of a mile. N. 21° W., nine
miles and a quarter, is Point Rincon, having a large white rock oiF
it; between these two points, in the latitude of 25.02 S., lies the
village of Paposo, the most northern village on the coast of ChUe.
This is a miserable place, containing about 200 inhabitants, under
an Alcalde ; the huts are scattered, and difficult to distinguish, from
their being the same colour as the hills at the back of them. Ves-
sels touch here occasionally for dried fish and copper ore : the
former plentiful but the latter scarce. The mines he in a S.E. direc-
tion, seven or eight leagues distant : but are very httle worked.
Wood and water may be obtained on reasonable terms; the water is
brought from wells two miles off, and is difficult to embark. Vessels
bound for this place should run in on a parallel of 25.05., and
when at the distance of two or three leagues, the white islet off
Point Rincon will appear, and shortly after the low white head of
Paposo. The course should be immediately shaped for the latter ; for
with that head hearings. S.E. , distant half a mile, is the anchorage, in
from fourteen to twenty fathoms, sand and broken shells. Should the
weather be clear (which is seldom the case), a rornid hiU, higher than
the surrounding ones, and immediately over the village, is also a
good guide.
North twenty-three degrees west from Point Grande, at the dis-
tance of twenty-three miles, is Point Plata, similar in every respect
to Point Grande, terminating in a low spit, off which he several
small rocks, forming a bay on the northern side, with from seventeen
to seven fathoms water ; rocky, uneven ground.
From this point to Point Jara, which hes north ten degrees west,
fifty-two miles, the coast runs in nearly a direct line, a steep, rocky
shore, surmounted with hills, from 2,000 to 2,500 feet high, and
without any visible shelter, even for a boat.
Point Jara is a steep, rocky point, with a rounded summit, and
has on its northern side a snug cove for small craft; it is visited
occasionally by sealing vessels, who leave their boats to seal in the
vicinity. Water is left with them ; and for fuel they use the kelp,
which grows in great quantity, as neither of these necessaries of life
are to be had within twentj'-five leagues on either side ofthem.
Nearly four miles due north from this point is the south point of
the large bay of Moreno, or Playa brava, high and rocky, with a
APPENDIX. 233
black rock lying oiFit ; andN. 26° W., twcntjr-two miles distant, is
Point Davis (the south-west point of Moreno peninsula), which
slopes gradually from Mount Moreno, and has two nipples on its
extreme.
Mount Moreno, formerly called George Hill, is the most conspi-
cuous object on this part of the coast ; its summit is 4,060 feet above
the level of the sea, sloping gradually on the south side to Point
Davis, where it terminates ; and on the north more abruptly towards
the barren plain on which it stands. It is of a light brown colour,
without the slightest sign of vegetation, and has a deep ravine on its
western side.
Immediately under Mount Moreno is Constitucion Harbour, a
small but snug anchorage, formed by the main land on one side and
Forsyth Island on the other. Here a vessel might careen and undergo
repairs without being exposed to the heaAy rolling swell which sets
into most of the ports on this coast ; and the landing is excellent :
the best anchorage is oif a sandy spit at the north-east end of the
island, in six fathoms water, muddy bottom ; farther out the hold-
ing ground is bad ; it would be advisable to moor ship securely, as
the sea-breeze sometimes sets in strong. In running in, the island,
or weather side, should not be hugged too close, as a number of
sunken rocks lie oft" the low cliffy points — some only being buo)'ed
by kelp. A mid-channel course would be the best, provided the wind
allowed of reacliing the anchorage before-mentioned : neither wood
nor water are to be found in this neighbourhood — therefore provi-
sion must be made accordingly.
N. 8° W., twelve miles from this harbour, is Moreno Head, a
steep bluiF, the termination of a range of table land, which runs
in a line from Mount Moreno ; on the northern side of this head
is Herradura Cove, a narrow inlet, running in to the eastward, with-
out affording any shelter.
N. 4° W., nine miles from tliis head, lies Low Point, with some
sunken rocks lying off it, and five miles farther on is Leading
Bluff ; this is a very remarkable headland, and with the hill of
Mexillones, which lies a few miles south of it, is an excellent
guide for the port of Cobija ; it is about one thousand feet high,
and facing the north is entirely covered wth guano, which gives
it the appearance of a chalky cliff. There is an islet about half
a mile to the north-west, attached to the main by a reef of
y
234 APPENDIX.
rocks, but no danger of any description outside it. The hill of
Mexillones is 2,650 feet high, has the appearance of a cone with
the top cut oflF, and stands conspicuously above the surround-
ing heights. This in clear weather is undoubtedly the best of
the two marks ; but as the tops of hills on the coast of Peru are
frequently covered with heavy clouds, the bluff is the surer mark, for
it cannot be mistaken ; as, besides its chalky appearance, it is the
northern extreme of the peninsula, and the land falls back several
miles to the eastward of it.
Round this head is the spacious bay of Mexillones, eight miles
across — but of little use, as neither wood or water is to be obtained-
The shore is steep-to ; there is anchorage on the west side, tw^o
miles inside the blufF, a cable's length off a sandy spit, in seven
fathoms sandy bottom : at the distance of three cables there is thirty
fathoms.
From this bay the coast runs nearly north and south, without any
thing worthy of remark, until you reach the Bay of Cobija, or La
Mar. This lies N. 13° E. thirty-one mUes from Leading BlufF, is
the only port of the Bolivian Republic, and contains about fourteen
hundred inhabitants. Vessels call occasionally to take in copper ore
and cotton ; but the trade is small (particularly in 1835, as the
revolution in Peru had destroyed the little they had). Water is scarce,
at least, that which is good : there are wells, but the water from
them is very brackish, and will not keep in casks. Fresh meat
may be procured at a high price ; but fruit and vegetables, even for
their owti consumption, are brought from Valparaiso, a distance of
seven hundred miles. They have a mud-built fort, of five or six
guns, on the summit of the Point ; the only fortification about the
place.
If coming from the southward toward this bay : after having passed
the Leading BlufF (which should always be made), it would be advis-
able to shape a course so as to close the land two or three leagues
to windward of the port, and then coast along until two white-topped
islets, ofF False Cobija Point, are seen ; a mile and a quarter to the
northward of them is the port. On the Cobija Point there is a white
stone, which shews very plainly, in relief against the black rocks at
the back of it : a white flag is usually hoisted at the fort, when a ves-
sel appears in the offing — which is also a good guide. In going in
there is no danger ; the point is steep-to, and may be rounded at a
APPENDIX. 035
cable's length distant, and the anchorage is good in eight or nine
fathoms, sand and broken shells. In the bay there are a number of
straggling rocks, all well pointed out by kelp. It is high water
at the full and change at 9 h. 54m., and the tide rises four feet.
Landing, at all times is indifferent, and at full and change, owing to
the heavy swell, it requires some skill in winding through the narrow
channel, formed by rocks on each side. Two miles north and east
is Copper Cove, a convenient place for taking in the ore ; there is
anchorage in twelve fathoms, a short distance from the shore.
After leaving the north point of Cobija Bay, which has a number
of straggHng rocks a short distance oiF it, the coast takes a rather
more easterly direction ; generally shallow sand bays, yviih rocky
points, and hills from two to three thousand feet high close to the
coast, but no anchorage or place fit for shipping, until you reach
Algodon Bay, twenty-eight miles from Cobija.
This bay is small, and the water deep ; we anchored a quarter of a
mile from the shore, in eleven fathoms, sand and broken shells, over
a rocky bottom ; its only use is as a stopping-place for water, should
it be required. It may be obtained at the Gully of Mamilla (seven
miles to the northward) from a spring, a mile and a half from the
beach ; the usual method of bringing it is in bladders made of seal-
skin, holding seven or eight gallons each, with which most of the
coasters are provided — ^the only vessels that profit by a knowledge of
these places.
Algodon Bay may be distinguished by a guUy leading down to it,
and that of Mamilla to the northward, which has two paps on the
heights, over the north side of it ; there is also a white islet off Algo-
don Point.
N. 2° W., ten miles from this bay, is a projecting point, called
in the Spanish chart San Francisco, but known more generally
by the name of Paquiqui ; on the north side of it, and near the
extreme, is a large bed of guano, so much used on this coast for
manure, that it may be said to be quite a trade. A brig of one
hundred and seventy tons was loading with it for Islay at the time
we passed ; she was moored head and stern within a cable's length
of the rocks, on which a considerable surf was breaking, and the
guano was brought off in a balsa to a launch just outside the surf.
There is better anchorage farther in the bay ; but this is chosen for
convenience.
y2
236 APPENDIX.
N. 2°W., sixteen miles from Paquiqui, is Point Arena, a low,
sandy point, with rocky outline : between the two is a small fishing
village, near a remarkable hummock : anchorage may be obtained
under Point Arena, in ten fathoms ; fine sandy bottom.
N. 6° E., twelve miles from Point Arena, is the gully and river
of LoA, which forms the boundary hne between Bolivia and Peru.
It is the principal river on this part of the coast ; but its waters
are extremely bad, in consequence of rimning over a bed of salt-
petre, and the hiUs surrounding it containing a quantity of copper
ore. It is sedd that the ashes of a volcano faU into it, which
add greatly to its unwholesomeness ; but bad as it is, the people
residing on its banks have no other. At Chacansi, in the in-
terior, where it di\ades, it is tolerably good. In the summer sea-
son it is about fifteen feet broad and a foot deep, and runs with
considerable strength to within a quarter of a mile of the sea, where.
it spreads, and flows over, or filters through the beach ; but does not
make even a swatchway, or throw up any banks, ever so small.
A chapel on the north bank, half a mile from the sea, is the only
remains of a once populous village. People from the interior visit it
occasionally for guano, which is in abundance.
There is good anchorage, but rather exposed to the sea-breeze,
with the chapel bearing north, half a mile from the shore, in from,
eight to twelve fathoms, muddy bottom ; and landing may be eflFected
under Point Chileno ; but the best anchorage near here is the Bay of
Chipana, six miles N. 39° W. from the river, and a snug cove for
landing, near the extreme of the point ; but at the full and change,
a heavy swell sets in, and I doubt a boat being able to land with.
goods at those times.
The best distinguishing mark for the Loa is the gully through
which it runs, that may be easily known from its being in the
deepest part of the bay, formed by Point Arena on the south and
Point Lobo on the north ■; and the liiUs on the south side being nearly
leve^ while those on the north are much higher and irregular.
For the Bay of Chipana — after making the land in the latitude
of the Loa, a large white double patch is seen on the side of a hill
near the beach, and another similar one, a little to the northward : on
discovering these marks (which may be seen three or four leagues),
a course should be shaped directly for the southern end, where lies
the anchorage in seven fathoms, sand and broken shells, under a low.
APPENDIX. 237
level point. No danger need be feared in entering- ; as although the
land is low, it may be approached within half a mile, in from six to
ten fathoms. The anchorage inside the long kelp-covered reef mio-ht
perhaps, be preferred ; but the landing is not so good.
N. 27° W. of this bay, at the distance of eighteen miles, is Point
LoBo, or Blanca, high and bold, on its extreme are several hillocks.
Between these two is a small fishing village, called Chomache, under
a point, which has a long reef off it, on the outer part of which
a cluster of rocks shew themselves a few feet above water. The
people of this village get their water from the Loa — a passage
requiring, on a balsa, four days or more.
N. 21° W., fourteen miles off Point Lobo, is Point Pacache, a low
rugged projecting point, with an islet a quarter of a mile off it, but
quite clear outside this islet : half way between these two points is
the Cone (PabeUon) of Pica, a remarkable hillock of guano ap-
pearing as if it had been covered with snow which had thawed at
the top, leaving the lower half frozen, contrasting strongly vnth the
surrounding hills, which are of a barren sun-burnt brown. This is
also a place of resort for the guano vessels ; they find pretty good an-
chorage close to the northward of the Pabellon.
East, a little southerly, a few mOes in-shore of this, is a beU-
shaped mountain, named Carrasco, 5,500 feet high : in clear wea-
ther it is a good mark for the neighbourhood of Iquique.
From Point Pacache to Point Grande, N. 8°W. twenty-eight miles,
the coast is low and rocky, the termination of a long range of table
land, CEdled the heights of Oyarvide, or Barrancas, from its cliffy
appearance : it has innumerable rocks and shoals off it, and should •
not be approached on any account nearer than a league, for the fre-
quent calms and heavy swell pecuHar to this coast render it unsafe
for nearer approach.
Point Grande at the north end of the Barrancas, is a low cliffy
point, with three white patches on its northern side ; round this
point is the Bay of Cheuranatta.
N. 3°W., eleven miles from Point Grande is the anchorage and
town of Iquique ; a miserable place that affords scarcely sufficient
provisions for the consumption of its inhabitants, about five hundred
souls ; and no water nearer than Pisagua (a distance of nearly forty
miles), from which place it is brought by boats built for the purpose,
and is very dear. Yet, with these disadvantages, it is a place of con-
S38 APPENDIX.
siderable trade, from the quantity of saltpetre, and the silver mines of
Huantacayhua, in its neighbourhood : the latter are Uttle worked, as
the saltpetre is a surer profit, large cargoes of which are annually
taken in English vessels. There are no imports ; all the property
belongs to merchants in Lima, where vessels are chartered, and have
only to call here and take in their cargoes.
Vessels bound for this place should run in on the parallel of Point
Grande, until the white patches on that point are discerned, when a
course should be shaped for the northern of three large sand hiUs :
stand boldly in on this course tUl the church steeple appears, when
shortly after, the tovra and low island will be seen, under which is
the anchorage ; care must be taken in rounding this island to give it
a good berth, a reef extending off it to the westward, to the distance
of two cables' lengths.
The anchorage is good in eleven fathoms, with Point Piedras
bearing N. 9° W. ; W. extreme of the island, W. 32° S. ; church
steeple S. 15° E.
Vessels have attempted the passage between the island and the
main by a mistake, and thereby got into danger, from which they
have been extricated with difficulty : it is only lit for boats or very
small vessels.
Lcinding is bad and the way hazardous, owing to the number of
blind breakers with which it abounds ; boats have been lost at the
full and change of the moon, when the heavy swell sets in. Balsas
are employed to bring cargoes to a laimch at anchor outside the
danger, as is the case in most of the ports on this coast.
N. 12° W., eighteen miles from Point Piedras (the north point of
Iquique Bay, which has a cluster of rocks round it), is the small bay
of MexiUones, appearing as a low black island vdth a white rock
lying off it, and may be known by the GuUy of Aurora a httle to
the southward, and a road apparently well trodden on the side of
the hUls, leading to the mines. And N. 20° W., thirty-three miles
from Point Piedras, is Point Pichalo, a projecting ridge at right
angles to the general trend of the coast, with a number of hummocks
on it. Round to the northward of this point is the village and road-
stead of Guano Pisagua ; this, as well as MexiUones, is connected
with Iquique in the saltpetre trade, and is resorted to by vessels for
that article. In rounding the point, a sunken rock lies about half a
cable's length off, and should be looked out for, as it is necessary to
APPENDIX. 239
hug the land close to ensure fetching the anchorage off the village at
the beginning of the ridge ; baffling ^\^nds are frequent, which may
throw you near the shore, but do not signify, as the water is smooth
and the shore steep-to. The best anchorage is with the extreme of
Pisagua Point, N. 7° 30' W. ; and Pichalo Point, W. 1S° S., two
cables' length off the village, in eight fathoms, by which you will
avoid a rock with four feet water on it, lying off the sandy cove at
the distance of two cables.
North of this, at the distance of two miles and a half, is the gully
and river of Pisagua, the water of which supplies the neighbouring
inhabitants ; it is not, when at its greatest strength, more than ten
feet across, and then does not overflow, but merely filters through the
beach into the sea. Generally speaking, it is dry nine months in the
year ; weUs are dug near it where water, such as it is, may always be
found : but no vessel should trust to watering at this place, as, be-
sides its unwholesomeness, the difficulty and expense attending it
would be very great.
From this to Point Gordo the coast is in low broken cliffs, with a
few scattered rocks oiF it, and ranges of high hills near. Point Gordo
is a low jutting point, where a long line of cliflF, several himdred feet
high, commences ; which continues, with only two breaks, to Arica.
These breaks or gullies, as they are called, are veiy remarkable,
and are useful in making Arica from the southward. The first is the
gully of Camarones, which hes seven miles north of Point Gordo,
and is about a mile in width, running at right angles to the coast
towards the mountains, with a stream of water running down it, and
a quantity of brush-wood on its banks ; it forms a slight sandy bay,
scarcely sufficient to shelter a vessel from the heavy swell.
The Gully of Victor is the other ; it lies N. 17° W., twenty-nine
miles from that of Camarones, and fifteen miles from Arica ; it is about
three quarters of a mile in width, and from a high bold point, called
Point Lobo, jutting out to the southward, forms a tolerably good
anchorage for small vessels ; it also runs toward the mountains in a
similar manner to that of Camarones, and Uke it has a small stream
running through, with verdure on its banks. Vessels boimd to Arica
should endeavour to make this gully or ravine, and when within
three or four leagues of it they will see Arica Head, which appears
as a steep blufi^, with a round hill in shore, called Monte Gordo.
Upon nearer approach the island Huano will be observed, joined to
240
APPENDIX.
the head by a reef of rocks. To the northward of this island, and
round the head is the port and town of Arica, the sea-port of Tacna.
Of late this place has been the seat of ci\'il war from which it has
severely suffered. It was in contemplation in the latter end of 1836
to make it the port of the BoliA-ian territory ; should that take place,
it would perhaps become next in importance to the harbour of CaUao,
the principal port in Peru : its present exports are bark, cotton, and
wool ; for which is received, in return, merchandize, chiefly British.
Fresh provisions and vegetables, with all kinds of tropical fruit, may
be had in abundance and upon reasonable terms ; the water also is
excellent, and may be obtained Math little difficult}^ ; as a mole is run
out into the sea, which enables boats to lie quietly while loading and
discharging : the only inconvenience is ha\dng to carry or roll it
through the town. Fever and ague are said to be prevalent ; this in
all probability arises from the bad situation which has been chosen
for the town, the high head to the southward excluding the benefit
of the refreshing sea-breeze, which generally sets in about noon. In
entering this place there is no danger whatever ; the low island may
be rounded at a cable's distance in seven or eight fathoms, and an-
chorage chosen where convenient.
Hence the coast takes a sudden turn to the westward, and as far as
the river Juan de Dios, is a low sandy beach with regular soxuidings:
from this river it gradually becomes more rocky, and increases in
height tiU it reaches the Point and Moero S.\ma, kno^^^l by some as
the Devil's Headland. This is the highest and most conspicuous land
near the sea, about this part of the coast, and appears from its boldness
to project beyond the neighbouring coast hne ; on its western side
is a cove formed by the point called Sama, where coasting vessels
occasionally anchor for guano ; there are three or four miserable
looking huts, the residence of those who collect the guano ; it would
be quite impossible to land except in a balsa, and even then with
difficulty. Should a vessel be drifted down here by baffling winds
and heavy swell, which has been the case, she should endeavour to
pass the head (as a number of rocks surround it) ; and about a mile
to the westward anchorage may be obtained in fifteen fathoms.
N. 4&° W., nine miles from Point Sama, is a low rocky point,
called Tyki, t.nd between the two, the small river Lucumbu, having
low cliffs on each side of it ; this, like most of the rivers on the
coast, kas not strength to make an outlet for itself, but is lost in the
Al'PEXDIX. 941
shingle beach at the foot of the before-mentioned cUffs ; regular
soundings, which continue gradually increasing until youreach Point
Coles, may be obtained at the distance of two mUes, in from fifteen
to t\\"enty fathoms.
W. 21° N., at the distance of thirty-one miles from Point Sama,
is Point Coles ; the coast between is alternately sandy beach, with
low clifi^, and moderately high table land a short distance from the
coast. I doubt if landing could be effected any where between Arica
and Port Coles, as a high swell sets directly on this part and appears
to break with redoubled violence.
PoixT Coles is very remarkable ; it is a low, sandy spit, rmining
out from an abrupt termination of a line of table land. Near its
extreme is a cluster of small hummocks, the whole, at a distance,
appearing as an island ; off the point, to the south-west, is a cluster of
rocks or islets, but no hidden dcuiger exists, although there is gene-
rally a quantity of froth, under which a reef may be suspected.
N. 13° E., five miles and a half from this point, is the \'illage and
roadstead of Ylo. This is a poor place, containing about three hun-
dred inhabitants, under the local governor and captain of the port.
But httle trade is carried on, and that chiefly in guano : a mine of
copper has been lately discovered, which may add to its imporlance.
The inhabitants have to supply the necessaries of life by cultiva-
tion, and do not care to trouble themselves about luxuries. Water
is scarce, and wood is brought from the interior, so that it is not
on any account a suitable place for shipping. The best anchorage
is off the village of Pacoche (a mile and a quarter south of the
town), in twelve or thirteen fathoms, and the best landing is in
Huano Creek : but bad, indeed, is the best, and great care must
be taken lest the boat be swamped, or hurled with violence against
the rocks.
In going into Ylo, the shore should not be approached nearer than
half a mile (as many sharp rocks and blind breakers exist), until
three small rocks, called ' the Brothers,' always visible inside the table
end, bear east, when the village of Pacoche may be steered for, and
anchorage taken abreast of it, as convenient.
English Creek affords the best landing, but boats are forbidden
that cove, to prevent contraband trade being carried on.
From Ylo, the coast trends to the westward, with a cliffy out-
line, from two to four hundred feet in height, and with one or two
242 APPENDIX-
coves, useful only to small coasters, until you reach the Valley of
Tambo, which is of considerable extent, and may be easily distin-
guished by its fertile appearance, contrasting strongly with the barren
and desolate cliffs on either side : those on the east maintain theirregu-
larity for several miles, while on the west the regularity is broken,
and from the near approach of the hills their aspect is bolder.
The next point of this valley is called Mexico, it is E. 18° S.,
twenty-one miles from Islay Point, and is exceedingly low, pro^
jecting considerably beyond the general trend of the coast ; it is
covered with brushwood to the water's edge, and at the distance of
two miles in a southerly direction, soundings may be obtained in
ten fathoms, muddy bottom ; from that depth, in the same direction,
it increases to twenty fathoms ; but on each side of the bank there
are tifty fathoms.
W. 18° N., twenty-one miles from Point Mexico, is Point Islay,
and between the two, five miles from the latter, the cove of Mol-
LENDO, once the port of Arequipa ; but of late years the bottom has
been so much altered, that it is only capable of affording shelter
to a boat or very small vessel ; in consequence of which it has been
thrown into disuse, and the bay of Islay now receives vessels tliat
bring goods to the Arequipa market.
Islay, the port of Arequipa, formed by a few straggling islets off
the point, extending to the north-west, is capable of containing
twenty or five and twenty sail. The town is built on the west side of a
gradually declining hill, sloping toward the anchorage, and is said to
contain fifteen hundred inhabitants (chiefly employed by the merchants
of Arequipa). As in all the sea-ports of Peru, a local governor and
captain of the port are the Authorities ; this is also the residence of
a British vice-consul. Trade was in a more flourishing condi-
tion here, even during a civil war, than at any place we visited ;
there were generally four or five, and often double that number of
vessels discharging or taking in cargoes. 'J 'he principal exports were
wool, bark, and specie, in exchange for which British merchandize
was chiefly coveted.
Islay being much frequented by British merchant vessels, and dif-
ferences of opinion having arisen as to the best method of making
it, detailed and clear directions should be given. Vessels have fre-
quently been in sight, to the westward of the port, yet from the
strength of the current (half a knot, and at the full and change often
APPENDIX. 243
as much as one knot per hour) setting to the westward, have been
prevented from anchormg for several days.
This, no doubt, has been partly owing to the hitherto inaccurate
position assigned it, and from a proper reluctance to expose a vessel
on an imperfectly known coast, to be baffled and drifted about by
light and variable airs, in addition to a heavy swell continually roUing
directly toward the shore.
With the following directions, it is to be hoped that more confi-
dence wiU be acquired, and consequently less delay occasioned in
sailing to the seaport of the second city of Peru.
Coming from the southward, the land abreast of Tambo should
be made, and a certainty of that place ascertained, which (according
to the state of the weather) may be seen from three to six leagues :
the course should then be shaped toward a gap in the mountain to
the westward, with a defined sharp-topped hill in the near range, a
short distance from it. In this gap is the road leading to Arequipa,
which winds along the foot of the before-named hill from Islay.
As the coast is approached, the foot of the hills wiU be seen to be
covered with white ashes (said to have been thrown from the volcano
of Arequipa), not found on any other part of the coast. This
peculiarity commences a httle westward of Tambo, and continues
as far as Point Omilius, and when within three leagues, the Point
Islay and white islets forming the bay, will be plainly observed, and
should be steered for.
Care must be taken in closing the point, as a rock, barely covered,
lies a quarter of a mile to the southward. It is the custom to go to
the w .stward of all the islands ; but, with a commanding breeze, it
would unquestionably be better to run between the third outer and
next island,* which enables you to choose your berth at once ; this
can seldom be done by the other route, the wind heading as you
enter, obliging you to anchor, and use warps. The best anchorage
is just within Flat Rock Point, off the landing-place, in ten or twelve
fathoms. A hawser is necessary to keep the bow to the swell, to
prevent rolling heavily, even in the most sheltered part. Vessels
from the eastward should close the land about Tambo, and observe
the same directions.
If from the eastward the parallel of seventeen degrees five minutes
• His Majesty's ships Menai and Challenger passed in between these
islands.
244
APPENDIX.
should be made, and run in on, this will be about a league to the
southward of the point ; and, if the longitude cannot be trusted.
Point Ornelius, being the most remarkable land, and easily seen
from that parallel, should be searched for in passing. It lies
W. 28° N., fourteen miles from Point Islay — is about two hun-
dred feet high — ^has the appearance of a fort, with two tier of
guns, and is perfectly white ; the adjacent coast to the west is dark,
and forms a bay ; and on the east are low black cliffs ; with ashes on
the top extending half-way up the hills. If the weather be clear,
the valley of Quilca may be seen, which is the first green spot west
of Tambo. Ornelius, however, must be searched for, and when
abreast of it Point Islay vdU be seen, topping to the eastward, as two
islands off a gradual declining point, the sharp hill before-named
in the near range, will also be seen, if favourable weather ; and shortly
after the town will appear like black spots, in strong relief against
the white ground, when a course may be shaped for the anchorage
under the white islets, as before. Landing at Islay is far from good ;
a sort of mole, composed of a few planks, with a swinging ladder
attached to it, enables you generally, with a little management, to
get on shore in safety ; but often at the full of the moon vessels are
detained three days or more, without being able to land or take in
cargo. Fresh provisions may be had on reasonable terms ; but neither
wood nor water can be depended on. There are no fortifications of
any description.
The coast between Islay and Point Cornejo is an irregular black cliff,
from fifty to two hundred feet high, bounded by scattered rocks to
the distance of a cable's length ; about two leagues from Islay is a
cove, called MoUendito, the residence of a few fishermen : there
is a similar cove a little to the eastward of Point Cornejo. West-
ward of that point the coast retires and forms a shallow bay, in
which are three small coves — Aranta, La Guata, and Noratos ; and
W. 36° N., thirteen miles distant, is the valley and river of Quilca,
off which vessels occasionally anchor, under the Seal Rock lying to
the south-east of Quilca Point. This anchorage is much exposed ;
but landing is good in the cove westward of the valley. Watering js
sometimes attempted, by fiilling at the river and rafting off, but must
always be attended with much difficulty and danger. The valley is
about three-quarters of a mile in width, and differing from the others,
which are level, rims down the side of a hill; and from the regu-
APPENDIX. 245
larity of the cliffs by which it is bounded, has the appearance of a
work of art.
W. 6° N., at the distance of six leagues, is the valley of Camana ;
the coast between is nearly straight, \^^th alternate sandy beach
and low broken cliff, the termination of the barren hills immediately
above. Camana is from two to three miles broad, near the sea ; and
apparently well cultivated : the village is situated about a mile from
the sea ; but is scarcely perceptible, being small, and surrounded
by thick brushwood.
On approaching from the eastward, a remarkable cliff, resembling
a fort, will be seen near the sea ; this is an excellent guide till the
vaUey becomes open. There is anchorage in ten or twelve fathoms,
muddy bottom, due south about a mile ; but landing would be dan-
gerous.
W. 18° N., twenty-three miles, is the the valley of OcoSa, the
next remarkable place ; it is smaller and less conspicuous than the
former ; but similar in other respects. An islet lies at its southern
extreme, and several rocks near the extreme of the chff, on its
eastern side.
W. 11° N., fourteen miles, is a projecting bluff point called Pesca-
dores, it has a cove on itsea^t side surrounded by islets ; and off the
point, at the distance of three quarters of a mile in a southerly direc-
tion, lies a rock barely covered: to the westward of the point is a bay
but no anchorage ; the coast then runs in nearly a direct line until
you reach Point Atico, a rugged point, with a number of irregular
broken hillocks on it, barely connected vrith the coast by a sandy
isthmus. At a distance it appears like an island, the isthmus not
being visible far off: there is tolerable anchorage in nineteen or
twenty fathoms on its west side, and excellent landing in a snug cove
at the inner extreme of the point. By keeping a cable's length off
shore, no danger need be feared in running into this roadstead. The
valley of the same name Ues a league and a half to the eastward^
where are about thirty houses, scattered among the trees, that grow
to the height of some twenty feet. From this point the coast conti-
nues its westerly direction (low and broken cUff, with hills imme-
diately above) until you reach Point Capa, where a bay commences
that runs as far as Point Chala ; in it there are several coves, but
none that could be serviceable to shipping.
Point Chala bears from Point Atico W. 20° N. and distant sixteen
246 APPENDIX.
leagues and a half, is a high rocky point, the termination of the
Mono, or hill of that name. This mount shoM's very prominently,
and has several summits to it ; on the east side is a valley that sepa-
rates it from another lovi^er hiU, with two remarkable paps, and on
the west it slopes suddenly to a sandy plain ; the nearest range of
hills to the westward are thrown in-shore considerably, making
Morro Chala still more conspicuous.
W. 26° N., eighteen miles from Point Chala, is Point Chavini,
which appears like a rock on the beach ; between the two is a sandy
beach, with Uttle green hillocks and sand-hills ; there are also two
rivulets, rimning from the valleys of Atequipa and Lomas, that are
seen in the distance.
Half a mile to the westward of Chavini is a small white islet, and
a cluster of rocks level with the water's edge ; hence to the road-
stead of Lomas a sandy beach continues, with regular soundings oif
it, at two miles from the shore.
Point Lomas projects at right angles to the general trend of the
coast, and, similar to Atico, is all but an island ; it may easily be
distinguished although low, by its marked difference (being black
rock) from the adjacent coast.
This road is the port of Acari, affords good anchorage in from five
to fifteen fathoms, and tolerable landing ; it is the residence of a few
fishermen, and used as a bathing place for the inhabitants of Acari,
which, from the information obtained, is a populous town several
leagues in-land. AH supplies, even water, are brought here by thostf
who visit it : the fishermen have a well of brackish water scarcely fit
for use. Boats occasionally call here for otters, which are plentifidat
particular seasons.
W. 21° N., twenty-three miles from Lomas Road, is the Harbour
of San Juan ; and eight miles further, that of San Nicolas. The
former is exceedingly good, and fit for a vessel to undergo any
repairs in, or heaving dovra, in case of necessity, without being
inconvenienced by a swell ; but all materials must be brought, as well
as water and fuel, none of which are to be found there.
The shore is composed of irregular broken cliffs, and at the head
of the bay is a sandy plain ; still the harbour is good, indeed much
better than any other on the south-west coast of Peru, and might be
an excellent place to run for if in distress. It may be distinguished
by Mount Acari, a remaikable sugar-loaf hiU, almost perpendicu-
APPENDIX. 24)7
larly over the cliff on the north side of the bay ; and three leagues
to the eastward, a short distance from the coast, a high bluff head,
the termination of a range of a table land. Between this bluff and
the harbour the land is low and level, with few exceptions, and has a
number of rocks lying off it to the distance of half a mile.
S.W. three-quarters of a mile from Steep Point (the southern point
of the harbour) lies a small black rock, always visible, with a reef of
rocks extending a quarter of a mile to the northward ; and nearly two
miles to the S.E., there is an islet that shows distinctly. A passage
may exist between this reef and the point, but prudence would forbid
its being attempted ; the safest plan is to pass to the northward,
giving it a berth of a cable's length ; and not close the shore until
well within the next point (a sunken rock Hes off it), when you may
haul your wind and work up to the anchorage at the head of the bay,
and come to in any depth from five to fifteen fathoms, muddy bottom.
In working up, the northern shore may be approached boldly ; it is
steep-to, and has no outlying dangers.
The harbour of San Nicolas lies N. 41° W, eight miles from San
Juan, is quite as commodious and free from danger as the latter, but
the landing is not so good.
Harmless Point may be rounded wdthin a cable ; there are a niun-
ber of scattered rocks to the southward of it, but as they all appear,
there is no danger to be feared. There are no inhabitants at either of
these ports, so that vessels wanting any repairs may be sure of not
being interrupted while so employed.
N. 59° W., eight and a half miles from Harmless Point, is Point
Beware, high and clifiy, with a number of smaU rocks and bhnd
breakers round, and some heights close above it ; from this point the
coast is alternately chff and small sandy bays, till you reach Point
Nasca, round which is what has been termed Port CabaUos.
Point Nasca may be readily distinguished : it is a bluff head of a
dark brown colour, 1,020 feet in height, with two sharp topped
hummocks of a moderate height at the foot of it ; the coast to the
westward falls back to the distance of two miles, and is composed
of white sand hills ; in the depth of this bight is Caballos, a rocky
shallow hole, that should only be kno-wn to be avoided ; we lay at
anchor in seven fathoms, as far in as it was thought prudent to go,
for twenty four hours, without being able to effect a landing : the
■wind came round the head in heavy gusts, which, combined with the
248 APPENDIX.
long ground swell, made it doubtful if two anchors would hold us till
our observations wiere concluded. The only traces we saw of there
ever having been any inhabitants at this dreary place, was a pole
sticking up on the top of a mound, near the head of the bay.
N. 64° W., thirteen leagues from Point Nascais Point SantaMaria,
and the rock called the Ynfiemillo. This point is low and rugged, sur-
rounded by rocks and breakers. At the distance of a league and a
half, inland, to the eastward, is a remarkable table topped hill, called
the table of Dona Maria ; this hill may be seen in clear weather at
a considerable distance from seaward, and from its height and pecu-
liar shape is a good mark for this part of the coast.
The Ynfiernillo Rock lies due west from the northern extreme
of the point, at the distance of a mUe ; it is about fifty feet high,
quite black, and in the form of a sugar loaf ; no dangers exist near
it : there are fifty-four fathoms at two mUes distance. Between this
rock and Point Caballos, the coast to a short distance west of the
small River Yea is a sandy beach, with ranges of moderately high
sand hills. From thence to the YnfierniUo it is rocky, with grassy
cliffs immediately over it, and some small white rocks l5Tng off.
N. 31° W., ten and a half miles from Santa Maria, is Point Azua,
a high bluff, with a low rocky point off it; between is a sandy
beach, interrupted by rocky projections, and a small stream running
from the hills.
N. 3° W., from Point Azua, and at the distance of twenty-one
miles, is the southern entrance to the bay of the Yndependencia.
This extensive bay which is fifteen mUes in length in a N.W. and
S.E. direction, and three miles and a half broad, has been till of late
years, completely unknown or overlooked : no mention is made of it
in the Spanish charts, and it was not till the year 1825 that the
Hydrographer at Lima became aware of its existence, and then only
by an accidental discovery. It has two entrances : the southern
called Serrate, which takes its name from the master of the vessel
by whom it was discovered, is formed by the Island of Santa Rosa
on the north, and Point Quemada on the south : it is three quarters
of a mile wide and free from danger. The northern entrance is
named after the Dardo and TruxiUano, two vessels that were con-
ve5ring troops to Pisco : they ran in, mistaking it for that place, and
were wrecked : many of the people on board perished. It is formed
by Point Carretas on the north and the Island of Vieja on the south.
APPENDIX. 249
is five miles in width, and clear in all parts. It is bounded on the
west by the Islands of Vieja and of Santa Rosa, and on the
east by the main-land, which is moderately high, cliffy, and
broken by a sandy beach, at the south end of which is a small
fishing village called Tungo. The people of this village are resi-
dents of Yea, the principal town in the province, which is about
twelve leagues distant; they come here occasionally to fish and
remain a few days, bringing with them aU their supplies, even to
water, as that necessary of life is not to be obtained in the neigh-
bourhood. ITiere is anchorage in any part of this spacious bay ;
the bottom is quite regular, about twenty fathoms all over, excepting
off the shingle spit on the north-east side of Vieja Island, where is
a bank running off that spit to the northward, on which are five and
six fathoms : this is decidedly the best place to anchor, for on the
weather shore, near Quemado Point, it blows strong and in sudden
gusts off the high land, and great difficulty would be found in land-
ing ; whereas, at the spit, you are not annoyed by the wind, and
there is a snug cove, or basin, within it, where boats may land
or lie ui safety at any time.
Approaching this part of the coast from seaward, it may be dis-
tinguished by three clusters of hiUs, Quemado, Vieja Island, and
Carretas ; they are nearly of the same height, and at equal distances
from one another. The S.W. sides of Morro Carretas and the
Island of Vieja are steep dark chff, but Morro Quemado slopes gra-
dually to the water's edge, and is of a much lighter colour. At the
southern extreme of Vieja Island, is a remarkable black lump of
land, in the shape of a sugar loaf : off which lies the white level
island of Santa Rosa, the S.W. side of which is studded with rocks
and breakers, but there is no danger a mUe from the shore.
N. 35° W., six leagues and a half from the north head, or Point
Carretas, is theBoqueron, or southern entrance to the Bay of Pisco ;
between the two is a deep angular bay, with the Island of Zarate
near its centre. The Boqueron is formed by the main land on the
east, and the Island of San Gallan on the west ; this island is two
miles and one-third long in a north and south direction, and one
mile in breadth : it is high, with a bold chffy outHne. There is a
deep valley dividing the hUls ; which when seen from the south-west,
gives it the appearance of a saddle ; the south extreme terminating
abruptly, while at its northern end it slopes more gradually and has
250 APPENDIX.
several peaks on it. Off this end are some detached rocks, tlie nor-
thern of which has the appearance of a nine-pin, and shews dis-
tinctly.
S. J E., at the distance of a mile from its south extreme, lies
the Pinero Rock, which is much in the way of vessels bound to
Pisco from the southward; it is just level with the water's edge,
and in fine weather can always be seen; but when it blows hard
(which it sometimes does through this channel) and a weather
tide is running, there is such a confused cross sea that the whole
space is covered with foam, rendering it difficult to distinguish the
rock ; at such a time the shore should be kept well aboard on either
side, and when in a line with the outer extreme of the island and
the white rock off Point Huacas, you vdU be within the rock and
may steer for Point Paracca ; on rounding which you will open the
Bay of Pisco.
This extensive bay, formed by the Peninsula of Paracca on the
south, and the Ballista and Chincha Islands on the west, is the
principal port of the province of Yea. The to^vn of Pisco is built on
the east side, about a mile from the sea ; and is said to contain three
thousand inhabitants, who derive considerable profit from a spirit
they distil, known by the name of Pisco or Italia, great quantities
of which are annually exported to different parts of the coast : sugar
is also an article of trade, but the pisco is the staple commodity.
Refreshment may be obtained on reasonable terms : wood is scarce :
excellent water may be had at the head of Paraccas Bay, under the
south cluster of trees, two miles from the fishing village of Paracca :
the landing there is very good, and the wells are near the beach.
The best anchorage off the town is vnth. the church open of the
road, bearing E. 14° N., in four fathoms, muddy bottom, three-
quarters of a mile from the shore. A heavy surf beats on the beach
with rollers to the distance of a quarter of a mUe off, rendering it
dangerous to land in ship's boats ; launches built for the purpose
are used in loading and discharging vessels ; but at times even these
cannot stand it, and all commxinication is cut off for two or three
days together.
There are four entrances to this capacious bay : that to the south-
ward already named; between San Gallan and the Ballista Islands;
between those and the Chincha Islands ; and the great or northern
entrance ; aU of which, from appearances, may be safely used ; but.
APPENDIX. 251
between the islands, time would not allow a Ml examination, and,
therefore, there may be dangers that were unseen by us.
In coming from the southward, after passing Point Paracca, a
course may be shaped midway between Blanca Island and the church
of Pisco, which will be seen distinctly : this will lead directly to the
anchorage. A mile and a half round Point Paracca is a bay, off
which a shoal patch extends, with four fathoms on it ; the tail of
this bank wiU be passed in standing towards the anchorage, the
water then deepens suddenly, and when abreast of Blanca Island
you will have twelve fathoms muddy bottom ; from this depth it
decreases gradually to the anchorage.
In coming from the northward it is all plain sailing ; after passing
the Chincha Islands stand in boldly to the anchorage ; the water
shoals quicker on this side Blanca Island, but there is no danger
whatever. Vessels having to ballast here, should work up and
anchor under Shingle Point ; they can lie close to the shore, and
boats may load with expedition.
In coming from seaward this part of the coast may easily be
knovm by the Island of San Gallan, and the high Peninsula of
Paracca at the back of it, which make like large islands, the land
on each side being considerably lower and failing back to the east-
ward, so as not to be visible at a moderate distance. As the shore -
is approached the Chincha and Ballista Islands will be seen ; which
will confirm the position, there being no other islands lying off the
coast about this parallel.
From Pisco the coast runs in a northerly direction, a low sandy
beach with regular soundings oiF it, till you reach the River Chincha;
from thence commences a clay cliffy coast, which continues as far as
the River Canete. From this river to Point Frayle is a beautiful
and fertile valley, in the middle of which is situated the town of
Cerko Azul. This valley produces rum, sugar, and chancaca, a
sort of treacle, for which it is resorted to by coasters. The ancho-
rage is W.N.W. from the bluff that forms the cove, three-quarters
of a mile distant, in seven fathoms ; nearer the shore the water is
shoal, which causes a long swell ; the landing place is on the northern
side of the point, on a stony beach, where a heavy surf is constantly
breaking.
N. 39° W., fifteen miles from Cerro Azul, lies the Island of Asia.
a round, white islcuid, about a mile in circumference, with some rocks
z 2
252
APPENDIX.
extending from it to the shore. Between the two is a bay, hut
scarcely affording anchorage. The coast line is partly a rocky and
partly a sandy beach ; in-shore are hOls about fourteen hundred
feet in height, inclining gradually toward the coast.
N. 41° W., twenty miles from Asia Island, is Chilca Point; it is
about three hundred feet in its highest part, has several rises on it,
and terminates in a steep cUfF, with a small flat rock close off it.
The valley of Chilca hes a league to the southward of the point,
and the harbour of the same name half a league to the northward.
This is a snug cove, but very confined ; anchorage is good in any part
of it, and landing tolerable ; there is a small village at the head of
the bay, but no information could be obtained from the inhabitants
about Chilca, for they deserted their huts on our arrival.
From Chilca the coast forms a bend to about the Valley of Lierin,
off which are the Pachacamac Islands. The northern is the
largest, half a mile in length, and about a cable's length broad ; the
next but one to it is the most remarkable, being quite Hke a sugar-
loaf, perfectly rounded at the top : the others are mere rocks, and
not visible at any distance. At the northern end of these islands
lies a small reef, even with the water's edge : the group run nearly
parallel to the coast, in a N.W. and S.E. direction, and are about a
league in extent. There is no danger on their outer side, but
towards the shore the water is shoal, which causes a long swell, that
at times must break. Between these islands and the Morro Solar is
a sandy beach, with moderately high land a short distance from
the sea. The Morro Solar is a remarkable cluster of hOls, situated
on a sandy plain ; when seen from the southward it has the appear-
ance of an island in the shape of a quoin, sloping to the westward,
and faUing abruptly on its in-shore side ; facing the sea it termi-
nates in a steep cliff, and has a sandy bay on each side of it.
Off the point of the southern sand bay is an islet with some
rocks lying about it, and off the point of the northern sand bay is
a reef of rocks of about a cable's length ; round this reef, on the
north side of the Morro, is the town and road of ChoriUos. The
town of ChoriUos, built on the chff, at the foot of one of the
slopes of the Morro Solar, is used chiefly as a bathing-place for the
inhabitants of Lima, and during a revolution its road is filled with
the shipping from Callao ; though it is an exceedingly bad place for
them : the bottom is a hard sand, with patches of hard stony clay
APPENDIX. ■ 253
mixed together, called tosca ; and the heavy swell that sets round
the point causing almost a roller, brings a vessel up to her anchor
and throws her back again with a sudden jerk, each of which makes
her drag, or endangers snapping the cable.
Vessels having to anchor here ought not to shut the southern point
the Morro in with the next point to the northward : by keeping this
mark open they will be in eight or nine fathoms, and not have so
much swell as there is further in. The landing is very bad ; canoes
built purposely and dexterously managed are the usual means of com-
munication : no doubt there are times when a ship's boat may land
without danger, but very seldom probably without the crew being
thoroughly drenched. From ChoriUos the coast runs in a steady
sweep with cliffs of less height, tiU it reaches the Point of CaUao,
which is a shingle spit, stretching out toward the Island of San
Lorenzo, and with it forms the extensive and commodious Bay of
CaUao.
The Island of San Lorenzo, which is 1050 feet at its highest
part, is four miles and a half long, in a N.W. and S.E. direction,
and one mile broad. OiF its S.E. end lies a small but bold-looking
island, called Fronton, and to the S.W. are the Palominas rocks :
its northern end, or Cape San Lorenzo, is clear, and round it is the
usual passage to the anchorage at Callao. In rounding this Cape do
not close the land nearer than half a mile, for within that distance
there are Hght baffling airs caused by the eddy wind round the island ;
by getting among which you would be more delayed than if you
gave the island a good berth, and should have to make an additional
tack to fetch the anchorage.
This is the usual route ; but there is another which, with common
precaution, may be used to great advantage, by vessels coming
from the southward. This is the Boqueron, formed by the Island of
San Lorenzo and CaUao Point. After making San Lorenzo and
Fronton, steer so as to keep the south extreme of the latter about a
point open on the bow port ; and keep on this course until Callao
Castle is seen, which has two marteUo towers on it, and is situated
on the inner part of the shingle spit, that forms the point : then steer
for it till Horadada Island (with a hole through it) comes on with
the middle of the southern sandy bay of the Morro Solar, and with
the inner declivity of the hill on Solar Point bearing S. 66° E. : with
these marks on, and steering N. 66° W., for the furthest point of
254
APPENDIX.
Lorenzo you can see, you will be clear of all danger ; and when the
west marteUo tower in the castle comes on with the northern part of
CaUao spit, bearing N. 49° E., you may haul gradually round, till
the same tower is seen to the northward of the breakers on a shoal
lying oiF the spit ; when a direct course may be shaped for the ancho-
rage. There is no regular tide in this passage, but generally a little
setting directly through, sometimes to the N.W. and at others
the contrary ; shovdd the stream be adverse, and it fall calm while in
the channel, there is good anchorage in eight or nine fathoms, with
the leading marks on.
Callao is well known as the sea-port of Lima, which is seven
miles inland, situated five hundred feet above the level of the sea,
and at the foot of a range of mountains : when seen from the an-
chorage on a fine day, it has an imposing appearance.
Trade was in a flourishing condition in 1 836, and when the govern-
ment becomes settled, this may be the first commercial port on the
west coast of South America.
SuppHes of all sorts may be obtained for shipping ; fresh provi-
sions as well as vegetables, with an abundance of fruit : watering
is also extremely convenient, a well-constructed mole being run out
into the sea, at which boats can lie and fill from the pipes pro-
jecting from its side ; wood is the scarcest article, and very dear, 9o
that vessels likely to remain at this port should husband their fuel
accordingly.
From Callao, the coast is a sandy beach, running in a northerly
direction until you reach Point Vernal ; it there becomes higher and
clifiy, which character continues as far as Point Mulatas, roimd
which is the little bay of Ancon.
To the west and south-west of Ancon lie the Pescador Islands,
the outer and largest of which bears N. 31° W. from Callao Castle,
and at the distance of eighteen mUes. There is no danger among
these islands ; they are steep-to, with from twenty to thirty fathoms
near them.
N. 33° W. from Point Mulatas, twelve miles distant, is the Bay
of Chancay and river of that name ; this bay may be known by the
bluff" head that forms the point, and has three hills on it, in an eas-
terly direction ; it is a confined place, and fit only for small coasters.
From Chancay, the coast runs in a more westerly direction, as far as
Point Salinas, a shingle beach, with a few broken, clifiy points ; the
APPENDIX. 255
hills are near the coast, and from four hundred to five hundred
feet high.
The point or head of Salinas is five miles in length, in a north and
south direction ; off its southern extreme is a reef of rocks, a quarter
of a mile from the shore ; and at its northern part, called Las Bajas,
is an islet at a cable's distance ; between these points are two coves
fit only for boats ; there is a remarkable round hill, called Salinas,
at a short distance from the coast, and further in shore, is a level,
sandy plain ; at the south side of this plain is a number of salinas,
or salt-ponds, from which the headland takes its name. These ponds
are visited occasionally by people from Huacho.
Off the south part of Salinas, in a south-west direction, lie the Huara
Islands, the largest of which is called Mazorque. It is two hun-
dred feet in height, three-quarters of a mile long, and quite white ;
sealers occasionally frequent this island ; there is landing on its north
side.
The next in size is called Pelade ; it lies S. 49° W. six miles and
a half from Mazorque, is about one humdred and fifty feet high, and
apparently quite round ; between these two islands a safe passage
exists, and may be used without fear in working up to Callao. Be-
tween Mazorque and SaUnas are several smaller islands, all of which,
from their appearance, may be approached without danger ; but as
no advantage could be gained, it would not be prudent to risk going
between them. Vessels, in working up, sometimes go between the
inner one and the point ; but what they gain by so doing does
not appear, for when the current sets to the southward, it runs
equally as strong between Mazorque and Pelade as it does nearer the
shore.
Round the northern point of Salinas Head is the bay of that name,
of large dimensions, and affording anchorage. From this bay the
coast is moderately high and cliffy, without any break, until you
reach the Bay of Huacho. This bay lies round a bluff head, is small ;
but the anchorage is good in five fathoms, just within the two rocks
that run off the northern part of the head. The town is built about
a mile from the coast, in the midst of a fertUe plain, and in coming
from seaward has a pleasant appcEirance ; it is not a place of much
trade, but whale-ships find it useful for watering and refreshing their
crews. Fresh provisions, vegetables, and fruit, are abundant and on
reasonable terms ; wood is also plentiful, and a stream of fresh water
256 APPENDIX.
runs down the side of the clifF into the sea. Landing is tolerably
good : rafting seems to be the best method of watering.
In coming from seaward, the best distinguishing marks for this
place, are the Beagle Mountains, three in number, in the near
range, each of which has two separate peaks on it ; these lie
directly over the bay, and on closing the land, the rornid hiU on Sali-
nas Point and the Island of San Martin to the northward, wUl be
seen ; about midway between them is the Bay of Huacho, under a
light brown cliiF, the top of which is covered with brushwood : to the
southward the coast is a dark, rocky cMfF.
N. 29° W., three miles and two-thirds from Huacho, are the Head
and Bat of Carquin, scarcely as large as Huacho, and apparently
shoal and useless to shipping ; off the Head, which is a steep cliff,
with a sharp-topped hiU on it, are some rocks above water, and an islet
about three-quarters of a mile distant. N. 31° W. three miles from
this islet is the island of San Martin, and round to the northward of
the point abreast of it, is the Bay of Bequeta.
This is no place for a vessel, being full of rocks and breakers, and
having nothing to induce one to go there. From this bay the coast is
moderately high, with sandy outline, until you reach Point Atahuan-
qui. This is a steep point, with two mounds on it, and is partly white
on its south side : there is a small bay on its north side, fit only for
boats. Between this point and the south part of Point Thomas
the coast forms a sandy bay, low and shrubby ; with the town of
Supe about a mile from the sea.
Point Thomas is similar in appearance to Atahuanqui, without the
white on the south side. To the northward of this Point is a snug
little bay, capable of containing four or five saU; it is called the
Bay of Supe, and is the port of that place and Barranca.
There is a fishing village at the south part of it, which is used
by the inhabitants of Barranca during the bathing- season. Hitherto
it had been a forbidden port by the government : in consequence of
which it is little known, and has had few opportunities of exchanging
its produce for the goods of other countries. When we were there,
little information could be gained as to the size of the neighbouring
towns, and number of inhabitants they contain ; but from their appear-
ance we thought they might be of considerable extent. These places
produce chiefly sugar and com, cargoes of which are taken in the
various little vessels that trade along the coast. Refreshments may
APPENDIX. 257
be obtained ; but water is scarce, tlae greater part of which is brought
from Supe, for the use of the inhabitants of the village.
The best anchorage is in four fathoms, with Point Thomas shut in
by the inner point, about a cable's length from the rocks running
off that point, and rather more than a quarter of a mile from the
village. There is good anchorage further out, in six or seven fathoms,
but little sheltered from the swell. In entering, there is no danger ;
Point Thomas is bold, with regular soundings, from ten to fifteen
fathoms three-quarters of a mile off it. Off Inner Point there are a
few rocks to a short distance ; but there is no necessity for hugging
the shore so close, as you can always fetch the anchorage, by keeping
at a moderate distance in standing in.
To distinguish this port, the best guide at a distance is the Bell
Mountain, the highest and most remarkable mountain in the second
range ; it bears from the anchorage E. 39° N. ; may be distinguished
by its shape like a bell, and has three distinct rises on its summit —
the highest at the north end ; on that side it shews very distinctly,
there being no other hiUs near it for a considerable distance. On
approaching the coast, the island of San Martin to the southward,
and Mount Darwin and Cerro Horca (a small round hill on the beach,
with a steep, chffy side to it, facing the sea, with apparently an islet
off it), will be seen, nearly four leagues to the northward. The har-
bour itself has a white rock at its north extreme, and cannot be
mistaken, for there is no other like it near this part of the coast.
From Supe the coast is a clay cHff, about a hundred feet Ln height,
to the distance of a league and a half; it then becomes low and
covered with brushwood, until you reach Cerro Horca already men-
tioned ; here it again becomes hUly near the sea, with alternate rocky
points and small sandy bays, which continue to the distance of six
leagues ; where is the bay called Gramadel.
This is a vnld-looking place, with a heavy swell roUing in ; it is
visited occasionally for the hair seal, with which it abounds : there is
anchorage in six or seven fathoms, sandy bottom, with the bluff that
forms the bay bearing S.S.E. about half a mUe from the shore ;
but landing is scarcely practicable.
The coast maintains its rocky character, vdth deep water off it, as
far as the Buffadero, a high, steep cliff, vidth a hill having two paps
on it, a little in-shore. From this bluff is a rocky cliff, from two
hundred to three hundred feet high, and more level country, as far as
Point Leganto, round which is the Port of Guarmey.
268 APPENDIX.
This is a tolerable harbour, with good anchorage any where in
from three and a half to ten fathoms, over a fine sandy bottom.
Fire-wood is the principal commodity, for which it is the best and
cheapest place on the whole coast. Vessels of considerable burthen
touch here for that article, which they carry up to CaUao, and derive
great profit from its sale. There are also some saltpetre works,
established by a Frenchman, but httle business is done in that line.
The town Hes in a north-easterly direction, about two miles from the
anchorage, but is hid by the surrounding trees, which grow to the
height of thirty feet. It has only one street, and cannot contain more
than five or six hundred inhabitants. At the anchorage there is a
small house, used to transact business, but no other building, which
is unusual, as at most of these places there is a small village near
the sea. Large stacks of wood are piled up on the beach, ready for
embarking.
Fresh provisions, vegetables, and fruit, are plentiful and moderate ;
but water is not to be depended on. It is true, there is a river, and
for several months after March there is a plentiful supply ; but in
the summer season there is sometimes great drought. At the time
we were there, a whale-ship put in to supply her wants, and had to
remain several days, waiting for the water to come down from the
mountains.
Legarto Head is a steep cliff, with the land faUing immediately
inside it and rising again to about the same height. In saUing in,
after having passed the head, a small, white islet will be seen in the
middle of the bay ; steer for it, that you may not border on the
southern shore, for there are many straggling rocks running off the
points ; and when sufficiently far to the northward to shape a mid-
channel course between the white islet and the point opposite it, to
the southward, do so, and it will lead to the anchorage. In standing
in, in this direction, the water shoals gradually to the beach ; but
the southern shore must on no account be approached nearer than a
quarter of a mUe.
The best anchorage is in four fathoms, with Harbour Islet bearing
N. 26° W., and the ruins of a fort on a hUl in-shore E. 5° N. about
a quarter of a mile from the landing-place on the beach. This land-
ing-place does not seem to be so good a one as a steep rock on the
outer side of the bluff, where the sand beach commences ; but pro-
bably it is the most convenient for loading boats.
The rise and faU of tide is irregular, and the time of high water
APPENDIX, 259
uncertain; but, generally speaking, three feet may be considered
about the extent to which it ranges. The sea breeze sets in so
strongly occasionally, that it is difficult for boats to pull ao-ainst it ;
this is particularly the case under the high land, whence it comes
in sudden gusts and squalls.
In coming from seaward, the best way to make this port is to
stand in on a parallel of 10° 06', and when within a few leagues of
the coast, a sharp -peaked hill, with a large white mark on it, will be
seen standing alone a little north of the port : the break in the
hills through which the river runs, is high and clifiy on each side.
The land is also much lower to the northward of Legarto Head;
and there is a large white islet at the north end of Guarmey Bay.
N. 34° W., seven miles and a half from the white islet at the
north extreme of Guarmey Bay, is Point Culebras, a level project-
ing point, similar in appearance to Legarto Head, as seen from the
northward ; the coast between is a mass of broken cliffs and innu-
merable detached rocks, with moderately high land near the coast.
On the north side of Point Culebras, there is anchorage off the
valley of that name. From this point the coast is rocky, with small
sandy bays, and some rocks lying off it about three quarters of a
mile ; there is also a white clifiy islet, five miles to the northward of
Culebras ; whence the coast takes a bend inwards, forming^a bay,
and then runs out towards the Colina Redonda ; a point with two
hummocks on it, and as seen from the southward, appearing Hke an
island. On the north side of this point is the Caleta (only fit for
boats) ; and immediately over it, the Cerro Mongon.
The Cerro Mongon is the highest and most conspicuous object on
this part of the coast ; when seen from the westward it has the ap-
pearance of being round, with rather a sharp summit ; but from the
southward, it shows as a long hUl with a peak at each end. It is
said there is a lake of fresh water on its summit, and that its valleys
abound with deer ; but the truth of this cannot be vouched for, as
our examination did not extend so far.
From Mongon there is a range of hills running parallel to the
coast (which is high and rocky, with some white islets lying off it)
as far as Casma, where they terminate in a steep rocky bluff, that
forms the southern head of the port of that name.
The Bay of Casma is a snug anchorage, something in the form of
a horse-shoe ; at its entrance it is a mile and three quarters in a
260
APPENDIX.
N.W. and S.E. direction, and a mile and a half deep from the outer
part of the cheek, with regular soundings from fifteen to ten, and
three fathoms near the beach. ^,
The best anchorage is with the inner part of the south cheek, bear-
ing about S.S.E. a quarter of a mile off shore, in seven fathoms water ;
by not going farther in you escape, in a great measure, the sudden
gusts of wind that at times come do^^m the valley with great vio-
lence. Captain Ferguson, of H.M.S. Mersey, mentions a rock with
nine feet water on it, on the south side, half a mUe from the shore,
that sometimes breaks : we saw nothing of it while we were there,
but doubtless it exists.
This place seemed quite deserted ; the only things that indicated
its ever having been visited, were a few stacks of wood piled up on
the beach.
The best distinguishing mark for Casma, is the sandy beach in the
bay, with the sand hdlls in-shore of it contrasting strongly with the
hard dark rocks, of which the heads at the entrance are formed :
there is also a small black islet lying a Httle to the westward of it.
From Casma the coast takes rather a more westerly direction, but
continues bold and rocky.
N. 44° W., five leagues from Casma, is the Harbour of Samanco,
or Hu/^MBACHo ; midway between them is a bay, almost hidden by
two islands that lie across the entrance : this bay is four miles long
and two miles deep ; but as the Bay of Samanco is so near at hand,
it was not examined by us as to its capabUities.
The Bay of Samanco is the most extensive on the coast to the
northward of Callao ; it is two leagues in length, in a N.W. and
S.E. direction, and a league and a half wide : at its entrance it is
two miles wide, formed by Point Samanco on the south, and Seal
Island on the north, and has regular soundings all over it.
At the S.E. comer, in a sandy bay, is a small \illage (the resi-
dence of some fishermen), situated at the termination of the River
Nepena. This river, like most on the coast, has not sufficient
strength to force a passage for itself through the beach, but termi-
nates in a lagoon within a few yards of the sea.
The tovra of Huambacho is the nearest place to this bay ; it lies
about a league distant, at the east extreme of the valley. Nepena,
which is the principal town, lies to the north-east about five leagues
off. Tliere is very little trade at this place ; small coasting vessels
APPENDIX. 261
from Payta sometimes call here with a mixed cargo, and they get in
exchange sugar and a Httle grain.
Refreshment may be obtained from the neighbouring towns, but
wood is scarce. The water of the river is brackish and unfit for use ;
but there are wells on the left bank, a short distance from the huts.
When taken on board, this water is not good ; but, contrary to the
general ride, after it has been some time confined on board, it becomes
wholesome and pleasant tasted.
When at a distance, the best mark to distinguish this bay, is Mount
Division, a hill with three sharp peaks, situated on the peninsula be-
tween Samanco and the Bay of Ferrol. There is also a bell- shaped
hiU on the south side of the bay that shows very distinctly.
Mount Tortuga, a short distance inland to the N.N.E., wiU also
be seen : it is higher, and similar in appearance to the Bell Mount.
The south entrance point is a steep bluff, with some rocks lying off
it to a cable's length ; on opening the bay. Leading Bluff will be seen,
a large lump of rock on the sandy beach at the N.E. side, that looks
like an island. In going in, give Samanco Head a berth in passing ;
you may then stand in as close as convenient to the weather shore,
and anchor off the village in four, five, or six fathoms, sandy bottom :
when rounding the inner points, take care of your small spars ; for
the wind comes off the BeU Mount in sudden and variable puffs.
N. 43° W., three leagues from Samanco, is the entrance to the
Bay of Ferrol, nearly equal in size to Samanco, and separated from
it by a low sandy isthmus ; it is an excellent place for a vessel to
careen, being entirely free from the swell that sets into most of the
ports. On its N.E. side is the Indian village of Chimbote, where,
we were told, refreshment of any kind might be had, but no water.
The entrance is clear ; but there is a reef of rocks off Blanca Island,
half a mile to the northward, which must be avoided.
N. 40° W., two leagues from the entrance of Ferrol, is Santa
Island : about a mile and a half in length ; lying N.N.E. and
S.S.W., and of a very white colour ; just without it are two sharp-
pointed rocks, twenty feet above the sea. Two miles N.N.E. from
the island is Santa Head, on the north side of which is the harbour
of that name. This, although small, is a tolerable harbour ; the best
anchorage is in four or five fathoms, with the extreme of the head
bearing S.W. Fresh provisions and vegetables may be obtained on
moderate terms. It is also a tolerable place for watering.
262 APPENDIX.
The town lies west from the anchorage, about two miles distant ;
and the mouth of the river is a mUe and a half along the beach.
This is the largest and most rapid river on the coast of Peru : from
Santa Head it is seen to wind its way down the valley, with several
islets interrupting its course ; but at its termination it branches off
and becomes shallow, with only sufficient strength to make a narrow
outlet for itself, through the sandy beach that forms the coast line :
a heavy and dangerous surf lies off it ; so that no boat could approach
vdth any degree of safety.
This part of the coast may be known by the wide spreading valley
down which the river runs, bounded on each side by ranges of sharp-
topped hiUs ; and as you approach, Santa Island will be plainly seen ;
with the Head of the same name ; there is also a small but remark-
able white island, called Corcovado, to the N.W. of the harbour.
There is no danger in entering ; the soundings are regular for some
distance outside ; and you may anchor any where between the islands
in a moderate depth of water, but of course exposed to the swell.
N. 39° W., five leagues from Santa, lie the Chao Islands, one mile
and three quarters off the point and hill of that name. The largest
is a mUe in circumference, about one hundred and twenty feet high,
and, like most of these islands, quite white ; there are regular sound-
ings from ten to twenty fathoms, at the distance of a mile off shore.
Between Santa and Chao the coast is a low sandy beach, which
continues and forms a shallow bay, as far as the hill of Guanape,
with moderately high land a few miles in-shore.
The hill of Guanape is about three hundred feet high ; rather
sharp at its summit, and when seen from the southward, appears like
an island ; on the north side of it is a small cove, with tolerable
landing just inside the rock that hes off the point.
S. 8° W. from this point, between six and seven miles from the
coast, lie the Guanape Islands, with a safe passage between them
and the shore ; they may be said to be two, with some islets and
rocks lying about them ; the southern is the highest and most con-
spicuous.
From the hiU of Guanape the coast continues a sandy beach, with
regular soundings ; and ranges of high sharp-topped hills, about
two leagues from the sea, until you near the little hiU of Carretas,
which is on the beach, and has Morro Garita de Mocha overlooking
it. Here commences the valley of Chimu, about the middle of which
APPENDIX. 263
is situated the city of Truxillo, and at the northern extreme, the
village and road of Huanchaco. This is a bad place for shipping,
and seems to have been badly chosen : the north side of the hUl of
Carretas is a much better place for landing and embarking goods ; and
might be farther improved by sinking some small craft laden with
stones, plenty of which the hill would aiFord.
The road of Huanchaco is on the north side of a few rocks that
run out from a chffy projection ; sheltering the land in a slight de-
gree, but affording no protection to shipping. The village is under
the cliff, and not distinguishable till to the northward of the point ;
but the church, which is on the rising ground, shows very distinctly,
and is a good guide when near the coast.
The usual anchorage is with the church and a tree that stands
in the village in one, bearing about east, a mile and a quarter from
the shore, in seven fathoms dark sand and mud. Vessels often have
to weigh or slip and stand off, owdng to the heavy swell that sets
in : it is also customary to sight your anchor once in the twenty-
four hours, to prevent its being imbedded so firmly as to require
much time to weigh it when required.
Landing cannot be effected in ship's boats ; there are launches con-
structed for the purpose, manned by Indians of the village, who are
skilful in the management of them : they come off on your arrival,
and will land you safely, for which they charge six dollars, equal to
one pound four shillings sterhng : it is to be remembered that no
more is charged for a cargo of goods ; their having to risk the surf
being that for which you pay.
Fresh provisions may be had from Truxillo, but watering is out of
the question. The city is said to contain 4,000 inhabitants. Rice is
the principal production of the valley ; for that article and specie
it is that vessels call here.
If bound for this road, you should stand in on a parallel of 8°,
(which is a mile to vdndward), and you vrill see Mount Campana, a
bell-shaped mount, standing alone, about two leagues to the north-
ward : and Huanchaco Peak, which is very sharp, and the first hUl
in the range on the north side of the valley. Shortly after the
church vtdU come in sight, and the shipping in the road.
The coast is cliffy for a few miles to the northward of Huanchaco ;
the low sandy soil with bushes on it then commences, with regular
soundings off it, and continues as far as Malabrigo Road. This bay
264 APPENDIX.
although bad, is considerably preferable to Huanchaco ; it is formed
by a cluster of hiUs, projecting beyond the general trend of the
coast, which at a distance appear like an island ; there is a fishing
village at the S.E. side, but no trade is carried on. The town
of Paysan lies some leagues to the S.E., and, by the account they
gave of it at Malabrigo, must be of considerable extent.
The best anchorage here is vidth the \dllage bearing about E.S.E.,
three-quarters of a mile from the shore, in four fathoms sandy bot-
tom : landing is bad, but the fishermen have what they call ' cabal-
Htos,' bunches of reed fastened together, turned up at the bow like
a balsa of ChUe, but much higher. These are so light that they
are thro-WTi on the top of the surf to the beach, when they jump off
and carry them on their shoulders to the huts. It seems that each
different bay or road has its peculiarly-constructed vessel, adapted to
the surf which it has to go through. The small island of Macabi,
lies S. by E. two leagues from Malabrigo, with a safe channel
of ten fathoms between it and the main land.
N. 35° W., six leagues and a half from Malabrigo, is the road of
Pacasmayo ; between the two the coast is low and cliffy, with a
sandy beach at the foot of the cHff, and soundings of nine and ten
fathoms two miles off shore. Pacasmayo is a sufficiently good road-
stead, under a projecting sandy point, with a flat running off it to
the distance of a quarter of a mile. The best anchorage is with the
point bearing about S. by E., and the village east ; you will there
have five fathoms, sand and mud : there is no danger in standing
in ; the soundings are regular, shoaling gradually towards the shore.
Landing is difficult : laimches are used as at Huanchaco. The prin-
cipal export is rice, which is brought from the town of San Pedro
de Yoco, two leagues inland. Fresh provisions may also be obtained
from the same place ; wood and water may be had at the village on
the beach, which is principally inhabited by Indians, employed by
the merchants of San Pedro.
To distinguish this road from seaward, the best guide is to stand
in on a parallel of 7° 25' to 30', and when vdthin six leagues, the
hill of Malabrigo wUl be seen, which appears like an island sloping
gradually on each side ; and a little to the northward. Arcana HiU,
rugged with sharp peaks. As you approach, the low yeUow cliffs
win appear (those north of the road the liighest), on the summit of
which, on the north side of the point, is a dark square buUding that
APPENDIX. 265
shews very distinctly. The best mark for the anchorage is the ship-
ping, when any are there. From this road the coast continues low,
with broken cliiF, until you reach Point Eten, which is a double hiU
(the southern one the highest), with a steep cliff facing the sea.
The north side of this cliff is white, and shews conspicuously.
N. 43° W., a Httle more than four leagues, is the road of Lam-
BAYEQUE, the worst anchorage on the coast of Peru. There is a
small village on the rising ground, with a church that shews white
towards the sea ; off which vessels anchor in five fathoms, a mile
and a quarter from the shore. The bottom is a hard sand, and bad
holding ground, it is always necessary to have two anchors ready,
for the heavy swell that sets on this beach renders it almost im-
possible to bring up with one, particularly after the sea breeze
sets in.
Rice is the chief commoditj^ for which vessels touch here : the
only method of discharging or taking in a cargo (or in fact landing
at all), is by means of the balsa. This is a raft of nine logs of the
cabbage palm, secured together by lashings, with a platform raised
about two feet, on which the goods are placed. Tliey have a large
lug sail which is used in landing, the wind being along the shore
enables them to run through the surf and on the beach with ease and
safety ; and it seldom happens that any damage is sustained by this
peculiar mode of proceeding. Supplies of fresh provisions, fruit,
and vegetables may be obtained, but neither wood nor water.
The coast continues low and sandy, similar in appearance to that
of Lambayeque, to the distance of twenty-five leagues : an extensive
range of table-land of considerable height, with broken rocky points,
then commences, and continues to Point Aguja or the Needle.
Fifteen leagues from Lambayeque in an E.S.E. direction, lies a small
group of islands called Lobos de Afuera. These islands are a
league in length north and south, and a mile and a half broad ; are
about a hundred feet high, of a mixed brown and white colour, and
may be seen several leagues off ; they are quite barren, affording
neither wood nor water. There is a cove on the north side formed by
the two principal islands, but with deep water and rocky bottom ;
within this cove are several nooks, in which a small vessel might
careen, without being interrupted by the swell.
These islands are resorted to by fishermen from Lambayeque on
their balsas ; they carry all their necessaries with them, and remain
a a
SG(j APPExnix.
about a month salting fish, M'hich fetch a high price at Lambayeque.
ITiere is no danger round these islands, at the distance of a mile ;
regular soundings will be found between them and the shore, from
fifty fathoms abreast of the islands.
N. 26° W., ten leagues from Lobos de Afuera, lies the Island of
LoBo's DE TiEEEA, nearly two leagues in length, north and south,
and little more than two miles wide ; when seen from seaward it has
a similar appearance to the former islands, and many rocks and
blind breakers lie round it, particularly on the west side. There is
tolerable anchorage on the N.E. side, in eleven or t^velve fathoms,
sand and broken shells. A safe passage is said to exist between
this island and the main, which is distant ten miles, but as no advan-
tage could be gained by going between, it was not thoroughly exa-
mined by us.
Point Aguja is long and level, terminating in a steep bluff 150
feet high, and has a finger rock a short distance off it, with several
detached rocks round the point.
Three miles and a half N.N.E. of this is Point Noniira, and five
miles farther in the same direction is Point Pisura, the south point
of the Baj' of Sechura ; between Aguja and Point Pisura are two
small bays, where anchorage may be obtained, if required. The land
about this part is much higher, and has deeper water oflf it, than on
either side, and may be readily known by its regularity and table-
top. The bay of Sechura is twelve leagues in length, formed by the
little Lobos Island of Payta and Point Pisura, and is six leagues
deep ; on the S.E. side the coast shows low sand hills, but as you
go northward it becomes chffy and considerably higher.
Near the centre of the bay is the entrance to the River Piura, and
the tovra of Sechura situated on the banks of it. This town is inha-
bited chiefly by Indians, who carry on a considerable trade in salt,
which they take to Payta on their balsas, and sell to the shipping.
The river is small, but of sufficient size to admit the balsas when laden.
There is anchorage any where off the town, in from twelve to five
fathoms, coarse sand ; in the latter depth you will be better than a
mile from the shore. This place may easily be distinguished by the
church, which has two high steeples on it, and shows conspicuously
above the surrounding sand hills ; one of these steeples has a con-
siderable inchnation to the northward, which at a distance £rives it
more the appearance of a cocoa-nut tree than a stone building.
APPENDIX. 267
From Lobos Island Point the coast is cliffy, about 120 feet high,
and continues so as far as Payta Point, which is three leagues distant ;
between these two, a mile and a half from the coast, is a cluster of
hills called the saddle of Payta ; accurately described by Captain
Basil Hall. The Silla or Saddle of Payta is sufficiently remark-
able, it is high and peaked, forming three clusters of peaks joined
together at the base, the middle being the highest ; the two northern
ones are of a dark brown colour ; the southern is the lowest, and of a
lighter browTi. These peaks rise out of a level plain, and are an
excellent guide to vessels boimd for the Port of Payta from the south-
ward.
A few leagues to the northward, as already mentioned, is Payta
Point, round which is the port of that name. This is without excep-
tion the best harbour on the coast, and considerable trade is carried
on. Vessels of all nations touch here for cargoes, principally cotton,
bark, hides, and drugs, in return for which they bring the manu-
factures of their several countries. In the year 1835 upwards of
forty thousand tons of shipping anchored in this port. Communi-
cation with Europe (via Panama) is more expeditious than at any of
the other ports.
The town is built on the slope and at the foot of the hill, on the
south-east side of the bay ; at a distance it is scarcely visible, the
houses being of the same colour with the surrounding cliff. It is
said to contain 5,000 inhabitants, and is the sea port of the province
of Piura, the population of which is estimated at 75,000 souls.
The City of San Miguel de Piura is situated on the banks of
the River Piura, in an easterly direction from Payta, between nuie
and ten leagues distant. Fresh provisions may be had at Payta on
reasonable terms, but neither wood nor water, except at a high
price, the latter being brought from Colan (a distance of four miles)
for the inhabitants of the place. When we were there hopes were
entertained of a supply of water from the west side of the bay ; an
American having commenced boring with an apparatus proper for the
purpose.
There is no danger in entering this excellent harbour : after
rounding the point which has a signal station on it, you will open
False Bay : this must be passed, as the true bay is romid Inner
Point. That point ought not to be hugged closely, for there are some
rocks to the distance of a cable's length, and the wind baffles off it.
a a 2
QG8
API'KXDIX.
After rounding Inner Point you may anchor where convenient, in
quiet still water, with from four to seven fathoms, over a muddy bot-
tom. The landing jDlace is at the mole about the centre of the town.
N. 41°. W., nine leagues and a half from the town of Payta, is
Point Paeina, a bluff, about eighty feet high, with a reef to the
distance of half a mile on its west side ; between this point and
Payta the coast is low and sandy, with table land of a moderate
height, a short distance from the beach ; and the mountain of Ama-
tape five leagues in the interior.
After rounding Point Parina (which is the western extreme of
South America), the coast trends abruptly to the northward, and
becomes higher and more chiij^ until you reach Point Talara. This
is a double point, the southern part of which is cliffy ; about eighty
feet high, with a smaU black rock lying off it ; the northern part is
much lower, and has few breakers near. On the north side of this
point is a shallow bay, in the depth of which the high cliffy coast
again commences, and runs in a line towards Cape Blanco.
Cape Blanco is high and bold (apparently the corner of a long
range of table-land), sloping gradually toward the sea ; near the
extreme of the cape there aie two shaq> topped hillocks.; and midway
between them and the commencement of the table land, is another
rise with a sharp top. There are some rocks that shew themselves
about a quarter of a mile off^, but no danger exists without that dis-
tance. From Cape Blanco the general trend of the coast is more
easterly, in nearly a direct hne to Point Malpelo, which is twenty-
one leagues distant.
N. 34° E., seven leagues and a half from the former is Point
Sal, a brown cliff", one hundred and twenty feet high ; along the
coast is a sandy beach, with high cliff as far as the valley of Mancora,
where it is low with brush wood near the sea ; the hills being- at a dis-
tance inland.
Northward of Point Sal the coast is cliffy, to about midway
between It and Point Picos ; it then becomes lower, and similar to
Mancora.
Point Picos is a sloping bluff, with a sandy beach outside it, and
another point, exactly similar, a little to the northward : at the back
of it is a cluster of hills with sharp peaks, hence arises, probably,
the name given by the Spaniards to this point. From Point Picos
the coast is a sandy beach, with a mixture of hill and cliff of a
APPENDIX. 269
light brown colour and well wooded. There are seveial small bays
between it and Point Malpelo, which bears N. 41° E., seven and a
half leagues distant.
Point Malpelo, the southern point of the entrance of Guayaquil
River, may be readily known by the marked diiference between it
and the coast to the southward : it is very low and covered wibh
bushes to its extreme ; a short distance in-shore, is a clump of bushes
higher and more conspicuous than the rest, which shews plainly on
approaching. At the extremity of the point is the River Tumbes
off which a reef extends, to the distance of a quarter of»a mile.
This place is much frequented by whalers, for fresh- water, which is
found about a mile from the entrance, where they fill their boats from
alongside ; great care is necessary in crossing the bar, as a heavy
and dangerous* surf beats on it, rendering it at all times difficult to
cross. 1
The entrance to the river may be distinguished by a hut on the
port hand going in, which is perceived immediately you round the
point. About two leagues up the river stood the old town of
Tumbes, now scarcely more thah a few huts, barely sufficient to
supply the whalers with fruit and vegetables. This is the boundary
line, between Peru and the State of the Equator. You may anchor
any where off the point in six or seven fathoms.
Winds.
The prevailing winds on the coast of Peru blow from S.S.E. to
S.W. ; seldom stronger than a fresh breeze, and often in particular
parts scarcely sufficient to enable shipping to make their passages
from one port to another. This is especially the case on the south
and south-western coast, between Cobija and Callao.
Sometimes during the summer, for three or four successive days,
there is not a breath of vdnd ; the sky is beautifully clear, with a
nearly vertical sun.
On the days that the sea-breeze sets in, it generally commences
about ten in the morning ; then light and variable, but gradually
increasing till one or two in the afternoon. From that time, a steady
breeze prevails till near sunset, when it begins to die away ; and
soon after the sun is down there is a calm. About eight or nine
270 APPENDIX.
in the evening light winds come off the land, and continue till sun-
rise; when it again becomes calm until the sea-breeze sets in as
before.
During winter (from April to August) light northerly winds may
be frequently expected, accompanied by thick fogs, or dark lowering
weather ; but this seldom occurs in the summer months, although
even then the tops of hiUs are frequently enveloped in mist.
To the northward of Callao, the winds are more to be depended
on ; the sea-breeze sets in with greater regularity, and fresher than
on the southern parts ; and near the limit of the Peruvian territory
(about Payta and off Cape Blanco), a double-reefed topsail breeze is
not uncommon.
It is to be remarked, and may be laid doMia as a general rule, that
although such moderate winds blow on the coast of Peru, yet sudden
and heavy gusts come over high land after the sea-breeze sets in,
which, from the smallness of the ports, may be attended with some
inconvenience, if precautions are not taken in shortening sail previous
to entering them.
The only difference between winter and summer, as far as regards
the winds, is the frequency of light northerly airs during the former
months ; but in the state of the weather, the difference is far greater
than one would imagine in so low a latitude. In the summer the
weather is dehghtfully line, with the thermometer (Fahrenheit's)
seldom below 70°, and often as high as 80°, in a vessel's cabin ; but
during winter the air is raw and damp, with thick fogs and a cloudy
overcast sky. Cloth clothing is then necessary for the security of
health ; whereas in summer the lighter you are clad, the more con-
ducive to comfort and health.
The general set of the Current on the coast of Peru is along the
shore to the northward, from half a knot to one knot an hour ; but
occasionally it sets to the southward, with equal or even greater
strength.
The period at which these southerly sets take place cannot be ascer-
tained with any degree of certainty. Neither seasons, the state of
the moon, nor other causes common on almost every coast, seem to
have an influence here. The oldest navigators, and men accus-
tomed to the coasting trade, can assign no reason for these changes —
they only know that they do take place, and endeavour to profit by
them accordingly.
APPKNUIX. 271
During our stay on the coast, we frequently experienced these
southerly sets, immediately preceding and during northerly winds ;
but as this was not always the case, no general rule can be laid
douTi, although it certainly appears a natural inference to draw. "We
also remarked, that at times the current was setting to the south-
ward, when a fresh wind was, and for days previous, had been blow-
ing from that quarter. And as no inequalities or irregularities in
the coast Hne could have occasioned this, it only served to heighten
our curiosity, without affording any clue to discover how the peculia-
rity was caused.
On Passages.
With regard to making passages on this coast — little difficult)^ is
found in going northward ; a fair offing is all that is requisite to
ensure your making a certain port in a given number of days ; but in
working to windward, some degree of skill, and constant attention
are necessary.
Much difference of opinion exists as to whether the in -shore or
off-shore route should be preferred ; but from the experience we had
ourselves, and from information gained from those who were said to
understand the coast, we were led to suppose the following the best
line to foUow.
On leaving Guayaquil or Payta, if bound to CaUao, work close in-
shore to about the island of Lobos de Afuera. All agree in this.
Endeavour always to be in with the land soon after the sun has
set, that advantage may be taken of the land wind, which begins
about that time ; this will frequently enable a ship to make her way
nearly along shore throughout the night, and place her in a good
situation for the first of the sea-breeze.
After having passed the before-named islands, it would be advisable
to work up on their meridian, until you approach the latitude of
Callao ; then stand in, and if it is not fetched, work up along shore,
as above directed.
Some people have attempted to make this passage, by standing
off for Jveveral days, hoping to fetch in on the other tack, but have
invariably found it a fruitless effort, owing to the northerly set that
is experienced on apjDroaching the equator.
If from Callao and bound to \^alparaiso, there is no question but
272 APPENDIX.
that by running off with a full sail the passage will be made in much
less time than by working in-shore, for you run quite through the
trade-wind, and fall in with the westerly winds which are always
found beyond the trades. But for the intermediate ports (except-
ing Coquimbo) the case is different, as they lie considerably within
the trade-wind, and must be worked for by that alone.* It may,
however, be recommended to work along shore as bfefore stated, to
about the island of San Gallan. Whence the coast trends more to
the eastward, so that a long leg and a short one may be made (with
the land just in sight) as far as Arica, or to any of the ports between
Pisco and that place.
From Arica, the coast being nearly north and south, vessels
bound to the southward should make an offing of about fifteen or
twenty leagues (to ensure keeping the sea-breeze), and work up on
that meridian till in the parallel of the place to which they are bound.
On no account is it advisable to make a long stretch off; for as you
approach the limit of the trade-wind it gradually hauls to the east-
ward, and great difficulty will be found in even fetching the port
from which you started.
The average passage in a well-conditioned merchant-vessel from
Guayaquil to Callao is from fifteen to twenty days ; and from Callao
to Valparaiso about three weeks ; fast-sailing schooners have made
these passages in much less time ; and there is an instance of two
men-of-war, in company, having gone from Callao to Valparaiso,
remained there two days, and re-anchored at Callao on the twenty-
first day. But these are rare occurrences, and only to be done under
most favourable circumstances, such as taking a " norther" soon
after leaving Callao.
N.B. These remarks and notices, relating to Peru, are the work
of Mr. Usborne. Those referring to Northern Chile are by Lieut.
Sulivan. Mr. Stokes and I have added a few words,
* A dull sailer might do better by running through the trade, making
easting with westerly winds, and then steering northward' along the coast,
than by attempting to work to windward against a trade-wirtfi, which
varies but a few points.
APPENDIX. 273
No. 42.
Al Snr. Comandante de la barca de S.M.B. Beagle, D°. R. FitzRoy.
Buenos Ayres, Nov. 8 de 1832.
Ano 22 de la Libertad, y 17 de la Yndependencia.
El Ministro de Relaciones Esteriores que subscribe ha recibido eon
la mayor satisfaccion la Carta del Puerto de Bahia Blanca, que se ha
servido remitu'le fel Snr. Fitz Roy, Comandante de la Barca Beagle
de S.M.B.
El Ministro agradece al Snr. Fitz Roy este presente que considera
de mucha importancia, y en su consecuencia tiene el placer de incluirle
las ordenes que por el Ministerio de la Guerra se libran a los Coman-
dantes politicos y militares de los Puertos de la RepubHca, para que no
le pongan impedimento en sus operaciones facultativas sobre la Costa
y si le faciliten los auxilios que puedan serle precisos para este desem-
peno.
Dios guarde muchos Anos al Snr. Com". D". Roberto Fitz Roy.
Manuel V. E. Maza.
Nc. 43.
Sir, Lima, 21st June 1836.
We, the undersigned British merchants, residing in this capital,
have just learned with much satisfaction from his Majesty's Consul-
General, Mr. Wilson, that the survey of the sea-coast from Cape
Horn to Guayaquil has been completed. This important work exe-
cuted by you and under your orders, wiU, doubtless, prove of great
value to British commerce in the Pacific ; and we should be wanting
in gratitude if we did not avail ourselves of the earliest opportunity
of returning you our sincere thanks, not only for the skill and zeal
you displayed in this arduous undertaking, but for the pecuniary
sacrifices you made to insure its complete and speedy accompHsh-
ment. To Mr. Usborne we also feel much indebted, for the energy
and perseverance manifested by him in the fulfilment of his duty,
under circumstances not a little embarrassing and difficult ; and we
hope that his conduct, being made known in the proper quarter, will
meet the reward it deserves. That you may long live to serve your
274 APPENDIX.
country, and establish fresh claims to the gratitude of your coun-
trymen, is the sincere wish of.
Sir,
Your obUged and faithful servants,
For Dickson, Price, and Co. — W. Hodgson.
Natlor, Kendall, and Co.
For Laylem, Read, arid Co. — Valentine
Smith.
SwAYN, Reid, and Co.
Lang, Pearce, and Co.
Fredk. Huth, Gruning, and Co.
For GiBBs, Crawley, and Co. — H. Witt.
J. W. Leadlet.
For Hegan, Hall, and Co. — J. Farmer.
John Mackie.
J. Sutherland.
For Christopher Briggs. — H. N, Briggs.
Templeman and Bergman.
Frederick Pfeiffer.
No. 44.
Description of a Quadrant, the power of which is increased by
means of an additional Horizon Glass.
Let CAB, in the figure, represent a common quadrant, having
the angle A C B equal to forty-five degrees : let C be the index-glass ;
C A the zero hne, or the plane of the glass produced ; D the hori-
zon-glass, and E the sight-vane.
Suppose C and D to be parallel, and that a ray coming from an
object H, is reflected from C, along the line C D, and from D along
the line D E to the eye.
A ray of light from h may be supposed to come from H, if the
two, H h, are more than half a mile from the instrument, and the
object H vnH be seen directly, as well as by reflection, in the Une D E.
The angle D C E being equal to the angle DEC, D C is equal
to D E. With the centre D describe the circle C E F. Place a
glass at F, similar to that at D, but making an angle with C B,
which will reflect a ray passing along C F, in the line F E, to E.
CttlKiaTITS.
STJRAOnUS.
'FHLMlB.llT S.
/tFz£:Jic/
CTUMlUJL.TDSo
?U)lisl)ed by Henry CollD-Lim.Ja.Great l-IarIbarougli5Lreci..l839
APJ-ENDIX. 275
C F E is an angle at the circumference of a circle, and therefore half
C D E, at the centre ; and equal to D E F, or forty-five degrees.
An object at H being reflected from F along the line FE, will
appear in contact with an object at K, which we may here suppose to
be the horizon of the sea. But, by looking through the glass F,
and bringing an object into contact with the horizon, which is really
forty-five degrees above it, the index of the quadrant will be at zero ;
and by looking through F, and bringing an object into contact with
K, or the horizon, which is reaUy one hundred and thirty-five degrees
from it, the index of the quadrant wiU be at ninety degrees.
The principle being thus shown, it is unnecessary to go farther in
this place ; either in explaining how it applies equally well to a quin-
tant or sextant, or in describing Mr. Worthington's ingenious method
of taking advantage of it, in the sextants he has lately made with
power to measure 160°.
In adjusting or verifying the adjustment of the additional glass, I
found that by measiu-ing the angular distance of two fixed stars more
than forty degrees apart — ^first carefully by the ordinaiy method, and
then using the extra or additional glass — it was practicable to ascer-
tain its exact error : the only difficulty I had foreseen in the efficient
use of this auxiliary.
I may add, that the telescope moves parallel to the plane of the
instrument, and that there are two sets of numbers referring to one
gi-aduation.
No. 45.
On Clouds.
Clouds may be divided into four classes, called —
CiERUs, Stratus, Nimbus, Cumulus.
Cirrus is the first light cloud that forms in the sky after fine clear
weather. It is very Ught and delicate in its appearance ; and gene-
rally curling or waving, like feathers, hair, or horses' tails. It may
also be called the ' Curl Cloud.'
Stratus is the shapeless smoke-hke cloud that is most common,
and of all sizes : sometimes it is small, and at a distance, like spots of
inky or dirty water ; its edges appearing faint or' ill-defined ; some-
times it rises in fog-banks from water, or land ; sometimes it over-
spreads and hides the sky. Rain does not fall from it. Its exact
276 APPENDIX.
resemblance cannot be traced upon paper, because the edges are so
ill-defined. It may also be called the ' Flat Cloud.'
Nimbus is the heavy-looking, soft, shapeless cloud, from which
rain is falling. Whatever shape a cloud may have retained previous
to rain falling from it — at the moment of its change from vapour to
water, it softens in appearance, and becomes the ' Nimbus,' or
' Rain Cloud.'
Cumulus is the hard-edged cloud, or cloud with well-defined
edges ; whose resemblance can be accurately traced on paper. This
cloud is not, generally speaking, so large as the Stratus or Nimbus,
aud appears to be a compact mass of either the former or latter, or
of both. It may also be called the ' Heap Cloud.'
These four classifications of clouds will not, however, suffice to
describe exactly the appearance of the sky at all times. More minute
distinctions are required, for which the following may be used : —
Cirro-stratus — signifying a mixture of Cirrus and Stratus.
Cirro-cumulus- — Cirrus and Cumulus.
Cumulo-stratus — signifying a mixture of Cumulus and Stratus.
Which terms may be rendered more explanatory of the precise
kind of cloud, by using the augmentative termination onus, or the
diminutive, itus. Thus: — Cirronus, Cirritus ; C irrono- stratus ;
Cirrito-stratus ; Cirrono-cumulus, Cirrito- cumulus ; Stratonus, Stra-
titus ; Cumulonus, Cumulitus ; Cumulono-stratus, Cumulito-stratus.
Should these be found insufficient to convey distinct ideas of every
variety of clouds, the second word may be augmented or diminished,
thus : Cirrono-stratitus, &c.
These terms may be abbreviated for common use by MTiting only
the first letters of each word ; allowing one letter to represent the
diminutive, two letters the ordinary, or middle degree, and three
letters the augmentative. As Cirrus and Cumulus begin with the
same letter, it will be necessary to make a distinction between them
by taking two, three, and four letters, respectively, of Cumulus ;
thus, C, Ci., Cir. ; S., St., Str. ; N., Ni, Nim. : Cu., Cum., Cumu.
Suppose it were desired to express Cumulito-stratoni, C.-Str. would
be sufficient, &c.
c sua IK o zmra .
cmamJiTiD'S.
C HH ]R O ly d - S IT Jai.!ir TITS -
TtFUzKcy
Cimtianc'O-S'irmA'anrTS *
PutlisheilyHanry Calbum, 13. Great Marlborough Sar«etlB.'^9
CiriffiiR,©i^o- CiumTuiLTns.
Cim^^irc -€'1
s T stA-or oimr s .
ST3R-&,!ffirTTD"S.
riiblishedljyHem)' CoTbitm IZ Gtreai Marlkorougb atrecL]R.^9.
CT!JMTUi-o:wo- STmATins-
CTCMID LI T O-SIJEUilTTJ S .
i'dhhsbeity Henry CalbumJa Ca:t>ai,LUrlbarou^Strc€tJ8a9.
APPKXDIX. - 277
No. 46.
WlXDS.
Much notice has lately been taken of the theory respecting storms ;
suggested by Colonel Capper in 1801, discussed by Mr. Redfield in
1831, and carried out in much detail by Colonel Reid. I have neither
ability, nor at present space, to make more than a few brief remarks
on this subject.
Are not storms exceptions to the general winds, or, atmospheric
cvirrents ; not the causes of them ? * Variable winds are almost con-
tinual, except during short intervals of calm ; but hurricanes, or
even ordinary storms, are rare. May not opposing or passing cur-
rents cause eddies, or whirls, on an immense scale in the air, not
only horizontal, but inclined to the horizon, or vertical ?
In laying a ship to, during a storm, there are other points to con-
sider besides the veering of the wind ; such as the direction of the
sea, with or against a current, &c. I cannot agree with Colonel
Reid, in his remarks (page 425) about the " problem to be solved,"
or in his " Rule for laying ships to in hurricanes."
I never myself witnessed a storm that blew from more than fifteen
points of the compass, either successively, or by sudden changes.
In most, if not all of the stcJrms to which 1 can bear any testi-
mony, currents of air arriving from diiFerent directions appeared to
succeed each other, or combine together. One usually brought ' the
dirt,' to use a sailor's phrase, and another cleared it away, after
driving much of it back again, often Math redoubled fury. One of
these currents was warm and moist — another cold and dry, compa-
ratively speaking. While one lasted, the barometer feU, or was sta-
tionary ; with another it rose. At ■ all places I have ^•isited, or of
which I have obtained notices on the subject, the barometer stands
high with easterly, and comparatively low with westerly winds, on
an average. Northerly winds in the northern hemisphere affect the
barometer, like southerly winds in the southern hemisphere.
No. 47.
Tides.
At the end of the year 1833, I received from Mr. Whewell a copy
of a work for which seamen in general are deeply indebted to him. It
* Reid's Law of Storms, p, 120, &c.
278 APPENDIX.
bore the unpretending title of an " Essay towards a first approxima-
tion to a Map of Cotidal Lines;" but however Hghtly the author
might esteem it, there can be no doubt that it tended to remove a
cloud which hung over numerous difficulties ; and to enable us not
only to take a general view of them, but to see how we should direct
our course in order to attain some knowledge of their intricacies.
In 1831 Mr. Lubbock called the attention of mathematicians, as
well as of practical seamen, to the subject of Tides : but it was Mr.
WheweU who aroused general interest ; and, assisted by the Admi-
ralty, engaged the co-operation of observers in all quarters of the
globe.
At the first perusal of Mr. Whewell's essay, I was particularly
struck by the following passages : " But in the meantime no one
appears to have attempted to trace the nature of the connexion
among the tides of the different parts of the world. We are, per-
haps, not even yet able to answer decisively the inquiry which
Bacon suggests to the philosophers of his time, whether the high
water extends across the Atlantic so as to affect, contemporaneously,
the shores of America and Africa ? or, whether it is high on one side
of this ocean when it is low on the other .' at any rate, such obser-
vations have not' been extended and generalized." * Also : f
" If the time of high water at Plymouth be five, and at the Eddy-
stone eight (as formerly stated), the water must be falling for three
hours on the shore, while it is rising at the same time at ten or
twelve miles distance ; and this through a height of several feet. We
can hardly imagine that any elevation in one of the situations, should
not be transferred to the other in a much shorter time than this.
" There is, in fact, no doubt that most, or all the statements of such
discrepancies, are founded in a mistake arising from the comparison
of two different phenomena ; namely, the time of high- water, and
the time of the change from the flow to the ebb current. In some
cases the one, and in some the other of these times, has been
observed as the time of the lide ; and in this manner have arisen
such anomalies as have been mentioned." And again : I
" The persuasion that, in waters affected by tides, the water rises
while it runs one way, and falls while it runs the opposite way, though
wholly erroneous, is very general."
These, and other valuable remarks, showed me what indistinct or
erroneous ideas I had entertained ; and that many other seamen had"
-^ Philosophical Transactions, 1833, p. 148. t Ibid. 157. I Ibid.
APPENDIX. 279
been siinilarl}^ perplexed, I could have little doubt, having often
talked to experienced practical men on the subject. Probably the
expressions ' tide and half-tide,' ' tide and quarter-tide,' &c., con-
veyed more distinct ideas to their minds, than to mine : for to me
they were unsatisfactory, and although quite aware of their meaning,
I never liked them. From 1833, I and my companions on board
the Beagle paid more attention to the subject, and made obser-
vations in the manner suggested by Mr. Whewell, as often as our
other avocations allowed. It was, however, impossible to take interest
in the subject, and discover difficulties, facts irreconcileable to theory,
without trying to think how to account for them — unquaHfied even
as I knew myself to be for such a task.* Perhaps I was encouraged
to meditate by Mr. Whewell's concluding paragraph ; f and, sepa-
rated from assistance, I tried to reason my way out of the dilemma,
by the help of such few data as I could dwell upon vpith certaint}^
* Among the points which I could not establish in my own mind, by
appeal to facts, were — " the tides of the Atlantic are, at least in their
main features, of a derivative kind, and are propagated from south to
north." (p. 164.) "That the tide. wave travels from the Cape of Good
Hope to the bottom of the Gulf of Guinea, in something less than four
hours." (p. 167.) " That the tide-wave travels along this coast (American)
from north to south, employing about twelve hours in its motion from
Acapulco to the Strait of Magalhaens." (p. 194.) " From the compara-
tive narrowness of the passage to the north (of Australia), it is almost
certain that these tides must come from the southern side of the conti-
nent." (p. 200.) " The derivative tide which enters such oceans (North
and South Pacific) from the south-east, is diffused over so wide a space,
that its amount is also greatly reduced." (p. 217.) &c.
t " I cannot conclude this memoir without again expressing my entire
conviction of its very imperfect character. I should regret its publication,
if I supposed it likely that any intelligent person could consider it other-
wise than as an attempt to combine such information as we have, and to
point out the want and the use of more. I shall neither be surprised nor
mortified, if the lines which I have drawn shall turn out to be, in many in-
stances, widely erroneous : I offer them only as the simplest mode which
I can now discover of grouping the facts which we possess. The lines
which occupy the Atlantic, and those which are near the coasts of Eu-
rope, appear to have the greatest degree of probability. The tides on the
coasts of New Zealand and New Holland, have also a consistency which
makes them very probable. The Indian Ocean is less certain ; thougli
it is not easy to see how the course of the lines can be very widely diffe-
rent
280 APPExnix.
Some of the facts which seem to stand most in opposition to the
theory that deduces tides in the northern Atlantic from the move-
ment of a tide-wave originated in the great southern ocean are :
• — the comparative narrowoiess of the space between Africa and Ame-
rica ; with the certainty that the sea is neither uniformly nor exces-
sively deep in that space,* and the trifling rise of tide ; not only
upon either nearest shore (where it does not exceed four or five feet
at the utmost), but at Ascension Island, where the highest rise is not
two feet.f Secondly, the absence of any regular tide about the wide
estuary of the river Plata, the situation and shape of which seems so
well disposed for recei%ing an immense tide.i Thirdly, the flood-
tide moving towards the west and south along the coast of Brazil,
rent from that which we have taken. The course of these lines in the
Pacific appears to be altogether problematical ; and though those which
are drawn in the neighbourhood of the west coast of America connect
most of the best observations, they can hardly be considered as more than
conjecture : in the middle of the Pacific I have not even ventured to con-
jecture. Tt only remains to add, that 1 shall be most glad to profit by
every opportunity of improving this map, and will endeavour to em-
ploy for this pui-pose any information with which I may be supplied." —
pp. 234-5.
• Besides the ' Roccas', Fernando de Noronha, and St. Paul rocks,
various accounts have been received, from time to time, of shoals near the
equator, between the meridians of fifteen and twenty.four degrees west.
There can be no doubt, from the descriptions, that many alarms have been
caused in that neighbourhood by earthquakes; which are, to my appre-
hension, indications of no very great depth of water. In 1761, a small
sandy island was said to have been seen by Captain Bouvet, of Le Vail-
lant. This, if seen, has probably sunk down since. Krusenstern saw a
volcanic eruption thereabouts in 1806. In 1816, Captain Proudfoot, in
the ship Triton, fiom Calcutta to Gibraltar, passed over a bank, in lati-
tude 0° 32' S. and longitude 17" 46' \V. It appeared to extend in an east
and west direction three miles, and in a north and south direction one
mile. They sounded in twenty-three fathoms, brown sand ; but saw no
appearance of breakers.
t At St. Helena it is not three feet : while at Tristan d'Acunha there
is a rise of eight or nine feet under ordinary circumstances.
{ I have passed months in that river without being able to detect any
periodical rise of water, which I could attribute to tide ; though it is said,
that when the weather is very settled, some indications of a tide may be
perceived.
appi-:ndix. 281
from near Pernambuco to the vicinity of the river Plata ; and lastly^
the ahnost uniformity of the time of high \A'ater along that extent of
-the coast of Africa which reaches from near the Cape of Good Hope
to the neighbourhood of the Congo.
Against the supposition that a tide-wave travels along the west
coast of America, from north to south, are the facts — that the flood-
tide impinges upon Chiloe and the adjacent outer coast, from the
southward of west ; that it is high water at Cape Pillar and at Chiloe,
inclucUng the intermediate coast, almost at one time ; * that from
Valdivia to the Bay of Mexillones (differing eighteen degrees in lati-
tude), there is not an hour's difference in the time of high- water ;
that from Arica to Payta the times vary gradually as the coast
trends westward ; that from Panama to California, the times also
change gradually as the coast trends westward ; and that from forty
to sixty north, high water takes place at one time.
Having thus stated a few of the difficulties to be encountered by a
theory which supposes such important tide -waves to move in the di-
rection of a meridian, rather than in that of a parallel, I will venture
to bring forward the results of much anxious meditation on the
subject, trusting that they will be received by the reader — not as
assertions — not as conclusions to which assent is asked without a
reason for acquiescence being given — ^but as the veiy^ fallible opinion
of one indi\'idual, who is anxious to contribute a mite, however small,
towards the information of those for whom this work is more parti-
cularly vmtten — namely, seafaring men ; and who, if his ideas are
fallacious, will rejoice at their refutation by the voice of truth.
Resting in confidence upon the Nevrtonian theory — which assigns
as the primary causes of tides the attractions of the moon and sun —
I win make a few remarks, and then state some facts from which
to reason.
Some persons seem to view the tidal phenomena more in con-
nection with what would have happened had the globe been covered
with water, than with reference to what actually happens, now
that the oceans are nearly separated by tracts of land. They appear to
consider that the effects of the moon's attraction (leaving the sun's out
of the question at present, as it is similar though smaller) are felt
only in vertical hues ; and they do not allow for the lateral action of
* Within about half an hour; an irregularity easily accounted for, and
to which any one place is subject.
bb
282 APPENDIX.
the moon upon a body of water, by which any portion is attracted
towards her before she is vertically over it, as well as after she has
passed to the westward of the meridian of that portion.
But little attention appears to have been paid to a consideration
of the momentum acquired by any great body of water moved from
the position it M'ould occupy if undisturbed, and to the consequences
of that momentum, when the water returns from a temporary displace-
ment. And there seems to be a difficulty in altogether reconciling the
statement that " tides are diminished by diffusion,* with the manner
in which the great tides of the Northern Atlantic are supposed to
be caused — a supposition which is mainly dependent upon theprinciple
of " forced vibrations or oscillations. "f
In consequence of similar ideas, excited by the facts previously
mentioned, the following questions were inserted in the Geographical
Journal for 1836 : —
" It may appear presumption in a plain sailor attempting to oiFer
an idea or two on the difficult subject of ' Tides ;' yet, with the
utmost deference to those who are competent to reason upon the
subject, I will venture to ask whether the supposition of Atlantic
tides being principally caused by a great tide-wave coming from the
Southern Ocean, is not a little difficult to reconcile with the facts that
there is very little tide upon the coasts of Brazil, Ascension, and
Guinea, and that in the mouth of the great river Plata there is little
or no tide .'
" Can each ocean have its own tides, though affecting, and being
affected by the neighbouring waters ?
" Can the mass of an ocean have a tendency to move westward as
well as upward, after and towards the moon as she passes ? If so,
after the moon has passed, will not the mass of that ocean have an
easterly inclination to regain that equilibrium (with respect to the
earth alone) from which the moon disturbed it (sun's action not
here considered) ?
" In regaining its equilibrium, would not its owa momentum carry
it too far eastward ; and would not the moon's action be again
approaching ?
" Can one part of an ocean have a M'estward tendency, while another
part, which is wider or narrower, from east to west, has an eastward
• Whewell's Essay, p. 217.
+ Herscliel's Astronomy, Cab. Cyo. p. 334.
APPENDIX. 283
movement ? If so, many difficulties would vanish ; among them those
which were first mentioned, and those perplexing anomalies on the
south coast of New Holland." — (Jour. R. Geog. Soc. vol. vi. part II.
p. 336.)
It might have been concluded that these questions had scarcely-
been noticed, as I heard nothing on the subject, had I not lately read
the following remarks in a work pubhshed in 1837. Whether their
author ever saw the questions, I do not know ; but as his observations
bear strongly upon the subject, and are those of an eminent mathe-
matician, I quote them verbatim :—
" Suppose several high, narrow strips of land were now to encircle
the globe, passing through the opposite poles, and dividing the
earth's surface into several great, unequal oceans ; a separate tide
would be raised in each. When the tidal wave had reached the far-
thest shore of one of them, conceive the causes that produced it to
cease ; then the wave thus raised would recede to the opposite
shore, and continue to oscillate until destroyed by the friction of its
bed. But if instead of ceasing to act, the causes which produced
the tide were to re-appear at the opposite shore of the ocean, at the
very moment when the reflected tide had returned to the place of its
origin, then the second tide would act in augmentation of the first ;
and if this continued, tides of great height might be produced for
ages. The result might be, that the narrow ridge dividing the adja-
cent oceans would be broken through, and the tidal wave traverse a
broader tract than in the former ocean. Let us imagine the new
ocean to be just so much broader than the old, that the reflected tide
would return to the origin of the tidal movement half a tide later
than before ; then instead of those two super-imposed tides, we should
have a tide arising from the subtraction of one from the other. Tlie
alterations of the height of the tides on shores so circumstanced might
be very small, and this might again continue for ages, thus causing
beaches to be raised at very diiFerent elevations, without any real
alteration in the level, either of the sea or land." — (Babbage's Ninth
Bridgewater Treatise, pp. 248, 249.)
Additional data, and leisure to reflect upon them, have tended to
confirm the view taken previously to asking those questions in the
Geographical Journal ; but before stating this view more expUcitly,
it is necessary to lay facts before my readers, from which they may
judge for themselves.
bb2
284
APPENDIX.
In the greatest expanse of ocean, that which meets with only par-
tial interruption to free tidal movements — the zone, if it maj"- be so
called, near fifty-five degrees of south latitude — there Is high water at
opposite sides, and low water at opposite sides of the globe nearl}'^
at the same time.
At the eastern part of the Falkland Islands, exposed to the tide of
this zone, it is high water, or full sea, at about nine o'clock on the
day of new, or full moon, by Greenwich time ;* and on the southern
shore of Van Diemen's Land it is high-water at about ten. This is
not a point exactly opposite, it is true, but it is the nearest so at
which we have yet observed.
At each of tliese places the tide rises six hours and falls six hours,
alternately ; therefore when it is low water at one, it is also low water
at the other. There is no intermediate place in this zone, rather
distant from these points, at which I know of a tide observation
deserving confidence ; but those above-mentioned are certain, and
corroborate the Newtonian theory in a satisfactory manner.
This is, however, the only zone of ocean, which is at all able to
follow the law which would govern its undulations if the globe were
covered with water. In other zones (taking about ten degrees
in latitude as a zone) it is high water, generally speaking, at one
side of an ocean near the time that it is low on the other.
In oceans about ninety degrees wide, this happens very nearly ;
but as the width diminishes, so do the times of high water at each
side approach ; and as the viidth increases beyond ninetj' degrees, as
in the case of zones of the Pacific, the times of high water still
approach (in consequence of the tendency to high M'ater at opposite
points), and farther confirm the Newtonian theory.
For examples (on the day of full moon) : — In the Pacific, at Port
Henry, in 50° S. it is high water at 5h. at M'hich time it is near low
water at Auckland Island, where the time of high tide is 12h. 30m.
In this case, the interval between one high water, and the other on
the opposite side of the ocean, is 7h. 30m. or 4.30 ; and the ^vidth of
that ocean is nearly eight hours (measured in time.)
At Valdivia, in lat. 4C° S. it is high water at 3h. 30m. and at New
Zealand, on that parallel, at 9h. 50m. The space of ocean between
is seven hours nearly : the diflTerences are 6.20 and 5.40.
* Towhicli all tlio tinips are iiere reduced for easy comparison.
APPENDIX. 285
In 30° S. at Coquimbo, it is high water at '2h. and at Norfolk
Island it is high at about 9h. The intermediate space of ocean is
nearly eight hours wide.*
In 20° S., at Iquique, it is high water at Ih. 30m., and at New
Caledonia, in the same parallel, it is high water at Sh. lom. The
space between is about eight hours wide : the least diiference 4.15.
Near 10°, or 12°, at Callao, it is high water at about ten ; but
as on this parallel a multitude of islands spread across half tlie
Pacific, no comparison of times can be trusted.
On the equator — at the Galapagos Islands — it is high water at
8h. 20m. ; and at New Ireland it is high water at 3h. 00m. — a dif-
ference of seven hours nearly. The ocean is here eight hours ^\^[de ;
but at New Ireland there is only- one tide m tM'ent}'-four hours — an
anomaly to be considered presently.
The parallel of 10° N. is similar to that of the equator — however,
we may as well examine it. At the little Isle of Cocos, and at Nicoya,
on the main, it is high water at aljout 81i. ; and at the Philippine
Islands, in the same latitude, at 4h. ; the difference, eight hours, ia
not far from the meridian distance, which is about ten hours ; but the
Phihppines also feel the effects of catises which influence the tides
at New Ireland, and, generally, those of the Indian Archipelago.
In 20° N. at San Bias, it is high water at 3h ; and at Loo-choo,
the nearest know^l point of comparison at the other sic? o fthe ocean,
at lOh. The difference, 7 hours, is about an hour less than the
meridian distance. In 30° N. on the Coast of Cahfornia, it is high
water at 4h., and at Nangasaky, in Japan, in lat. 32° 44', at 11.12.
The difference, 7.12, is nearly half an hour less than the meridian
distance. In 40° N. it is high water at about 8h. on the American
coast, but for the opposite shore I have no data. In 50° N. it is high
water on Vancouver Island at 9h., and at the south extreme of Kam-
schatka it is said to be high water at about 6h. ; the difference, 9 or
3 hours, is anomalous — made so probably by a derivative tide.
Havmg examined the Pacific, let us proceed in a similar manner
with the Atlantic, and the Indian Ocean : —
In 40° S. off Blanco Bay, the time of high water is 9h. ; the
same as at the Falklands.
At Amsterdam Island, one authority says 6h., another I2h, for the
* A derivative tide (p. 28'J) may act here.
286
APPENDIX.
time of high water. Both cannot be right : but thinking the latter
correct, I have preferred it. In Bass Strait it is high water at about
ten. Between the two extremes there are thirteen hours, and between
the times of tide there are eleven, or thirteen hours. At Amsterdam
Island, high water is taken as two hours after that of Bass Strait,
but the difference of meridians is about four hours. The difference
between the high water of Amsterdam, and Blanco Bay, is nine hours,
and their difference of meridians is about nine hours.
In 30° S. it is high water on the African coast at two, and on the
American coast at six. There are about four hours difference of
meridian between them in that parallel.
In 20° S. it is high water at 3h. on the African shore, and 6h. on
the Brazilian ; the meridian distance is about three hours and three
quarters.
In 10° S. at 3h. 15m. on the east side and 7h. on the west: the
distance is about three hours and a quarter.
On the equator we have 4h. 30m. at the eastern limit, and nearly
8h. at the western ; the distance being about three hours and a half.
In 10° N. 7h. and lOh. the distance being three hours.
In 20° N. at Cape Blanco, at about Ih. ; and on the north coast
of San Domingo, nearly at 11 h. The interval is about 3.40 : but
there are interfering derivative tides, probably, as well as local pecu-
liarities, among the West-India Islands.
In 30° N. about 4h. on the east and Ih. 30m. on the west. The
distance is nearly five hours. This seems anomalous.
In 40° N. 3h. on the coast of Spain, and at about Ih. on the coast
of America. This is another anomaly : but easy of explanation.
In 50° N. it is high water at 4h. 36m., in the mouth of the chan-
nel ; and at lOh. 45m. on the coast of Newfoundland. Their meridian
distance is about 3.20.
On the west coasts of Ireland and Scotland, from 5h. to 6h. is the
hour of high water ; on the coast of Labrador, it is from lOh. to
llh., in the same parallels. The meridian distances are from three
to four hours : but as we approach the parallel of 60° N. the North
Sea and Davis Strait open, which probably affect the tide between
Ireland and Labrador.
The Indian Ocean appears to have high water on all sides at once,
though not in the central parts at the same time. Thus, it is liigh
water at the north-west extremity of Australia ; on the coast of
1
^ .-
O
"^"Diiahfid oy Hezay Ccuijuro.].'^ Great Maxtbororu^ Soresi.. 1339.
APPENDIX. 287
Java ; on that of Sumatra ; at Ceylon ; at the Laccadiva Islands ;
at the Seychelles ; on the coast of Madagascar ; and at Amsterdam
Island, at twelve : but at the Chagos Islands and Mauritius it is
high water at about nine, and at the Keeling Isles about eleven.
Here, then, it would seem that there is cause for much perplexity.
Having now stated the principal facts which occur to my mind, I
will mention the conclusions drawn from them, and then attempt to
explain the anomalies.
Let E G (fig. 1.) represent a section of our globe, of which A B
C D is supposed to be land, and E F G H water. Let H M show
the direction in which the moon's attraction would operate. The
effect of her attraction, according to Newton's demonstration, would
be to raise the water at F by positive attraction of the water, and at
H by attracting the earth more than the water : — let the dotted line
represent the consequent figure of the ocean.
In fig. 2, let the ocean be supposed 90° or six hours wide ; let the
moon act in the direction M F ; and let the dotted line represent the
altered position of the water when moved out of its natural position
(with respect to the earth) by the moon's attraction.
Again, in fig. 3, suppose the moon acting in the line M K, and
the dotted line representing the figure taken in that case by the
ocean.
It will occur to the reader that but little water can rise at F
and H (fig. 1), at F (fig. 2), or at K (fig. 3), unless water falls or
sinks, at E and G (fig. 1), G (fig. 2), F and G (fig. 3). because
water is but slightly compressible, except under extraordinary pressure,
and because it is incapable of being stretched ; therefore, if at any
place the sea is raised above its natural level, the excess must be
supplied by a sinking taking place elsewhere. There cannot be a
void space left under the sea between the water and its bed ; and
there is no lateral movement of the particles at the surface only
of the ocean sufficient to cause high tides on either shore : —
therefore the conclusion may be drawTi, that the whole mass librates
or oscillates.
By librating I mean such a movement as that which a large jelly
would have, if its upper part were pushed on one side,, and then
allo-wed to vibrate while the base remained fixed : and by oscillating
I mean a movement like that of water in a basin, after the basin is
gently tilted and let down again : and that such a motion would be
288 APl'ENDIX.
imperceptible, except l)y its effects, there can be little doubt after
reflecting how small a lateral movement of an ocean would cause
immense commotion at its boundary, in consequence of the slight
elasticity of water, when free to move.
Now let the moon be supposed to move from M in fig. 2 to M in
fig. 3. Tlie highest point of the water would then be transferred
from F to K, during which transfer the water must fall at F and
rise at G : and so of other points. In this manner when the moon
causes a tide by her direct attraction, a wave or swelling, whose
crest is above the natural level of the sea, moves westward, until
it is stopped by a barrier of land. But when it recedes from that
barrier, how is the excess of the wave above the height of the sea
(when uninfluenced by the moon) transferred to the other side of
the same ocean ? There is no return wave : if there were, islands
intermediate would have an ebb, and a flood tide, every six hours ;
four floods in twenty-four hours ; but they have, on the contrary,
six hour tides, alternate ebb and flow, twice in twenty-four hours,
like those of the shores of continents, though generally smaller in
amount. Water cannot rise in one place unless it falls in another
■^it does fall on one side of an ocean, while it rises on the other
— how then is the fluid transferred .'' There is only one way —
which is by the mass oscillating. In the former case when the
moon passed over, it was a libratory movement, in this latter it is an
oscillation.
If it is shoviTi, as I believe, that the ocean oscillates, we see that
there are two principal causes of tides — one the direct raising of
water by the moon : and the other, oscillation excited by that tem-
porary derangement of the natural level of the sea.
From the preceding facts and deductions combined with the com-
monly received laws of fluids and gravitation, the following conclu-
sions may be drawn : —
1 . Every large body of water is affected by the attraction of the
moon, and sun, and has tides caused by their action.
2. Bodies of water are not only raised, or accumulated, vertically,
by the attraction of the moon and sun ; but they are also drawn
laterally by them.
3. When a large body of water is prevented from continuing a
horizontal movement, it rises until whatever momentum it had
acquired ceases ; and then it sinks gradually.
APPENDIX. 289
4. The momentum acquired by a body of water in thus sinking
back to the position it should occupy, with reference to the earth's
attraction only, carries it beyond that position to one from which it
has a tendency to recoil again — and so to keep up an oscillation
until brought to rest by the friction of its bed. (Attraction of the
moon and sun not considered.)
5. The recurring influences of the moon and sun are checks on
these oscillations, and prevent their taking place more than once
between each separate raising of the water in consequence of their
attractions.
6. Different zones (or widths measured by latitude) of an ocean,
may move differently, each having waves and oscillations at times
differing from those of an adjoining zone, in consequence of one
having more or less longitude, depth, or freedom from obstacles than
another.
7. Original waves and oscillations combine with, and modify one
another, according to their relative magnitude, momentum, and
direction.
8. The natural tendency of tide-waves, and oceanic librations, is
from east to west ; and of oscillations, from west to east, and east
to west also : but derivative waves or oscillations move in various
directions according to primary impulse, and local configuration of
the bed of rn ocean.
Conformably to these conclusions, I will now try to explain a few
of the more remarkable anomalies of tides, in various parts of the
world : taking it for granted that the reader is acquainted vfith
existing works on the subject, especially those of Mr. Whewell,*
and the brief but comprehensive and explanatory view taken by Sir
J. Herschel in his treatise on astronomy. •}■
I mentioned that between Callao and the western shores of the
Pacific, in the parallel of about 12° south, no comparison of times
can be trusted ? Why not ? may be asked. Four or five hours west
of Callao, there is a multitude of islands which checks the libratiou of
the ocean. Another tide wave forms westward of them, on a small
scale, and it is by this second tide, altered by derivative tides
* Published in the Philosophical Transactions.
+ Cabinet Cyclopaedia. A Treatise on Astronomy, chap, xi., pp. 334,
5, 6, 7, 8, 9.
290 APPENDIX.
from each side, that the western portion of this zone is affected.
Otaheite is thus at the edge, or Umit, of four tides — one east, ano-
ther west, a third to the north, and a fourth to the south, and as
these tides are moving with different impulses, and at different
times, it is not at all surprising that they should almost neutralize
each other at Otaheite. As we go west or east of that island, we
find the tides augmenting gradually in height. At the Friendly
Islands they rise five feet, and at the Gambier Islands three feet.
Respecting the twelve hour tide at New Ireland, and at other
places in the Indian archipelago — appeal to facts, so far as we can
trace the tides at present, tends to confirm the explanation of Sir
Isaac Newton, which consisted in supposing that such tides are com-
pounded of two tides, which arrive by different paths, one six hours
later than the other. " When the moon is in the equator, the
morning and evening tides of each component tide arc equal, and
the tides obhterate each other by interference, which takes place
about the equinoxes. At other periods the higher tides of each com-
ponent daily pair, are compounded into a tide which takes place at
the intermediate time, that is, once a day ; and this time will be
after noon or before, according to the time of year." — Whewell, in
Phil. Trans. 1833, p. 224.
At New Ireland, the time of high water is about 3 ; but at New
Caledonia it is 9. Again, at the north-west coast of Australia, it is
12 ; and at the eastern approach to Torres Strait, 10 : at the Philip-
pine Islands it is 4 ; and at Loo Choo, 10. Now here are various
times of tide, and different impulses, crowded together into a com-
paratively small space, sufficient to perplex any theorist of the pre-
sent day. Owing to local configurations, and a variety of inci-
dental circumstances, we find every kind of tide in this region, in
a space sixty degrees square. Although tidal impulses, waves,
and resulting currents are checked and altered by the broken land
of the Indian archipelago, they cannot be suddenly destroyed, or
prevented from influencing each other, while communications, more
or less open, exist in so many directions.
At the Sandwich Islands there is said to be very little tide. As it
is high water in 40° N., on the American coast, at 8 ; at which time
it is also high water at the Galapagos, it appears that the two
zones of the ocean — one about the equator, and the other near 40° N.
— have liigh water, in the mericUan of the Sandwich Islands, at two
APPENDIX. 291
very different times ; and that the high water of the northern zone
will have passed that meridian about three hours before the equato-
torial wave. Impulses derived from them might succeed one
another at an intermediate point, such as the Sandwich Islands.
Besides which, there is the tide of their own zone to be considered ;
in consequence of which alone it might be high water at about 6 :
thus these islands are so situated as to receive at least three tides —
one primary and two derivative — whose respective times of high water
are 1, 6, and 10, a succession which may well be supposed to neu-
tralise any ebb, and maintain the water thereabout above its natural
level, independent of tide.
About the Strait of Magalhaens, and along the eastern coast of
Patagonia, there are very high tides ; apparently complicated, but
perhaps less so than is usually beheved.
A powerful tide arrives at the Falklands, and at the east end of
Staten Land, at about 9 ; which is opposed by another powerful
tide arriving from the west. The union of these two accumulates
the water between Tierra del Fuego and the Falldands, and on the
east coast of Patagonia.
Within the Strait of Magalhaens, westward of the Second Nar-
row, it is high water at about 4.40, and the tide rises six feet :
but eastward of the First Narrow it is high at 1.30, and the tide rises
forty feet.
Now, as in one case the sea only rises three feet, and in the other
twenty, above its mean level, every one would expect to find a rush
of water through the Narrows, from the high sea to the low, and
such is the fact. From ten to four the water runs westward with
great velocity, and from four till ten it rushes eastward. During the
first interval, from ten to four, the eastern body of water, between
Tierra del Fuego and the Falldands, is above the mean level ; and
during the latter interval, from four till ten, it is below the mean
level — that which it would have if there were no tides.
From 50° S. to near Blanco Bay in 40° S. the tide-wave certainly
travels along the coast to the north ; but this is a derivative from the
meeting of tides above-mentioned, combined with the primary tides
on the coast traversed. In this way principally may we account
for a high tide in one place on this coast, and a low one on another
(similarly situated, though differing in latitude) ; and, again, a high
tide at another place. During the twenty-four hours that the deri-
292
Al'PKNDIX.
vative wave occupies in moving from Cape Virgins to the Colorado, it
alternately augments or diminishes two floods and two ebbs of the
great ocean. Perhaps, indeed, it reaches farther and affects the water
about the Plata.
The extraordinary ' races' about the Peninsula of San Jose, and
the apparent absence of currents about the straight coast extending
eastward from Blanco Bay, may be attributed to conflicting tidal im-
pulses.
Why there should be no tide in the River Plata, situated and
shaped as it is, seems extraordinary ; but as it is high water at 6h. on
the coast of Brazil, and at Sh. about Blanco Bay; and as a derivative
wave from this neighbourhood must move eastward and northward,
there is a filling up, from the southward, as an ebbing takes place in
consequence of a regular six-hour tide ; and vice versa.
Tristan d'Acunha has a considerable rise of tide, about eight feet,
though Ascension and St. Helena have only about two feet. The
former place is aff'ected by a great southern tide ; the two latter are
influenced by the comparatively small tide which traverses the space
between Africa and Brazil.
In the West Indies there are varieties of tides, caused by primary
and derivative impulses, exceedingly modified by local circumstances :
none however are large, while some are as small as those of Ota-
lieite — scarcely a foot at the utmost. There are places also in that
archipelago where there is only one tide in twenty-four hours. In
considering the West-India tides, those of the east coast of North
America, and the exceedingly high ones of Fundy Bay, the gulf stream
ought not to be overlooked, as it may aff'ect the tides on the coasts
it traverses even more than those on the Patagonian coast are altered
by the current driven along it from near Tierra del Fuego.
I may here remark that Mr. WheweU was misled by inaccurate data
respecting several times of high water, of material consequence to his
cotidal lines. At the Western Islands he had 1|^ and 2j, where there
ought to have been 4}, according to Mendoza Rios' tables, confirmed
by the Beagle's observations ; at Madeira he used l^, the time of the
stream changing, instead of 4, the time of high water ; at the Cape
Verde Islands he took the time of low tide, instead of that of high
water ; his 5h. line is near Ascension, whei'e the time of high water
is 6.20 ; and his 2h. line is close to St. Helena, where the time is
about five. The deficiency of data is so great, owing to mistaking
APPKNDIX. 298
the turn of stream for the time of high water, and registering
or calculating observations erroneously, that little dependence can be
placed in at least one-third of those hitherto recorded. On this
account chiefly, though partly to simplify the question, I have not
hoped to be much nearer the mark than half an hour in this dis-
cussion, discarding fractions as much as possible, and attempting
only to avoid errors of material consequence.
Looking at the Atlantic, as represented on a globe, we see that
Newfoundland and the adjacent coasts are so placed as to receive
tidal impulses from the Arctic Sea, North Atlantic Ocean, the
tropical part of the North Atlantic and the gulf stream : besides
which, no doubt, a derivative from the equatorial zone is felt there.
It is high water at the east side of the Atlantic, from the
Canary Islands to Scotland, within an hour or two of the same time,
on the salient points of the coast, namely, at about 4h. ; and if the
opposite coast were straight, like that of Chile, and uninfluenced by
derivative tides or by currents, we might expect that it would be high
water there at about 7h., allowing that the tide-wave moved as it is
found to do generally. But it is high water at about Ih., from
30° to 40,° the times increasing northward from 40° N. to the Bay
of Fundy, and also increasing southward from 50° N. to that bay,
where, as every sailor knows, the tides rise higher than in any
other part of the world. Tliis sequence of times, each ending in
about 43° N., the adjacent gulf stream, (an immense river in the
ocean), and an accumulation of water in that corner higher than is
known any where else, show that we cannot there expect to find data
for tidal niles. In that quarter is evidently a marked exception,
caused by the conflux of at least two primary tides, two derivatives,
and a poweiful current, aided by the peculiar configuration of the
land.
In the Mediterranean it is supposed by many persons that there is
no ebb and flow ; but Captain Smyth, who surveyed so much of its
shores, informs me that he found a tide, small certainly and appa-
rently not governed by the moon, but regular. I have myself noticed
a small rise and fall there ; and the cun-ent, caused by tide, in the
Faro of Messina, is well known.
As the moon passes over the Indian Ocean, the natural eff^ect of
her attraction must be to accumulate the waters, and draw the wave
so caused after her, as in other places ; but while that ocean is obey-
294 AFPliXDIX.
ing her power, and the wave is travelling toward the west, another
wave is approaching from the Pacific — a wave which has been retarded
in its passage— and its crest passes through the Indian archipelago,
while the water would otherwise be falling at the western part of
Torres Strait. At the same time, a derivative* wave moving north-
ward along the west Australian coast, combines vdth the Pacific wave
to raise a high tide about the north-west coast of Australia, where,
if it were not for these auxiharies, there would be low water at that
time. Six hours afterguards, one body has ebbed toward the
Pacific — the other southward, toward the then comparatively low
ocean, south of Australia, and what — if Torres Straits were blocked
up ; and the water prevented from falling away toward the south —
would be a high tide, is, in fact, low water. The tides in the two
northern bays are derivatives, and move northward.
High water taking place at one time — within an hour — all along
the east coast of Africa, shows that the rise of sea, or tide-wave,
there moves westward or eastward, and the times of high water at
the islands are farther confirmations ; for the wave is at Chagos and
at the Mauritius three or four hours before it is high water on the
African coast. The KeeUng time shows that there the water rises
longer, in consequence of that part of the ocean being affected by
the advancing swell of the Pacific.
The only remaining particular case which I now recollect is that
of the south coast of Australia — from King George Sound to Spencer
Gulf — a large space of sea, in which there is very little rise of tide —
and even that little very irregular.
As the high water moves westward from the meridians of that
great bay, a tide moves southward from the Indian archipelago,
where it is high water just as it should be low in the bay men-
tioned : hence there is a filling, or flowing, from one wave, while an-
other is retreating. In this wide expanse, affected by derivative tides
from three adjoining oceans, we cannot but expect irregularities ; either
very high tides, caused by combination — or httle or no tide, in conse-
quence of mutual destruction — one tide ebbing from, whUe another is
flowing toward the same place.
Throughout these remarks I have intentionally omitted to say
much of the sun's action, because, though very inferior, it is simi-
• Derived from a great southern wave passing westward.
APPENDIX. 295
lar to that of the moon. Perhaps the Otaheite tide may be purely-
solar; this, however, is not at all certain.
It appears to me probable, that many important currents are caused
by the tidal libration or oscillation of the sea. As the earth turns
only one way, the moon is continually puUing, as it were, in one
direction, and to this cause, I think, most of the greater currents
may be traced. Wind, evaporation, and the variable weight of the
atmosphere may each have a share in moving the waters horizontally ;
but there are many facts which lead to a conclusion that the moon
and sun are principal agents in causing currents.*
Having alluded to the effect of atmospheric pressure on the ocean,
I will take this opportunity of mentioning that the chief cause of
water rising on the shore before hurricanes, or gales of wind, may
be the lightened pressure on the surface of the sea, indicated by the
mercury being low in a barometer. This is very remarkable at the
Mauritius and in the river Plata, at both which places the water
rises unusually before a storm, while at the same time the mercury
falls. As the column rises, so the water falls again. I have in-
stanced those places as being well known, and alFected very little by
tide : but the fact has been observed by me in many places during
the Beagle's voyage, and I have besides collected the testimony of
others respecting it.
These causes may materially affect the height of tides and the
strength of currents. In the wide but shallow Plata, the depth of
water and nature of current varies in extraordinary accordance with
the barometer.
Another cause of the water rising before a high wind, or storm,
as well as of a ground swell, of rollers, or of that disturbed tumul-
tuous heaving of the sea, sometimes observed while there is little or
no wind at the place, may be the action of wind on a remote part
of that sea ; an action, or pressure, which is rapidly transmitted,
through a fluid but slightly elastic, to regions at a distance.
I have collected many instances of rollers, or a heavy swell, or a
confused ground swell being felt at places, where not only there was
no wind at the time, but to which the wind that caused the move-
• A continued stream may be produced by a succession of impulses,
as a rotatory system of waves may " be kept in constant circulation by
impulses received from the adjacent tides." — See Whewell in Phil.
Trans. 1836, p. 299.
296 APPENDIX.
ments of water never reached, lliat they were caused by %nnd I
proved by the logs of ships, which were in the respective gales at
the time their eiFects on the sea were thus felt at a great distance.
ITie places to wliich I particularly allude are the Cape "\"erde Islands,
Ascension, St. Helena, Tristan d'Acunha, Cape Frio, Tierra del
Fuego, Chiloe, the coast of Chile, the Galapagos Islands, Otaheite,
the Keehng Islands, Mauritius, and the Cape of Good Hope.
Waves, or rollers, caused by earthquakes, or volcanic eruptions,
are, of course, unconnected with wind or atmospheric pressure.
But in accounting for currents, as occasioned in some if not many
instances by tidal pressure, or a succession of tidal impulses, we
must not overlook the well known power of wind in giving horizon-
tal motion to water, as well as in elevating or depressing it.
Wind blowing almost always in one direction is knowTi to com-
municate a movement to waters, and it is remarkable that the gene-
ral movements of the North Pacific as well as the North Atlantic
are from west by the north to east, or, as a sailor would say, ' with
the sun ;' while in the southern oceans. Pacific, Atlantic, and Indian,
they are generally ' against the sun,' or from west to east by the
south — both corresponding to the general turn of the winds in the
respective hemispheres. The Chile current after coasting Peru,
presen'es a temperatiu-e of about 60° up to the Galapagos, and there
it meets a warm stream out of the Gulf of Panama, at a tempera-
ture of about 80°. The two unite together and turn westward
along the equatorial zone. There is a remarkable exception on the
east coast of Patagonia, where the current sets northward, owing,
probably to tides.
I cannot end this imperfect attempt to sketch out some of the
movements of ocean, without reminding young readers to whom
the subject may not be so familiar as it is to others, that there may
be circidations of water in a vertical direction, or in a plane inclined
to the horizon, as weU as horizontally : and that bodies of water
differing in temperature, as well as in chemical composition, do not
hastily blend together. Their reluctance to mix is observable at sea,
when we sail out of one current, or body of water, into another —
differing perhaps in temperature, chemical composition, and colour.
At the meeting, or edge, of such bodies there is usucJly a well
defined line, often considerable ripplings, which indicate some degree
of mutual horizontal pressure — as of separate masses.
APPENDIX. 207
At the mouths of hvrge rivers it sometimes happens that salt water
is actualty running up the river, underneath a stream of fresh water
which still continues to run down. This I have witnessed in the
river Santa Cruz. Of course intermixture takes place gradually,
though by slow degrees.
The height of waves may be here mentioned, with reference to
rollers or other undulations of water however caused. Large waves
are seldom seen except where the sea is deep and extensive. The
highest I have ever -witnessed myself were not less than sixty feet
in height, reckoning from the hollow between, perpendicularly to
the level of two adjacent waves : but from twenty to thirty feet is a
common height in the open ocean during a storm.
I am quite aware of, and have long been amused by the assertion
of some persons, whose good fortune it has been not to witness
really large waves — that the sea never rises above twelve or fifteen
feet — or, that no wave exceeds thirty feet in height, reckoning in
a vertical line from the level of the hollow to that of the crest.
In H. M. S. Thetis, during an unusually heavy gale of wind in the
Atlantic, not far from the Bay of Biscay, while between two waves,
her storm try-sails were totally becalmed, the crest of each wave
being above the level of the centre of her main-yard, when she was
upright between the two seas. Her main-yard was sLxty feet from
the water-line. I was standing near her tafFrail, holding by a rope.
I never saw such seas before, and have never seen any equal to
them since, either off Cape Horn or the Cape of Good Hope.
Calculations of tides, applicable to the method of following- out New-
ton's general principles, adopted by Mr. Whewell and most persons
whose opinions on this subject all men respect — are equally applicable
to the view here taken. In either case the time of high water, and rise
of tide on a certain day, is ascertained at a given place exjierimentally :
and as the causes of that tide are the moon and the sun ; changes in
their position with respect to the earth will operate changes in the tides,
which, as to time and quantity, will depend upon the above data, and
the positions of earth, moon, and sun.
The variation of tide is what we liave to deal with in ordinary calcu-
lation, not the original movement.
c c
^98 APrENBIX
No. 48.
Previous to sailing from England in 1831, the Beagle was fitted
with the permanent lightning conductors invented by Mr. Wm. Snow
Harris, F.R.S.
During the five years occupied in her voyage she was frequently
exposed to lightning, but never received the sHghtest damage,
although supposed to have been struck by it on at least two occa-
sions, when — at the instant of a vivid flash of Ughtning, accompa-
nied by a crashing peal of thunder — a hissing sound was heard on
the masts ; and a strange, though very slightly tremulous, motion in
the ship indicated that something unusual had happened.
The Beagle's masts so fitted, answered weU during the five years'
voyage above-mentioned, and are stiU in use on board the same ves-
sel, on foreign service.
Even in such small spars as her royal masts and flying jib-
boom, the plates of copper held their places firmly, and increased
rather than diminished their strength.
No objection which appears to me valid, has yet been raised against
them ; and were I allowed to choose between having masts so fitted
and the contrary, I should not have the slightest hesitation in decid-
ing on those with Mr. Harris's conductors.
Whether they might be farther improved, as to position and other
details, is for their ingenious inventor to consider and determine. He
has already devoted so many years of valuable time and attention to
the very important subject of defending ships against the stroke of
electricity ; and has succeeded so well for the benefit of others — at
great inconvenience and expense to himself — that it is earnestly to
be hoped that the Government, on behalf of this great maritime
country, will, at the least, mdemnify him for time employed and pri-
vate funds expended in n pubHc service of so useful and necessary a
character.
No. 49.
MEMOEANDUM OF SOME OF THE FRESH PROVISIONS, PROCUREn FOR
THE beagle's crew, BETWEEN 1831 AND 1835.
Many other animals and birds were shot at various places (be-
sides those enumerated in this list), by which every one on board
APPENDIX.
299
profited in turn. Fish were caught frequently, either with nets or
lines, sometimes with both ; so that, except in long passages, the crew
of the Beagle were seldom many weeks without a supply of fresh
and wholesome food; while the provisions carried on hoard were
always of the best quality that could be procured.
Number and Weight of the Animals killed with two
Rifles only.
Date.
Animals.
By WHOM Shot.
Weight.
1832.
Blanco Bay, E
ASTERN Patagonia.
Sept. 1 1
One cavia
H. Fuller . .
*22 lbs.
- 12
Three deer . .
Ditto
122
— 15
One cavia
A.B.Bute
*19
— 17
Two doer
Mr. Stokes
81-
Oct. 16
Four deer
H. Fuller ..
167
1833.
August 25
Two deer
H. Fuller..
96
..
One deer
Mr. Stokes
*62
— 30
Two deer
H. Fuller..
79
— -
Two cavias . .
Ditto ..
35
, . ,
One deer
A.B.Bute
43
— 31
Ditto
Mr. Bynoe
45
Sept. 1
Ditto
Mr. Stokes
39
, .
Ditto
H. Fuller..
46
—, „ .
One fawn
Ditto ,.
12
fc-,
Four cavias . .
Ditto . .
73
— 3
One cavia
Capt. FitzRoy ..
21
One deer
]\f r. Stokes
48
— 4
Three cavias .
H. Fuller..
52
Port Desire, Eastern Patagonia.
Dec. 28
Oneguanaco.. H. Fuller ..
164
J 834.
Santa Cruz, Eastern Patagonia.
April 24
One guanaco .
H. Fuller..
130
— 30
Two guauacoes
Ditto ..
220
May 8
One guanaco .
Mr. Bynoe
150
J
Ditto
H. Fuller..
143
— 9
Ditto
Mr. Bynoe
166
_ 11
Ditto
Ditto ..
139
2,174 lbs.
* The weight of the whole animal. The rest are as served out to the
ship's company,
c c 2
300
APPENDIX.
Fresh Provisions purchased in the Pacific and Indian Oceans, for the
use of the Crew of H.M.S. Beagle.
Charles Island, Galapagos.
Date.
Articles.
Dlrs.
Rts.
1835.
Sept. 25
_ 26
1 Pi? ■] r
]^\^ > 269 lbs <
1 Pig f
3 Pigs J 1.
13 Barrels Potatoes
8 Pumpkins . .
TOTAI-
4
4
4
7
26
1
4
6
47
2
I
Otaheite.
16th to 28tli November 1 835 :— Dlrs. Rls. Mils.
706 II). Fresh Beef 35 1
4 Barrels Potatoes, 3 dlrs. each .. .. 12
3 Pigs, 5 dlrs. each 16
25 Heads of Taro Root 2 4
Dlrs. 64 4 1
25th November 1835 :—
Fresh Beef 20 lb. 1 dlr.
Ditto Pork .. 15 1b. 1 dlr.
Sweet Potatoes, 3 dollars per barrel.
New Zealand.
22d Dec. 1835 to 1st Jan. 1836 :—
10 Pigs, weighing 840 lbs., at 2Jrf. per lb. .. .£8 15
8 cwt. Potatoes, at 3s per cwt • . . . 14
£9 19
£9 195. equal to 49 dlrs. 6 rls.
22d December 1835 :— In the Bay of Islands.
Current Prices : — Pork, 2|rf. per lb.
Potatoes, OS. per cwt.
Comed Pork, 4irf. per lb.
Beef, when procured, 2irf. per lb.
Keeling Klands.
12th April 1836:—
26 Turtle, at 4i. 4rf. each i:5 12 8
2 large Pigs 200
.£7 12 8
In payment— 500 lbs. Bread at 2^(7. ..£5 4 2
Cash 2 8 G
7 12 8
AFEENUIX.
301
No. 50.
A few Observations on the Temperature of the Sea in latitude
27° 30' S. and longitude 41° E. ; on the loth May 183G.— (Six's
self-registering Thermometer, Fahrenheit's Scale, used.)
At the surface
, ^
75,6
At 200 fathoms
below
58",5
At 5
fathoms
below
74,5
300
• •
55,5
8
74,2
400
• •
52,5
18
74,0
420
..
52,0
20
74,0
28
73,0
A few repeated •
—
40
72,5
At 5 fathoms
below
74,4
48
71,0
20
74,0
50
70,0
48
71,0
75
68,0
50
• ■
70,0
100
64,5
100
• •
64,5
In April 1836, at the Keeling Islands in the Indian Ocean (lat.
12° S.), the temperature at the bottom, in 363 fathoms, was 45°
(very carefully observed).
No. 51.
TABLE OF REMARKABLE HEIGHTS VISIBLE FROM A SHIP.
The heights given in this table were ascertained by angular mca>
surement : they are on the coasts of South America, the Falldand
Islands, and the Galapagos.
Summits. Feet.
Abingdon Island .......... 1,950
Acari Mount 1 ,650
Aconcagua 23,200
Ahuja Point, Height near .. 1,000
Albemarle Island, S.W. summit 4,700
Albemarle Island, S.E. ditto 3,720
Albemarle Island, Middle ditto 3,780
Albemarle Island, North ditto 3,500
Albemarle Island, over Cape
Berkeley 2,360
Alexander Mount 1,960
Amatape Mountain 3,270
Summits. Feet.
Animas Las, Height south of 1,800
Aymond Mount 1,000
Banks Hill, Good Success Bay 1 ,400
Bell Mount (Tierra del Fuego) 2,600
Benson Mount 1,780
Bofjueron Mount 3,000
BufaderoHill 1,620
Burney Mount 5,800
Callao, Height near 3,000
Campana Mount 3,450
332
APPENDIX.
Summits. Feet.
Ciirrcta Mount 1,430
Can- Hill 2,500
Carrasco Mount 5,520
Carrasco Heights 3,000
Carrisal, Herradura de, Height
near 3,050
Castro Hill (Peru) 1,160
Chala Mount 3,7 10
Chiiueral, Height north of .. 1,100
Charles Island, Saddle Hill.. 1,780
Chatham Island, west summit 1,550
Chathamlsland, middle summit 1,210
Chatham Island, south summit 1,550
Chilca, Port, height over .. 1,320
Chileno Point 1,640
CliffCoveHill 1,550
Cobija Range 3,330
Cocotue Head 1,500
Coles Point, height near 2,970
Cone, Port San Andres 1,600
Corcovado, Rio de Janeiro . . 2,340
Corcovado (Chiloe) 7,510
Cruz, Mount 2,260
Cucao Heights 1 ,800
Culibras Cove, height near.. 2,390
Curauma Head 1,830
Dark Hill 2150
Darwin Mount (Tierra del
Fuego) 6,800
Darwin INIount (Peru) 5,800
Davis Mount J ,420
Division Mount 1 ,830
Dripstone (Galajjagos) 1,500
Duende Summit 2,580
Eten, Height inshore, near.. 2,450
Galera Range, over Point
Falsa 1,550
Gallan, San, Island 1,130
Garita Hill 3 yoO
Gobernador Hill 1,020
Summits. Feet.
Gorda Point 2,520
Grande Point 1,570
Graves Mount 1 ,438
Haddington Mount 3,130
Herradura Hill (Coquimbo).. 1,000
Herradura, South distant hill 2,450
Huacho, Peak 4,220
Huanaquero Hill 1,850
Iluanchaco Mount 3,450
Iluayteea Grande 1,000
Islay Mount 3,340
Isquiliac Mount 3,000
James Island (Galapagos),
summit 1,700
Jaron Mountain 3,990
Juan Fernandes, Yungue.... 3,000
Juan Soldado , 3,900
KaterPeak 1,750
Leehuza Mount 1,300
Limari Range 2,150
Lobo Height, south of Victor 3,380
Lobo Point, Height over 3,090
Lomas Range, over San An-
tonio 2,960
Lorenzo, San 1,050
Luis, San, range near Cape
Quedal 2,400
Main Mount 2,060
Malacuen 3,000
Mamilla Height 4,020
Manzano Hill 1,550
Maria, Dona, Table of .... 2,160
Matalqui Heights 1,500
Matamores, Height near ... . 2,450
IVFaule, Heights near 1,300
Maytencillo Range 3,900
Meilersh Height 3,560
Mexillones Height 2,650
Midhurst Island 1 ,760
AITENDIX.
303
Summits. Feet.
Rlilagro, east liei-lit 2,400
JMilagro, south height 3,150
IMincliinmadom 8,000
Mitford Head 1,220
Mocha Island 1,240
Mollendo Peak 3,090
Mongon Mount 3,900
Monument Peak 2,850
Moore's Monument . 3,400
Moreno IMount 4,160
Nai'borough Island (Galapa-
gos) .- 3,720
Nasca Point 1,020
NeukeMount 1,800
Obispo, Height near 2,850
Oyarvide Mount 5,800
Osorno Mountain 7, -550
Pabellon, Pico 1,040
Payta, Silla de 1,300
Paul, St., Dome of 2,280
Paz Islet 1,180
Pedro, San 3,200
Peje Peurao, Point 1,900
Philip Mount (Chonos) 2,760
Philip, St., Mount 1,31
Pisagua, Height north of . • 3,220
Plata Point 1,670
Pond Mount 2,500
Pyramid Hill 2,500
Quilan Ridge 1,180
Quillota Bell 6,200
Quemado Mount 2,070
Summits. Feet.
Refuge Peak (Ghonos) 3,460
Rugged Peak 2,840
SamaHill 3,890
Sarmiento Mount 6,910
SerenaHill 1,660
Silla Hill (Pichidanque) .... 2,000
Simon Mount 1,600
Skyring Mount 2,200
Skyring Peak (Chonos) 2,620
Solar, Height near 3,420
Sulivan Mount (Peru) 5,000
Sulivan Peaks (Chonos) 4,350
Stokes Mount (Peru) 4,000
Sugar Loaf, (Rio de Janeiro) 1,270
Sugar Loaf (Galapagos) .... 1,200
Sugar Loaf (Chonos) 1,840
Talinay Mount 2,300
Tarn Mount 2,850
Tarapaca Mount 5,780
Tres Monies, Cape 2,000
Tres Puntas, Cape 2,000
Twenty-six degree Range
2,200
Raper Cape
Rees Point, range near
2,000
3,500
Usborne Mountains (Peru) .. 4,000
Usborne Mount (Falklands) . . 1,630
Valparaiso, Heights over.... 1,480
Valparaiso, Signal Post hill 1,070
Ventana Mountain 3,350
Villarica Mountain 16,000
Weddell Mount 1,160
Wickham Heights (in the Falk-
lands) 1,700
Wickham IMount (Peru) .... 4,010
Williams Island 2,530
Wilson Mount 8,060
Yanteles Mount 8,030
Note. — The heights are given only to the nearest ten feet above the
mean level of the sea; but they were calculated to the utmost degree of
accuracy that was attainable.
304 APPENDIX.
No. 52.
In pp. 228-9 of vol. ii, it is stated, "In 1501-2 Americus Vcspucius,
then employed by the King of Portugal, sailed six hundred leagues
south, and one hundred and fifty leagues west, from Cape San Agos-
tinho (lat. 8° 20' S.) along the coast of a country then named Terra
Sanctfe Crucis. His account of longitude may be very erroneous,
but how could his latitude have erred thirteen degrees in this his
southernmost voyage ? "
Since those pages were printed, I have obtained a perfect copy
of the four voyages of Americus Vespucius, written in Latin ; and
I noAv hasten to correct any erroneous impression which might arise
out of my having asserted that Vespucius " could not have explored
farther south than the right bank of La Plata."
By the subjoined extracts from the third voyage of Vespucius, it
appears that he sailed to about fiftj'-two degrees of south latitude ;
and near that latitude discovered land : — which I have no doubt
whatever was Georgia.
These extracts are not only verbally but literally copied from
the original : every passage which can throw even the slightest
light upon dates, times, courses, distances or positions, is here given ;
the portions of the narrative which are omitted relate solely to what
Vespucius saw on the land. According to his narrative, he went to
the Canaries, thence to the coast of Africa near Cape Verde ; from
which place he sailed to the coast of Brazil, near, but to the west-
ward of Cape St. Roque ; thence he worked to windward against
the current, till he reached Cape San Agostinho ; and from that point
he coasted to about the River Grande, in thirty-two south. From this
port, whether the River Grande or a place near it, Vespucius steered
to the south-east (per Seroccum) five hundred leagues ; found the
south pole elevated fifty-two degrees, the night fifteen hours long,
the cold excessive, a high sea, a succession of tempestuous weather,
and land precisely like Georgia, but not at all resembUng any part of
the Falklands. Georgia lies somewhat farther south than the
latitude mentioned (being in 54°— 55°) ; but we should take into
consideration the instruments used at sea in 1502 ; the all but utter
ignorance of southern stars ; and the succession of bad weather
encountered by Vespucius about the time of his seeing land near
52° S.
APPENDIX. 305
From this latitude he sailed thirteen hundred leagues towards the
north and north-east, and arrived at Sierra Leone ; whence he went
to the Azores and to Lisbon.
The internal evidence contained in the narrative of this voyage
affords satisfactorj' proof of its authenticity. Whether the design
of Vespucius was to seek for southern land, or endeavour to sail
to ' Cathay' by the shortest line (the arc of a great circle), does not
appear : but as we know he was skilled in mathematics and of an
enterprising character, such a conjecture as the latter may be not
totally improbable.
Navigatio tertia Americi Vesputii.
" loitur ab hoc Lisbonse portu cum tribus conservantiae navibus
die Mali decima MDI abeuntes, cursum nostrum versus magnse Cana-
rife insulas arripuimus, secundum quas et ad earum prospectum
instanter enavigantes, idem navigium nostrum coUaterahter secundiim
Aphricam occidentem versus sequuti fuimus."
* * * H= * * *
" Exinde autem ad partem illam ^thiopise, quse Besilicca dicitur,
devenimus : quae quidem sub torrida zona posita est, et superquam
quatuordecim gradibus se septentrionalis erigit polus in climate pri-
mo : ubi diebus undecim nobis de lignis et aqua provisionem parantes
restitimus, propter id quod Austrum versus per Atlanticum pelagus
navigandi mihi inesset affectus. Itaque portum J^^thiopise ilium post
haec reUnquentes, tunc per Lebeccium ventum in tantum navigavimus,
ut sexaginta et septem infra dies insulse cuidam ajiplicuerimus, quse
insula septingentis a portu eodem leucis ad Lebeccii partem distaret.
In quibus quidem diebus pejus perpessi tempus fuimus, qu^m un-
quam in mari quispiam antea pertulerit, propter ventorum nimbo-
rumve impetus, qui quamplurimum nobis intulere gravamina, ex eo
quod navigium nostrum Irneae prsesertim eequinoctiali continue junc-
tum fuit. Inibique in mense Junio hyems extat, ac dies noctibus
sequales sunt, atque ipsse umbrae nostrae continue versus meridiem
erant. Tandem vero omninotanti placuit novam unam nobis osten-
dere plagam, decima septima, scilicet, Augusti, juxta quam, leuca
sepositi ab eadem cum media, restitimus, et postea assumptis cymbis
nonnullis in ipsam visuri si inhabitata esset, profecti fuimus."
H: * -t H= * * *
306
APPENDIX.
" De qua quidera ora pro ipso serenissimo Castilire rege posses-
sorium cepimus, invenlmusque illam multum amEenam ac viridem
esse, et apparentiae bonse. Est autem extra lineam Eequinoctialem
Austrum versus quinque gradibus : et ita eadem die, ad naves nos-
tras repeda^dmus."
* * * * * Jj! *
" Postquam autem terrain iUam reliquimus, mox inter Levantem et
Seroccum ventum, secundum quos se continet terra, navigare occe-
pimus, plurimos ambitus, plurimosque gyros interdum sectantes :
quibus durantibus gentes non vidimus, quas nobiscum practicare, aut
ad nos a^ipropinquare voluerint. In tantum vero navigavimus ut
tellurem unam novam quae secundum Lebeccium se porrigeret, inve-
nerimus. In qua quum campum unum circuivissemus, cui sancti
Vincentij campo nomen indidimus, secundum Lebeccium ventum post
hsec navigare occcepimus : distatque idem sancti Vincentij campus
a priore terra Ula, centum quinquaginta leuois ad partem levantis :
qui et quidem campus octo gradibus extra lineam sequinoctialem ver-
sus Austrum est."
:(! >(: H< >l^ * * *
" nos portum ilium linquentes, per Lebeccium ventum, et in visu
teiTse semper transcurrimus, plures continue faciendo scalas plu-
resque ambitus, ac interdum cum multis populis loquendo, donee
tande versus austrum extra Capricorni tropicum fuimus. Ubi super
horizonta ilium meridionalis polus triginta duobus sese extollebat
gradibus, atque minorem jam perdideramus ursam, ipsaque major
ursa multum in fima videbatur, fere in fine horizontis se ostentans,
et tunc per stellas alterius meridionalis poll nosmetipsos dirigebamus,
quje multo j^lures, multoque majores ac lucidiores quam nostri jdoH
steUae existunt : propter quod j^lurimarum iUarum figuras confinxi,
et praesertim earura quae prioris ac majoris magnitudiiiis erant, ima
cum declinatione diametrorum, quas circa polum austri efficiunt, et
una cum denotatione earundem diametrorum, et semidiametrorum
earmn, prout in meis quatuor diaetis, sive navigationibus iaspici facile
poterit. Hocce vero navigio nostro, a campo sancti Augustini incei^to,
septingentas percurrimus laucas (leucas ?) videlicet, versus Ponen-
tem centum, et versus Lebeccium sexingentas : quas quidem dum
peragraremus, si quis quae vidimus enumcrare vellet, non totidem ei
papp-eae chartae suflicerent."
APPENDIX. 307
" Et in hac quidem peragratione decern fere raensiljus extitimus."
* * * :i; :!: IK *
" edixi, mandavique ubique, ut de lignis et aqua pro sex mensibus
munitioneiu omnes sibi pararent : nam per navium magistros nos
cum navibus nostris adhuc tantundem navigare posse judicatum est.
Qua quidem, quam edixeram, facta provisione, nos cram illam lin-
quentes, et inde navigationem nostram per Seroccum ventum initi-
autes, Februarii decima tertia, videlicet, quum sol sequlnoctio jam
approj^inquaret, et ad hoc Septentrionis liemisphserium nostrum ver-
geret, in tantam pervagati fuimus, ut meridianum polura super
horizonta ilium quinquaginta duobus gradibus sublimatum inveneri-
mus, ita ut nee minoris ursse : nee majoris stellse amodo insplci
valerent. Nam tunc a portu illo, h quo per Seroccum abieramus,
quingentis leucis longe jam facti eramus, tertia, videlicet, Aprilis.
Qua die tempestas ac procella in mari tarn vehemens exorta est, ut
vela nostra omnia colligere, et cum solo nudo que malo remigare
compelleremur, perflante vehementissime Lebeccio, ac mari intume-
scente, et aere turbulentissimo extante. Propter quem turbinis
violentissimum irapetum nostrates omnes non modico affecti fuerunt
stupore. Noctes quoque tunc inibi quam-maximBe erant. Etenim
Aprilis septima, sole circa Arietis finem extante, ipsEE esedem noctes
horarum quindecim repertte sunt : hyemsque etiam tunc inibi erat,
tit vestra satis perpendere potest majestas. Nobis autem sub hac
navigantibus turbulentia, terram unam Aprilis secunda vidimus,
penes quam viginti circiter leucas navigantes appropiavimus : verum
ilium omnimodo brutalem et extraneam esse comperimus, in qua
quidem nee portum quempiam, nee gentes aliquas fore conspeximus,
ob id, ut arbitror, quod tarn asperum in ea frigus algeret, ut tam
acerbum vix quisquam perpeti posset. Porro in tanto periculo, in
tantaque tenq^estatis importunitate nosmet turn reperimus, ut vix
alteri alteros prsegrandi turbine nos videremus. Quamobrem demum
cum navium pr?etore pariter concordavimus, ut connavitis nostris
omnibus, terram illam linquendi, seque ab ea elongandi, et in Portu-
gallia remeandi signa faceremus. Quod consilium sanum quidem et
utile fuit, quum si inibi nocte solum adhuc ilia perstitissemus, dis-
perditi omnes eramus : nempe quum hinc abiissemus, tam grandis die
sequent! tempestas in mari excitata est, ut penitus obrui perdite
metueremus. Propter quod plurima peregrinationum vota, necnon
alias quamplures cseremonias, prout nautis nios esse solet, tiuic feci-
308 APPENDIX.
mus. Sub quo tempestatis infortunio quinque navigavimus diebus,
demissis omnino velis. In quibus quidem quinque diebus ducentas
et quinquaginta in man penetravlmus leucas, lineee interdum equinoc-
tiali, necnon mari et aurse temperatlori semper appropinquando, per
quod nos a prscmissis eripere periculis altissimo Deo placuit. Eratque
hujuscemodi nostra nav'igatio ad transmontanum ventum et Grsecum,
ob id quod ad ^thiopise latus pertingere cupiebamus, a quo per maris
Atlantici fauces eundo, mille tercentum distabamus leucis. Ad illam
autem per summi tonantis gratiam Maij bis quinta pertigimus die.
Ubi in plaga una ad latus Austri, quae Serraliona dicitur, quindecim
diebus nos ipsos refrigerando fuimus. Et post hsec cursum nostrum
versus insulas Lyazori dictas arripuimus : quK quidem insulse a Ser-
raliona ipsa septingentis et quinquaginta leucis distabant, ad quas
sub Julii finem pervenimus, et pariter quindecim inibi nos reficiendo
perstitimus diebus. Post quos inde exivimus, et ad Lisbonse nostrse
recursum nos accinximus, a qua ad occidentis partem tercentum sepo-
siti leucis eramus, et cujus tandem deinde portum MDII cum pros-
pera salvatione et cunctipotentis nutu rursum subi^imus cum duabus
duntaxa navibus, ob id quod tertiam in Serraliona, quoniam amplius
nangare non posset, ignicombusseramus. In hac autem nostra tertio
cursa na^^gatione, sexdecim circiter menses permansimus : e quibus
undecim absque transmontanese stellre, necnon et majoris ursse mino-
risve aspectu na\-iganmus, quo tempore nosmetipsos per aliam meri-
dionalis poli stellam regebamus : quae superius commemorata sunt,
qure in eadem nostra teitio facta na^•igatione, relatu magis digna
conspexi."
The above is a literal extract from pp. 116 — 126 of the Novus
Orbis, id est, Navigationes primas in Americam. Roterodami, apud
Johannes Leonardi Berewout. Anno 1616. — an exceedingly scarce
work.
No. 53,
BAROMETRIC OBSERVATIOXS IN THE RIVER SANTA CRVZ.
Before leaving the Beagle, to explore part of the river, tAvo
mountain barometers, afterwards carried in the boats, were suspended
on shore, close to the sea, and compared with a barometer on board
the ship, the cistern of wliich instrument was at the level of the sea.
APPENDIX. 309
After returning from exploring part of the river, both mountain
barometers were again similarlj' compared, and the difference between
the best instrument and that fixed on board was found to be the
same as before, namely, 0,19 inch. At sunrise on the 5th of May,
at the westernmost station reached by the boats, the mountain baro-
meter which was preferred showed 29,81 (/3') ; the thermometers,
attached, and detached, 44° Fahrenheit ; and the cistern of the instru-
ment was one foot above the level of the river. At the same time
(allowing the difference of longitude) the barometer on board the
Beagle showed 30,07 (/3) ; while the attached thermometer showed
44°, and the detached 43°.
The rise of tide that morning at the ship was twenty-one feet, and
it was high water at thirty minutes past seven, a.m.
By Baily's rule—*
B = 0,00000 (subtract 0,19 from 29,81)
log. H' = 1,47159
1,47159
log. H — 1,4781.3
D = 0,00654 - - - log ='7,81558
c =:'9",y9980
Half-tide 10,5 feet. A = 4,79207
— 2,5 405 = 2,60745
8
4-7
— 1 412 feet.
Hence the western station appears to be about four hundred and
twelve feet above the level of the eastern — that of the Beagle : —
but other pairs of obsen'ations were made durmg the pre\dous and
following days (May 4th and 6th) of which the results, similarly
deduced, were 464, 501, 527, 487, 497, 434, and 436;— each con-
siderably above 400 feet : and as that part of the river (the western
station) is about two hundred miles from the sea, the fall, on an
average, cannot be less than two feet in each mile.
» Pp. 183 and 263 of Astronomical Tables and Formul», by Francis
Baily, Esq. F.R.S. Pres. A.S. &c. &c.
310 APPENDIX.
No. 54.
A FEW NAUTICAL REMARKS.
Without extending this work to an unwieldy size, it would he
impossible to give particular descriptions of, or saiUng directions for,
half the anchorages surveyed by the Beagle and her consorts. I can
here only allude to some which are least easy of access ; and for
details concerning the rest, I must ask the reader to refer to Captain
King's Sailing Directions, pubHshed by the Admiralty in 1832 ; and,
hereafter, to a similar work, which I am compiling.
In approaching or entermg any port between the southern coast
of Brazil and Tierra del Fuego,* both leads and charts must
be closely attended to, tides and currents must be well considered,
and the colour, as well as rippling of the water, narrowly watched.
Generally speaking, much of this extent of coast is comparatively
shallow, and beset with insidious dangers in the shape of banks and
currents. Where rocks occur they are less to be feared, because
their position is, in most cases,t pointed out by kelp.j. Some of the
banks are particularly dangerous, being exceecUngly steep-sided and
hard. Where there is a strong stream or great rise of tide, or where
both are found, the i"isk of approaching such banks is proportionably
increased.
Of the River Plata I have spoken briefly in Chapter IV., and of
Blanco Bay there is a shght description in Chapter V. of the second
volume.
Before entering PortBelgrano (within Blanco Bay), or any similar
port, such as False Bay, Green Bay, Brightman Inlet, Union Bay,
&c. I should advise anchoring, and ascertaining the ship's position
exactly, sending a boat to find the middle of the principal entrance,
and there dropping a buoy with a good anchor. If the weather is at
aU hazy, no marks on the distant low land will be made out by a
stranger, until he has had time to take a few angles, look round
from the masthead, and examine the chart leisurely. These things
cannot be so well done while the ship is saiUng fast ; she may, how-
ever, be brought to for a time.
* Except at the Falklands.
+ That in the entrance of Port Desire is a notable exception to the
general rule
J Seaweed growing in rocky places.
APPENDIX. 311
Tlie Falkland Islands, Tierra del Fuego,* the west part of Pata-
gonia, the shores of the Chonos Archipelago, and Chil6e,t those of
Chile and Peru, and the Galapagos Islands, have bold coasts, with
deep water near them ; — in such places the lead is of less importance.
Most lurking dangers are buoyed by kelp ; but where they are not
so distinguished, the lead would hardly warn the seaman of them,
because rocks usually rise so abruptly. A careful and experienced
eye at the masthead, another perhaps on the fore-yard or at the jib-
boom end, a manageable quantity of sail, under which the vessel
may be instantly brought to the wmd or hove in stays, and a good
estimation of distances by the commancUng officer will be of more
consequence in frequenting these coasts, than either lead or directions.
San Carlos and the Narrow of Chacao are remarkable exceptions. Both
banks and rocks are thei-e to be guarded against — by chart, eye, and
lead, however, rather than by lengthy directions, which sometimes
pei-plex more than they assist. Of these a particular plan is given
iu the map which accompanies the first volume of this work.
Remarks upon the winds, weather, and cUmate of each of the
southern portions of the South American coast have already been
given in variovis pages of this work ; but I will add some more, refer-
ring particularly to the outer coast of Tierra del Fuego, previous to
saying a few words on the passage round Cape Horn.
Some Observations upon the Ajipearance and Character of the Sea
Coast of Tierra del Fuego ; a brief Description of the Anchorages ;
and a few Remarks upon the Seasons, Wmd, and Weather.
From Cape PiUar to Cape Horn the coast of Tierra del Fuego is
very irregular and much broken ; being, in fact, composed of an
immense number of islands. It is generally high, bold, and free
from shoals or banks ; but there are many rocks nearly level with
the surface of the water, distant two aiad even three miles from the
nearest shore, which make it veiy unsafe for a vessel to approach
nearer than five miles, excepting in daylight and clear weather. Tlie
coast varies in height from eight to fifteen hundred feet above the sea.
* Except the northernmost and the eastern shores,
t Except San Carlos de ChiI6e.
312 APPENDIX.
Farther inshore are ranges of mountains always covered with snow,
whose height is from two to four thousand feet, and in a few instances
about six or seven thousand.
With daylight and clear weather a vessel may close the shore with-
out risk, because the water is invariably deep, and no rock is found,
which is not so marked by sea- weed (or kelp as it is generally called),
that by a good look-out at the mast-head, its situation is as clearly
seen as if it were buoj'ed. By avoiding kelp you are sure of having
sufficient water for the largest ships on any part of this coast. At
the same time, it must be remembered that kelp grows in some
places from a depth of thirty fathoms, and that on many parts of this
coast you may pass through thick beds of sea-weed without having
less than six fathoms water ; still it is always a sign of danger, and
until the spot where it grows has been carefully sounded, it is not
safe to pass over it with a ship. As an instance ; — after sounding a
large bed of this weed in one of the Beagle's boats, and thinking it
might be passed safely, a rock %vas found, not more than four feet in
diameter, having only one fathom water over it.
Viewing the coast at a distance, it appears high, rugged, covered
with snow, and continuous, as if there were no islands. When near
you see many inlets which intersect the land in every direction, and
open into large gulfs or sounds, behind the seaward islands : and
you then lose sight of the higher land, which is covered with snow
throughout the year, and find the heights close to the sea thicldy
wooded towards the east, though barren on their western sides, owing
to the prevailing winds. These heights are seldom covered with
snow, because the sea winds and the rain melt it soon after it falls.
Opposite to the eastern valleys, where the land is covered with
wood, and water is seen faUing down the ravines, good anchorage is
generally found. But these valleys are exposed to tremendous squalls
which come from the heights. The best of all anchorages on this
coast is where you find good ground on the western side of high land,
and are protected from the sea by low islands. It never blows near
so hard against high land as from it ; but the sea on the weather side
is of course very formidable, unless stopped, as I mentioned, by islets.
Where the land is chiefly composed of sandstone or slate, anchor-
ages abound ; where of granite, it is difficult to strilce soundings.
The diiFerence between the granite and slate or sandstone hills,
can be distinguished by the former being very barren and rugged,
I
APPENDIX. 313
and of a grey or white appearance ; whereas the latter are generall)^
covered with vegetation, are dark-coloured, and have smoother out-
lines. The slate liills shew some sharp peaks, except which, the only-
bare places are those exposed to wind or sea.
Soundings extend about thirty miles from the coast. Between ten
and twenty miles from the land, the depth of water varies from sixty
to two hundred fathoms ; the bottom almost every where being white
or speckled sand. From ten to five miles distant, the average depth is
fifty fathoms ; it varies in general from thirty to one hundred, but
in some places there is no ground with two hundred fathoms of line.
Less than five miles from the shore the soundings are very irregular
indeed, generally less than forty fathoms, though in some places
deepening suddenly to one hundred or more ; while in others a rock
rises nearly to, or above the surface of the water.
After carrying fifty, forty, thirty, or twenty fathoms, towards an
inlet, which you are desirous of entering, you will perhaps find the
water deepen to sixty or one hundred fathoms as soon as you enter
the opening : and in the large sounds, behind the seaward islands,
the water is often considerably deeper than on the outside.
There Is a bank of soundings along the whole coast, extending
from twenty to thirty miles from it, which appears to have been
formed by the continued action of the sea upon the shore, wearing It
away, and forming a bank with its remains.
Between the islands, where there is no swell or surf worth notice,
the water is deep, and the bottom very irregular.
A small ship may run among the islands In many places, and find
good anchorage ; but she will enter a labyrinth, from which her
retreat may be difficult, and in thick weather very dangerous.
Fogs are extremely rare on this coast ; but thick, rainy weather,
and strong winds prevail. The sun shews himself but little; the sky,
even in fine weather, being generally overcast and cloudy. A clear
day is a rare occuiTence.
Gales of wind succeed each other at short intervals, and last several
days. At times the weather is comparatively fine and settled for
perhaps a fortnight, but those periods of quiet are few.
Westerly winds prevail during the greater part of the year. The
easterly wind blows occasionally in the winter months, and at times
very hard, but it seldom blows in summer.
Winds from the eastern quarter invariably rise light, with fine
dd
314 APPENDIX.
weather ; they increase graduall}% the weather changes, and at times
they end in a determined heavy gale. More frequently they rise to the
strength of a treble -reefed topsail breeze, then die away gradually,
or shift to another quarter.
From the north the wind always begins to blow moderately, but
with thicker weather and more clouds than when from the eastward :
it is generally accompanied by small rain. Increasing in strength, it
draws to the westward gradually, and blows hard from between north
and north-west, with heavy clouds, thick weather, and much rain.
When the fury of the north-wester is expended, which varies from
twelve to fifty hours, or even while it is blowing hard, the wind some-
times shifts suddenly into the south-west quarter, blowing harder
than before. This wind soon drives away the clouds, and in a few
hours causes cleai- weather, though perhaps with heavy squalls pass-
ing occasionally.
In the south-west quarter the wind (generally speaking) hangs
several days, blowing strong, but moderating towards the end, and
admitting two or three days of fine weather.
Northerly winds then usually begin again, during the summer
months ; but all manner of shifts and changes are experienced, from
north to south by the west, during that season ; which would hardly
deserve the name of summer, were not the days so much longer, and
the weather a Httle warmer. Rain and wind prevail during the long,
much more than in the short days.
It should be remembered that bad weather never comes on sud-
denly from the eastward, neither does a south-west or southerly gale
shift suddenly to the northward. South-west and southerly winds
rise suddenly as well as violently, and must be well considered in
choosing anchorages, or preparing for shifts of wind at sea.
The most usual weather in these regions is a fresh wind between
north-west and south-west, with a cloudy overcast sky.
Much difference of opinion has prevailed as to the utHity of a
barometer in these latitudes. I may remark, that during some
years' careful trial of a barometer and sympiesometer (Adie's), I
found their indications of the utmost value. Their variations did not
of course correspond to those of middle latitudes, but they corres-
ponded to those of high northern latitudes in a remarkable manner,
(changing south for north, east and west remaining the same).
Gales of wind from the southward, and squalls from the south-
APPENDIX. 315
west, are preceded, and therefore foretold, by hea^'y banks of large
white clouds rising in those quarters, having hard edges, and appearing
very rounded and solid.
Winds from the northward and "north-westward are preceded and
accompanied by low scud clouds, with a thickly overcast sky, in
which other clouds appear to be at a great height. The sun shews
dimly through them, and has a reddish appearance. For some hours,
or a day before a gale from the north, or west, it is not possible to
take an altitude of the sun, although he is visible ; the haziness of
the atmosphere in the upper regions causing his limbs to be quite
indistinct. Sometimes, but very rarely, with the wind light between
N.N.W. and N.N.E. there are a few days of beautiful weather :
but they are sure to be succeeded by gales from the southward,
with much rain.
It may be useful to say a few words regarding the seasons in the
neighbourhood of Cape Horn, as much question has arisen respecting
the propriety of making a passage round the Cape in winter rather
than in summer.
The equinoctial months are the worst in the year, generally speak-
ing, as in most parts of the world. Heavy gales prevail about those
times, though not perhaps exactly at the equinoxes. In August,
September, and October, there is usually very bad weather ; strong
vvdnds, snow, hail, and cold, then prevail.
December, January, and February, are the warmest months ; the
days are long, and there is some fine weather ; but westerly winds,
at times very strong gales, with much rain, prevail throughout this
season, which carries with it less of summer than in almost any part
of the globe.
March, as I said, is stormy, and perhaps the worst month in the
year, with respect to violent winds, though not so rainy as the sum-
mer months.
In April, May, and June, the finest weather is experienced ; and
though the days are short, it is more Uke summer than any other
time of the year. Easterly winds are frequent, with fine, clear,
settled weather. But bad weather occurs during these months,
though not so often as at other times. During this period there is
some chance of obtaining a few successive and corresponding obser-
vations. To try to rate chronometers by equal altitudes would l^e a
fruitless waste of time at other seasons.
dd2
316 APPENDIX,
June and July are much alike, but easterly gales blow more
during July. The days being so short, and the weather cold, make
these two months very impleasant, though they are, perhaps, the
best for making a speedy passage to the westward, as the wind is
then prevalent from the eastern quarter.
I should say that December and January are the best for making
a passage from the Pacific to the Atlantic Ocean, though that passage
is so short and easily made, that it hardly requires a choice of time.
For going to the westward, I should prefer April, May, or June,
and should wait for a wind.
Lightning and thunder are seldom known : violent squalls come
from the south or south-west, giving warning of their approach by
masses of clouds. They are rendered more formidable by snow and
hail of a large size.
There is a continual current setting along the south-west coast of
Tierra del Fuego, from the north- west towards the south-east, as far
as the Diego Ramirez Islands. From their vicinity the current takes
a more easterly direction, setting round Cape Horn towards Staten
Island, or off to seaward to the E.S.E.
Much has been SEiid of the strength of this current ; some persons
supposing that it is a serious obstacle in passing to the westward of
Cape Horn, whUe others almost deny its existence.
We found it run at the average rate of a nule an hour. Its strength
is greater during west, — ^less or insensible during easterly winds. It
is strongest near the land, particularly near the projecting capes or
detached islands.
This current sets rather from the land, which diminishes the dan-
ger of approacliing the south-west parts of the coast : but there is,
in fact, much less risk in approaching this coast than is generally
supposed. Being high and bold, without sandbanks or shoals, its
position accurately determined, and a bank of soundings extending
twenty or thirty miles from the shore, it need not be much feared.
Rocks, it is true, abound near the land, but they are very near to
the shore, and out of a ship's way.
A Une from point to point along the coast (beginning from the
outermost Apostle), will clear all danger, excepting the Tower Rocks,
which are steep to, and high above water.
The preceding notices were written by me in 1 830, and I have not
found it necessary to alter them materially. Taken in connection wth
APPENDIX. 317
Capt. King's, Chapt. 24, in Vol. 1, and the following brief remarks,
I hope they may prove useful to a stranger to the passage round
Cape Horn : but he will doubtless avail himself also of what has been
written on this subject by other persons, especially Weddell.
In going westward, Captain King recommends keeping near the
eastern coast of Patagonia, and " after passing Staten Island, if the
wind be westerly, the ship should be kept upon the starboard tack,
unless it veer to the southward of S.S.W. until she reaches the lati-
tude of 60° S." — (vol. i. pp. 464-5.) I do not think keeping near
the eastern coast of Patagonia of importance to a large or strong
vessel ; smoother water is found near that coast, it is true, but cur-
rents set to the northward alongshore more strongly than in the
open sea. Icebergs, however, are never found in sight of that land,
though they have been met farther eastward, to the north of forty
degrees south latitude. Instead of going into sixty, south latitude, I
should prefer working to windward, near the shore of Tierra del
Fuego ; — through NassauBay ; where anchorages are numerous, and
easy of access.
In Orange Bay, or farther south, a ship may await a favourable time
for making a long stretch to the westward : if foiled in one effort, she
may return, or seek for anchorage under Noir Island, in Euston
Bay, or elsewhere, until a better opportunity occurs. To make
westing ought to be the principal object, in my humble opinion, till
the meridian of about 82° is reached.* Icebergs are not found near
the land of Tierra del Fuego, but they are frequently met with at
a distance from it.
By adopting this plan of passing through Nassau Bay, or near
Cape Horn, much labour and dainage may be avoided, because a ship
may lie quietly at anchor during the worst weather, and be ready to
profit by any advantageous change.
* Ei§fhty degrees will be far enough west for a fast-sailing- ship ; but
eighty-five degrees M'ill not be too westerly for a dull saileh
318 APPENDIX.
No. 55.
Remarks on the Chronometrical Observations made during the Sur-
veying Vo)'ages of H. M. Ships Adventure and Beagle, between
the years 1826 and 1836.
Before I iiroceed to notice the chronometrical observations made
during the Beagle's latter voyages, fi-om 1831 to 1836, it appears to
me necessary to give a copy of Captain King's Report of those made
under his direction between 1826 and 1830.
Copy of a Report of the Chronometrical Observations made during a
Voyage for the purpose of surveying the southern extremity of
America, in H.M. Ships Adventure and Beagle, between the years
1826 and 1830, under the orders of CaptamP. P. King, by direc-
tion of the Right Honourable the Lords Commissioners of the
Admiralty.
Among the important objects to which my attention was directed
by the Lord Commissioners of the Admiralty, upon my appointment
to the command of the Expedition for the survey of the southern part
of South America, was that of measuring the differences of certain
meridians in the north and south Atlantic Oceans by means of
chronometers ; and for this purpose I -was supplied from the Royal
Obsen'atory at Greenwich with nine chronometers ; eight of which,
at the suggestion of the Astronomer Royal, were suspended in gim-
bals, and divided into two boxes ; and the ninth, an eight-day box-
watch, was fitted in the usual manner. ITae whole were fixed in a
chest that was firmly secured to the deck as low down as possible,
and as near to the middle part of the ship as could be managed, in
order to diminish the eflfect of the ship's motion, and to counteract
that of the ship's local attraction, which, whatever it might have
been, always remained the same, as the chronometers were never
moved from their positions.
Tlrese nine chronometers were made by Mr. French. Their
description and number were as follows : —
Eight-day box chronometer, No. 3233 designated Z
Two-day 3296 A
Two-day 3295 B^ ™
Two-day 3271 c °"^ ^°'^-
Two-day 3227 D
Al^PENDIX. 319
One-day box chronometer, No. 3290 designated E
One-day 3291 fI in
One-day 3292 G [ one box.
One-day 3293 H,
Z had been going at the Observatory for many months, and had
preser\'ed a very regular rate, but all the others Avere quite new, and
had scarcely settled to a steady rate when I received them.
In addition to the above I was furnished with a pocket chrono-
meter. No. 553, by Mr. Murray. This watch had been at the Ob-
servatory for several months, and had performed remarkably well : and
before I sailed Messrs. Parkinson andFrodsham intrusted to my care
for trial a pocket chronometer. No. 1048, that was only completed in
time to be sent to me two days before the Expedition sailed from Ply-
mouth. Mr. French also lent me a pocket-watch to use for observ-
ing with, in order that the rest might not be unnecessarily moved.
In the Beagle were three excellent box chronometers. Two by
Messrs. Parldnson and Frodsliam, Nos. 254 and 228, which had
been used in the Polar Voyages ; and the third, No. 134, made by Mr.
M'Cabe.
The means, therefore, that were placed at my command to effect
this most interesting object were tolerably ample : and the result
will prove how admirably these machines are adapted to measure
such differences when a great number are emjiloyed ; because the
irregularities and errors of individual watches are compensated for
by employing the mean of the whole.
In the observations for the determination of time, a sextant by
Troughton, No. 1140, and an artificial horizon, were the instruments
used : and the mode, whenever it could be adopted, was that of cor-
responding altitudes. Occasionally, however, absolute altitudes were
used, but only in those places where the latitude was correctly
ascertained ; — and in some instances the chronometers were rated
by a transit instrument.
The chronometers were always compared with the 'journeyman'
watch before and after the observations, and when corresponding al-
titudes were observed all the watches were compared at noon. Their
rates were carefully observed before sailing from one port, as well as
after the arrival at another ; and in calculating the acceleration or re-
tardation of their rate of going, the correction was obtained by inter-
polation, upon the supposition of their having changed gradually.
Whenever it appeared, by comparing the watches with each other.
320 APPENDIX.
that any one had suddenly varied from its rate, its result was omitted
in the determination.
The method of interpolating for the alteration of the rates which I
have adopted, is one that was successfully employed by Captain
Flinders in his survey of New Holland ; and one that I have been
for many years in the habit of using with most satisfactory results.
In cases where chronometers alter their rates suddenly, the rule
cannot be applied ; but, in general, the alterations are caused by
changes of temperature ; and as these changes are "gradual, so the
rates alter in the same progressive manner.
The correction has, therefore, been obtained by an arithmetical
progression ; in which the first term, the number of terms, and the
common difference, are given to find the sum of the terms.
The difference between the two rates divided by the number of
days that have intervened, called the daily variation of rate, is the first
term F ; as well as the common difference D : the interval between
the determination of the errors of the watches, in mean time, of the
place left and arrived at, is the number of terms N : and the sum of
the terms is the correction required, S. The formula, when reduced
to its simplest form, is F (N-fl) ^=S.
The places which I was instructed to visit for the purpose of mea-
suring their respective meridional differences were Madeira, Santa
Cruz in the island of Teneriffe, the north-east end of San Antonio,
and Port Praya in the island of St. Jago, in the North Atlantic ;
and the island of Trinidada, Rio de Janeiro, and Monte Video, in
the South Atlantic Ocean.
After the chronometers had been carefuUy rated at the Observa-
tory, they were embarked on board H.M.S. Adventure, on the 23rd
April, 1826 ; but as the ship was detained at Deptford and North-
fleet until the 4th May, an opportunity was offered of ascertaining
what change had been produced by the alteration of the place ; and
it turned out to be by no means inconsiderable. Five of the watches
had accelerated, and the remaining four had retarded rates. It
would be difficult to assign any other reason for this change than
the effect of the ship's local attraction.
With this newly found rate we sailed for Plymouth ; and, after
five days' passage, arrived in the Sound ; and, on the 9th May, ob-
tained a set of corresponding altitudes upon the Breakwater, upon a
stone marked ^ ; which, by the Ordnance map, is 0' 31 "-5 in longi-
APPENDIX. 321
tude to the eastward of the flag-staff of Drake's Island ; 10" 2 to the
westward of Plymouth old church, and 0' 25"- 1 to the westward of
the new church. Tlie longitude, therefore, of the station, by the
Ordnance survey, would be 4° 7' 41"-7, but by applying a proportion
of the error detected by Dr. Tiarks, in liis chronometrical observa-
tions between Greenwich and Falmouth, viz., 4'"09 or 1' 11""3, the
corrected longitude of the station will be 4° 8' 43". Our chrono-
meters made it 0' 40"' 2 to the eastward of the corrected longitude,
and 0' 19"'6 to the westward of the original determination by the
Ordnance survey.
The Breakwater being the point from whence all my differences are
measured, I have considered its longitude west of Green^vich to be
as above stated, namely, 4° 8' 43".
It now remains to record the results, the details of which are
given in another form.*
Madeira. — The obsen'ations were made at Mr. Veitch's garden*
house, that being the spot used by Dr. Tiarks with ten chrono-
meters. The difference between it and the Breakwater is 12" 45' 45"
west : the longitude will therefore be 1 6° 54' 28" W.
which is 0' 1 7'''4 to the eastward of Dr. Tiarks's determination.
Teneriffe (Fort San Pedro) — by eleven chronometers is 0° 40' 6"
to the eastward of Madeira, and will therefore be ...16°14'22""W.
St. Jago (landing place at Port Praya) — by ten chronometers
it was found to be 7° 15' 55" w^est of Teneriffe, and there-
fore.,.. 23° 30' 17"
Rio DE Janeiro (VUlegagnon Island) — by fourteen chronometers the
difference was found between it and Port Praya to be 19° 34' 46"
which will make its longitude 43° 05' 03"
St. Antonio (Terrafal Bay at the south-west end). — Inconsequence
of unfavourable weather we were unable to land at the north-east
end, and, therefore, made our observations at Terrafal Bay ; the lon-
gitude of which was found by eleven chronometers to be 9° 05' 39"
to the westward of Teneriffe which makes it 25° 20' 1 "
Tkinidada. — On account of the south-east trade being scant, we were,
prevented from making this island.
Monte Video (Rat Island). — The difference of longitude between
this place and Rio de Janeiro was measured, on various occasions,
* These details are lodged in the Hydrographical Officct R. F;
*Jf^.
APPENDIX.
between the years 1826 and 1830 ; and in the whole 62 different
results were obtained, the mean of which makes it 13° 4' 27"
west of Villegagnon Island, or 56° 9' 30"
GoRRiTi (well at the north-east end) is 1 15' 51", by twenty-four
chronometrical results, to the eastward of Rat Island, Montevideo,
or... 54° 53' 38"
Cape St. Mary is 54° 5' 58"
Buenos Ayres (Cathedral). — By three chronometers is 2° 8' 24" west
of Rat Island, Monte Video, or 58° 17' 53"
Port Famine (Observatory at the west side of the bay). — The me-
ridional difference between this place and Rat Island at Monte
Video was also found on the several occasions of the ships passing
to and fi'o. In aU, 54 chronometrical results were obtained, the
mean of which makes the Observatory 14° 44' 31" to the west-
ward, or 70° 54' 01"
Port Desire (Ruins of the Spanish colony).— Fifteen chronometri-
cal results make it 9° 42' 15" to the west of Rat Island, Monte
Video, or 65° 51' 45'J
Sea Bear Bay (Sandy beach on the south side of the bay) — is 7'44"
east of Port Desire, and therefore 65° 44' 01"
St. Martin Cove, near Cape Horn (the head of the cove). —
Twelve chronometers made its longitude 11° 19' 33" west of Rat
Island, Monte Video, or 67° 29' 03"
Valparaiso (Cerro Alegre). — Tliis place was found by seven chro-
nometers to be 4° 3' 48" to the westward of St. Martin Cove,
or 71° 32' 51" west of Greenwich, but between it and Port
Famine the difference being by ten chronometers 0° 41' 8" or
71° 35' 9" west, the mean has been taken, viz 71° 34' 12"
Juan Fernandez (Cumberland Bay, the fort). — This place was
found by nine chronometers to be 7° 11' 52" west of Valparaiso,
which makes it 78° 46' 04"
Talcahuano Bay (Fort Galvez). — By eleven chronometers the dif-
ference between it and Valparaiso is...l° 28' 53" or 73° 03' 05"
San Carlos de Chiloe (Sandy Point). — ^The point which is opposite
to the town is, by twenty chronometrical results, 2° 16' 13" west
of Valparaiso, or 73° 5^ 25"
The above are the principal chronometrical determinations that
were made : the following are dependant on them : —
APPENDIX. 3S3
Santos (the Arsenal). — By twelve chronometers this place is
3° ir 31" west of Rio de Janeiro, or 4G° 16' 33"
St. Catherine (Flag Staff of S*''.Cruz D'Anhatomirim) is, by-
fifteen chronometrical results, 5° 24' 38" to the west of Rio de
Janeiro, or 48° 29' 41"
Port Sta. Elena (the spot marked " Observatory" on the plan). —
Eleven chronometers made it 10° 23' 4G" west of the Island of
Gorriti, or 65° 17' 25"
Cape Virgins (extremity of the cliff). — By ten chronometers is
13" 24' 8" to the west of Gorriti, or 68° 17' 46" west of Green-
wich ; but by comparing ft with Port Famine, from which ten chro-
nometers make it 2° 36' 0" to the eastward, the result is 68° 18' 01";
the mean of the two determinations makes it 68° 17' 53"
Port Gallant (Wigwam Point). — By twenty-one chronometers
is 1° 2' 55" west of Port Famine, or 71° 56' 57"
Harbour of Mercy (Observation Islet) at the western end of the
Strait of Magalhaens is 3° 40' 55" west of Port Famine, or
74° 34' 56" west of Greenwich. By the survey, however, it is
laid down in 74° 35' 31"
During the voyage various astronomical observations were made
for the longitude, the summary of which is as follows :
Period.
Place,
Between
the
a
and
No. of Series.
Longitude
by
Observation.
Longitude
Chronometer.
On each
side.
In all.
Sept, 1826
Oct. 1828
Nov. 1829
Jan. 1830
Rio de Janeiro
Gorriti*
Chiloe
Valparaiso. . . .
©
©
©
8
9
8
16
16
18
16
32
/ //
43 8 18
54 53 40
73 48 42
71 35 10
o / //
43 5 3
54 53 38
73 50 25
71 34 12
* The longitude of Gorriti by Captain Stokes's luttars was 54° 57' W ;
that of Monte Video (Rat Island) 56° 14'; of Port Famine old observa-
tory (at the west side of the bay) 70° 57'; and of Villegagnon Island, at
Rio de Janeiro, 43° 9' W. (each to the nearest minute only).
Captain Stokes M'as an excellent observer, and used one of Troughton's
best repeating reflecting circles. His lunar observations, which were
very
324 APPENDIX.
By referring these several observations to Port Famine by chrono-
metrical differences, its longitude by observation will be 70° 54' 1 1"
which is nearly identical with that produced by the chronometric
chain from Plymouth, viz. 70° 54' 01" west. The last has, there-
fore, been taken for its longitude, and all the meridians of the coast,
surveyed by the expedition under my command, depend upon that
determination. Phillip Parker King.
After ha\-ing perused Captain King's Report of the chronometrical
observations made under his direction, I would ask the reader to turn
to Dr. Tiarks's Report on Captain Foster's chronometrical observa-
tions in H.M.S. Chanticleer, published in the Appendix* to a
" Narrative of a Voyage to the Southern Atlantic Ocean, in the years
1828, 29, 30, performed in H.M.S. Chanticleer, under the command
of the late Captain Henry Foster, F.R.S.--By W. H. B. Webster,
surgeon of the sloop."
It ^^^ll also be useful to refer to a work on " Chronometers and
Longitudes," by Captain Owen ; and to the " Pilote du Bresil," by
the Baron Roussin ; as weU as other works, before forming an opi-
very numerous, were cliiefly computed by Lieutenant Skyring. Duriiig
the years 1826 and 182/ Captain King considered the longitude of
Villegagnon to be about 43° 9', but afterwards he thought 43** 5' more
correct.
There is a striking accordance between the results of Captain Stokes's
numerous lunar observations, and the late measurements by the Beagle's
chronometers.
I was informed by Lieutenant Skyring, and by Mr. John L. Stokes,
that the longitude of Villegagnon, by the Beagle's chronometers only, in
1826, was 43° 9' (to the nearest minute).
In 1829, Mr. L. Stokes, a good observer even at that time, took many
sets of lunar observations at San Carlos, in Chiloe ; the mean result of
which gave 73° 56' for the longitude of Point Arena.
Now, these results are so close to those lately obtained in the Beagle —
being within a mile in each case — that I should hesitate to give them
without all their data, did I not know that the officers employed on board
the Adventure and Beagle were aware of these determinations, and often
discussed them, before the year 1836. Captain King and Lieutenant
Stokes are more particularly acquainted with them.
Robert FitzRoy;
• Voli II. pp. 233-254.
APPENDIX.
325
nion upon the degree of value that may be attached to the following
remarks and results.
•Remarks on the Beagle's Chronometrical Measurements between
18.31 and 1836 ; with their principal Results.
On the 14th of Nov., 1831, the following chronometers were
embarked on board the Beagle, and placed in their permanent situ-
ations : — *
Letters.
Descrip-
tion.
Days.
Maker.
No.
Owner.
Remarks.
A
Box
8
Molyneux . .
1415
Fitz-Roy
Good.
tB
Do.
1
Gardner
24
Government..
Bad.
C
Do.
1
Molyneux . .
1081
Molyneux
Rather good.
D
Do.
8
Murray
542
Murray
Do.
E
Do.
1
Eiflfe
E
Government . .
Do.
F
Do.
2
Arnold & Dent
661
Arnold & Dent
Do.
G
Do.
1
Do.
6.33
Fitz-Roy
Do.
H
Pocket
1
Do.
261
Do.
Do.
K
Do.
1
Parkinson &\
Frodsham J
1042
Government . .
Good.
L
Box
2
Arnold
634
Fitz-Roy
Rather good.
M
Do.
1
Frodsham
2
Government • .
Do.
N
Do.
2
Molyneux . .
1175
Fitz-Roy
Do.
O
Do.
1
Earnshaw
705
Government . .
Do.
tP
Do.
1
Frodsham
1
Do.
Bad.
R
Do.
1
Murray . .
584
Murray
Very good.
S
Do.
1
Arnold
465
Government • •
Rather good.
T
Pocket
1
Molyneux
1326
Fitz-Roy
Indifferent.
V
Do.
1
Pennington ..
426
L"*. Ashburnham
Rather good.
w
Box
2
Molyneux . .
971
Government . .
Good.
X
Do.
1
Earnshaw
509
Do.
Rather good.
Y
Pocket
1
Morrice
6144
Do.
Do.
Z
Box
8
French
4214
Do.
Good.
These chronometers being embarked, and permanently fixed, more
than a month previous to the Beagle's departure from England,
sufficient time elapsed to ascertain their rates satisfactorily.
Suspended in gimbals, as usual, within a wooden box, each was
placed in sawdust, divided and retained by partitions, upon one of
two wide shelves. The sawdust was about three inches thick below,
as well as at the sides of each box, and formed a bed for it which
* The 12 hour mark of each chronometer was invariably kept in one
direction with respect to the ship.
+ Never used after Feb. 1835. \ Never used after Sept. 1835.
326 APPENDIX.
rose ratlier above the centre of gravity of the box and watch ; so that
they could not be displaced unless the ship were upset. The shelves,
on which the sawdust and boxes were thus secured, were between
decks, low down, and as near the vessel's centre of motion as could
be contrived. Placed in this manner, neither the running of men
upon deck, nor firing guns,* nor the running out of chain-cables,
caused the slightest vibration in the chronometers, as I often proved
by scattering powder upon their glasses and watching it with a
mao-nifying glass, while the vessel herself was %'ibrating to some
jar or shock.
All the watches were in one small cabin, into which no person
entered, except to compare or wind them, and in which nothing else
was kept. The greater number were never moved fi-om their first
places, after being secured there in 1831, until finally landed at
Greenwich in 1836.
Durino- eight years' observation of the movements of chronometers,
I have become gradually convinced that the ordinary motions of a
ship, such as pitching and rollmg moderately, do not affect tolerably
good timekeepers, which are fixed in one place, and defended from
vibration as well as concussion. Frequently employing chronometers
in boats, and in very small vessels, has strengthened my conviction
that temperature is the chief, if not the only cause (generally speak-
ing) of marked changes of rate. ITie balances of but few watches
are so well compensated as to be proof against a long continuance of
higher or lower temperature. It often happens that the air in port,
or near the land, is at a temperature very different from that over
the open sea — in the vicinity ; and hence the difference sometimes
found between harbour and sea rates. The changes so frequently
noticed to take place in the rates of chronometers moved from the
shore to the ship, and the reverse, are well known to be caused partly
by change of temperature and partly by change of situation.! In
the Beagle we never found the watches go better than when their
boxes were bedded in saw-dust, and they themselves were moving
freely in good gimbals.
Suspending chronometers, as on board the Chanticleer, not only
alters their rate, but makes them go less regularly ; and when fixed
» The Beagle's guns were long six and long nine pounders, of brass :
tbey were only fired from the foremost ports,
t This may be connected with magnetism.
'' APPENDIX. 327
to a solid substance, as on board the Adventure, they feel the vi-
brations caused by people running on the decks, by shocks, or by
a chain cable running out. Cushions, hair, wool, or any such sub-
stance, is preferable to a solid bed ; but, perhaps, there is nothing'
better than coarse dry savs^-dust.
Some chronometrical measurements have erred, and caused much
perplexity, in the following manner. The chronometers were rated
in air whose average temperature was — let us suppose, for example,
'70. They were then carried through air either considerably hotter,
or considerably colder, and again rated in a temperature nearly
equal to that specified. The rates were not found to differ much,
and it was supposed that the chronometers had been going extremely
well ; though, in truth, the rates of most of the watches had differed
extremely (from those found in port) during the voyage ; but they
had returned nearly to the old rates upon reaching nearly equal tem-
perature. And this has happened, more or less, to every ship carry-
ing chronometers across the Equator ; especially when going to Rio
de Janeiro with the sun to the northward of the Line.
How far, or in what manner, magnetism, or electrical influence,
may affect chronometers, is hitherto unknown : but there is sufficient
reason for suspecting considerable effects, under certain conditions,
from one or both of these causes.
The Beagle's chronometers were all wound daily, at nine (except
the eight-day watches, which were wound every Sunday morning),
and compared at noon. Whatever other comparisons might be made,
for equal or corresponding altitudes, sights for time, &c., the noon
comparison was regularly made and forthwith examined, in order
that any change might be at once detected. Whether at sea, or in har-
bour, this same method was punctually and accurately executed by
one person only, under the inspection of Mr. Stokes and myself.
This person, Mr. G. J. Stebbing, of Portsmouth — who was en-
gaged for the purpose, as well as to keep our instruments in repair,
take care of our collection of books,* assist in magnetic, and other
observations, and write for me — was of invaluable assistance ; and, I
may well say, contributed largely to whatever was obtained by the
Beagle's voyage.
In Images 74 and 75 of the second volume, I have mentioned a few
* Our books, which were not a few, considering the small size of the
vessel, were collected in one cabin, under Mr. Stebbing's charge, and lent
to the officers, without reserve, under certain regulations.
328 APPENDIX.
reasons for preferring to give undivided attention to an unbroken
series of chronometrical observations, rather than allot any portion of
time to independent astronomical observations ; which, to be really-
valuable, required what I could not command, namely — time ; a well-
placed and good transit instrument ; sldll in its use ; and habits of
obsen'ing, which are neither readily nor easily acquired. Besides
which, there is always a degree of uncertainty involving the deduc-
tions from observations of any celestial phenomena, at a great dis-
tance from well-known obsen'atories ; even when the observer and
his means are unexceptionable. The causes of this uncertainty are
familiar to many, but, as these pages may meet the eye of a reader
who is not aware of them, I will mention that the figure of the earth
is not yet quite accurately known, that parallax and refraction cannot
be allowed for with absolute certainty, that levels and plumb-lines
are not everj'where exactly at right angles to, or coincident with, a
line di'awn from them to the earth's centre ; and that tables, how-
ever excellent, are not perfect.
That able and indefatigable astronomer, Mr. Fallows, was along
time at the Cape of Good Hope before he could determine its longi-
tude ; and, after all his exertions, his successors have adopted a
result differing from it half a mile.* There is reason to doubt
whether Paramatta Observatory is well determined in longitude. To
fix that of St. Helena, and that of the Mauritius, occupied much
time and talent, aided by excellent instruments in well-built observa-
tories. A great deal of time and pains, and ability, have been
employed at Madras ; yet, as far as chronometers can tell, there
is a great discordance between the hitherto published longitudes of
Madras, the Mauritius, and Paramatta, when \iewed in connection
Avith their respective meridian distances ; such, at least, as have yet
been measured.
Even on the coast of the Baltic, what differences were found by
Lieutenant- General Schubert, in 1833, between the received posi-
tions of various observatories, and those which he deduced from the
results of fifty-six chronometers ; — placed at his disposal, with a
steam-boat, by the Emperor of Russia.f
But, to return from this digression : — In the Beagle's measure-
• Mr. Fallows considered the longitude of the Cape observatory to be
Ih. 13m. 53s. E. Mr. Henderson Ih. 13m. 55s. E.
t Journal of the Royal Geographical Society. Vol. VI. Part II. ] 836,
pp. 413-6.
APPENDIX. 329
ments of meridian distances, time was invariably obtained by series
of equal, or corresponding altitudes of the sun ; observed by one
and the same person with the same sextant, and the same artificial
horizon, placed in the same manner, both before and after noon.
A very good pocket chronometer, carried by hand, in a box, was
always used for taking time. In every instance, it was compared
with the standard chronometers (the two supposed to be the best)
immediately before the morning observation, and again immediately
aftei-wards. It was also compared at noon, and before, as well as
after the afternoon, observations. This watch* was so well con-
structed, that the intervals shown by it betv>^een morning and after-
noon observations always agreed with those shown by the standards,
(allowmg for their respective rates).
Generally speaking, seven altitudes of one limb of the sun were
taken, and then the same seven altitudes of the other hmb, for one
set of sights, or observations. Three such sets were usually taken,
at short intervals, and the mean result used, unless any marked dif-
ference occ'-irred, in which case the result of each separate pair of equal
altitudes (morning and afternoon) was computed, and the erroneous
ones were rejected. Those were considered erroneous which differed
much from the majority. Generally, however, there was the closest
agreement between the results of single pairs of sights, as well as
between those of entire sets.
When clouds intervened the series was unavoidably irregular, but
the pairs of equal altitudes were always numerous. In a very few in-
stances the chronometers were rated by the results of absolute or
independent altitudes, taken with every precaution at similar times
of day with the same instruments, and by the same observer. In
such cases the rates were obtained by comparing together the times
obtained by morning observations, or those deduced from afternoon
sights ; not by morning and afternoon, or afternoon and morning
observations. But the time, considered to be correct, was invaria-
bly deduced from equal altitudes, by the method of Professor Inman.
At Paramatta, at the Cape of Good Hope, and under the walls of the
Royal Observatory at Greenvvdch, we had opportunities of trying
whether there was any difference between our time, thus obtained, and
that of the respective astronomers ; and I feel gratified in being able
* K. Parkinson and Frodsham. No. 1041
e e
330 APPENDIX.
to state, that in no one instance did it differ a quarter of a second
from theirs ; indeed the figures would bear me out in saying,
that it did not differ even a tenth of a second ! These facts are well
known to Lieut. Stokes, Lieut. Suhvan, and Mr. Usborne.
The sextant used throughout the voyage for this purpose, and this
alone, was a particularly good one, made expressly for me by Wor-
thington and Allan. Its index error never varied, nor was it ever the
least out of adjustment. Between morning and afternoon observa-
tions it was more than usually guarded, and on no accotmt handled,
or exposed to a change of temperature.
Latitudes were obtained by other sextants, and by circles. I was
always anxious to get many results, not only by one observer, or in-
strument, but by several observers, and different instruments. It
sometimes happened that there were six observers seated on the
ground, with as many different instruments and horizons, taking the
sun's circum-meridian altitudes, or observing stars at night. Where
so many were working against one another, errors were soon de-
tected, either in observation or in computing. I have already men-
tioned that Dr. Inman's method of calculation was followed ; but it
remains to be shown what mode of interpolation was adopted when,
as was usually the case, most of the watches were found to be going
at rates different from those ascertained at the preceding place of
rating.
With very few exceptions, the method used by Dr. Tiarks* was
practised ; and, in the excepted cases, that used by FHnders, Owen,
Foster, King, and others, was employed. The following are the
princi])al results upon which all others obtained during the Beagle's
last voyage (1831-6) depend. Want of room alone prevents my giv-
ing the minutest details upon which they depend ; it would be of
little use to give comjDutations without comparisons, or comparisons
without rates, or rates without the calculations and observations on
which they depend ; or any part of these without the whole, which
constitutes a mass of figures filling several thick folio books. All these,
however, will be deposited at the Hydrographical Office, so that any
one who will take the trouble may, after obtaining the Hydrographer's
permission, examine them to the fullest extent.
Our first station was at the Devonport Baths, exactly in the meri-
* Chanticleer's Voyage — Appendix, p. 226-8.
APPENDIX.
331
dian of the centre of Government House. By the pubHshed survey of
Plymouth and Devonport,* the Government- House at Devonport
is 0° 1' 48" west of Plymouth old church, the longitude of which is
given by Captain King in the preceding copy of his report.
This longitude, however, differs slightly from that obtained by the
Beagle's chronometers carried from Devonport to Greenwich ; and
as the longitude of Falmouth, by her chronometers, agrees with that
determined by Dr. Tiarks, I have used in the construction of the
table of positions (pp. 65-85) the result obtained directly by these
chronometers, because so confirmed.
Principal Results of the Beagle's chronometrical measurements
between 1831 and 1836; forming a connected chain of meridian
distances around the globe, the first that has ever been completed,
or even attempted, by means of chronometers alone.
Devonport to Port Praya.
Twenty Chronometers. Twenty-three Days.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
K
L
S. H. M. S.
21,68
21, 8o
20,69 20,69
17,03
20,33 20,33
23.03
21,43 21,43
17,16
23,90
21,12 21,12
H. M. S. H. M. S.
M 1 17 20,47 20,47
N 24,42
p 17,73
R 19,90 19.90
S 20,52 20,52
V 22,23
W 20,93 20,93
X 21,08
Y 20,58 20,58
Z 21,43 21,43
Preferred.
Mean ... 20.87
Ih. 17 m. 20,7s.
20,74
Places of observation :
The Baths, in the meridian of Government-house, at Devonport.
The landing-place at the west side of Quail Island, Port Praya, in
the Cape Verde Islands.
• In the above-mentioned plan, published by the Admiralty, on a scale
of 5,03 inches to a mile, the departure between Devonport Baths and
Plymouth Old Church is .5,8 inches ; which in latitude 50° 22' represents
0° 1' 48"1 of longitude.
e e 2
332
APPENDIX.
Port Pkaya to Bahia.
Twenty-one Chronometers. Twenty-six Days.
H. M.
s.
H. M.
s.
H. JI.
s.
H.
M.
s.
A
1 00
04,67
1 00
04,67
59
49.87
B
59
59,41
P 1 00
03,58
1
00
03.58
C
1 00
01,85
1 00
01,85
R 1 00
03,48
1
00
03,48
D
59
40,68
S 59
43,47
E
59
52,21
T 59
41.47
t'
1 oo
04,06
1 00
04,06
V 1 00
11,17
G
I 00
06,00
W 1 00
03,91
1
00
03,91
K
1 00
17,99
X 1 00
02,19
1
00
02,19
L
I 00
01,60
1 00
01,60
Y 1 00
02,47
1
00
02,47
M
59
59,56
59
59,56
Z 1 00
04,69
1
00
04,69
N
1 00
03,95
1 00
03,95
—
Mean ... i 00
00,16
1
00
03,00
Preferred
. Ih. 00m. 03,0s.
Places of observation :
At Port Praya, as before.
At Bahia, in Fort San Pedro, Gamboa.
Bahia to Rio de Janeiro.
Twenty Chronometers. Twenty-two Days.
H.
M.
s.
H.
M.
S.
H.
M.
s.
H. M.
S.
A
18
32,50
18
32,50
18
31,35
31,35
C ..
28,98
P ...
32,06
18
32,06
D ..
30,47
...
30,47
R ...
33.42
33,42
if' ..
35,52
S ...
...
27,13
G ..
33,90
T ..
...
29,43
H ..
31,59
..
...
31,59
V ..
■ .•
26,70
K ..
31,25
..
...
31,25
W ...
27,88
L ..
29,76
X ...
30,63
30,63
M ..
38,23
Y ...
38,79
N ..
30,98
30,98
Z ...
Mean
31,51
31,51
31,60
31,58
Preferred
. Oh. ISm
.3
1,6s.
Places of observation :
At Bahia, as before stated.
At Rio de Janeiro, close to the well on ViUegagnon Island.
APPENDIX.
333
Rio de Janeiro to Bahia.
Twenty Chronometers. Six Days.
H. M. s.
A o 18 29,58
C 31,50
D 31,46
E 27,79
F 31,87
G 30,89
H 29,92
K 30,09
L 30,22
M 29,68
31,50
31,46
31,87
30,89
T 31,44
29,71
Preferred.
H. M. S. H. M. S.
N o 18 29,60
o 31,17 31,17
P 31,37 31,37
R 31,61 31,61
.. 31,44
.. 31,83
.. 31,18
Mean ... 30,82 31,43
Oh. 18m. 31,4s.
W 33,02
X 31,83
Y 32,57
Z 31,18
Places of observation, as before stated.
Bahia to Rio de Janeiro.
Twenty Chronometers. Fourteen Days.
H. SI.
S. H. M. S.
H.
M. S. H.
M. S.
A 18
31,17 18 31,17
18 29,49
B
42,45
P ...
... 33,34 ...
... 33,34
C ......
28,02
R ...
... 33,09 ...
... 33,09
D
28,65
S ...
... 39,47
E
34,16
T ...
... 31,33
F
31,79 31,79
V ...
... 31,21 ...
... 31,21
G
30,42 30,42
W ...
... 32,13 ...
... 32,13
K
28,02
X ...
... 29,96 ...
... 29,96
L
31,13 3i>i3
Y ...
... 27,55
N
33,41
Z ...
Mea
... 30,91 ...
... 30,91
n... 31,89 ...
... 31.52
Preferred
. Oh. 18m
. 31,5s.
First
.
18
31,6
Second
Mean of all
.
18
31,4
.
18
31,5
Places of observation, as before stated.
334
AIM'ENDIX.
Rio de Janeiro to Monte Video.
Twenty Chronometers. Twenty-four Days.
H. M. s.
A o 52 16,19
B 08,57
C 09,75
H. M.
S.
16,19
D
E
F
G
H
K
L
16,11 16,11
i4>98 14.98
i4>57 14,57
17,57 17,57
11,28
27,36
22,89 22,89
H. M. S. H. M. S.
N o 52 19,79 19,79
O 14,14
P 13,06
R 20,83 20,83
S 12,35
T 09,89
W 14,08
X 14,42 14,4a
Y 40,60
Z 18,60 18,60
Mean ... 16,85 17,60
Preferred Oh. 52m. 17,6s.
Places of observation
At Rio de Janeiro, as before stated.
At Monte Video, on Rat Island.
Monte Video to Port Desire.
Seventeen Chronometers. Nineteen Days.
H. M.
A o 38
C
D
E
F
G
H
K
L
S. H. M. S.
46,88 46,88
44,08
50,17 50,17
50,30 50,30
46,01
48,37
43,01
56,56
48,04
46,01
48,37
48,04
H. M. S. H. M. S.
M o 38 40,01
N 42,75
R 45,65 45,65
S 51,49 51,49
W 45,45 45,45
X 39,95
Y 27,14
z 47,32 47,32
Mean... 45,48 47,97
Preferred Oh. 38m. 48,0s.
Places of observation :
Monte Video, as before.
Port Desire, at the Spanish Ruins.
APPENDIX.
S25
Port Desire to Port Famine
Sixteen Chronometers.
H. M. S. H. M. S.
A o 20 10,57 io>57
B o 20 09,39 09,39
C o 20 10,65 10,65
D o 20 09,03 09,03
F o 20 10,70 10,70
G o 20 05,07
H o 20 09,71 09,71
K o 20 02,10
Preferred Oh. 20m. 10,7s.
Places of observation :
Port Desire, as before.
Port Famine, old Observatory at the west side of the port.
Sixteen
Days.
H. M.
S. H.
M. S.
L 20
10,35 ...
.. 10,35
M 20
15,«4
R 20
12,20 ...
... 12,20
S 19
51,63
T 20
39,07
W 20
14,22 ...
... 14,22
X 20
07,31
Z 20
10,29 ...
... 10,29
an 20
10,51 ...
... 10.71
Port Famine to San Carlos.
Twenty Clironometers. Twenty-seven Days.
A
12
08,12
12
08,12
B
12
37,16
C
11
52,62
11
52,62
D
1 1
54-60
11
54,60
E
11
57,52
11
57,52
G
12
10,02
H
1 1
47>95
K
12
10,99
L
12
03,68
12
03,68
M
11
58,40
11
58,40
Preferred
H.
M.
S.
H.
M.
S-
N
12
06,37
12
06,37
P
12
18,26
R
12
09,42
S
1 1
51,87
T
11
51,00
V
1 1
42,42
W
11
55>93
11
55,93
X
11
34.26
Y
1 1
55,13
11
55,13
Z
12
01,42
12
01,42
Mean o 12 00,36 o 11 59,38
0h. 11m. 59,48.
Places of observation :
This measurement is made from a spot 5,9s. east of that used in
the measure from Port Desire to Port Faminie, this being the new
and that the old Observatory.
San Carlos, at Point Arena.
S38
APPENDIX.
San Carlos to Valparaiso.
Eighteen Clironometers. Twelve Days.
H. JI.
s.
H. JI.
s.
H. JI.
s.
K. M.
s.
A
08
55,69
oB
55.69
L 09
00,17
09
00,17
B
08
44,51
N 08
59.17
08
59.17
C
09
02,07
09
02,07
P 08
47,60
D
09
06,01
R 08
55,64
08
55,«4
E
og
06,72
. V 09
09,05
F
08
42,77
W 09
03.39
09
03,39
G
08
53.90
08
53.90
X 09
10,39
II
09
08,10
Y 09
01,49
09
01,49
K
09
02,60
09
02,60
Z 08
58,34
08
5R.34
Mean o 08 59,31 o 08 59,25
Preferred Oh. 8m. 59,2s.
Places of observation :
San Carlos, Chil6e, Point Arena. Valparaiso, Fort San Antonio.
Valparaiso to Callao.
Fourteen Chronometers. Twenty- five Days.
H. M.
o 22
07.74
s.
07,74
.. 00,51
.. 07,31 07,31
.. 06,86 o6,06
.. 04,42
F 16,60
G 05,90 05,90
H. M. S. . H. M. S.
O O 22 08,66 0B,66
P 08,97 08,97
K 11,33 '1.33
S n,39 11,39
W 12,28 12,28
X 03.30
Z 09,36 09,36
Mean... 08,19 08,98
Preferred Oh. 22m. 09,0s.
Places of observation :
Valparaiso, as before. Callao, the Arsenal.
Callao to the Galapagos Islands (Chatham Island).
Twelve Chronometers. Twelve Days.
H. M. S. H. M. S.
A o 49 31,80 31,80
B 32,30 32,30
c 33,90 33,90
D 33,49 33.49
K 30,39 30,39
N 36,74
H. M.
S. H. J
s.
49
33,15
• 33,15
R
32.16
• 32,16
S
32,56
. 32.56
w
35,21
. 35.21
X
29,44
z
32,90
. 32,90
Mean ... 32,84 32,79
Preferred- Oh. 49m. .32,8s.
Places of observation :
Callao, as before.
Chatham Island, Stephens Bay — landing-place at south-west side.
APPENDIX.
337
Galapagos Islaxds (Chatham) to Charles Island.
Fourteen Chronometers. Four Days.
H. M.
s.
H.
M.
S.
H. M.
S- H.
M. S.
A 03
39,49
..
...
39.49
N
03
41,69 ...
... 41,69
B
37,29
39.36 ...
... 39.36
C
39,11
..
...
39,11
R
39.40 ...
— .39,40
D
39,23
,.
...
39.23
S
39.44 ...
- 39.44
G
44,81
w
39.19
ts.
36,67
X
39,28 ...
... 39,i28
L
38,23
...
38,23
z
Mean.
39.52 ...
• •• 39,52
. 39.48 ...
... 39,48
Preferred
.. Oh.
03m.
39,5s.
Places of obser\'ation :
Chatham Island, as before.
Charles Island, landing-place at the south-east part of Post Office
Bay..
Charles Island (Galapagos) to Otaheite.
, Thirteen Chronometers. Thirty-one Days.
H. M.
s.
H.
M.
s.
H. M.
S. H.
M. S.
A 3 56
11,67
..
...
11,67
3 56
14,19 •••
... 14,19
B
07,07
R
14,91 ...
... 14,91
C
07,53
..
07,53
S
11,35 ...
... 11,35
D
05,43
W
08,27 ...
... 08,27
H
14,04
..
14,04
X
09,35 ...
... op,35
L
20,65
z
16,74 ...
... 16,74
N
14,57
....
14.57
Mean .
. 11,98 ...
... 12,26
Preferred
. 3h. 56m.
12,3s.
Places of obser\'ation :
Charles Island, as before. Otaheite, Point Venus.
Otaheite to Bay of Islands, in New Zealand.
Sixteen Chronometers. Twenty-eight days.
H. SI.
s.
H.
M.
S.
H. M.
S. H.
M. S.
A 2 25
38,69
38,69
N 2 25
40,78
B
37,50
37,50
34.97 •••
... 34,97
C
32,87
32,87
R
36,68 ...
... 36,68
D
35,11
35,11
S
28,83
G
33,99
33,99
V
27.99
H
35,66
35,66
w
32,83 ..
... 32,83
K
38,20
...
38,20
X
28,89
L
27,70
z
Mean ..
40,48
. 34,44 •••
... 35,65
Preferred
. 2h. 25m. 35,6s.
Places of observ'ation :
Otaheite, as before. Bay of Islands, Paihia Islet.
S38
APPENDIX.
Bay of Islands in New Zealand to Sydney.
Fifteen Chronometers. Nineteen Days.
H. M. S. H. M. S.
A 1 31 33,50 33,50
B 27,63
C 33.64 33,64
D 31,84 31,84
G 27,41
H 23,94
K 44,60
L 32,09 32,09
H. M.
1 31
Preferred.
N
O
R
S
w
X
z
Mean
Hi. 31m. 31,5s
S. H.
M. S.
32,52 ...
... 32,52
29,29 ...
... 29,29
30,69 ...
... 30,69
30,17 ...
... 30,17
28,52 ...
... 28,52
26,82
32,36 ...
... 32,36
. 31,00 ...
... 31.46
Places of observation :
New Zealand, as before.
Sydney, Fort Macquarrie.
From Macquarrie Fort to the Observatory at Paramatta, by three
Chronometers,* Oh. 00m. 52,0s. (Paramatta west of Fort).
Sydney to Hobart Town.
Fifteen Chronometers. Eleven Days.
H.
o
M. S. H. M. S.
15 29,40 29,40
... 26,30
A
B 26,30
C 34,31
D
G
K
L
N
35,28
30,96
29,86
30,96
29,86
30,91 30,91
30,83 30,83
M.
15
o
R
S
V
w
X 30,41
z 32,31
S. H. M. S.
29,25 29,25
26,17
32,01 32,01
38,84
25,48
30,41
32,31
Preferred.
Mean ... 30,82
Oh. 15m. 30,2s.
30,22
Places of observation :
Sydney, as before.
Hobart Town, east side of Sullivan Cove, in a small battery close
to the water.
* These three Chronometers were carried by water to and from the
Observatory on the same day.
APPENDIX.
339
HoBART Town to King George Sound.
Fifteen Chronometers. Twenty days.
H. M. S. H. M. S.
A 1 57 48,75 48,75
B 26,50
C 59.28
D 63,90
G 54,^5 54,15
H 54,31 54,31
K 42,94
L 55)21 ..
55,21
H. M.
S. H.
M. S.
N 1 57
57,77 ...
... 57,77
51,26 ...
... 51,26
R
42,67 ...
... 42,67
S
52,67 ...
... 52,67
W
36,04
X
47,47 -
... 47,47
z
50,96 ...
... 50,96
Mean..
. 49,59 ...
... 51,53
Preferred Ih. 57m. 51,5s.
Places of observation :
Hobart Town, as before.
King George Sound, new Government BuUdings, at the east side
of Princess Royal Harbour, near the water.
King George Sound to the Keeling Islands.
Fifteen Chronometers. Twenty Days.
H, M.
s.
H.
M.
S.
H. M.
S. H. M. S.
A 1 24
07,62
,.
07,62
N 1 24
08,64
. 08,64
B
07,17
..
07,17
07,72
. 07,72
C
09,15
09,15
R
09,53
. 09,53
D
09,16
..
09,16
S
06,55
• 06,55
G
12,50
W
00,06
H
05,60
..
...
05,60
X 23
43,24
K
03.09
Z 24
07,44
. 07,44
L
23,16
Mean 24
06,04
. 07,86
Preferred
. Ih. 24.m. 07,9s.
Places of observation :
King George Sound, as before.
Keeling Islands, north-west part of Direction Islet.
340
APPEXDIX.
Keeling Islands to the Mauritius.
Fifti
en
Ch
ronometers
Twenty-
one Days.
H. M.
s.
H.
M.
s.
H. M
S. H. M. s.
A 2 37
38,96
..
38,96
2 37
32,54
. 32,54
B
36,30
• ■
...
36,30
R
37,62
• 37,62
C
35,05
...
35,05
S
31,94
. 31,94
D
31,87
...
...
31,87
V
25,55
G
17,34
w
29,81
. 29,81
K
48,06
X
27,70
L
43,18
z
34,42
. 34,42
N
33,17
33,17
Mean
•• 33,56
• 34,17
Preferred
. 2h. 37m.
34,2s.
Places of obsen^ation :
Keeling Islands, as before.
Mauritius, Battery on Cooper's Island, Port Louis.
Mauritius to Simon's Bay.
Thirteen Chronometers. Twenty-five Days.
H. M.
s.
H.
M.
s.
M. M.
S. H.
M. S.
A 2 36
25,12
...
25,12
2 36
23,46 ...
... 23,46
C
18,23
..
...
18,23
R
21,44 ...
... 21,44
D
28, It)
S
18,82 ...
... 18,82
G
32,50
w
17,74 ...
". 17,74
K
24,85
...
24,85
X
12,44
L
23,62
..
...
23,62
z
19,68 ...
... 19,68
N
24,93
...
24,93
Mean .
.22,38 ...
• •• 21,79
Preferred
. 2h. 36m.
21,8s.
Places of observation :
Mauritius, as before.
Simon's Bay, south-east end of the Dock Yard, near high water
mark.
Simon's Bay to the Observatory, by three Chronometers, carried
to and from it the same day. Oh. 00m. 10,9s.
Observatory east of Simon's Bay.
APr-ENDIX.
341
H. M.
A 1 36
C
D
G
K 43,37
L 30,34
N 27,63
Simon's Bay to St. Helena.
Thirteen Chronometers. Twenty-one Days.
S. H. M,
S.
38,39 38,39
31,03 31,03
29,82
31,46
29,82
31.46
30,34
H. M. S. H. M. S.
O 1 36 32,14 32,14
R 37.70 37,70
S 31,00 31,00
V 29,90
W 37,24 37,24
Z 33,96 33,96
Mean... 33.38 33,3»
Preferred Ih. 36m. 33,3s.
Places of observation :
Simon's Bay, as before.
St. Helena, James Valley, near high water mark, in the meridian
of the Observatory on Ladder HiU.
St. Helena to Ascension.
Fourteen Chronometers. Seven Days.
A
B
C
D
G
o 34
45.95 45.95
44,18
44.96 44,96
45,00 45,00
45.72 45,72
H -44,15
K 45,42 45,42
L
N
O
R
S
w
z
o 34
48,23
46,37
45,26 45.26
46,37 46,37
45,72 45,72
45.93 45,93
46,22 46,22
Mean ... 45,68
Preferred Oh. 34m. 45,7s.
Places of obsei'vation :
St. Helena, as'before.
Ascension, centre of the Barrack Square.
45,65
Ascension to Bahia.
Fifteen Chronometers. Ten Days.
H. M.
s.
H.
M.
S.
A 1 36
27,18
...
...
27,18
B
20,25
C
D
25,75
28,31
••
...
25,75
28,31
G
H
K
L
24,47
23,48
22,36
28,76
24,47
28,76
Preferred
H
N 1
O ..
R .
S ..
w .
M.
36
s.
29,92
23,56
26,65
s.
29,92
.. 26,65
24,71 2^,71
26,28 26,28
X 32,50
Z 26,12 26,12
Mean ... 26,02 26,70
36m. 26,7s.
Places of observation :
Ascension, as before. Bahia, as before stated.
342
APPENDIX.
Bahia to Pernambuco.
Fifteen Chronometers. Seven Days.
A
B
C
D
G
H
K
L
H. M.
o 14
S.
35,82
37,84
36,03
34,89
36,80
36.76
37,41
34,85
35,82
36,03
36,80
36,76
37,41
H. M.
N o 14
O
R
S
V
w
z
s.
35,02
36,23 ...
36,19 -
36,79 •••
37,80
... 36,23
... 36,19
■ •• 36,79
35,24 ...
36,97 -
... 35,24
... 36,97
ean ... 36,31 ...
... 36,42
Preferred Oh. 14m. 36,4s.
Places of observation :
Bahia, as before.
Pernambuco, the south-west end of the Arsenal.
Pernambuco to Port Praya.
Fourteen Chronometers. Fourteen Days.
H. M. S. H.
M. S.
H.
M.
S. H.
M. S.
A 45 23,77
L
45
30,95
B 28,32 ...
... 28,32
N
,.
...
25,03 ...
... 25,03
C 27,40 ...
... 27.40
..
...
28,89 -
... 28,89
D 27,29 ...
... 27,29
S
..
...
28,38 ...
... 28,38
G 28,04 ...
... 28,04
V
,,
...
29,40 ...
... 29,40
H 28,71
w
,,
...
27,46 ...
... 27,46
K 22,70
z
26,24 ...
... 26,24
Mean ...27,33 27,64
Preferred Oh. 45m. 27,6s.
Places of observation :
Pernambuco, as before. Port Praya, as before stated.
Port Praya to Angra.
Thirteen Chronometers. Fifteen Days,
H. M.
s.
H.
M.
S.
H.
M.
S. H.
M. S.
A 14
B
50,08
49.39
...
...
50,08
L
N ..
14
51,43 •••
49,26 ...
... 51,43
... 49,26
C
48,93
..
...
48,93
...
49,88 ...
... 49,88
D
51,46
..
...
51,46
S ..
48,52 ...
... 48,52
G
H
52,59
60,39
••
...
52,59
z ..
50,43 ...
50,88 ...
... 50,43
... 50,88
K
49,20
Mean ..
. 50,09 ...
... 50,34
Preferred
.Oh
. 14m
50,3s.
Places of observation :
Port Praya, as before.
Angra (in Terceira), close to the best landing-place.
APPENDIX.
343
Angra to Falmouth.
Eleven Chronometers. Eleven Days
H. M.
s.
H. M. S.
H. M. S. H.
M. S.
A 1 28
38,61
38,61
N 1 28 40,07 ...
... 40,07
C
39.92
39.92
38,64 ...
... 38,64
D
41,61
41,61
s 41.49 •••
... 41,49
G
37,11
37,11
V 40,80 ...
... 40,80
H
42,99
Z 38,15 ...
... 38,15
L
38,43
38,43
Preferred
Mean ... 39,80 ...
.. Hi. 28ni. 39,5s.
... 39,48
Places of observation :
Angra, as before.
Falmouth, Pendennis Castle.
Angra to Devonport.
Eleven Chronometers. Fourteen Days.
H. M.
A 1 32
C
D
s.
09,76
08,60
10,62
H.
M.
S.
09,76
08,60
10,62
N
S
H. M.
1 32
S. H.
08,95 ...
07,35 ...
10,29 ...
M. S.
... 08,95
... 07,35
... 10,29
G
H
L
07,15
13,06
08,82
••
...
13,06
08,82
V
z
Mean .
10,33 ...
09,52 ...
... 10,33
... 09,52
..09,50 ...
... 09,73
Preferred
. Ih.
32m.
09,7s.
Places of observation, as before.
Devonport to the Royal Observatory at Greenwich.
H. M.
A 16
C
D
G
L
S.
34,9
37,8
42,7
42,2
39.7
Ten Chronomete
H. M. S.
34,9
37,8
4^,7
....... 42,2
3S,7
Preferred
rs. Eleven Days.
H. M. S. H.
N 16 42,1
43,4 ..
S 38,1 ..
V 45,5 ..
z 36,3 ..
M. S.
.... 42,1
.... 43,4
... 38,1
... 45,5
... 36,3
Mean ...40,27
. Oh. 16m. 40,3s.
... 40,27
344 APPENDIX.
Observatory at the II. N. College at Portsmouth to
Greenwich.
Eleven ChronometL-rs. Eight Days.
H. M.
L o 04
H. M. S.
H.
M.
S.
A 04 22,35
04
22,35
B 24.57
,,
24,57
C 22,63
..
22,63
D 26,73
,.
....
26,-3
G 26,46
..
26,46
n 29,79
•N
O
s
z
s.
H.
M.
S.
24,07
04
24,07
26,63
..
....
26,63
29,17
..
....
29,17
23,29
..
....
23,29
21,81
;;
I
21,81
•• 25,23
24,77
Mean
Preferred Oh. 04m. 24.,8s.
H. M. S.
Angra to Devonport 1 32 09,7
Angra to Falmouth 1 28 39,5
Falmouth to Devonport 03 30,2
Devonport to Grtenwich 16 40,3
Falmouth to Greenwicli 20 10,5
Devonport to Greenwicli 16 40,3
Portsmouth to Greenwich 04 24,8
Devonport to Portsmouth 12 15,5
fO 04 24,8
<^0 12
Again ... ... <^ 12 15,5
to 03 30,2
Greenwich to Falmouth 20 10 5
While looking over the preceding results, enquiry may be made
for those of the other chronometers : I should, therefore, mention
that the others were useless. Some of the watches stopped ; others
altered their rates suddenly ; and in one case (R) a mainspring broke
when the chronometer had been going admirably, till that moment.
Four chronometers were left with Mr. Usbome, on the coast of
Peru, and in consequence of these diminutions of our original num-
ber, there were but eleven watches in tolerably effective condition
during the last two principal links of the chain, namely, from Port
Praya to the Azores, and from the Azores to Devonport.
Five years is a long time for chronometers to preserve their capa-
bility of going steadily, under various changes of climate, without
being examined, and perhaps cleaned or fresh oiled, by an expe-
rienced chronometer maker.
APPENDIX. 345
Having given the principal resnlts — those forming hnks of the
chain of meridian distances carried round the globe — I have to men-
tion that all others of a similar nature, obtained by the Beagle's
officers, are based upon them, and that in no one instance do any of
the longitudes given in the accompanying tables depend upon absolute
or independent astronomical obser^'ations.
It ought to be clearly stated, however, that the sum of all the
parts which form the chain amounts to more than twenty-four hours,
therefore error must exist somewhere ; but what has principally
caused the error, or where it may be said to exist, I am unable to
determine. The whole chain exceeds twenty-four hours, by about
thirty-three seconds of time.
It appears very singular, that the more the various links of this
chain are examined and compared with other authorities, the more
reason there seems to be for believing them correct, at least to within
a very small fraction of time ; and even allowing that each link were
one or two seconds of time wrong, it does not appear probable that
all the errors would lie in one direction, unless some hitherto unde-
tected cause affects chronometers when carried westward, which
might affect them differently when carried eastward.
It would ill become me to speak of any value which may be at-
tached to these chronometrical measures ; even erroneous as they
undoubtedly are in some part, if not to a certain degree almost every
where. I can only lay the honestly-obtained results before persons
who are interested in such matters, and request that they may be
compared with those of the best authorities.
Callao, Sydney, and the Cape of Good Hope, are three remote
points which might be selected rather than others, because generally
supposed to be well determined. If the Beagle's position of CaUao
be proved incorrect, then must Humboldt's (calculated by Oltmanns),
adopted by Daussy,* be also incorrect ; and if her position of Sydney
(reckoning eastward from Greenwich) be materially wrong, then
must the best authorities for the longitude of that place be also in
error, for they differ from the Beagle only about eight or ten seconds,
which is but a mmor part of thirty-three seconds.
The only idea I can dwell on, with respect to the cause of this
error of thirty-three seconds, is, that chronometers may be affected by
* Connaissance des Tems. — 1836.
f f
S^6 APPENDIX.
magnetic action in consequence of a ship's head being for a consider-
able time towards the east, or west : yet this is but a conjecture. In
the measures between Bahia and Rio de Janeiro, and in those between
Rio de Janeiro and Cape Horn, there is no evidence of any permanent
cause of error ; but the greater part of those measurements were
made with the ship's head usually near the meridian.
Were I to select three measurements which I thought less trust-
worthy than others — I should decide on that from the Galapagos to
Otaheite, from Otahelte to New Zealand, and from Hobart Town to
King George Sound ; but I do not think that either one of these can
be five seconds of time in error, according to regular computation,
without supposing some unknovsm cause of error to exist. If each
of the three were five seconds wrong, and each error lay in the same
direction, still there would only be fifteen seconds out of thirty-
two accounted for. Such a, supposition as this, however, that each
of these three measurements is five seconds, or thereabouts, in error
(referring only to error caused by known means) appears to be ex-
tremely improbable, I would almost say impossible.
It will naturally occur to the reader, that as error, undetected as
to locality, exists, arbitrary correction must be made in order to
reduce 24h. Om. 33s. to 24h.
Otaheite has been selected as a point at which such a correction
might be made vdth the least degree of inconvenience : to that place
the longitudes in the accompanying tables are given as measured
westward by Cape Horn, and eastward from Greenwich by the Cape
of Good Hope ; and there, as the two portions of the chain overlap,
a mean has been taken between the resulting longitudes.
I will now recapitulate the principal measurements, and confront
them with various other determinations. Limited space prevents my
quoting many ; but I trust that enough will be given to show that
some weight may be attached to at least a proportion of the results
obtained by the Beagle's officers.
APPENDIX.
347
Beagle's Chain of Meridian Distances and Resulting
Longitudes in the Atlantic Ocean.
1831—1836.
Plymoutli (Government House, Devonpoit)
Plymouth to Port Praya*
Port Praya to Fernando de Noronha
Feniando de Noronha to Bahia
Port Praya to Bahia*
Bahia to Rio de Janeiro
Rio de Janeiro to Monte Video
—
16
40,3
1
17
•20,0
I
34
00,3
35
39.9
2
09
40,2
24
23,6
—
I
00
03,5
■2
34
03,«
18
31,4
3
52
35,2
52
17,6
3
44
52,8
Other Determinations.
Plymouth (or the Government House at Devonport) taken
from the Ordnance Survey and Dr. Tiarks
Captain W. F. W. Owen placed Port Praya in
Dr. Tiarks's longitude of Madeira and Capt. P.
meridian distance thence to the same spot in
placed it in
Beagle— Plymouth to Port Praya
Beagle — Port Praya to Plymouth
Beagle — Port Praya to Bahia ...
Beagle — Bahia to Port Praya
Beagle — Bahia to Rio de Janeiro
Beagle — Rio de Janeiro to Bahia
Beagle — Bahia to Rio de Janeiro
Captain Foster — Rio de Janeiro to Monte Video
Captain King — Rio de Janeiro to Monte Video
M. Barral — Rio de Janeiro to Monte Video ...
Beagle in 1830— Monte Video to Rio de Janeiro
The longitude of Rio de Janeiro given in this table is very near the latest
determinations of the French, and almost identical with that which is stated ,
in the Ephemerides of Coirabra, to have been deduced from upwards of three
thousand observations.
...
...
16
41,4
...
...
1
34
04,8
p. King's
Port Praya
34
02,9
..
17
20,7
...
17
19,4
...
00
03,0
...
00
04,1
...
18
3',6
...
18
3',4
...
18
3',5
...
52
19,0
..,
52
17,8
..
52
17,4
..•
52
18,0
Note. — When more than one measurement is stated between the same two
places, it is to be understood that the observations were taken at, or have been
reduced to the same points.
Using the mean of the measurements, outward and homeward.
348
APPENDIX.
Beagle's Chain of Meridian Distances and Resulting
Longitudes in the Atlantic Ocean.
1831—1836.
Monte Video to Port Desire
Port Desire to Port Famine ...
Port Famine to Port Louis ...
Port Louis to Cape Horn
Baiiia to Ascension ...
Ascension to St. Helena
St. Helena to Simon's Bay
Simon's Bay to the Observatory at the Cape
of Good Hope
H.
jr.
s.
H.
M.
&.
o
38
48,0
4
23
40,8
o
20
10,7
4
43
51,5
51
Q2,0
3
52
29,5
36
35,2
4
29
04,7
1
36
26,7
57
37,1
O
34
45,7
22
51,4
1
36
33,3
1
13
41,9
oo
10.9
1
13
52,8
Other Determinations.
Beagle in 1829 — Monte Video to Port Desire
Beagle in 1830 — Port Desire to Monte Video ...
Adventure (tender)— Port Desire to Port Louis
Adventure (tender) — Port Louis to Port Famine
And, therefore. Port Desire to Port Famine
Captain King's published result of all the measures made be-
tween 18-26 and 1830 places Port Famine west of Monte
Video
The present result, as above stated, is ...
Beagle in 1830 — Cape Horn to Port Desire, by three short
steps with intervening rates
Which would place Cape Horn in longitude ...
Beagle in 1832 — Direct from Monte Video, made
Captain Foster's meridian distance from Monte Video to St.
Martin Cove, reduced to Cape Horn, and used with the
Beagle's longitude of Monte Video, gives the longitude ...
Coquille, M. Duperrey— St. Helena to Ascension
Captain Foster — St. Helena to Ascension
Captain Foster — St. Helena to the Cape Observatory ' ...
Nautical Almanac — St. Helena to the Cape Observatory
Mr. Fallows, 1828 — Cape Observatory
Mr. Henderson, 1832 — Cape Observatory
Mr. Maclear, 1836— Cape Observatory
When the Beagle went to Rio de Janeiro in 1826, she made the longitude
2h. 52m. 36s. She stopped at Port Praya, for rates, by the way. Captain
Stokes made the longitude of Rio de Janeiro nearly the same by lunars.
Malaspina and Espinosa made the longitude of Monte Video ( Rat Island)
neai-ly ,3h. 44m. 585. Captain Stokes made it 3h. 44m. 56s.
38
47,7
38
45,9
31
u,o
51
21,9
20
10,9
58
58,1
58
58,7
05
23,7
4
29
04,5
4
29
08
4
29
04
34
46,8
34
48,3
36
45,7
36
45,0
13
53,2
13
55.6
13
56,o
i
APPENDIX.
349
Beagle's Chain of Meridian Distances and Resulting Longi-
tudes in the Pacific Ocean, between Cape Horn and Otaheite.
1834—1835.
Port Famine to San Carlos, Chiloe
San Carlos to Valparaiso
Valparaiso to Callao
Callao to Chatham Island in the Galapagos
Chatham Island to Charles Island
Charles Island to Otaheite
H.
M.
s.
H.
M.
s.
11
53,5*
4
55
45,0
o8
59,2
4
46
45,8
22
09,0
5
08
54,8
49
32,8
5
58
27,6
o
03
39,5
6
02
07,1
3
56
12,3
9
58
19,4
Other Determinations.
Beagle 1830 — Port Famine to Cape Horn, by true bearing of
Sarmiento from Doris Peak
Beagle 1829-30 — Cape Horn to San Carlos
Beagle 1829 — Port Famine to San Carlos
Beagle 1829 — San Carlos to Valparaiso
Malaspina and Espinosa had an observatory at San Carlos,
whose longitude they considered
Their meridian distance t thence to Valparaiso was
Malaspina'sand Espinosa's observations, calculated by Profes-
sor Oltmanns, give for Valparaiso ...
And for Callao Castle
14
46,5
26
39,9
11
54,0
09
00,2
4
55
47,5
o3
59,8
4
46
47,7
5
08
57.1
Repeated examination of the successive differences of longitude given in these
pages, and the data on which they rest, leads me to think that the alterations
spoken of by Captain King, in page 493 of Volume I., were unnecessary.
By an unexceptionable true-bearing of Mount Sarmiento, from Doris Peak,
I was enabled to connect the longitude of the outer coast with that of Port
Famine in a most satisfactory manner.
M. Lartigue, in the French frigate Clorinde (see Connaissance des Tems,
for 1836), made the meridian distance between Callao and Valparaiso almost
identical with that of Espinosa and Malaspina, as well as the above stated
result of the Beagle's measurement.
* oh. iim. 59,4s. -6,9s.=oh. 11m. 53,5s.
t In Malaspina's expedition there were at least four chronometers, made by
Arnold, besides others.
350
APPENDIX.
Beagle's Chain of Meridian Distances and Resulting Longi-
tudes in the Indian and Pacific Oceans, between the Cape of
Good Hope and Otaheite.
1835—6.
Simon's Bay to Mauritius
Mauritius to Keeling Islands
Keeling Islands to King George Sound
King George Sound to Hobart Town
Hobart Town to Sydney ... ...
Sydney to Bay of Islands
Bay of Islands to Otaheite ...
Otaheite by the west...
Mean of the two measures .
Equal, in space, to
H.
M.
s.
H.
M.
s.
2
36
21,8
3
50
03.7
2
37
34,2
6
27
37,9
1
24
07.9
7
51
45,8
1
57
51,5
9
49
37,3
O
15
30,2
10
05
07,4
1
31
31,5
11
36
39,0
2
25
35,6
14
02
14,6
org
57
45,4
•••
...
9
58
19,4
9
58
02,4
..•
149° 30'
' 36"
Other Determinations.
Captain Owen— Simon's Bay to Mauritius
Captain Lloyd — Mauritius Observatory
Captain Flinders — Mauritius ... ... ...
Flinders (by lunars) made the difference of meridians between
King George Sound and Sydney
Beagle's measurement gives
2
36
23,2
3
50
08
3
50
00
2
13
i5>3
2
13
21,1
Captain Cook and Mr. Wales placed Otaheite (Point Venus) in 149° 35' —
but subsequently Mr. Wales considered 1 49° 30' more correct.
In Cook's first voyage the longitude of Otaheite was made 149° 32' 30"; in
the second, Mr. Wales made it 149° 34' 50"; and in the third voyage. Cook and
his officers made it 149° 37' 32" w. (at Point Venus),
I was informed that M. Duperrey, in the Coquille, made the longitude of the
Bay of Islands 174° 01' 00" e. Our observations were made at the same point,
and, if such is the case, his result agrees with that of the Beagle, taken west-
ward from Greenwich.
APPENDIX.
351
Some of the Beagle's Measurements during the years 1829 and
1830, which are here inserted, may serve to shew what accurate
determinations may be obtained from even a few good chronome-
ters, when often rated and carefully managed.
Monte Video to Port Desire
Port Desire to Port Famine
Port Famine to Cascade Harbour
Cascade Harbour to Port Gallant
Port Gallant to San Carlos de Chiloe
San Carlos de Chiloe is west of Monte Video
by the chain of 1831-6
H. M. S. H. M. S.
c 38 47>7 —
o 20 10,7 o 58 58,4
O 02 22,0 1 01 20,4
o 01 50,2 1 03 10,6
o 07 40,9
10 5»,5
1 10 52,2
San Carlos to Hai-bour of Mercy ... w.
Harbour of Mercy to Dislocation Harbour e.
Dislocation Harbour to Latitude Bay e.
Latitude Bay to the Basin near Cape Glou-
cester ... ... ... ... E.
The Basin to North Cove in the Barbara
Ciiannel
North Cove to Townshend Harbour
Townshend Harbour to Stewart Harbour
Stewart Harbour to Doris Cove
Doris Cove to March Harbour
March Harbour to Orange Bay
Orange Bay to St. Martin Cove
St Martin Cove to Cape Horn
Cape Horn by chain east of San Carlos
Cape Horn to Lennox Harbour
Lennox Harbour to Good Success Bay
Good Success Bay to Port Desire
Port Desire by chain is east of Cape Horn ...
Port Desire to Monte Video
Monte Video to Sta. Catharina
Sta. Catharina to Rio de Janeiro
Rio de Janeiro by chain is east of Port Desire
o 02 53,6 o 02 53,6
00
01
08,4
25,7
o 03 47,9
E.
04
02,3
E.
01
30,6
E.
01
45,9
E.
01
17,0
E.
04
41,0
£.
07
37,1
E.
02
05,1
E.
01
12,1
o 29 33,1
26
39.5
01
47,7
26
40,3
—
06
19,9
08
07,6
02
43,9
05
23,7
38
45>9
05
23,9
—
30
35,0
—
21
43,0
1
31
03,9
...
...
1
31
05,6
The measurements made in 1829-30, here given, may be compared with the
charts or other documents deposited in the Hydrographical Office in 1831.
352 APPENDIX.
Having vhus endeavoured to give a view of the Beagle's principal
measurements of meridian distances, vi'ith some of the collateral de-
terminations which are at present within my reach, I •wUHngly refrain
from their discussion.
It is for those who have access to more extended information, and
who are not personally interested in the question, by having assisted
in malving any of these measures themselves, to discuss and assign
values to them.
For this reason, an intention which I entertained of attempting to
make some enquiry into the grounds on which the longitudes of
Jamaica, the Havannah, Chagres, Panama, &c. are by some persons
considered to be well determined, has been relinquished.
I will conclude by remarking, that if so small a vessel as the
Beagle, with so few chronometers going well, latterly, could attain,
during a tedious and indirect voyage of five years, to within thirty-
three seconds of the truth — a much nearer approach to exactness
may be anticipated from measurements made in far less time, with a
greater number of chronometers.
END OF THE APPENDIX.
Printed by J. L. Cox and Sons, 75, Great Queen Street,
Lincoln's-Inu Fields.
'- J
ILOW aSjLAMB
ADMIRAL KRUSEN STERN
1837.
mtt additions W Bob! iitz-Roy.
1838.
I^jMihr.i aremttiv r.> .1ft M/hrimnml fy- Hr
ACKS of H.M.S. BEAGLE _li
OKNEilAI. C'liAHT sliewillg' lllo I'UlNCirAL TllACKS ol' H MS . BEAGLE ^1031 -G
TVNews
OpenLibrary